Education Act 1989

  • not the latest version

Reprint
as at 1 January 2008

Education Act 1989

Public Act1989 No 80
Date of assent29 September 1989

Note

Changes authorised by section 17C of the Acts and Regulations Publication Act 1989 have been made in this eprint.

A general outline of these changes is set out in the notes at the end of this eprint, together with other explanatory material about this eprint.

This Act is administered in the Ministry of Education


Contents

Title

Enrolment schemes

Standing-down, suspension, exclusion, and expulsion of students

36 Interpretation [Repealed]

39 Function of Board [Repealed]

41 Powers of Board [Repealed]

42 Interpretation [Repealed]

45 Function of Board [Repealed]

47 Powers of Board [Repealed]

48 Interpretation [Repealed]

54 Powers of Council [Repealed]

64 Effect of charter [Repealed]

86 Financial year [Repealed]

Payment of salaries

Limitations on staffing

Application period may be extended

109 Commissioners [Repealed]

Restrictions on appointment and employment of teaching staff

Teacher registration

Limited authority to teach

Teacher Registration Board

134 Co-opted members [Repealed]

Teachers council

Mandatory reporting

Disciplinary functions

Review of competence

Police vetting

Preliminary provisions

Establishment of Commission

Functions of Commission

Funding mechanisms

Requirements for, and content of proposed plans

Submitting proposed plan

Profiles

[Repealed]

Preparing and consulting on proposed plans

Assessment of proposed plans and giving of funding approval

Expiry of funding approval

Suspension or revocation of funding given under section 159YA

Amending or replacing plans

Plan summary

Funding by Commission

[Repealed]

Funding under this Part other than via plans

Councils

Constitution of Councils

Functions and duties of Councils

Charters

185 Consultations [Repealed]

Profiles

[Repealed]

Powers of institutions and Councils

Institutions at risk

Chief executive and staff

Bulk funding

Finance

Miscellaneous provisions

229F Voting slip [Repealed]

229L Undue influence [Repealed]

229M Complaints [Repealed]

Part to apply to private training establishments

[Repealed]

238 Notice [Repealed]

269 Definitions [Repealed]

276 Powers of Board [Repealed]

287 Definitions [Repealed]

291 Powers of Board [Repealed]

Funding

Charters

Licensing of early childhood centres, etc

Powers of entry and inspection

Police vetting of employees

Miscellaneous

Transitional provisions

Provisions concerning students with enrolment exemption

Provisions concerning hostels

Provisions concerning hostels

335 Auditor [Repealed]

337 Personnel policy [Repealed]


An Act to reform the administration of education

BE IT ENACTED by the Parliament of New Zealand as follows:

1 Short Title and commencement
  • (1) This Act may be cited as the Education Act 1989.

    (2) Except as otherwise provided in this Act, this Act comes into force on the 1st day of October 1989.

Part 1
Rights to primary and secondary education

2 Interpretation
  • (1) In this Part, and Parts 2, 3, and 11, of this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Assisted student means a foreign student who is in New Zealand to study under an assistance programme administered by the New Zealand Government

    Assisted student: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Board means a Board of Trustees constituted under Part 9 of this Act; and,—

    • (a) In relation to a school, means the school's Board; and

    • (b) In relation to a principal, means the Board of the principal's school:

    Chief Review Officer means the chief executive of the Education Review Office

    Composite school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) of this Act

    Composite school: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Correspondence school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) of this Act

    Correspondence School: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(1) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    doctor means a health practitioner who is, or is deemed to be, registered with the Medical Council of New Zealand continued by section 114(1)(a) of the Health Practitioners Competence Assurance Act 2003 as a practitioner of the profession of medicine.

    doctor: this definition was substituted, as from 18 September 2004, by section 175(1) Health Practitioners Competence Assurance Act 2003 (2003 No 48). See sections 178 to 227 of that Act as to the transitional provisions.

    Domestic student, at any time, means a person who is then—

    • (a) A New Zealand citizen; or

    • (b) the holder of a residence permit under the Immigration Act 1987 who satisfies the criteria (if any) prescribed by regulations made under subsection (4); or.

    • (c) By virtue of paragraph (a) or paragraph (b) or paragraph (f) of section 11(1) of that Act, exempt from the requirement to hold a permit granted under that Act; or

    • (d) Exempted under section 12 of that Act from the requirement to hold a permit granted under that Act; or

    • (e) A person of a class or description of persons required by the Minister, by notice in the Gazette, to be treated as if they are not foreign students:

    Domestic student: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 52(2) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Domestic student: this definition was substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Domestic student: paragraph (b) of this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 4(1) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Enrolment scheme means a scheme adopted (and not since abandoned) under section 11H; and includes any amendments to the scheme that have been adopted under section 11M

    Enrolment scheme: this definition was inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 6(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Enrolment Scheme: this definition was substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Enrolment Scheme: this definition was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 26(1) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by substituting the expressions section 11H and section 11M for the expressions section 11G and section 11K respectively.

    Exempt student means a foreign student who—

    • (a) Is in New Zealand to study under an exchange programme approved by the New Zealand Government; or

    • (b) Is for the time being exempted under section 4C of this Act:

    Exempt student: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Exempt student: paragraph (b) of this definition was amended, as from 1 January 1992, by section 3(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the expression 4C for the expression 4A(1).

    Foreign student, at any time, means a person who is not then a domestic student

    Foreign student: this definition was substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Hostel means a boarding establishment used mainly or solely for the accommodation of students enrolled at a registered school

    Hostel: this definition was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 3 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Intermediate school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) of this Act

    Intermediate school: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(1) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part, and Parts 2, 3, and 11, of this Act

    Minister: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part, and Parts 2, 3, and 11, of this Act

    Ministry: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Overcrowding, in relation to a school, means the attendance at the school of more students than its site or facilities can reasonably be expected to take

    Overcrowding: this definition was inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 6(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Parent, in relation to any person, means a person who is the person's mother, father, or guardian

    Primary school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) of this Act

    Primary school: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(1) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Principal means the chief executive of a state school or an institution established under this Act; and, in relation to a school or an institution, a person enrolled at a school or institution, or the enrolment of a person at a school or institution, means the principal of the school or institution

    Registered school means a school that is a state school, or a school registered under section 35A of this Act

    Registered school: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 9(2) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Secondary school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) of this Act

    Secondary school: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(1) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry

    Special education means education or help from a special school, special class, special clinic, or special service

    State school means a school that is a primary school, a composite school, or a secondary school

    Student, in relation to a school or institution, means a person enrolled at the school or institution

    Walking distance, in relation to travel between a person's residence and a school,—

    • (a) Where there is no public transport that the person can conveniently use, means the distance (measured along the most direct route by public road, public footpath, or combination of both) between the residence and the school; and

    • (b) Where in both directions there is public transport that the person can conveniently use, means the sum of the following distances (each measured along the most direct route by public road, public footpath, or combination of both) or, where the sum is greater in one direction than the other, the greater sum:

      • (i) The distance between the residence and the place where public transport must first be taken (or, as the case may be, finally be left); and

      • (ii) The distance between the school and the place where public transport must finally be left (or, as the case may be, first be taken); and

      • (iii) Every intermediate distance between one element of public transport and another:

    (2) In this Part, and Parts 2 and 3, of this Act, unless the context otherwise requires, the terms special class, special clinic, special school, and special service have the meanings assigned to them by section 2 of the Education Act 1964.

    (3) In the absence of proof to the contrary,—

    • (a) A certificate signed by the chief executive of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade that on a specified day, or for a specified period, a specified person was or was not, or will or will not be in New Zealand to study under an assistance programme administered by the New Zealand Government; or

    • (b) A certificate signed by the Secretary that on a specified day, or for a specified period, a specified person was or was not, or will or will not be in New Zealand to study under an exchange programme approved by the New Zealand Government,—

    is, for the purposes of subsection (1) of this section, conclusive evidence of the matter certified; and judicial notice shall be taken of the signature on any such certificate of the chief executive or (as the case may be) the Secretary.

    (4) The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations prescribing criteria that the holder of a residence permit under the Immigration Act 1987 must satisfy in order to fulfil the requirements of paragraph (b) of the definition of domestic student in subsection (1).

    (5) Regulations made under subsection (4),—

    • (a) if made on or before 30 June in any year, expire on the close of 31 December of that year unless they are expressly confirmed by Act of Parliament passed during that year; and

    • (b) if made on or after 1 July in any year, expire on the close of 31 December in the following year unless they are expressly confirmed by Act of Parliament passed before the end of that following year.

    (6) The expiry of regulations made under subsection (4) does not affect the validity of any act done pursuant to, or in accordance with, the regulations before the date on which the regulations expire.

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(2) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156) by omitting the expression composite school.

    Subsection (3) was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 3(2) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).The reference to the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade in paragraph (a) replaced an earlier reference to the Ministry of External Relations and Trade pursuant to section 9(2) Foreign Affairs Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 48).

    Subsections (4) to (6) were inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 4(2) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

3 Right to free primary and secondary education
  • Except as provided in this Act or the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975, every person who is not a foreign student is entitled to free enrolment and free education at any state school during the period beginning on the person's 5th birthday and ending on the 1st day of January after the person's 19th birthday.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 ss 75(2), 85(1)

3A Restriction on attendance at certain schools
  • [Repealed]

    Section 3A was inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 2 Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Section 3A was repealed, as from 25 October 2001, by section 4 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

4 Enrolment of foreign students
  • (1) Subject to section 4A(3) of this Act, a foreign student—

    • (a) Shall not be enrolled at a state school without the Board's consent; and

    • (b) Shall not be enrolled in special education without the consent of the person or body administering the institution or service concerned; but

    (2) Subject to section 4B of this Act and to subsections (3) and (4) of this section, once enrolled at a state school or in special education a foreign student has the same rights to remain enrolled, and to tuition, at the school as a domestic student.

    (3) Except as provided in subsection (5) or subsection (6) of this section, no foreign student who is not an exempt student shall be enrolled at a state school if the student's enrolment has the effect that a domestic or exempt student who is entitled to enrol there and has applied for enrolment is not able to be enrolled.

    (4) Except as provided in subsection (5) or subsection (6) of this section, no foreign student who is not an exempt student shall be enrolled in any subject, course, or programme at a state school if the student's enrolment has the effect that a domestic or exempt student who is entitled to enrol in the subject or course and has applied for enrolment in it is not able to be enrolled in it.

    (5) Any assisted student may be enrolled at a state school, or in a subject, course, or programme at a state school, by agreement between the Board and the chief executive of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade.

    (6) Notwithstanding that domestic and exempt students may not be able to be enrolled, a foreign student who is not an exempt student may be enrolled at a state school, or in any subject, course, or programme at a state school, if the enrolment is in a vacant place—

    • (a) That the Board established for foreign students; and

    • (b) Whose continued availability is dependent on the fees payable by foreign students enrolled in it.

    (7) As soon as is practicable after a foreign student is enrolled at a state school, the principal shall give the Secretary written notice of—

    • (a) The student's name, age, and nationality; and

    • (b) The day on which the student began (or will begin) to receive tuition at the school.

    (8) Notwithstanding anything in this section or section 4B of this Act, with the consent of the principal, a foreign student may, during a period of not more than 28 consecutive days (or any longer period the Secretary approves for any particular student), receive tuition at or from a state school—

    • (a) Without the consent of the Board; and

    • (b) Without paying the amount required by section 4B of this section;—

    but in that case the student shall not be counted for the purpose of calculating or ascertaining the schools entitlement to teachers or funding.

    Subsections (3A) to (3D) were inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 4(1) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (6) was amended, as from 1 January 1990, by section 5(2) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156) by substituting the words Subject to section 4A(3) of this Act, once for the word Once.

    Sections 4 and 4A were substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    In subsection (5) the reference to the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade replaced an earlier reference to the Ministry of External Relations and Trade pursuant to section 9(2) Foreign Affairs Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 48).

4A Certain foreign students may enrol at state schools as of right
  • (1) The Minister may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, declare foreign students of a specified kind or description to be entitled to enrol at state schools.

    (2) A notice may be unconditional, or subject to conditions specified in it.

    (3) Subject to—

    • (a) The conditions (if any) specified in the notice; and

    • (b) Section 4B of this Act,—

    a foreign student of a kind or description for the time being specified in a notice under subsection (1) of this section has the same rights to enrolment and tuition at state schools as a domestic student.

    Section 4A was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 5(1) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (6) was amended, as from 8 August 1991, by section 5(2) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90) by substituting the words any grant for a Board in respect of for the words a Board's operational activities grant for.

    Sections 4 and 4A were substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

4B Fees for foreign students
  • (1) Subject to section 4(8) of this Act, no foreign student shall receive tuition in any subject, course, or programme at a state school unless there has been paid to the Board an amount fixed by the Board that is not less than the sum of the following amounts:

    • (a) The Board's best estimate of the cost to the Board (including the appropriate proportion of the Board's administrative and other general costs) of providing tuition in the subject, course, or programme for 1 student:

    • (b) An amount that is in the Board's opinion an appropriate reflection of the use made by 1 student receiving tuition in the subject, course, or programme of the Board's capital facilities:

    • (c) The amount (if any) prescribed under section 4D of this Act for a student receiving tuition at a state school in the subject, course, or programme:

    • (d) All other fees (if any) prescribed by the Board.

    (2) Nothing in subsection (1) of this section prevents a Board's accepting by instalments any amount required by that subsection to be paid; but subject to section 4(8) of this Act, no foreign student shall at any time continue to receive tuition in any subject, course, or programme at a state school unless the sum of the following amounts is less than the sum of the instalments paid up to that time:

    • (a) The Board's best estimate of the cost to the Board (including the appropriate proportion of the Board's administrative and other general costs and the appropriate proportion of any initial or start-up costs of the subject, course, or programme) of providing tuition in the subject, course, or programme for 1 student up to that time:

    • (b) An amount that is in the Board's opinion an appropriate reflection of the use made by 1 student receiving tuition in the subject, course, or programme of the Board's capital facilities:

    • (c) The appropriate proportion of the amount (if any) prescribed under section 4D of this Act for a student receiving tuition at a state school in the subject, course, or programme:

    • (d) All other fees (if any) prescribed by the Board.

    (3) Where a foreign student has after the 31st day of December 1989 received tuition in a subject, course, or programme at a state school without paying the full amount required by subsection (1) of this section in respect of the subject, course, or programme, the Board may, in any Court of competent jurisdiction, recover the underpayment from the student (or, as the case requires, a parent of the student), as a debt due to the Board.

    (4) In any year, the amount of any grant for a Board in respect of a school it administers may be reduced from what it would otherwise have been by any amount by which (in the Secretary's opinion), by virtue of the fact that the full amount required by subsection (1) of this section in respect of a subject, course, or programme at the school in which a foreign student was enrolled has not been paid to the Board, the student's education has been subsidised by money appropriated by Parliament.

    (5) No grant shall be reduced under subsection (4) of this section unless the Secretary has given the Board concerned written notice of the circumstances taken into account when the proposed reduction was decided on.

    (6) Where a Board disputes that a grant should be reduced under subsection (4) of this section, or disputes the amount by which it should so be reduced, the following provisions shall apply:

    • (a) The Board may, within 28 days of getting notice from the Secretary under subsection (5) of this section, by written notice to the Secretary giving the name and address of a proposed arbitrator, require the dispute to be settled by arbitration:

    • (b) If, within 14 days of getting the Board's notice, the Secretary has agreed an arbitrator with the Board, the agreed arbitrator shall settle the dispute:

    • (c) If, within 14 days of getting the Board's notice, the Secretary has not agreed an arbitrator with the Board, an arbitrator appointed jointly by the Secretary and the arbitrator originally proposed by the Board shall settle the dispute:

    • (d) The arbitrator's decision is final.

    (7) Where at any time a foreign student withdraws from a subject, course, or programme at a state school, the Board may refund to the person who paid (in respect of the student's enrolment in the subject, course, or programme) the amount of the fees referred to in subsection (1) of this section (or the sum of any instalments paid in respect of those fees) any amount it thinks appropriate not exceeding the extent (if any) by which the amount paid exceeds the sum of the following amounts:

    • (a) The Board's best estimate of the cost to the Board (including the appropriate proportion of the Board's administrative and other general costs and the appropriate proportion of any initial or start-up costs of the subject, course, or programme) of providing tuition in the subject, course, or programme for 1 student up to that time:

    • (b) An amount that is in the Board's opinion an appropriate reflection of the use made by 1 student receiving tuition in the subject, course, or programme of the Board's capital facilities:

    • (c) The appropriate proportion of the amount (if any) prescribed under section 4D of this Act for a student receiving tuition at a state school in the subject, course, or programme:

    • (d) All other fees (if any) prescribed by the Board.

    Sections 4B to 4D were inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

4C Minister may exempt certain foreign students from payment of fees
  • The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, exempt foreign students of a particular kind or description from the payment of all or a specified proportion or amount of the amount required by section 4B of this Act to be paid; and that section shall have effect accordingly.

    Sections 4B to 4D were inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

4D Boards to reimburse the Crown for expenditure in respect of foreign students
  • (1) Before the 1st day of July in every year, the Minister shall, by notice in the Gazette, set fees to be paid by Boards in respect of foreign students enrolled at state schools in the following year.

    (2) Fees may be set in respect of all or any of the following:

    • (a) All state schools, state schools of a specified kind or description, or specified state schools:

    • (b) All foreign students, or foreign students of a specified kind or description:

    • (c) All subjects, courses, and programmes; subjects, courses, and programmes of a specified kind or description; or specified subjects, courses, or programmes.

    (3) Within 28 days of the first day in any year on which a foreign student enrolled at a state school attends the school, the Board shall pay to the Secretary the appropriate fee (if any) prescribed under subsection (1) of this section.

    (3A) The Minister may pay to the proprietors of an integrated school whose Board has paid a fee under this section a portion of that fee, as determined in accordance with a formula prescribed under subsection (3B), for the purpose of reimbursing the proprietors for that part of the levy associated with the use of capital assets owned by the proprietors.

    (3B) The Minister must, by notice in the Gazette, prescribe a formula for the payment of money under subsection (3A), and may prescribe different formulae to apply to different schools or classes of school.

    (4) If before the 1st day of July in any year the Minister has not set under subsection (1) of this section fees to be paid by Boards in respect of foreign students enrolled at state schools in the following year, there shall be deemed to have been set under that subsection the fees set (or deemed to have been set) in the year before.

    Sections 4B to 4D were inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsections (3A) and (3B) were inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

5 Restrictions on enrolment at primary school
  • (1) No person under 5 shall be or continue to be enrolled at a primary school, or in a class below form III at a composite school.

    (2) No person who turned 14 in any year shall be or continue to be enrolled at a primary school, or in a class below form III at a composite school, in the next year.

    (3) No person who, in the opinion of the Secretary,—

    • (a) Has completed the work of form II; or

    • (b) Has completed work equivalent to the work of form II,—

    shall in any year be or continue to be enrolled at a primary school, or in a class below form III at a composite school.

    (4) Notwithstanding subsection (1) of this section, at any time before the 1st day of January 1993, this Act shall apply to children attending pre-school classes at any school specified in section 3(2) of the Education Amendment Act 1990 as if they are enrolled at the school; but on that day, all those classes shall be deemed to have been disestablished.

    (5) Nothing in subsection (4) of this section limits or affects section 308(4) of this Act.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 109(1)

    Subsections (4) and (5) were inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

6 Restrictions on enrolment at secondary school
  • No person who, in the opinion of the Secretary,—

    • (a) Has not completed the work of form II; and

    • (b) Has not completed work equivalent to the work of form II,—

    shall in any year be or continue to be enrolled at a secondary school, or in a class above form II at a composite school, unless the person turned 13 before the 1st day of April in the previous year.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 85(1)

7 Additional restrictions on enrolment at correspondence school
  • (1) The Minister may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, fix criteria for enrolment in early childhood, primary, and secondary classes at correspondence school; and different criteria may be fixed for all or any of the following:

    • (a) Different correspondence schools:

    • (b) Correspondence schools of different classes or descriptions:

    • (c) Early childhood, primary, and secondary classes at correspondence school.

    (2) No person shall be enrolled at a correspondence school unless—

    • (a) The Board is satisfied that the person's enrolment meets criteria then fixed under subsection (1) of this section; or

    • (b) The person is entitled under section 3 of this Act to free education at a state school, and the Secretary has directed the Board to enrol the person.

    (3) The Secretary shall not direct the Board of a correspondence school to enrol a person unless satisfied that the person cannot conveniently attend any state school (being a school offering education at the level, and in the subjects, required by the person's parents or, as the case requires, the person) that is not a correspondence school.

    (4) If satisfied that a person who is enrolled at a correspondence school pursuant to a direction under subsection (2)(b) of this section can conveniently attend a state school (being a school offering education at the level, and in the subjects, required by the person's parents or, as the case requires, the person) that is not a correspondence school, the Secretary may notify the Board of the fact; and in that case the Board shall cancel the person's enrolment unless the Board is satisfied that the person's enrolment meets criteria then fixed under subsection (1) of this section.

    (5) If satisfied that—

    • (a) A person's enrolment at a correspondence school does not meet criteria then fixed under subsection (1) of this section; and

    • (b) There is not in force in respect of the person a direction under subsection (2)(b) of this section relating to the school,—

    the Board shall cancel the enrolment.

    (6) The Board of a correspondence school may delegate to the principal the task of being satisfied that enrolments meet or do not meet criteria specified under subsection (1) of this section.

    (7) Every person lawfully enrolled at a correspondence school immediately before the commencement of this Act who is entitled under section 3 of this Act to free education at a state school shall be deemed to have been so enrolled pursuant to a direction given under subsection (2)(b) of this section on that commencement.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 110

7A Adult domestic students and domestic students exempted from attendance may be required to pay fees for tuition from correspondence schools
  • (1) No—

    • (a) Domestic student who has turned 16 and is not enrolled full-time at a registered school; or

    • (ab) Domestic student enrolled at a registered school that is not a state school; or

    • (b) Domestic student for whom a current certificate under section 21(1) of this Act is held,—

    shall be or continue to be enrolled in a course, class, or programme at a correspondence school unless there has been paid to the Board the appropriate fee (if any) for the time being prescribed by the Board with the Minister's consent.

    (2) Nothing in subsection (1) of this section gives any person a right to enrol at or receive tuition from a correspondence school.

    Sections 7A and 7B were inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 6 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (1)(a) was substituted and subsection (1)(ab) was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1)(a) was amended, as from 1 January 1993, by section 5(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the expression 16 for the expression 15.

7B Fees for evening classes, etc
  • The Board of a state school may refuse to allow any person to attend classes at the school—

    • (a) Usually held outside normal school hours; and

    • (b) Open to people not enrolled full-time at the school,—

    unless there have been paid to the Board the fees (if any) prescribed by the Board for attendance at those classes.

    Sections 7A and 7B were inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 6 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

8 Equal rights to primary and secondary education
  • (1) Except as provided in this Part of this Act, people who have special educational needs (whether because of disability or otherwise) have the same rights to enrol and receive education at state schools as people who do not.

    (2) Nothing in subsection (1) of this section affects or limits the effect of Part 2 of this Act (which relates to enrolment schemes and the suspension, expulsion, and exclusion of students).

    (3) Subsections (1) and (2) of this section come into force on the 1st day of January 1990.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 112A

9 Special education
  • (1) If satisfied that a person under 21 should have special education, the Secretary shall—

    • (a) Agree with the person's parents that the person should be enrolled, or direct them to enrol the person, at a particular state school, special school, special class, or special clinic; or

    • (b) Agree with the person's parents that the person should have, or direct them to ensure that the person has, education or help from a special service.

    (2) Notwithstanding anything in this Act that relates to enrolment schemes, or in the enrolment scheme of any school, but subject to the rest of Part 2 of this Act (which relates to the suspension, expulsion, and exclusion of students), where there has been an agreement or direction under subsection (1) of this section, the person concerned shall be allowed to enrol at the state school, special school, special class, or special clinic, concerned or (as the case requires) to have education or help from the special service concerned.

    (3) Subject to section 10(4) of this Act, where a direction has been given under subsection (1) of this section in respect of a person, a parent who, more than 1 month after it was given, fails or refuses to comply with it commits an offence, and is liable on summary conviction to the penalty prescribed for failing to comply with section 20(1) of this Act (which relates to enrolling children at school).

    (4) No person shall be or continue to be enrolled at a special school, special class, or special clinic, or have or continue to have education or help from a special service, except pursuant to an agreement or direction under subsection (1) of this section.

    (5) Notwithstanding anything in section 5 or section 6 of this Act,—

    • (a) A child under 5 may be or continue to be enrolled at a primary school, or in a class below form III at a composite school; and

    • (b) A person under 21 who turned 14 in any year may in any later year be or continue to be enrolled at a primary school, or in a class below form III at a composite school; and

    • (c) A person under 21 who, in the opinion of the Secretary,—

      • (i) Has not completed the work of form II; and

      • (ii) Has not completed work equivalent to the work of form II,—

    may be or continue to be enrolled at a secondary school, or in a class above form II at a composite school; and

    • (d) A person under 21 may be or continue to be enrolled at a secondary school, or in a class above form II at a composite school, on or after the 1st day of January after the person's 19th birthday,—

    pursuant to an agreement or direction under subsection (1) of this section.

    (6) Subsections (1) to (5) of this section come into force on the 1st day of January 1990.

    (7) The provisions set out in Schedule 1 to this Act shall have effect during the period commencing on the commencement of this Act and ending with the 31st day of December 1989.

    (8) Schedule 1 to this Act shall expire and be deemed to have been repealed with the close of the 31st day of December 1989.

    Compare: 1987 No 177 s 12(1)

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 20 June 1991, by section 6(2)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43) by substituting the expression 11J for the expression 12.

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 3 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the expression section 11M for the expression section 11J. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 26(2) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by substituting the words this Act that relates to enrolment schemes, or in the enrolment scheme of any school for the words section 11M of this Act (which relates to enrolment schemes).

10 Right of reconsideration
  • (1) Subject to paragraphs (p) and (q) of subsection (6) of this section, any person's parent may, in accordance with this section, require the reconsideration of—

    • (a) Any direction under subsection (1) of section 9 of this Act relating to the person; or

    • (b) If the person is not a foreign student, the Secretary's refusal to come to an agreement under that subsection relating to the person.

    (2) A requirement under subsection (1) of this section shall be made to the Secretary in writing within 1 month of the direction or refusal concerned.

    (3) Subject to subsection (5) of this section, where a requirement under subsection (1) of this section is made in respect of a direction given by the Secretary,—

    • (a) The direction shall not take effect—

      • (i) Until the Secretary has reconsidered and confirmed it; or

      • (ii) Where a requirement is made under subsection (4)(c) of this section, until that requirement has been considered by an arbitrator and the parent concerned has been told of the arbitrator's decision; and

    • (b) No offence is committed under section 9(3) of this Act for so long as the direction has not taken effect.

    (4) Where a requirement is made under subsection (1) of this section, the following provisions apply:

    • (a) If the requirement relates to a direction, the Secretary shall reconsider it and then—

      • (i) Confirm it, or cancel it and issue another, or cancel it and refuse to issue another, as seems appropriate; and

      • (ii) Notify the parent concerned in writing of the result of the reconsideration and the reasons for it:

    • (b) If the requirement relates to a refusal, the Secretary shall reconsider whether or not the matter concerned should be agreed, and then—

      • (i) Agree or refuse to agree to the matter with the parent concerned, as seems appropriate; and

      • (ii) Notify the parent concerned in writing of the result of the reconsideration and the reasons for it:

    • (c) A parent who is dissatisfied with the result of the reconsideration may, by notice in writing to the Secretary, require the result to be sent to an arbitrator.

    (5) Where—

    • (a) A requirement has been made under subsection (4)(c) of this section in respect of the result of the reconsideration by the Secretary of a direction under section 9(1) of this Act; and

    • (b) One month after the Secretary notified the parent concerned of the name of a person to represent the Secretary in the appointment of an arbitrator, the Secretary's representative and a nominee of the parent have not appointed an arbitrator,—

    the direction shall forthwith take effect, and section 9(2) of this Act shall have effect accordingly.

    (6) Where a parent makes a requirement under subsection (4)(c) of this section, the following provisions apply:

    • (a) The Secretary shall forthwith give the parent the names of 3 people:

    • (b) Each person shall, in the opinion of the Secretary, have experience in or expert knowledge of special education, but shall not be an employee of the Ministry or the Specialist Education Services Board established by section 37(1) of this Act, or an employee or trustee of a Board:

    • (c) Within 14 days of being given the names, the parent shall tell the Secretary—

      • (i) Which one of the people is acceptable; or

      • (ii) That none of them is acceptable, and the name of some other person who is:

    • (d) If within 14 days of being given the names the parent tells the Secretary that one of the people is acceptable, the person concerned shall be the arbitrator:

    • (e) If within 14 days of being given the names the parent does not comply with paragraph (c) of this subsection, the Secretary shall choose one of the 3 people to be the arbitrator:

    • (f) If within 14 days of being given the names the parent tells the Secretary that none of the people is acceptable, and the name of some other person who is, the Secretary shall forthwith accept or reject the other person:

    • (g) If the Secretary accepts the other person, the other person shall be the arbitrator:

    • (h) If the Secretary rejects the other person, the Secretary shall forthwith tell the other person the name of a person to act as the Secretary's agent in choosing an arbitrator; and the other person and the Secretary's agent shall, as soon as is possible, choose the arbitrator:

    • (i) Once it is known who the arbitrator is, the Secretary shall give the arbitrator a copy of all the relevant documents:

    • (j) The arbitrator shall give the parent notice in writing that—

      • (i) The arbitrator has been appointed; and

      • (ii) The parent may make written submissions:

    • (k) On getting written submissions from the parent or 21 days after notifying the parent (whichever comes first), the arbitrator shall tell the parent and the Secretary when and where the arbitrator will hear the matter:

    • (l) The parent (or a nominee), a representative of the parent, the Secretary (or a nominee), and a representative of the Secretary may take part in the hearing, and may require the child or other person concerned to be produced:

    • (m) Except as provided in this subsection, the arbitrator shall decide how the hearing proceeds:

    • (ma) If, at the hearing, the parent of the person concerned produces evidence about the person that was not available to the Secretary when the Secretary reconsidered the relevant direction or refusal to come to an agreement under section 9(1),—

      • (i) The arbitrator may not consider that evidence and must refer the case back to the Secretary:

      • (ii) The Secretary must reconsider the decision that was the subject of the arbitration, and subsection (4) applies to the Secretary's decision under this subparagraph with any necessary modifications:

    • (n) Subject to paragraph (ma), after the hearing the arbitrator shall either confirm the Secretary's decision or direct the Secretary to make some decision that the Secretary could have made but did not:

    • (o) The Secretary shall comply with any order made:

    • (p) A parent has no right to require the reconsideration or reference to an arbitrator of a decision the Secretary has made pursuant to an arbitrator's direction:

    • (q) If the arbitrator confirms a decision of the Secretary to refuse to come to an agreement under section 9(1) of this Act, no parent has a right to require the reconsideration or reference to an arbitrator of a further refusal made in respect of the same child or person within 12 months of the confirmation of the decision.

    (7) Subsections (1) to (6) of this section come into force on the 1st day of January 1990.

    Compare: 1987 No 177 s 12(1)

    Subsection (3)(b) was amended, as from 23 July 1990, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60) by substituting the expression 9(3) for the expression 9(2).

    Subsection (6)(b) was amended, as from 1 August 2000, by regulation 4(1) Education (Change of Name of Education Entities) Order 2000 (SR 2000/117), by substituting the words Specialist Education Services Board for the words Special Education Service Board

    Subsection (6)(ma) was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 4(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

    Subsection (6)(n) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 4(2) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the words Subject to paragraph (ma), after the hearing for the words After the hearing,. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

Part 2
Enrolment schemes, and suspension, expulsion, and exclusion of students

11 Limitations on enrolment at certain primary schools
  • [Repealed]

    Section 11 was repealed, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

Enrolment schemes

11A Purpose and principles
  • (1) The purpose of the enrolment scheme of a state school is—

    • (a) to avoid overcrowding, or the likelihood of overcrowding, at the school; and

    • (b) to ensure that the selection of applicants for enrolment at the school is carried out in a fair and transparent manner; and

    • (c) to enable the Secretary to make the best use of existing networks of state schools.

    (2) In achieving its purpose, the enrolment scheme of every state school must, as far as possible, ensure that—

    • (a) the scheme does not exclude local students; and

    • (b) no more students are excluded from the school than is necessary to avoid overcrowding at the school.

    Sections 11A to 11K were inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    The reference to the Human Rights Act 1993 in subsection (1)(b) was substituted, as from 1 February 1994, for a reference to the Human Rights Commission Act 1977 pursuant to section 146 Human Rights Act 1993 (1993 No 82).

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11B Interpretation
  • In sections 11C to 11PB, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    give notice means to publish a notice in a daily or community newspaper circulating in the area served by the school

    reasonably convenient school means a state school that a reasonable person living in the area in which the school is situated would judge to be reasonably convenient for a particular student, taking into account such factors as the age of the student, the distance to be travelled, the time likely to be spent in travel, the reasonably available modes of travel, common public transport routes, and relevant traffic hazards. The meaning may vary as between different schools depending on such matters as—

    • (a) whether the school is a single sex or co-educational school:

    • (b) whether the school is an ordinary state school, a Kura Kaupapa Maori, a designated character school, an integrated school, or a special school:

    • (c) whether the school is a primary, intermediate, secondary, composite, or area school

    special programme means a programme, or a programme of a type, that the Secretary has, by notice in the Gazette, approved as a special programme, and—

    • (a) that provides—

      • (i) special education; or

      • (ii) Maori language immersion classes; or

      • (iii) any other type of specialised education to overcome educational disadvantage; or

    • (b) that is a programme—

      • (i) that takes a significantly different approach in order to address particular student needs; and

      • (ii) that would not be viable unless it could draw from a catchment area beyond the school's home zone; and

      • (iii) to which entry is determined by an organisation or process that is independent of the school.

    Sections 11A to 11K were inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    The reference to the Human Rights Act 1993 in subsection (1)(b) was substituted, as from 1 February 1994, for a reference to the Human Rights Commission Act 1977 pursuant to section 146 Human Rights Act 1993 (1993 No 82).

    Subsection (5)(b) was amended, as from 1 January 1992, by section 4 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the words notice of its nature and effect is published for the words it is put in place,.

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11C Content of enrolment scheme
  • (1) A school's enrolment scheme must—

    • (a) define a home zone for the school; and

    • (b) set out the pre-enrolment procedures for selecting applicants who live outside the home zone; and

    • (c) identify any special programmes offered by the school and the criteria on which students will be accepted onto any special programme.

    (2) The procedures described in subsection (1)(b) must be consistent with section 11F and any relevant instructions issued by the Secretary under section 11G.

    Sections 11A to 11K were inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11D Effect of home zone
  • (1) Subject to the provisions of this Act, a person who lives in the home zone of a school that has an enrolment scheme is entitled at any time to enrol at that school.

    (2) An applicant for enrolment at a school with an enrolment scheme who lives outside the school's home zone is entitled to enrol at the school only—

    • (a) if he or she is offered a place at the school in accordance with the procedure set out in the enrolment scheme; or

    • (b) if the Secretary has agreed or directed under section 9, or directed under section 11P, section 16, section 17D, or section 18A, that the student be enrolled at the school or

    • (c) if—

      • (i) the student has been excluded or expelled from another school (school A); and

      • (ii) the principal of the school at which the student wishes to enrol agrees, by arrangement with the principal of school A, to enrol the student; and

      • (iii) the Secretary endorses the proposal.

    Sections 11A to 11K were inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

    Subsection (2)(b) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 5 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by adding the word or.

    Subsection (2)(c) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 5 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

11E How a school defines its home zone
  • (1) A state school's home zone must be defined by geographic boundaries, and must be described in such a way that any given address is either within or outside the home zone.

    (2) A school's home zone—

    • (a) must be an area for which the school is a reasonably convenient school for a student living in that area to attend; and

    • (b) may exclude any area for which another school is also a reasonably convenient school for a student living in that area to attend; and

    • (c) may exclude any area which it is desirable to exclude for the purpose of allowing the Secretary to make best use of the existing network of state schools in the area.

    Sections 11A to 11K were inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11F How to select applicants who live outside home zone
  • (1) The order of priority in which applicants who live outside a school's home zone are to be offered places at the school is as follows:

    • (a) first priority must be given to any applicant who is accepted for enrolment in a special programme run by the school:

    • (b) second priority must be given to any applicant who is the sibling of a current student of the school:

    • (c) third priority must be given to any student who is the sibling of a former student of the school:

    • (d) fourth priority must be given to any applicant who is a child of an employee of the Board of the school:

    • (e) fifth priority must be given to all other applicants.

    (2) If there are more applicants in the second, third, fourth, or fifth priority groups than there are places available, selection within the priority group must be by ballot conducted in accordance with instructions issued by the Secretary under section 11G.

    (3) For the purposes of this section, child A is the sibling of child B if—

    • (a) both children share a common parent; or

    • (b) a parent of child A is married to, or in a civil union with, a parent of child B; or

    • (c) a parent of child A was married to, or in a civil union with, a parent of child B at the time when child B's parent died; or

    • (d) a parent of child A is the de facto partner of a parent of child B; or

    • (e) both children live in the same household and, in recognition of family obligations, are treated by the adults of that household as if they were siblings; or

    • (f) the Secretary, by written notice to the school, advises that child A is to be treated as the sibling of child B.

    (4) If 2 or more siblings apply for places at a school at the same level, the applications of those siblings must be dealt with as a single application for the purpose of the ballot.

    (5) Every application for enrolment at a school with an enrolment scheme must be processed by the school in accordance with the enrolment scheme, and may not be declined on technical grounds or on any other ground that would be inconsistent with the purpose and principles set out in section 11A.

    Sections 11A to 11K were inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

    Subsection (3)(b) and (c) was amended, as from 26 April 2005, by section 7 Relationships (Statutory References) Act 2005 (2005 No 3) by inserting the words , or in a civil union with, after the words married to.

    Subsection (3)(d) was substituted, as from 26 April 2005, by section 7 Relationships (Statutory References) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).

11G Instructions and guidelines on operation of enrolment schemes
  • (1) The Secretary may issue instructions to state schools that have enrolment schemes about the following matters:

    • (a) the procedures for holding ballots:

    • (b) the dates on which ballots are to be held:

    • (c) the establishment and maintenance of waiting lists:

    • (d) the information to be given to applicants who live outside the school's home zone:

    • (e) any other matter that the Secretary considers necessary for ensuring the fair, transparent, and efficient operation of enrolment schemes.

    (2) Instructions issued under subsection (1)

    • (a) must be complied with by schools; and

    • (b) may apply to all or specified schools or classes of school; and

    • (c) must be notified in the Gazette, either in full, or by a notice outlining the content of the instructions and saying where a copy can be obtained, and the date on which the instructions take effect; and

    • (d) may be amended or revoked, in which case notice of the amendment or revocation must be given in the Gazette, as described in paragraph (c).

    (3) The Secretary may issue guidelines to state schools about any or all of the following matters:

    • (a) the basis on which the Secretary's powers in relation to enrolment schemes may be exercised (including, in particular, the power in section 11P(2)(a) relating to the determination of whether an applicant lives within a home zone or outside it):

    • (b) the kinds of amendments to enrolment schemes that are minor amendments for the purpose of section 11MA, or the criteria for deciding what is a minor amendment, or both:

    • (c) the manner in which schools must conduct reviews under section 11OA (which relates to the review of a student's enrolment).

    Sections 11A to 11K were inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

    Subsection (3) was substituted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 6 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

11H Process for developing and adopting enrolment scheme
  • (1) If the Secretary gives a written notice to a state school that there is, or is likely to be, overcrowding at the school, the Board of the school must develop an enrolment scheme for the school.

    (2) A Board may not begin developing an enrolment scheme unless it has received a written notice of the type referred to in subsection (1).

    (3) When developing a proposed enrolment scheme, a Board must consult with whatever persons and organisations it considers appropriate and, in particular, must take all reasonable steps to discover and consider the views of—

    • (a) the parents of students at the school; and

    • (b) the people living in the area for which the school is a reasonably convenient school; and

    • (c) the students and prospective students of the school (depending on their age and maturity); and

    • (d) the Boards of other schools that could be affected by the proposed enrolment scheme.

    (4) In addition to the consultation required by subsection (3),—

    • (a) the Board of a Kura Kaupapa Maori must consult with the persons and organisations that the Board believes have an interest in fostering the school's adherence to Te Aho Matua and any special characteristics set out in the school's charter:

    • (b) the Board of a designated character school must consult with those persons and organisations that the Board believes have an interest in fostering the aims, purposes, and objectives that constitute the school's different character:

    • (c) the Board of an integrated school must consult with the school's proprietors.

    (5) If the Secretary approves a proposed enrolment scheme for a state school, the school's Board must pass a resolution adopting the scheme as soon as practicable.

    Sections 11A to 11K were inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11I Proposed enrolment schemes to be approved by Secretary
  • (1) The Secretary may approve the proposed enrolment scheme of a state school only if he or she is satisfied that—

    • (a) the scheme complies, as far as possible, with the purpose and principles of enrolment schemes as set out in section 11A; and

    • (b) the definition of the school's home zone in the enrolment scheme ensures that students can attend a reasonably convenient school; and

    • (c) the boundaries of the school's home zone overlap or are contiguous with the boundaries of the home zone of any adjacent state school that has an enrolment scheme; and

    • (d) the scheme promotes the best use of the network of state schools in the area; and

    • (e) the procedures for determining which applicants who live outside the home zone will be offered places at the school comply with section 11F and any instructions issued under section 11G; and

    • (f) the Board has carried out adequate consultation under section 11H.

    (2) If a Board and the Secretary are unable to reach agreement about the content of the school's enrolment scheme or proposed enrolment scheme, the Secretary may require the Board to amend the scheme or proposed scheme in the manner required by the Secretary.

    (3) A Board that receives a requirement under subsection (2) must, as soon as practicable, change its enrolment scheme or proposed enrolment scheme to give effect to the Secretary's requirement, and the Board need not obtain separate approval from the Secretary for the change.

    Sections 11A to 11K were inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11J Information about school's enrolment scheme
  • (1) When the Board of a state school adopts an enrolment scheme, it must give notice of the fact that it has adopted an enrolment scheme, and the notice must include—

    • (a) a general description of the school's home zone; and

    • (b) information about where copies of the enrolment scheme may be viewed and obtained.

    (2) Each year, the Board of a school that has an enrolment scheme must give notice of—

    • (a) the likely number of out-of-zone places; and

    • (b) the significant pre-enrolment dates and procedures; and

    • (c) the date or dates on which any ballot will be held.

    (3) The following must be available for inspection at the school at all reasonable times:

    • (a) a copy of the school's current enrolment scheme:

    • (b) a copy of the results of the most recent ballot for places at the school:

    • (c) a copy of the waiting list for places at the school:

    • (d) if it is available, information about the matters listed in subsection (2).

    Sections 11A to 11K were inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11K Commencement of enrolment scheme
  • (1) An enrolment scheme for a primary school commences on the date 3 months after the day of its adoption, or on a later date specified in the scheme.

    (2) An enrolment scheme for a secondary or composite school commences on 1 January in the year following the year in which it was adopted, or on a later date specified in the scheme and agreed to by the Secretary.

    (3) Despite subsections (1) and (2), the Secretary may, on application by a Board, authorise the early commencement of an enrolment scheme if he or she considers that early commencement is appropriate.

    (4) If the Secretary gives authorisation for early commencement after the Board has given notice of the enrolment scheme, the Board must give notice showing the revised date on which the scheme will commence.

    Sections 11A to 11K were inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11L End of enrolment scheme
  • (1) The Board of a school may by resolution, in accordance with this section, abandon an enrolment scheme, in which case the scheme ends on the date specified in the resolution.

    (2) A Board may not resolve to abandon an enrolment scheme unless it has received written notice from the Secretary authorising it to do so.

    (3) The Secretary may at any time, by notice in writing, require the Board of a state school to abandon its enrolment scheme on the grounds that the Secretary is satisfied that there is not, or is not likely to be, overcrowding at the school if the enrolment scheme is abandoned; and the Board must resolve at its next meeting to abandon the scheme.

    (4) When a Board abandons an enrolment scheme, it must—

    • (a) notify the Secretary of the date on which the enrolment scheme ended or will end; and

    • (b) give notice of the date on which the scheme ended or will end.

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11M Amendment of enrolment scheme
  • (1) The Board of a state school that has adopted an enrolment scheme may amend it.

    (2) A Board must not amend a scheme unless it is satisfied that an enrolment scheme is still necessary in order to avoid overcrowding, or the likelihood of overcrowding, at the school.

    (3) If the Board of a state school (school A) adopts or amends an enrolment scheme, the Secretary may require the Board of any nearby state school that also has an enrolment scheme to develop a proposed amendment to its enrolment scheme, in order to take into account the effect of school A's scheme.

    (4) Sections 11A to 11L apply to an amendment and a proposed amendment to an enrolment scheme as if it were an enrolment scheme or a proposed enrolment scheme (as the case may be).

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11MA Making minor amendments to enrolment schemes
  • (1) A state school that wishes to make a minor amendment to its enrolment scheme may make it using the procedure set out in subsection (2) instead of going through the process set out in sections 11H to 11J.

    (2) In order to make a minor amendment to its enrolment scheme under this section, a school must—

    • (a) apply to the Secretary for confirmation that the proposed amendment is minor; and

    • (b) on receiving confirmation from the Secretary, give notice of the proposed amendment; and

    • (c) forward to the Secretary any written comments or queries received by the school regarding the proposed amendment; and

    • (d) adopt the amendment by resolution of the school's Board.

    (3) A school may not adopt an amendment under subsection (2)(d) unless—

    • (a) at least 1 month has passed since notice of the proposal was given; and

    • (b) the Secretary has, after that time, given approval for the amendment to be incorporated.

    (4) At any time before the amendment is incorporated into the enrolment scheme, the Secretary may advise the school that the proposed amendment is not minor, in which case the school may not adopt the amendment without going through the process set out in sections 11H to 11J.

    Section 11MA was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 7 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

11N Pre-enrolment in schools with enrolment schemes
  • (1) The Board of a state school may apply the pre-enrolment procedures of an enrolment scheme at any time after notice has been given of the scheme under section 11J(1), even if the scheme has not yet commenced.

    (2) In the case of applications by applicants who will be subject to a ballot, the Board must notify each applicant, in writing, of—

    • (a) when and how the ballot will be held; and

    • (b) when and how applicants will be advised of the results of the ballot; and

    • (c) the rights and responsibilities of applicants after the ballot.

    (3) The Board must give written notice to every applicant whose application is declined of—

    • (a) the reason why the application has been declined; and

    • (b) the Secretary's powers under section 11P(2).

    (4) The Board must give written notice to every applicant whose name was included in a ballot of the outcome of the ballot as it relates to the applicant.

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11O Enrolment may be annulled if based on false information or temporary residence
  • (1) The Board of a state school that has an enrolment scheme may, subject to subsection (4), annul the enrolment of a student if the Board believes on reasonable grounds that the student's enrolment or pre-enrolment form falsely claimed, for the purpose of securing enrolment, that—

    • (a) the student was living in the school's home zone when the student enrolled at the school; or

    • (b) the student was entitled to a particular priority in the ballot for places (for example, by falsely claiming the applicant to be the sibling (as defined in section 11F(3)) of an existing student).

    (1A) The Board of a state school that has an enrolment scheme may, subject to subsection (4), annul the enrolment of a student if, following a review under section 11OA, the Board determines that the student has used a temporary residence for the purpose of gaining enrolment at the school.

    (2) The address given in a student's pre-enrolment form as the address where the student lives will be taken to be the address at which the student is living on enrolment, unless the Board is notified otherwise.

    (3) The Board may annul the enrolment of any student, or may refuse an application for enrolment by any person, who claimed or claims priority in a ballot as a sibling of a student whose enrolment the Board has annulled under this section.

    (4) If the Board annuls an enrolment under any of subsections (1), (1A), or (3), the annulment takes effect 1 month from the date on which the Board decides to annul the enrolment.

    (5) A Board that annuls the enrolment of a student must immediately—

    • (a) advise the student's parents, in writing, of the date of annulment and the date on which it takes effect; and

    • (b) advise the Secretary of the name of the student and the date of annulment.

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

    The heading to section 11O was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 8(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by adding the words or temporary residence. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (1A) was inserted and subsections (4) and (5) were substituted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 8 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

11OA Review of student's enrolment
  • (1) The Board of a state school that has an enrolment scheme may issue the parents of a student enrolled at the school with a review notice under this section if—

    • (a) the student was enrolled at the school on the grounds that he or she lived in the school's home zone; and

    • (b) the student has, since enrolling at the school, moved out of the school's home zone; and

    • (c) the Board believes on reasonable grounds that the student has used a temporary residence within the school's home zone for the purpose of gaining enrolment at the school.

    (2) On receipt of a review notice, a parent who wishes to rebut the Board's view may make submissions to the Board in whatever manner he or she considers appropriate, and the Board must, in accordance with any guidelines issued under section 11G(3)(c), give the parent every reasonable opportunity to explain the situation.

    (3) The Board may exercise its power under section 11O(1A) to annul the student's enrolment if, no earlier than 10 school days after the date on which the review notice was sent, the Board determines that the student has used a temporary residence within the school's home zone for the purpose of gaining enrolment at the school.

    (4) Every review notice must—

    • (a) be in writing; and

    • (b) be sent by any 1 or more of post, fax, or email to the student's parents; and

    • (c) advise the parents of the effect of the notice, and explain what the parents may do next.

    Section 11OA was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 9 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

11P Secretary may direct Board to enrol applicant
  • (1) The Secretary may direct the Board of any state school (including the Board of the school at which the student was enrolled) to enrol a student whose enrolment has been annulled under section 11O.

    (2) The Secretary may direct the Board of any state school to enrol an applicant whose application for enrolment it has declined if the Secretary is satisfied that—

    • (a) the Board has declined the application on the ground that the applicant is not living in the school's home zone, but in fact the applicant is living in the school's home zone; or

    • (b) the consequences of not giving the direction would be so disadvantageous to the applicant that overriding the enrolment scheme in this case is justified.

    (3) The Secretary must not give a direction about a person under subsection (1) or subsection (2)(b) unless he or she has taken all reasonable steps to consult the person's parents, the Board of the proposed school, and (if appropriate, having regard to the age and maturity of the person) the person.

    (4) The Secretary may not direct the Board of a Kura Kaupapa Maori, a designated character school, or an integrated school to enrol a person under this section unless the person's parents agree, and accept the special character of that school.

    (5) A Board must comply with a direction under this section, and the direction overrides the provisions of any enrolment scheme the school may have in place.

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 11A to 11P were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11PA Annual review of enrolment scheme
  • (1) The Board of a state school that has an enrolment scheme in place on 1 February in any year must, before 1 May of that year,—

    • (a) review the operation of the enrolment scheme, having regard to the purpose and principles of enrolment schemes; and

    • (b) ask the Secretary whether he or she agrees with the Board's view about the continuing need for a scheme to prevent overcrowding, or the likelihood of overcrowding, at the school.

    (2) The Secretary may exempt a Board for any period not exceeding 3 years from the obligation to conduct an annual review if the Secretary considers that compliance is unnecessary.

    (3) The Secretary may at any time rescind an exemption given under subsection (2), and may require the Board to conduct a review of its enrolment scheme within a period specified by the Secretary.

    Sections 11PA and 11PB were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11PB Enrolment schemes of certain state schools
  • (1) Sections 11A to 11PA apply to Kura Kaupapa Maori, designated character schools, integrated schools, and special schools, and to their enrolment schemes, subject to the following modifications:

    • (a) all references to overcrowding or the likelihood of overcrowding must be read as if they were references to there being, or being likely to be, more applicants for enrolments at the school than there are places available; and

    • (b) the enrolment scheme need not define a home zone for the school, nor provide for balloting of applicants who live outside any home zone, but must accord priority to applicants for whom the school is a reasonably convenient school; and

    • (c) section 11J is modified as follows:

      • (i) subsection (1) applies as if paragraph (a) read a general description of the enrolment scheme; and

      • (ii) subsection (2) applies as if paragraphs (a) to (c) were replaced with the words the likely number of places available and the significant pre-enrolment dates and procedures that will apply; and

      • (iii) subsection (3)(b) does not apply; and

    • (d) in the case of a Kura Kaupapa Maori, the application of the sections must not result in inconsistency with section 155; and

    • (e) in the case of a designated character school, the application of the sections must not result in inconsistency with the school's charter or section 156; and

    (2) Sections 11A to 11PA do not apply to any state school of a type specified by the Secretary by notice in the Gazette.

    Sections 11PA and 11PB were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 28 of that Act as to enrolment schemes applying to the 2001 school year.

11Q Obligation to report to Parliament on enrolment schemes
  • (1) The annual report on the schools sector which is laid before the House of Representatives by the Minister of Education in accordance with section 87B must include a statement signed by the Secretary that—

    • (a) Lists the schools that have an enrolment scheme in place; and

    • (b) States the period for which each scheme has been in place; and

    • (c) Notes the schools where adjacent schools have schemes in place; and

    • (d) Outlines any plans included in the Ministry's property development or other programmes to address the pressures on capacity in areas where a number of adjacent schools have enrolment schemes in place, including development plans to manage school population changes to maximise (to the extent it is reasonable and practicable to do so) the opportunity for students to attend a reasonably convenient state school.

    (2) In this section, an enrolment scheme is in place once it has been notified in accordance with section 11J.

    Sections 11A to 11Q and the preceding heading were substituted for the previous sections 11A to 11K, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by substituting the expression section 87B for the words section 44B of the Public Finance Act 1989.

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 26(3) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by substituting the expression section 11J for the expression section 11G(6).

12 Enrolment schemes for certain other schools
  • [Repealed]

    Subsections (1) to (16) were substituted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 7 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Section 12 was repealed, as from 20 June 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43). See section 3(2) of that Act as to an enrolment scheme for a secondary or composite school put in place before the 1st day of October 1991.

12A Out-of-zone applicants for certain language courses
  • [Repealed]

    Section 12A was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 6 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 12A was repealed, as from 20 June 1991, by section 7(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

12B Exemptions from enrolment schemes in exceptional cases
  • [Repealed]

    Section 12B was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 7 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 12B was substituted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Section 12B was substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 5 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

Standing-down, suspension, exclusion, and expulsion of students

13 Purpose
  • The purpose of the provisions of this Act concerning the standing-down, suspension, exclusion, or expulsion of a student from a state school is to—

    • (a) Provide a range of responses for cases of varying degrees of seriousness; and

    • (b) Minimise the disruption to a student's attendance at school and facilitate the return of the student to school when that is appropriate; and

    • (c) Ensure that individual cases are dealt with in accordance with the principles of natural justice.

    Sections 13 to 17 were substituted, as from 12 July 1999, by section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes, section 64 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to the suspension of students from state schools, and clause 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 Commencement Order 1999 (SR 1999/185).

14 Principal may stand-down or suspend students
  • (1) The principal of a state school may stand-down or suspend a student if satisfied on reasonable grounds that—

    • (a) The student's gross misconduct or continual disobedience is a harmful or dangerous example to other students at the school; or

    • (b) Because of the student's behaviour, it is likely that the student, or other students at the school, will be seriously harmed if the student is not stood-down or suspended

    (2) A stand-down may be for 1 or more specified periods, and—

    • (a) The period or periods may not exceed 5 school days in any 1 term:

    • (b) A student may be stood-down more than once in the same year but for not more than 10 school days in total in that year:

    • (c) In calculating the period of a stand-down, the day on which the student was stood-down, and any day on which the student would not have had to attend school in any event, must not be counted:

    • (d) The principal may lift the stand-down at any time before it is due to expire.

    (3) If a student has been stood-down or suspended, the following provisions apply in relation to the student's attendance at the school:

    • (a) The principal may require the student to attend the school if the principal reasonably considers the student's attendance is appropriate for the purposes of section 17A:

    • (b) The principal must allow the student to attend the school if the student's parents request that the student be permitted to attend the school and the principal considers the request is reasonable:

    • (c) Otherwise the student does not have to, and is not permitted to, attend the school while stood-down or suspended.

    Sections 13 to 17 were substituted, as from 12 July 1999, by section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes, section 64 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to the suspension of students from state schools, and clause 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 Commencement Order 1999 (SR 1999/185).

    Subsection (1)(b) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by omitting the words for an unspecified period.

15 Board's powers when suspended student younger than 16
  • (1) If a student younger than 16 has been suspended from a state school, the school's Board may—

    • (a) Lift the suspension at any time before it expires, either unconditionally or subject to any reasonable conditions the Board wants to make:

    • (b) Extend the suspension conditionally for a reasonable period determined by the Board when extending the suspension, in which case subsection (2) applies:

    • (c) If the circumstances of the case justify the most serious response, exclude the student from the school by extending the suspension and requiring the student to be enrolled at another school.

    (2) If the Board extends a suspension conditionally, the Board must impose reasonable conditions aimed at facilitating the return of the student to school and must take appropriate steps to facilitate the return of the student to school.

    (3) If a student fails to comply with any condition imposed under this section in respect of the lifting or extension of his or her suspension, the principal may request the Board to reconsider the action it took under this section in that case and the Board may confirm or reverse its earlier decisions or may modify its earlier decisions by taking any action specified in any of paragraphs (a) to (c) of subsection (1).

    (4) If the Board has not sooner lifted or extended it or excluded the student under subsection (1)(c), the suspension of a student younger than 16 ceases to have effect—

    • (a) At the close of the 7th school day after the day of the suspension; or

    • (b) If the suspension occurs within 7 school days before the end of a term, at the close of the 10th calendar day after the day of the suspension.

    (5) If the Board of a state school excludes the student under subsection (1)(c), the principal must try to arrange for the student to attend another school (which school is a suitable school that the student can reasonably conveniently attend).

    (6) If the principal is unable, by the 10th school day after the day of the Board's decision to exclude a student, to arrange for the student to attend another school, the principal must tell the Secretary what steps the principal took in trying to do so.

    Sections 13 to 17 were substituted, as from 12 July 1999, by section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes, section 64 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to the suspension of students from state schools, and clause 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 Commencement Order 1999 (SR 1999/185).

16 Secretary's powers when excluded student younger than 16
  • (1) If the Secretary is satisfied that the Board of a state school has excluded a student who is younger than 16 from the school under section 15(1)(c), and that the principal has not arranged for the student to attend another school, the Secretary must either,—

    • (a) If satisfied that it is not inappropriate for the student to return to the school from which the student has been excluded, lift the exclusion; or

    • (b) Arrange for and, if necessary, direct the Board of any other state school (that is not an integrated school) to enrol the student at the other school; or

    • (c) Direct a parent of the student to enrol the student at a correspondence school.

    (2) The Secretary may not give a direction under subsection (1)(b) or lift an exclusion under subsection (1)(a) unless the Secretary has also made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the student's parents, the Board, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or able to advise on or help with, the student's education or welfare.

    (3) If the Board of the school from which the student has been excluded also controls another school, the Secretary (in exercising the power conferred by subsection (1)(b)) may direct the Board to enrol the student at that other school.

    (4) A Board must comply with a direction under subsection (1)(b), and the direction overrides the provisions of any enrolment scheme the school may have in place.

    Section 16 was amended, as from 1 January 1993, by section 5(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the expression 16 for the expression 15.

    Subsection (2)(a)(ii) was amended, as from 23 July 1990, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60) by substituting the word extended for the word suspended.

    Subsection (8) was amended, as from 20 June 1991, by section 6(2)(b) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43) by substituting the words section 11J of this Act and section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 1991 for the words section 11 and 12 of this Act, and every limitation or enrolment scheme put in place under either of them.

    Sections 13 to 17 were substituted, as from 12 July 1999, by section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes, section 64 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to the suspension of students from state schools, and clause 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 Commencement Order 1999 (SR 1999/185).

17 Board's powers when suspended student 16 or older
  • (1) If a student who is 16 or older has been suspended from a state school, the Board may—

    • (a) Lift the suspension at any time before it expires, either unconditionally or subject to any reasonable conditions it wants to make; or

    • (b) Extend the suspension conditionally for a reasonable period determined by the Board when extending the suspension, in which case subsection (2) applies; or

    • (c) Expel the student.

    (2) If the Board extends a suspension conditionally, the Board must impose reasonable conditions aimed at facilitating the return of the student to school, and must take steps to facilitate the return of the student to school.

    (3) If a student fails to comply with any condition imposed under this section in respect of the lifting or extension of his or her suspension, the principal may request the Board to reconsider the action it took under this section in that case and the Board may confirm or reverse its earlier decisions or may modify its earlier decisions by taking any action specified in any of paragraphs (a) to (c) of subsection (1).

    (4) If the Board has not sooner lifted or extended it or expelled the student under subsection (1)(c), the suspension of a student who is 16 or older ceases to have effect—

    • (a) At the close of the 7th school day after the day of the suspension; or

    • (b) If the suspension occurs within 7 school days before the end of a term, at the close of the 10th calendar day after the day of the suspension.

    Section 17 was amended, as from 1 January 1993, by section 5(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the expression 16 for the expression 15.

    Sections 13 to 17 were substituted, as from 12 July 1999, by section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes, section 64 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to the suspension of students from state schools, and clause 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 Commencement Order 1999 (SR 1999/185).

17A Duties of principal when student stood-down or suspended
  • (1) When a student is stood-down or suspended from a state school, the principal must take all reasonable steps to ensure that the student has the guidance and counselling that are reasonable and practicable in all the circumstances of the stand-down or suspension.

    (2) If a student's suspension is subject to conditions (whether under section 15 or section 17), the principal must take all reasonable steps to ensure that an appropriate educational programme is provided to the student.

    (3) The purpose of the programme referred to in subsection (2) is to facilitate the return of a student to school and to minimise the educational disadvantages that occur from absence from school.

    Sections 17A to 17D were inserted, as from 12 July 1999, by section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes, section 64 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to the suspension of students from state schools, and clause 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 Commencement Order 1999 (SR 1999/185).

17B Who may attend Board meeting concerning suspensions
  • If a student has been suspended, the student, the student's parents, and their representatives are entitled to attend at least 1 meeting of the Board and speak at that meeting, and to have their views considered by the Board before it decides whether to lift or extend the suspension or exclude or expel the student (whether under section 15 or section 17).

    Sections 17A to 17D were inserted, as from 12 July 1999, by section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes, section 64 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to the suspension of students from state schools, and clause 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 Commencement Order 1999 (SR 1999/185).

17C Effect of suspension on school register
  • (1) The name of a student younger than 16 who has been suspended from a school under section 14 or excluded from a school under section 15(1)(c) must stay on the school's register until the earliest of the following days:

    • (a) The day the student is enrolled at another registered school:

    • (b) The day the student is given an exemption under section 21 or section 22.

    (2) The name of a student who has turned 16 and is suspended from a school under section 14 must stay on the register of the school until the earliest of the following days:

    • (a) The day on which the student is enrolled at another registered school:

    • (b) The day on which the student is expelled from the school:

    • (c) The day on which the student leaves school:

    • (d) The 1 January after the student's 19th birthday.

    (3) Subsection (2) applies to a student who is younger than 16 when suspended from a school under section 14 or excluded from a school under section 15(1)(c), and turns 16 while subject to the suspension or exclusion.

    Sections 17A to 17D were inserted, as from 12 July 1999, by section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes, section 64 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to the suspension of students from state schools, and clause 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 Commencement Order 1999 (SR 1999/185).

17D Re-enrolment of excluded or expelled student
  • (1) The Board of a state school from which a student has ever been excluded or expelled (whether under section 15 or section 17) may refuse to enrol the student at the school (unless, in the case of an exclusion, the Secretary has lifted the exclusion under section 16(1)(a)).

    (2) Subject to section 16(1)(b), the Board of a state school may refuse to enrol a student who is for the time being excluded or expelled (whether under section 15 or section 17) from another state school.

    (3) The Secretary may, in the case of a student who has turned 16, direct the Board of another state school (that is not an integrated school) to enrol a student at the school if—

    • (a) The student has been expelled under section 17; and

    • (b) The Secretary has made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the student's parents, the Board, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or able to advise on or help with, the student's education or welfare.

    (4) A Board must comply with a direction under subsection (3), and the direction overrides the provisions of any enrolment scheme the school may have in place.

    Sections 17A to 17D were inserted, as from 12 July 1999, by section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes, section 64 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to the suspension of students from state schools, and clause 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 Commencement Order 1999 (SR 1999/185).

18 Notice requirements for stand-downs, suspensions, exclusions, and expulsions
  • (1) Immediately after a student is stood-down under section 14, the principal must tell the Secretary and (except in the case of a student who has turned 20) a parent of the student—

    • (a) That the student has been stood-down; and

    • (b) The reasons for the principal's decision; and

    • (c) The period for which the student has been stood-down.

    (2) Immediately after a student is suspended under section 14, the principal must tell the Board, the Secretary, and (except in the case of a student who has turned 20) a parent of the student—

    • (a) That the student has been suspended; and

    • (b) The reasons for the principal's decision.

    (3) Immediately after a Board lifts a suspension, extends a suspension, excludes a student, or expels a student (whether under section 15 or section 17), the Board must tell the Secretary and (except in the case of a student who has turned 20) a parent of the student—

    • (a) That the suspension has been lifted or extended, and the period of the extension (if any), or that the student has been excluded or expelled; and

    • (b) The reasons for the Board's decision.

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 1 January 1993, by section 5(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the expression 16 for the expression 15.

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 20 June 1991, by section 6(2)(b) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43) by substituting the words section 11J of this Act and section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 1991 for the words sections 11 and 12 of this Act, and every limitation or enrolment scheme put in place under either of them.

    Section 18 was substituted, as from 12 July 1999, by section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes, section 64 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to the suspension of students from state schools, and clause 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 Commencement Order 1999 (SR 1999/185).

18AA Secretary may make rules
  • (1) The Secretary may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, make rules (which must not be inconsistent with this Act) regulating the practice and procedure to be followed by Boards, principals, students, parents of students, and other persons under sections 14 to 18, including (without limitation) rules—

    • (a) Setting out procedural requirements to be followed when a proposed stand-down, suspension, exclusion, or expulsion is to be considered or decided:

    • (b) Specifying who should be consulted about the circumstances of a stand-down, suspension, exclusion, or expulsion:

    • (c) Setting out the steps to be taken by the principal and Board, respectively, when a student has been stood-down, suspended, excluded, or expelled:

    • (d) Specifying the notices to be given when a decision not to lift a suspension, or a decision to extend a suspension or expel a student, is made; and specifying the particulars to be set out in each notice:

    • (e) Specifying time limits within which specified things are to be done, and the reports that are to be produced and the persons who are to produce them:

    • (f) Providing reasonable measures (which must not be inconsistent with the Privacy Act 1993) to protect the privacy of individuals:

    • (g) Providing for such other matters as the Secretary considers desirable in the interests of natural justice.

    (2) Before making any rules under this section, the Secretary must—

    • (a) Publish in the Gazette, and in such newspapers as the Secretary considers appropriate, a notice of his or her intention to make the rules; and

    • (b) Give interested persons a reasonable time to make representations about the proposed rules; and

    • (c) Consult such persons and groups as the Secretary considers appropriate.

    (3) If there is any conflict between rules made under this section and the provisions of clause 8 of Schedule 6, the rules override clause 8.

    (4) Rules made under this section are regulations for the purposes of the Acts and Regulations Publication Act 1989 and the Regulations (Disallowance) Act 1989.

    Section 18AA was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 8 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

18A Recommendation that student should attend particular school
  • (1) The Secretary may, on the recommendation of the chief executive of the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families Act 1989, direct the Board of a state school to enrol at the school any person; and in that case the Board must do so.

    (2) No direction may be given under subsection (1) unless the Secretary has taken all reasonable steps to consult—

    • (a) The person's parents; and

    • (b) The Board of the school concerned; and

    • (c) The chief executive of the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families Act 1989, and any other person or organisation that, in the Secretary's opinion, may be interested in, or able to advise on or help with, the person's education or welfare.

    (3) A Board must comply with a direction under subsection (1), and the direction overrides the provisions of any enrolment scheme the school may have in place.

    The original section 18A was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 9 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 23 July 1990, by section 6(2)(b) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60) by substituting the words section 11J of this Act and section 5 of the Education Amendment Act 1991 for the words sections 11 and 12 of this Act, and every limitation or enrolment scheme put in place under either of them.

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 6(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the expression section 11M for the expression section 11J. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Section 18A was substituted, as from 1 October 1999, by section 13 Department of Child, Youth and Family Services Act 1999 (1999 No 82).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by omitting the expression under 18.

    Subsection (3) was substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 26(3) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

19 Principal may preclude student for health reasons
  • (1) A principal of a state school who believes on reasonable grounds that a student—

    • (a) Is not clean enough to keep attending the school; or

    • (b) May have a communicable disease (within the meaning of the Health Act 1956),—

    may preclude the student from the school.

    (2) Forthwith after precluding a student from school under subsection (1) of this section, the principal shall make all reasonable efforts to tell—

    • (a) The Board; and

    • (b) Either the student (in the case of a student who has turned 20) or the student's parents (in every other case); and

    • (c) In the case of a student precluded under subsection (1)(b) of this section, the Medical Officer of Health,—

    that the student has been precluded, and why.

    (3) Where a student has been precluded from a state school for being not clean enough, the Board shall have the matter looked into; and shall either cancel the preclusion or confirm that the student should stay precluded until the principal is satisfied that the student is clean enough to go back to school.

    (4) Where a student has been precluded from a state school on suspicion of having a communicable disease, the Board shall have the matter looked into; and shall either cancel the preclusion or confirm that the student should stay precluded until the Board has received a certificate from a doctor stating that the student is well enough to go back to school.

    (5) Where any person is charged with an offence against section 29 of this Act (which relates to ensuring the attendance of students at school)—

    • (a) It is a defence to the charge if it is proved that—

      • (i) The student did not attend because precluded for having a communicable disease; and

      • (ii) The time for which the student did not attend was no longer than was necessary for the Board to cancel the preclusion or the student to get well enough to go back to school (as the case may be); and

    • (b) Except to the extent set out in paragraph (a) of this subsection, it is not a defence to the charge that the student did not attend because precluded under subsection (1) of this section.

    (6) No principal or Board is liable for any act done or omitted—

    • (a) In good faith; and

    • (b) With reasonable care; and

    • (c) In pursuance or intended pursuance of a power or duty given or imposed by this section.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 193B

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 9(a) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the word preclude for the word exclude.

    Subsection (2) was amended by section 9(b) of that Act by substituting the word precluding for the word excluding.

    Subsections (2) to (5) were amended by section 9(c) of that Act by substituting the words precluded for the word excluded.

    Subsections (3) to (5) were amended by section 9(d) of that Act by substituting the word preclusion for the word exclusion. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

Part 3
Enrolment and attendance of students

20 New Zealand citizens and residents between 6 and 16 to go to school
  • (1) Except as provided in this Act, every person who is not a foreign student is required to be enrolled at a registered school at all times during the period beginning on the person's 6th birthday and ending on the person's 16th birthday.

    (2) Before a child's 7th birthday, the child is not required to be enrolled at any school more than 3 kilometres walking distance from the child's residence.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 ss 108, 109

    Section 20 was amended, as from 1 January 1993, by section 5(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the expression 16th for the expression 15th. See also section 5(4) of that Act for transitional provisions relating to persons turning 15 in 1992.

21 Long term exemptions from enrolment
  • (1) An employee of the Ministry designated by the Secretary for the purpose (in this section and section 26 of this Act referred to as a designated officer) may, by certificate given to a person's parent, exempt the person from the requirements of section 20 of this Act,—

    • (a) On the parent's application; and

    • (b) If satisfied that the person—

      • (i) Will be taught at least as regularly and well as in a registered school; or

      • (ii) In the case of a person who would otherwise be likely to need special education, will be taught at least as regularly and well as in a special class or clinic or by a special service.

    (2) A certificate under subsection (1) of this section continues in force until it is revoked or expires under this section.

    (3) If a designated officer refuses to grant a certificate under subsection (1) of this section, the applicant parent may appeal to the Secretary who, after considering a report on the matter from the Chief Review Officer, shall confirm the refusal or grant a certificate.

    (4) The Secretary's decision is final.

    (5) Every certificate under subsection (1) or subsection (3) of this section shall state why it was given.

    (6) Subject to subsection (7) of this section, the Secretary may at any time revoke a certificate under subsection (1) or subsection (3) of this section.

    (7) The Secretary shall not revoke a certificate under subsection (1) or subsection (3) of this section, unless, after having—

    • (a) Made reasonable efforts to get all the relevant information; and

    • (b) Considered a report on the matter from the Chief Review Officer,—

    the Secretary is not satisfied of whichever of the grounds specified in subsection (1)(b) of this section the certificate was originally granted on.

    (8) If the Secretary thinks any person exempted under subsection (1) of this section would be better off getting special education, the Secretary may revoke the certificate and issue a direction under section 9 of this Act.

    (8A) A certificate for the time being in force under subsection (1) or subsection (3) expires when the person to whom it applies turns 16 or enrols at a registered school, whichever happens first.

    (9) Every certificate of exemption under section 111 of the Education Act 1964 that was in force on the 30th day of September 1989 shall be deemed to have been granted—

    • (a) On the ground specified in subsection (1)(b)(i) of this section if it was in fact granted—

      • (ii) After the 19th day of July 1987, under section 111(3)(a) of that Act; and

    • (b) On the ground specified in subsection (1)(b)(ii) of this section if it was in fact granted—

      • (ii) After the 19th day of July 1987, under section 111(3)(b) of that Act;—

    and may be revoked under this section accordingly.

    Compare: 1987 No 177 s 10

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 10(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the words it is revoked or expires for the word revoked. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (6) was amended, as from 23 July 1990, by section 10 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60) by substituting the word revoke for the word cancel.

    Subsection (8A) was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 10(2) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

    Subsection (9) was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

22 Secretary may exempt from enrolment
  • (1) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, the Secretary may, by certificate given to the parent of a person who has turned 15, exempt the person from the requirements of section 20 of this Act—

    • (a) On the parent's application; and

    • (b) If satisfied that, on the basis of—

      • (i) The person's educational problems; and

      • (ii) The person's conduct; and

      • (iii) The benefit (if any) the person is likely to get from available schools,—

      it is sensible to do so.

    (2) The Secretary shall not exempt under subsection (1) of this section any person who has neither completed the work of form II nor enrolled for a class above form II.

    (3) The Secretary shall tell the chief executive of the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families Act 1989 the name and address of every person exempted under subsection (1) of this section.

    (4) If satisfied that it is in the best interests of any person to do so, the Secretary may revoke the person's certificate under subsection (1) of this section.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 112

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 January 1993, by section 5(3) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the expression 15 for the expression 14.

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 1 October 1999, by section 13 Department of Child, Youth and Family Services Act 1999 (1999 No 82) by substituting the words chief executive of the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families Act 1989 for the words Director of Social Welfare.

22A Secretary may exempt from enrolment persons placed in residence or programme under Children, Young Persons, and Their Families Act 1989
  • (1) On an application from the chief executive of the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families Act 1989, the Secretary may, by a certificate given to the chief executive of that department, exempt a person from the requirements of section 20 if satisfied that the requirements set out in subsection (2) have been met.

    (2) The requirements referred to in subsection (1) are that the person—

    • (a) Has been placed—

      • (ii) In a residential programme instituted by, and operated under contract with, the chief executive of that department where the person would otherwise be in a residence established under section 364 of that Act; and

    • (b) Will receive education services appropriate to the person's needs.

    (3) The Secretary may at any time revoke a certificate granted under subsection (1)

    • (a) On notification by the chief executive of the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families Act 1989 that the person exempted has been released from a residence other than for a temporary period; or

    • (b) If the Secretary is no longer satisfied that the person exempted meets the requirements of subsection (2); or

    • (c) At the request of the chief executive of that department and if satisfied that an exemption from section 20 is no longer required.

    (4) A certificate under subsection (1) continues in force until revoked under this section.

    Sections 22A was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 11 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Section 22A was substituted, as from 1 October 1999, by section 13 Department of Child, Youth and Family Services Act 1999 (1999 No 82).

23 Effect of exemption
  • For so long as a certificate under section 21 or section 22 of this Act continues in force—

    • (a) The exempted person does not have to be enrolled at any school; and

    • (b) No person has to have the exempted person enrolled at any school.

    Compare: 1987 No 177 s 10(5)

24 Penalty for failure to enrol
  • (1) Where the parent of a person required by this Act to be enrolled at a registered school fails or refuses to ensure that the person is enrolled at a registered school, the parent commits an offence, and is liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding $1,000.

    (2) The payment of a fine in respect of a conviction for an offence against subsection (1) of this section is not a bar to proceedings for a further such offence.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 116

25 Students required to enrol must attend school
  • (1) Except as provided in this Act, every student of a registered school (other than a correspondence school) who is required by section 20 of this Act to be enrolled at a registered school shall attend the school whenever it is open.

    (2) Every Board shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that students who are required by subsection (1) of this section to attend the school whenever it is open do so.

    (3) For the purposes of this section, a student attends a school on any day if, on the day,—

    • (a) It has been open for instruction for 4 hours or more; and

    • (b) The student has been present for 4 hours or more when it was open for instruction.

    (4) [Repealed]

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 117

    Subsection (4) was repealed, as from 1 January 1992, by section 6(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

25A Release from tuition on religious or cultural grounds
  • (1) A student aged 16 and above, or the parent of a student aged under 16, may ask the principal to release the student from tuition in a particular class or subject.

    (1A) A request under subsection (1) must be made in writing, and at least 24 hours before the start of the tuition.

    (1B) This section applies only to students enrolled at a state school that is not an integrated school.

    (2) Unless satisfied that—

    • (a) The parent or student (as the case may be) has asked because of sincerely held religious or cultural views; and

    • (b) The student will be adequately supervised (whether within or outside the school) during the tuition,—

    the principal shall not release the student.

    (3) Upon receiving a request from a parent under subsection (1), the principal must, before agreeing to release the student, take all reasonable steps to find out the student's views on the matter.

    (4) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, the principal shall release the student from the tuition and (if the student is to be supervised outside the school) let the student leave the school during the tuition unless satisfied, in the light of—

    • (a) The student's age, maturity, and ability to formulate and express views; and

    • (b) Any views the student has expressed,—

    that it is inappropriate to do so.

    (5) Nothing in this section limits or affects section 79 of the Education Act 1964.

    Sections 25A and 25B were inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 6(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (1) was substituted and subsection 1A and 1B were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 10(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 10(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by inserting after the word parent, the words or student (as the case may be). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (3) was substituted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 10(3) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

25AA Release from tuition in specified parts of health curriculum
  • (1) The parent of a student enrolled at any state school may ask the principal in writing to ensure that the student is excluded from tuition in specified parts of the health curriculum related to sexuality education and, on receipt of such a request, the principal must ensure that—

    • (a) the student is excluded from the relevant tuition; and

    • (b) the student is supervised during that tuition.

    (2) Nothing in subsection (1) requires a principal to ensure that a student who is to be excluded from tuition in specified parts of the health curriculum related to sexuality education is excluded at any other time while a teacher deals with a question raised by another student that relates to the specified part of the curriculum.

    Section 25AA was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 11 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

25B Release from school
  • The principal of a state school—

    • (a) May, if satisfied that—

      • (i) A student will receive outside the school tuition acceptable to the principal; and

      • (ii) Releasing the student would not result in a contravention of section 25(2) of this Act,—

      release the student from attendance at the school, for a period or periods agreed with a parent of the student, to receive the tuition (and, where appropriate, travel between the school and the place where the tuition is to be given):

    • (b) May, if satisfied that—

      • (i) A student has, on any day on which the school was open for instruction, been present at the school for 4 hours or more; and

      • (ii) There are good reasons for the student to leave before the school closes on that day,—

    let the student leave early on that day.

    Sections 25A and 25B were inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 6(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

26 Exemption from attendance
  • (1) A designated officer (as defined in section 21(1) of this Act) may, by certificate given to a student's parent, exempt the student (entirely or partly) from attending a school—

    • (a) On the parent's application; and

    • (b) If satisfied that—

      • (i) The student is under 10, and the walking distance between the student's residence and the school is more than 3 kilometres; or

      • (ii) The walking distance between the student's residence and the school is more than 5 kilometres; or

      • (iii) It is sensible to exempt the student for some other reason.

    (2) If a designated officer refuses to grant a certificate under subsection (1) of this section, the applicant parent may appeal to the Secretary who, after considering a report on the matter from the Chief Review Officer, shall confirm the refusal or grant a certificate.

    (3) The Secretary's decision is final.

    (4) Subject to subsections (6) and (7) of this section, a certificate under subsection (1) of this section shall specify the day on which it expires; and until it expires or is cancelled, the student's parent is not subject to section 20 of this Act in respect of the student.

    (5) Every certificate under subsection (1) of this section shall state the grounds on which it was granted.

    (6) No certificate granted under subsection (1)(b)(iii) of this section shall specify an expiry day more than 7 school days after the day it is granted.

    (7) No other certificate under subsection (1) of this section shall specify an expiry day more than 1 year after the day it is granted.

    (8) Where a certificate under subsection (1) of this section expires, a designated officer may, subject to that subsection, issue another in its place.

    (9) The Secretary may at any time cancel a certificate under subsection (1) of this section.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 118

27 Principal may exempt from attendance for short period
  • (1) If satisfied that a student's absence was or will be justified, the principal of the school may exempt the student from attending the school for a period of no more than 5 school days.

    (2) The parent of a student exempted under subsection (1) of this section is not subject to section 25 of this Act in respect of the student for the period to which the exemption relates.

    (3) In the absence of evidence to the contrary, a certificate from the principal of a school that—

    • (a) A student was absent from the school for any period; and

    • (b) The principal is not satisfied that the absence was justified,—

    is proof that the student was absent for that period without being exempted under subsection (1) of this section.

    (4) For the purposes of subsection (3) of this section, judicial notice shall be taken of the appointment and signature of every principal.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 118(9)

28 Secretary may require parents of certain children to enrol them at correspondence school
  • (1) The Secretary, by notice in writing to the parent of a student—

    • (a) Who has a certificate of exemption for the student under subparagraph (i) or subparagraph (ii) of section 26(1)(b) of this Act; or

    • (b) Who has been directed under section 16(7)(c) of this Act to enrol the student at a correspondence school,—

    may call on the parent to have the student enrolled at a correspondence school specified in the notice, and ensure that the student does the work of the course in which the student is enrolled.

    (2) Enrolment under subsection (1) of this section shall be—

    • (a) For the period of exemption, in the case of a student exempted under section 26(1)(b) of this Act; and

    • (b) Until the student turns 16, or for a shorter period specified in the notice, in every other case.

    (3) A parent who fails to comply with a notice under subsection (1) of this section to have a student enrolled at a correspondence school commits an offence, and is liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding the maximum fine provided for in section 24(1) of this Act (which relates to the failure to enrol at a registered school).

    Compare: 1969 No 135 s 119

    Subsection (2)(b) was amended, as from 1 January 1993, by section 5(2) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the expression 16 for the expression 15.

29 Penalty for irregular attendance
  • (1) Every parent of a person who—

    • (a) While enrolled at a registered school, does not attend as provided in section 25 of this Act; or

    • (b) While enrolled at a correspondence school, does not do the work of the course in which the student is enrolled,—

    commits an offence, and is liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding an amount calculated at the rate of $15 for every school day for which the offence has occurred.

    (2) Notwithstanding subsection (1) of this section, a fine imposed for an offence against that subsection shall not exceed $150 for a first offence against the subsection (or section 120(1) of the Education Act 1964), or $400 for a second or subsequent offence.

    (3) The imposition of a penalty under this section does not affect or restrict the operation of any provision of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families Act 1989.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 ss 119(2), 120

30 Employment of school-age children
  • (1) No person shall employ any person who has not turned 16 at any time—

    • (a) Within school hours; or

    • (b) In the case of a person enrolled at a correspondence school, when the employment interferes with the person's ability to do the work of the course in which the student is enrolled; or

    • (c) In the case of a person who has been granted a certificate of exemption under section 21 of this Act, when the employment interferes with the person's ability to be taught as well and regularly as in a registered school; or

    • (d) If the employment then—

      • (i) Prevents or interferes with the person's attendance at school; or

      • (ii) In the case of a person enrolled at a correspondence school, interferes with the person's ability to do the work of the course in which the person is enrolled,—

    unless there has been produced to the employer a certificate of exemption, or other satisfactory evidence that the person is exempted (otherwise than under section 21(1) of this Act) from enrolment at any school.

    (2) Every person who—

    • (a) Being a parent of any other person, permits the other person to be employed contrary to subsection (1) of this section; or

    • (b) Employs any other person in contravention of the subsection,—

    commits an offence, and is liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding $1,000.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 ss 121, 122

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 January 1993, by section 5(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the expression 16 for the expression 15.

31 Ensuring attendance of students
  • (1) Any Board may appoint any person to be an attendance officer for the schools or institutions it administers.

    (2) A person may be appointed an attendance officer by 2 or more Boards.

    (3) Every Board shall, by any means it thinks appropriate, take all reasonable steps to ensure the attendance of students enrolled at its school or schools (or institution or institutions).

    (4) An attendance officer, on producing a distinctive badge or other evidence of appointment, or a member of the Police may at any time detain any person who appears to have turned 5 and not to have turned 16, and who is not then at school, and question the person as to the person's name and address, the school (if any) at which the person is enrolled and its address, and the reason for the person's absence from school.

    (5) If not satisfied by the person's answers that the person has a good reason for not being at school, the attendance officer or member of the Police—

    • (a) May take the person to the person's home, or to the school at which the officer thinks the person is enrolled:

    • (b) [Repealed]

    (6) A person who, after an attendance officer has produced evidence of appointment, obstructs or interferes with the officer in the exercise of powers under this section, commits an offence, and is liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding $1,000.

    (7) Any attendance officer, a principal, or any person appointed by a Board for the purpose may lay informations, conduct prosecutions, and take any other proceedings, under this Part of this Act.

    (8) A certificate sealed by a Board showing that a person named in it is appointed for any purpose under this section is sufficient evidence of the matters specified in the certificate; and the authenticity of, and validity of the affixing of, a Board's seal shall not in any proceedings under this Part of this Act be inquired into or disputed.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 123

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 1 January 1993, by section 5(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the expression 16 for the expression 15.

    Subsection (5)(b) was repealed, as from 1 January 1992, by section 7 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

32 Hearings of proceedings may be private
  • If the District Court Judge concerned so orders, proceedings under this Part of this Act shall be held with closed doors.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 124

33 Evidence of school roll, etc
  • (1) In any proceedings under this Act, a certificate by a principal as to any of the following matters is, in the absence of proof to the contrary, proof of the matter stated:

    • (a) The enrolment of a person:

    • (b) The days on which a school was open during any period:

    • (c) The days on which a student attended a school during any period:

    • (d) A student's age:

    • (e) The name and address of a student's parent.

    (2) Judicial notice shall be taken of the signature and appointment of a principal on a certificate under subsection (1) of this section.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 125

34 Burden of proof on parents
  • In proceedings under this Part of this Act, the burden of proving any of the following matters in relation to a person is on the person's parent:

    • (a) The enrolment of the person at a school:

    • (b) The person's attendance at a school:

    • (c) The person's exemption from enrolment or attendance at a school.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 126

35 Fines to be paid to Boards
  • Every fine recovered under this Part of this Act shall be paid to the Board on whose behalf the proceedings concerned were commenced and shall then become part of the Board Fund.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 127

35A Registration and inspection of private schools
  • (1) In this section,—

    Efficient, in relation to a private school or proposed private school, means—

    • (a) Having suitable premises, staffing, equipment, and curriculum; and

    • (b) Usually providing tuition for 9 or more students who have turned 5 but are under 16; and

    • (c) Providing suitably for the inculcation in the minds of students of sentiments of patriotism and loyalty; and

    • (d) Giving students tuition of a standard no lower than that of the tuition given to students enrolled at—

      • (i) Primary schools of the same class, where the school's managers want it to be registered as a primary private school:

      • (ii) Secondary schools of the same class, where the school's managers want it to be registered as a secondary private school:

      • (iii) Special schools of the same class, where the school's managers want it to be registered as a special private school:

    Subsection (1) efficient: paragraph (b) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 12 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the expression 16 for the expression 15. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Managers, in relation to a private school or proposed private school, means all the people who control and manage it, whether or not they have a proprietary interest in it.

    (2) No premises shall be deemed not to be operating as a school by reason only of the fact that certificates of exemption under section 21 of this Act are held in respect of all or any of the students being taught there.

    (3) The managers of an unregistered or proposed private school may apply to the Secretary for its provisional registration as a primary, secondary, or special private school, or as a school of 2 or all of those descriptions.

    (4) If satisfied that the premises, staffing, equipment, and curriculum of a school or proposed school in respect of which an application is made under subsection (3) of this section are or are likely to be suitable, the Secretary shall provisionally register the school as a school of the description or descriptions concerned.

    (5) Provisional registration of a school or proposed school shall (unless earlier revoked) continue in force for 12 months only, and then expire.

    (6) As soon as is practicable after provisionally registering a school or proposed school, the Secretary shall tell the Chief Review Officer.

    (7) Unless a proposed school has not in fact been established, the Chief Review Officer shall—

    • (a) Between 6 and 12 months after the provisional registration of a school or proposed school; or

    • (b) By agreement with its managers, earlier,—

    ensure that a review officer reviews the school in action, and prepares a written report on the review to the Secretary and the school's managers.

    (8) If satisfied, having considered the review officer's report, that a provisionally registered school is efficient, the Secretary shall fully register the school as a school of the description or descriptions concerned.

    (9) The Chief Review Officer shall ensure that—

    • (a) While registered under this section, a school is reviewed in action by a review officer—

      • (i) Before the 1st day of January 1993 or the 3rd anniversary of its registration (whichever is the later); and

      • (ii) Thereafter, at intervals of no more than 3 years; and

    • (b) The review officer prepares a written report on the review and gives copies to the Secretary and the school's principal (or other chief executive) and managers.

    (10) Subject to subsection (11) of this section, the Secretary may at any time cancel a school's registration under this section.

    (11) The Secretary shall not cancel a school's registration under this section unless, after having—

    • (a) Taken all reasonable steps to get all the relevant information; and

    • (b) Considered a report on the school from a review officer,—

    the Secretary is not satisfied that the school is efficient.

    (12) Where—

    • (a) A school that is not a registered school operates as a school; or

    • (b) A school registered under this section as a school of a particular description or descriptions operates as a school of another description; or

    • (c) A school registered under this section whose managers have not told the Secretary that it will stop operating does not operate,—

    the school's managers commit an offence against this Act, and shall be liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding $200 for every day or part of a day on which the offence took place.

    (13) Every school that, on the 31st day of December 1989 was or was deemed to be fully or provisionally registered under section 186 of the Education Act 1964 as a school of a particular description or descriptions, shall be deemed to have been fully or provisionally (as the case may be) registered under this section on the 1st day of January 1990 as a school of that description or those descriptions.

    (14) The managers of a private school where more than 29 foreign students are (or, as the case may be, will be) enrolled shall pay to the Chief Review Officer (on written demand by the Chief Review Officer, and as a debt due to the Chief Review Officer) a proportion of the cost to the Education Review Office of every review of the school undertaken by the Education Review Office under this Act bearing the same relation to its total cost as the number of foreign students enrolled (or to be enrolled) there bears to the total number of students enrolled (or to be enrolled) there.

    Section 35A was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 9(1) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (14) was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 11 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

35AA Suspensions and expulsions of students from private schools to be notified to Secretary
  • (1) Immediately after a student has been suspended from attendance at, or expelled from a school registered under section 35A, the school's principal or head teacher must give the Secretary—

    • (a) Written notice of—

      • (i) The student's name and last known address; and

      • (ii) The day on which the student was suspended or expelled (or, if the student was first suspended and later expelled, the days on which the student was suspended and expelled, and the length of the suspension (if applicable)); and

    • (b) A written statement of the reasons for the student's suspension or expulsion.

    (2) Unless the student is within a reasonable time reinstated at the school or enrolled at some other registered school, the Secretary must (if the student is younger than 16) and may (if the student is 16 or older)—

    • (a) Arrange for the student to be enrolled at some other reasonably convenient registered school that the student can attend; or

    • (b) Direct the Board of a state school (that is not an integrated school) to enrol the student at the school; and, in that case, the Board must do so; or

    • (c) Direct a parent of the student to have the student enrolled at a correspondence school.

    (3) The Secretary may not give a direction under subsection (2) unless the Secretary has also made all reasonable attempts to consult the student, the student's parents, the Board, and any other person or organisation that, in the opinion of the Secretary, may be interested in, or able to advise on or help with, the student's education or welfare.

    (4) A direction under subsection (2)(b) overrides section 11M.

    Section 35AA was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 13 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

35B Courses for foreign students
  • The Board (or, in the case of a school that is not a state school, the governing body) of a registered school shall not establish, or permit any student to enrol or continue to be enrolled in, any class, course, or programme, intended exclusively or mainly for foreign students, unless the class, course, or programme, is for the time being approved by the New Zealand Qualifications Authority, which shall not approve it unless satisfied on reasonable grounds that—

    • (a) The school has or will have adequate staff, equipment, and premises to provide it; and

    • (b) The standard of instruction provided in it will be no lower than the standard that would be expected in any similar class, course, or programme for domestic students.

    Section 35B was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 12 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

35C Grants for private schools
  • (1) Grants may be made to the managers (within the meaning of section 35A(1) of this Act) of a registered school that is not a state school, out of public money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose.

    (2) Each grant shall be of an amount determined by the Minister.

    (3) A grant may be made unconditionally, or subject to conditions determined by the Minister.

    (4) The managers of a school to whom a grant is made subject to conditions shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that the conditions are complied with.

    (5) Where a grant has been made unconditionally to the managers of a school, the managers shall ensure that—

    • (a) There are kept (in respect of the year in which the grant was made and the year after), in a manner approved by the Minister, records showing fully and correctly all the managers' financial transactions, assets, liabilities, and funds; and

    • (b) The records are available for inspection at all reasonable times by any employee of the Ministry approved by the Secretary for the purpose.

    (6) Where a grant has been paid to the managers of a school subject to conditions, the managers shall ensure that—

    • (a) There are kept (in respect of the year in which the grant was made and the year after), in a manner approved by the Minister all records necessary to show fully and fairly—

      • (i) Such of the managers' financial transactions, assets, liabilities, and funds, as relate to or are or were affected by the making of the grants; and

      • (ii) That the conditions have been complied with:

    • (b) The records are available for inspection at all reasonable times by any employee of the Ministry approved by the Secretary for the purpose.

    (7) As soon as is practicable after the end of each financial year during which a school's managers are required by subsection (5) or subsection (6) of this section to keep records, they shall—

    • (a) Have prepared an income and expenditure account, showing all financial transactions for the year records of which are required to be kept by paragraph (a) of that subsection; and

    • (b) Have the account audited by a chartered accountant; and

    • (c) Give the Secretary copies of the account and the audit report on it.

    (8) For the purposes of this section, the financial year of a school's managers ends—

    • (a) Where the Minister has specified a day for the purpose, with that day; and

    • (b) With the 30th day of June in every other case.

    Section 35C was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 8(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 136).

Part 4
Specialist Education Services Board

  • The heading to Part 4 was amended, as from 1 August 2000, by regulation 4(1) Education (Change of Name of Education Entities) Order 2000 (SR 2000/117), by substituting the words Specialist Education Services Board for the words Special Education Service

  • Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

36 Interpretation
  • [Repealed]

    Board: this definition was substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 14 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

    Document of accountability: this definition was inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 4(1) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Minister: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

37 Board continued for purposes of this Part
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 37 and 38 were substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 15(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

38 Membership of Board
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 37 and 38 were substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 15(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

39 Function of Board
  • [Repealed]

    Section 39 was substituted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 3 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

39A Minister may require Board to negotiate document of accountability
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 39A to 39I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 3 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

39B Minister may prepare document where no agreement reached
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 39A to 39I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 3 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

39C Contents of documents
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 39A to 39I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 3 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

39D Amendments to documents
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 39A to 39I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 3 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

39E Revocation of documents
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 39A to 39I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 3 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

39F Board to comply with document of accountability
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 39A to 39I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 3 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

39G Non-compliance with document
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 39A to 39I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 3 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

39H Minister may dismiss Board where non-compliance not rectified
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 39A to 39I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 3 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

39I Minister to publish certain documents and directions
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 39A to 39I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 3 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

40 Board responsible to Minister
  • [Repealed]

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 25 June 1993, by section 4(2) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51) by inserting the words (to the extent that its document of accountability is relevant to any of those matters, in accordance with the document).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

41 Powers of Board
  • [Repealed]

    Subsection (2) was substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 13(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Part 4 (comprising sections 36 to 41) was repealed, as from the effective date (being 28 February 2002), by section 86(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88).

Part 5
Early childhood development board

  • The heading to Part 5 was amended, as from 1 August 2000, by regulation 4(1) Education (Change of Name of Education Entities) Order 2000 (SR 2000/117) by substituting the words Early Childhood Development Board for the words Early Childhood Development Unit

  • Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

42 Interpretation
  • [Repealed]

    Board: this definition was substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 16 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

    Document of accountability: this definition was inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 6(1) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Minister: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

43 Board continued for purposes of this Part
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 43 and 44 were substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 17(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

44 Membership of Board
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 43 and 44 were substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 17(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

45 Function of Board
  • [Repealed]

    Section 45 was substituted, as from 25 June 1993, as from 25 June 1993, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

45A Minister may require Board to negotiate document of accountability
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 45A to 45I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

45B Minister may prepare document where no agreement reached
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 45A to 45I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

45C Contents of documents
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 45A to 45I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

45D Amendments to documents
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 45A to 45I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

45E Revocation of documents
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 45A to 45I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

45F Board to comply with document of accountability
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 45A to 45I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

45G Non-compliance with document
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 45A to 45I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

45H Minister may dismiss Board where non-compliance not rectified
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 45A to 45I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

45I Minister to publish certain documents and directions
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 45A to 45I were inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

46 Board responsible to Minister
  • [Repealed]

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 25 June 1993, by section 6(2) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51) by inserting the words (to the extent that its document of accountability is relevant to any of those matters, in accordance with the document).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

47 Powers of Board
  • [Repealed]

    Subsection (2) was substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 13(2) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Part 5 (sections 42 to 47) was repealed, as from 6 April 2004, by section 5(2) Education (Disestablishment of Early Childhood Development Board) Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 14).

Part 6
Parent Advocacy Council

[Repealed]

48 Interpretation
  • [Repealed]

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

49 Parent Advocacy Council
  • [Repealed]

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

50 Membership of Council
  • [Repealed]

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

51 Criteria for appointing members
  • [Repealed]

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

52 Function of Council
  • [Repealed]

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

53 Council may refuse to act in certain cases
  • [Repealed]

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

54 Powers of Council
  • [Repealed]

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

55 Procedure where Council takes matter up
  • [Repealed]

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

56 Council may decide not to proceed with matter
  • [Repealed]

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

57 Council to give reasons
  • [Repealed]

    Section 57 was substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

58 Procedure where matter deserves action
  • [Repealed]

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

59 Power to obtain information
  • [Repealed]

    Part 6 (comprising sections 48 to 59) was repealed, as from 1 October 1991, by section 2(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

Part 7
Control and management of state schools

60 Interpretation
  • In this Part, and Part 8 of this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Assisted student means a foreign student who is in New Zealand to study under an assistance programme administered by the New Zealand Government

    Assisted student: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 5(3) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156)

    Board means a Board of Trustees constituted under Part 9 of this Act; and

    • (a) In relation to a school means the school's Board; and

    • (b) In relation to a principal, means the Board of the principal's school:

    Board staff means Board staff within the meaning of section 92 of this Act

    Charter means a charter of aims, purposes, and objectives that has been approved for a school under this Part of this Act; and, in relation to a school, means the school's charter (or, where it has no charter in fact, the charter it is deemed by section 61(12) of this Act to have)

    Chief Review Officer means the chief executive of the Education Review Office

    Chief Review officer: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 15 Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Domestic student means a person who is not a foreign student

    Domestic student: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 5(3) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156)

    Exempt student means a foreign student who—

    • (a) Is in New Zealand to study under an exchange programme approved by the New Zealand Government; or

    • (b) Is for the time being exempted under section 4C of this Act:

    Exempt student: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 5(3) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156) and amended, as from 1 January 1992, by section 3(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the expression 4C for the expression 4A(1).

    Foreign student means a person who is not a New Zealand citizen, and is—

    • (b) A person obliged by or pursuant to that Act or any other enactment to leave New Zealand immediately or within a specified time; or

    • (c) Deemed for the purposes of that Act to be in New Zealand illegally:

    Foreign student: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 5(3) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156)

    Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part of this Act

    Minister: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(3) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part of this Act

    Ministry: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(3) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    National curriculum objective

    [Repealed]

    National curriculum objective: this definition was repealed, as from 1 January 1992, by section 9(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    National education guideline

    [Repealed]

    National education guideline: this definition was repealed, as from 1 January 1992, by section 9(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    National education guidelines means all the national education goals, foundation curriculum policy statements, national curriculum statements, and national administration guidelines, for the time being in force under section 60A of this Act

    National education guidelines: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 9(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    National education guidelines: this definition was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 18 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by inserting the words foundation curriculum policy statements,.

    Parent means a parent within the meaning of section 92 of this Act

    Review officer means an employee of the Education Review Office

    Review officer: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 15 Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 136).

    School means a state school within the meaning of section 2 of this Act.

    Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry.

    Secretary: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(3) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

60A National education guidelines
  • (1) The Minister may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, publish (in their entirety, or by way of a general description and an indication of where the full text can be obtained) all or any of the following:

    • (a) national education goals, which are—

      • (i) statements of desirable achievements by the school system, or by an element of the school system; and

      • (ii) statements of government policy objectives for the school system:

    • (aa) Foundation curriculum policy statements, which are statements of policy concerning teaching, learning, and assessment that are made for the purposes of underpinning and giving direction to—

      • (i) The way in which curriculum and assessment responsibilities are to be managed in schools:

      • (ii) National curriculum statements and locally developed curriculum:

    • (b) National curriculum statements (that is to say statements of—

      • (i) The areas of knowledge and understanding to be covered by students; and

      • (ii) The skills to be developed by students; and

      • (iii) Desirable levels of knowledge, understanding, and skill, to be achieved by students,—

      during the years of schooling):

    • (c) national administration guidelines, which are guidelines relating to school administration and which may (without limitation)—

      • (i) set out statements of desirable codes or principles of conduct or administration for specified kinds or descriptions of person or body ,including guidelines for the purpose of section 61:

      • (ii) set out requirements relating to planning and reporting including—

        • (A) scope and content areas, where appropriate:

        • (B) the timeframe for the annual update of the school charter:

        • (C) broad requirements relating to schools' consultation with parents, staff, school proprietors (in the case of integrated schools) and school communities, and the broad requirements to ensure that Boards take all reasonable steps to discover and consider the views and concerns of Maori communities living in the geographical area the school serves, in the development of a school charter:

        • (D) variations from the framework for school planning and reporting for certain schools or classes of schools, based on school performance:

      • (iii) communicate the Government's policy objectives:

      • (iv) set out transitional provisions for the purposes of national administration guidelines.

    (2) Without limiting the generality of subsection (1), a notice relating to a national curriculum statement may—

    • (a) Specify different commencement dates for different provisions or different purposes, which dates may differ according to the class or designation of a school, the group or year level of students attending a school, or any combination of such classes, designations, groups, or levels:

    • (b) Specify a transitional period during which a Board may elect to comply with an existing curriculum statement or the new curriculum statement, and specify a date on which a Board must begin complying with the new curriculum statement:

    • (c) Revoke any curriculum statement issued under this section, and revoke any corresponding statement (such as a syllabus) issued in the form of a notice and having effect under the Education Act 1964.

    Section 60A was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 9(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Section 60A was amended, as from 25 June 1993, by section 7 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51) by inserting the words (in their entirety, or by way of a general description and an indication of where the full text can be obtained).

    Subsection (1)(a) was substituted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 12(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (1)(aa) was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 19(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes. See section 63 of that Act as to the saving of syllabuses in force under the Education Act 1964.

    Subsection (1)(c) was substituted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 12(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (1)(c) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by inserting after the words person or body the words , including guidelines for the purposes of section 61.

    Subsection (2) was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 19(2) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes. See section 63 of that Act as to the saving of syllabuses in force under the Education Act 1964.

60B Consultation about treatment of health curriculum
  • (1) The Board of every state school must, at least once in every 2 years, and after consultation with the school community, adopt a statement on the delivery of the health curriculum.

    (2) In this section,—

    school community means,—

    • (a) in the case of an integrated school, the parents of students enrolled at the school, and the school's proprietors:

    • (b) in the case of any other state school, the parents of students enrolled at the school:

    • (c) in every case, any other person whom the Board considers is part of the school community for the purpose of this section

    statement on the delivery of the health curriculum means a written statement of how the school will implement the health education components of the relevant national curriculum statements.

    (3) The purpose of the consultation required by subsection (1) is to—

    • (a) inform the school community about the content of the health curriculum; and

    • (b) ascertain the wishes of the school community regarding the way in which the health curriculum should be implemented, given the views, beliefs, and customs of the members of that community; and

    • (c) determine, in broad terms, the health education needs of the students at the school.

    (4) A Board may adopt any method of consultation that it considers will best achieve the purpose set out in subsection (3), but it may not adopt a statement on the delivery of the health curriculum until it has—

    • (a) prepared the statement in draft; and

    • (b) given members of the school community an adequate opportunity to comment on the draft statement; and

    • (c) considered any comments received.

    Section 60B was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 13 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

61 School charter
  • (1) Every Board must, for each school it administers, prepare and maintain a school charter.

    (2) The purpose of a school charter is to establish the mission, aims, objectives, directions, and targets of the Board that will give effect to the Government's national education guidelines and the Board's priorities, and provide a base against which the Board's actual performance can later be assessed.

    (3) A school charter must contain the following sections:

    • (a) a section that includes—

      • (i) the aim of developing, for the school, policies and practices that reflect New Zealand's cultural diversity and the unique position of the Maori culture; and

      • (ii) the aim of ensuring that all reasonable steps are taken to provide instruction in tikanga Maori (Maori culture) and te reo Maori (the Maori language) for full-time students whose parents ask for it:

    • (b) a long-term strategic planning section that—

      • (i) establishes the Board's aims and purposes; and

      • (ii) establishes for the next 3 to 5 years the Board's aims, objectives, directions, and priorities for intended student outcomes, the school's performance, and use of resources; and

      • (iii) includes any aims or objectives that designate the school's special characteristics or its special character (within the meaning of this Act):

    • (c) an annually updated section that—

      • (i) establishes for the relevant year the Board's aims, directions, objectives, priorities, and targets relating to intended student outcomes, the school's performance, and use of resources; and

      • (ii) sets targets for the key activities and achievement of objectives for the year.

    (4) A school charter must include the Board's aims, objectives, directions, priorities, and targets in the following categories:

    • (a) student achievement:

    • (b) the Board's activities aimed at meeting both general government policy objectives for all schools, being policy objectives set out or referred to in national education guidelines, and specific policy objectives applying to that school:

    • (c) the management of the school's and Board's capability, resources, assets, and liabilities, including its human resources, finances, property, and other ownership matters:

    • (d) other matters of interest to the public that the Minister may determine.

    (5) A school charter must—

    • (a) contain all annual or long-term plans the Board is required to have or has prepared for its own purposes; or

    • (b) contain a summary of each plan or a reference to it.

    Subsection (2) was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 9(3) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by adding the words , and provide a base against which the Board's actual performance can later be assessed.

    Subsection (3)(ba) was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 10 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (12) was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 9(4) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Sections 61 to 63 were substituted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 14 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

62 Procedural requirements of preparing or updating school charter
  • (1) The Board must provide the Secretary with a copy of its first school charter and every updated or amended school charter.

    (2) A school charter must be prepared and updated annually in accordance with national administration guidelines.

    (3) A Board must amend its school charter as soon as practicable after it becomes aware of any information contained in the charter that is false or misleading in a material particular.

    Sections 61 to 63 were substituted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 14 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by inserting the words or amended after the word updated.

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by inserting the word annually after the word updated.

    Subsection (3) was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

63 Effect of school charter
  • A school charter has effect as an undertaking by the Board to the Minister to take all reasonable steps (not inconsistent with any enactment, or the general law of New Zealand) to ensure that—

    • (a) the school is managed, organised, conducted, and administered for the purposes set out in the school charter; and

    • (b) the school, and its students and community, achieve the aims and objectives set out in the school charter.

    Sections 61 to 63 were substituted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 14 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Paragraph (a) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 6 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by omitting the words or deemed to be contained.

63A When school charter or updated charter takes effect
  • (1) When the Secretary receives a school charter or updated school charter, the Secretary must consider whether the charter has been developed or updated in accordance with the requirements of this Act and the national administration guidelines.

    (2) Unless it takes effect on a different date under subsection (5), a new or updated school charter takes effect on the 25th working day after the date that the Secretary receives it.

    (3) If, before the first or updated school charter takes effect, the Secretary determines that it was not developed or updated in accordance with the Act or is inconsistent with the Act or the national administration guidelines, the Secretary must notify the Board of the matters in the school charter to be resolved.

    (4) The Secretary must then negotiate with the Board to resolve the matters concerned and, if the Board and the Secretary are unable to reach agreement about the content of the school charter or updated school charter, the Secretary may require the Board to amend the charter or updated charter.

    (5) If the Secretary issues a notice under subsection (3), the school charter or updated charter takes effect—

    • (a) on the date agreed by the Secretary and the Board; or

    • (b) on the date the Secretary determines to be the commencement date for his or her amendments.

    Sections 63A and 63B were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 14 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

63B Board must make copies of school charter available
  • Once a school charter or updated school charter takes effect, the Board must make the charter available.

    Sections 63A and 63B were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 14 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

64 Effect of charter
  • [Repealed]

    Section 64 was repealed, as from 25 October 2001, by section 14 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

64A Secretary may require Board to get specialist support
  • [Repealed]

    Section 64A was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 20 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Section 64A was repealed, as from 25 October 2001, by section 22 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

65 Staff
  • Subject to Part 8A and section 120A of this Act, a Board may from time to time, in accordance with the State Sector Act 1988, appoint, suspend, or dismiss staff.

    Compare: 1987 No 177 s 14 (new s 136L)

    Subsection (2)(b) was amended, as from 23 July 1990, by section 16(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60) by substituting the word rise for the word arise.

    Subsections (3) and (4) were substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 16(2) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsections (4A) to (4E) were inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 16(2) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (5) was repealed, as from 23 July 1990, by section 16(2) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsections (6) and (7) were substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 16(2) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (8) was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 16(2) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 65 was substituted, as from 8 August 1991, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 January 1992, by section 10(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by omitting the words Subject to subsection (3) of this section, and further amended, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(2) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107) by inserting the words Subject to Part 8A of this Act,.

    Subsections (2) and (3) were repealed, as from 1 January 1992, by section 10(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Section 65 was substituted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 2 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

65A Length of school year
  • (1) The Minister may, before the 1st day of July in any year, prescribe the number of half-days on which schools must be open during the next year; and different numbers may be prescribed for schools of different classes or descriptions.

    (2) Except as provided in this Act, every Board shall ensure that each school it administers is in every year open for instruction on the number of half days required under subsection (1) of this section.

    (2A) If, because of a strike or lockout, a school is not open for instruction on any half-day, the school is, for the purposes of subsection (2), deemed to be open for instruction on that half-day.

    (3) Where the Minister has not in fact prescribed for a school a number under subsection (1) of this section in respect of any year, the Minister shall be deemed to have prescribed in respect of the year the number prescribed (or deemed under this subsection to have been prescribed) for the school for the year before.

    Sections 65A to 65G were inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (2A) was inserted, as from 6 April 2004, by section 6 State Sector Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 15).

65B Terms
  • (1) The Minister may, before the 1st day of July in any year, prescribe (by reference to specific dates, specified days, the number of half days prescribed under section 65A of this Act, or any 2 or more of those means)—

    • (a) The terms that schools must observe during the next year; or

    • (b) A means for ascertaining or determining those terms.

    (2) Except as provided in this Act, every Board shall ensure that the schools it administers are in every year open for instruction on every day during the terms prescribed, ascertained, or determined for the year under subsection (1) of this section.

    (3) For the purposes of section 65A of this Act and subsection (2) of this section—

    • (a) On any day, a school is open for instruction for a half-day only, if—

      • (i) It is in fact open for instruction for 2 hours or more before noon; but is not in fact open for instruction for 2 hours or more after noon; or

      • (ii) It is in fact open for instruction for 2 hours or more after noon; but is not in fact open for instruction for 2 hours or more before noon; and

    • (b) On any day, a school is not open for instruction at all if it is not in fact open for instruction for 2 hours or more before noon and for 2 hours or more after noon.

    (4) Where the Minister has not in fact prescribed terms, or a means of ascertaining or determining them, under subsection (1) of this section in respect of any year, the Minister shall be deemed to have prescribed in respect of the year the terms or means prescribed (or deemed under this subsection to have been prescribed) in respect of the year before.

    Sections 65A to 65G were inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 25 June 1993, by section 8(1) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51) by omitting the word consecutive wherever it occurred.

65C Holidays
  • (1) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, every Board shall ensure that all schools it administers are closed on Saturdays, Sundays, New Year's Day, the 2nd day of January, Waitangi Day, Good Friday, Easter Monday, Easter Tuesday, Anzac Day, the Sovereign's birthday, Labour Day, Christmas Day, Boxing Day, and the day observed in the locality in which the school is situated as anniversary day.

    (2) The Minister may at any time prescribe the circumstances in which Boards may open the schools they administer or any of them on Saturdays or Sundays; and schools may be open accordingly.

    (3) The Minister may, before the 1st day of July in any year, prescribe days during the next year (in addition to those specified in subsection (1) of this section) on which Boards may close the schools they administer, or any of them; and, subject to section 65A of this Act, schools may be closed accordingly.

    (4) Where the Minister has not in fact prescribed days under subsection (1) of this section in respect of any year, the Minister shall be deemed to have prescribed in respect of the year the days prescribed (or deemed under this subsection to have been prescribed) in respect of the year before.

    (5) The Minister may at any time prescribe the circumstances in which Boards may close the schools they administer or any of them; and, subject to section 65A of this Act, schools may be closed accordingly.

    Sections 65A to 65G were inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

65D Exceptions in particular cases
  • (1) The Minister may authorise a Board to open any specified school it administers for fewer half-days in any year than required by section 65A(2) of this Act; and schools may be closed accordingly.

    (2) The Minister may authorise a Board to open and close any specified school it administers in accordance with terms and holidays (specified by the Minister) that differ from those otherwise required by this Act to be observed; and, subject to any terms and conditions specified by the Minister when giving the authority, schools may be open and closed accordingly.

    (3) The Minister may authorise a Board to apply a meaning of half day that differs from the meaning it has in section 65B(3), if the Minister is satisfied that—

    • (a) The Board has adequately consulted parents, staff, and the local community about the proposal and it is generally acceptable; and

    • (b) The adoption of the proposal will not result in the students of the school spending less time in school than other students in comparable schools; and

    • (c) The Minister considers that such a variation is appropriate in the circumstances.

    (4) An authorisation under subsection (3) must be given either unconditionally or subject to such conditions as the Minister considers appropriate.

    (5) A student enrolled at a state school must comply with section 25 even if the school's Board varies the meaning of half day under subsection (3).

    (6) Subsection (3) overrides the provisions in section 77 of the Education Act 1964 concerning the times at which state primary schools are to be kept open.

    Sections 65A to 65G were inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsections (3) to (6) were inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 21 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

65E Emergencies
  • (1) Notwithstanding anything in this Part of this Act, a Board may at any time, because of epidemic, flood, fire, or other emergency, close a school it administers.

    (2) If satisfied that the closure for instruction of any school during any period during which it was otherwise required by this Part of this Act to be open was necessary because of epidemic, flood, fire, or other emergency, the Secretary may, by written notice to the Board, reduce the number of half-days for which the school would otherwise be required by section 65A of this Act to be open for instruction; and the school may be open and closed for instruction accordingly.

    Sections 65A to 65G were inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

65F Application of provisions
  • (1) The powers conferred on the Minister by sections 65A to 65E of this Act may be exercised in respect of all schools, schools of a particular class or description, or specified schools.

    (2) Sections 65A to 65E of this Act shall have effect as if special schools, special classes, special clinics, and special services are state schools.

    Sections 65A to 65G were inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

65G Minister to act by means of instructions
  • (1) Except as provided in subsection (2) of this section, the powers of the Minister under sections 65A to 65F of this Act shall be exercised only by written instruction signed by the Minister.

    (2) The Minister may delegate to the Secretary the Minister's powers under section 65D(2) of this Act; but if the Minister does so—

    • (a) The Secretary shall exercise the powers in respect of individual schools only; and

    • (b) The delegation shall not limit or affect the exercise of the powers by the Minister.

    Sections 65A to 65G were inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 17(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60). See also section 17(2) of that Act.

    Section 65G was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 11 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

65H Application of Crown Entities Act 2004
  • (1) Every Board is a Crown entity for the purposes of section 7 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (2) However, that Act applies to Boards only to the extent that subsection (3) provides.

    (3) The provisions of that Act set out in Schedule 3 of that Act and Schedule 5A of this Act apply to Boards and their Crown entity subsidiaries (within the meaning of that Act).

    (4) The trustees are the governing board for the purposes of those provisions of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Section 65H was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

66 Delegations
  • (1) The governing board of a Board may delegate any of the functions or powers of the Board or the governing board, either generally or specifically, to any of the following persons by resolution and written notice to the person or persons:

    • (a) a trustee or trustees:

    • (b) the principal or any other employee or employees, or office holder or holders, of the Board:

    • (c) a committee consisting of at least 2 persons, at least one of whom is a trustee:

    • (d) any other person or persons approved by the Board's responsible Minister:

    • (e) any class of persons comprised of any of the persons listed in paragraphs (a) to (d).

    (2) Subsection (1) does not apply to any functions or powers specified in this Act as not being capable of delegation.

    (3) The governing board must not delegate the general power of delegation.

    (4) A delegate to whom any functions or powers of a Board or governing board are delegated may,—

    • (a) unless the delegation provides otherwise, perform the function or exercise the power in the same manner, subject to the same restrictions, and with the same effect as if the delegate were the Board or the governing board; and

    • (b) delegate the function or power only—

      • (i) with the prior written consent of the governing board; and

      • (ii) subject to the same restrictions, and with the same effect, as if the subdelegate were the delegate.

    (5) A delegate who purports to perform a function or exercise a power under a delegation—

    • (a) is, in the absence of proof to the contrary, presumed to do so in accordance with the terms of that delegation; and

    • (b) must produce evidence of his or her authority to do so, if reasonably requested to do so.

    (6) No delegation in accordance with this Act—

    • (a) affects or prevents the performance of any function or the exercise of any power by the Board or the governing board; or

    • (b) affects the responsibility of the governing board for the actions of any delegate acting under the delegation; or

    • (c) is affected by any change in the membership of the governing board or of any committee or class of persons.

    (7) A delegation may be revoked at will by—

    • (a) resolution of the governing board and written notice to the delegate; or

    • (b) any other method provided for in the delegation.

    (8) A delegation under subsection (4)(b) may be revoked at will by written notice of the delegate to the subdelegate.

    (9) The governing board may, by resolution, appoint committees—

    • (a) to advise it on any matters relating to the Board's functions and powers that are referred to the committee by the governing board; or

    • (b) to perform or exercise any of the Board's functions and powers that are delegated to the committee.

    (10) A person must not be appointed as a member of a committee unless, before appointment, he or she discloses to the governing board the details of any financial interest that would disqualify the person from being a member of the committee under section 103A.

    (11) This section applies to each member of a committee who is not a trustee with necessary modifications.

    (12) Until revoked, a delegation to a committee continues in force, even if the membership of the Board or committee changes.

    Section 66 was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (8) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 7 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the expression subsection (4)(b) for the expression subsection (1)(b).

66A No delegation of power to borrow
  • The governing board of a Board must not delegate any power to borrow money that it may have under section 160 or section 162 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Section 66A was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 11 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Section 66A was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

66B Application of new acquisition of securities, borrowing, guarantees, indemnities, and derivative transactions rules
  • (1) The amendments made to sections 67 to 67B and 73 of this Act by Schedule 6 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 (being amendments that correspond with sections 160 to 164 of that Act) apply on and after 1 April 2005.

    (2) Until that date, the existing law applies (see the transitional provisions in sections 196 and 197 of the Crown Entities Act 2004).

    Section 66B was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

67 Restrictions on borrowing
  • (1) Sections 160 and 162 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply.

    (2) Therefore, a Board must not borrow from any person, or amend the terms of any borrowing, other than as provided in—

    • (a) any regulations made under Part 4 of that Act; or

    • (b) any approval given jointly by the Minister of Education and the Minister of Finance; or

    • (c) this Act.

    Subsection (1) was substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 18(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1) was substituted, and subsections (1AA) and (1AB) were inserted, as from 8 August 1991 by section 4(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

    Subsection (6) was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 18(2) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 67 was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, as from 1 January 1992, by section 12(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Section 67 was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

67A Restrictions on giving of guarantees and indemnities
  • (1) Sections 160 and 163 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply.

    (2) Therefore, a Board must not, with or without security, give a guarantee to, or indemnify, another person other than as provided in—

    • (a) any regulations made under Part 4 of that Act; or

    • (b) any approval given jointly by the Minister of Education and the Minister of Finance; or

    • (c) this Act.

    Sections 67A and 67B were inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 12(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Section 67A was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

67B Restrictions on use of derivatives
  • (1) Sections 160 and 164 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply.

    (2) Therefore, a Board must not enter into a derivative transaction, or amend the terms of that transaction, other than as provided in—

    • (a) any regulations made under Part 4 of that Act; or

    • (b) any approval given jointly by the Minister of Education and the Minister of Finance; or

    • (c) this Act.

    Sections 67A and 67B were inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 12(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Section 67B was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

68 Gifts
  • (1) Any money or property that is gifted to a school may be accepted or disclaimed by the Board in accordance with section 167 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (1A) A limitation in this Act or that applies under the Crown Entities Act 2004 (such as a limitation on the form in which property may be held) does not apply during a period that is reasonable in the circumstances.

    (1B) Subsections (1) and (1A) apply to any gift that is received by the Board for funding scholarships or bursaries, or for other educational purposes in connection with a school.

    (2) A Board shall hold every such gift for the specific purpose declared by the giver.

    (3) Unless the giver has created a special trust, scholarships and bursaries from a gift shall be open to every student at the school.

    (4) If the school for which a gift was given closes, the Minister shall direct that the gift should apply to some other school.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 191

    The heading to section 68 was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115). The heading previously read Boards may receive property for scholarships

    Subsection (1) was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsections (1A) and (1B) were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

69 Real property
  • Except as provided in section 68 of this Act, a Board shall not acquire an interest in land, or any licence to occupy any land or premises, without the consent of the Minister.

70 Occupancy of property and buildings
  • (1) The Secretary may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, specify terms and conditions applying generally to land and buildings occupied by Boards, and may from time to time, by written notice to a particular Board, specify terms and conditions applying to land and buildings occupied by that Board.

    (1A) A notice under subsection (1)

    • (a) May apply to any land and buildings occupied by a Board (regardless of who owns the property); but

    • (b) To the extent that it applies to the Board of an integrated school, is subject to the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975 and to the integration agreement for the time being in force between the Minister and the Proprietors of the school.

    (2) Terms and conditions under subsection (1) of this section may include such matters as standards of maintenance, standards of capital works, and minimum safety and health requirements.

    (3) Subsection (2) of this section does not limit the generality of subsection (1) of this section.

    (4) Terms and conditions may be specified under subsection (1) of this section in respect of a particular school or institution or schools or institutions, schools or institutions of particular classes or descriptions, or all schools and institutions.

    (5) A notice published in the Gazette under subsection (1) may publish the terms and conditions in their entirety, or by way of a general description and an indication of where the full text can be obtained.

    (6) Terms and conditions specified under subsection (1) apply to Boards or a Board (as the case may be) as if—

    • (a) The land and buildings were owned by the Crown and the Crown has leased them to the Board; and

    • (b) The terms and conditions were part of the lease; and

    • (c) The Crown had empowered the Secretary to exercise the Crown's powers concerning the lease.

    Subsection (1) was substituted, and subsection (1A) was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 22(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (5) was substituted, and subsection (6) was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 22(2) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

70A Minister may declare land to be no longer needed for educational purposes
  • (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, declare any land of the Crown to be no longer needed for educational purposes.

    (2) On publication of a notice under subsection (1), any land referred to in the notice that was, immediately before publication of the notice, held for a purpose set out in subsection (3), ceases to be so held and may be disposed of as land no longer required for a public work.

    (3) Subsection (2) applies to land held—

    • (a) for education or educational purposes; or

    • (b) for, or for the purposes of, a school or other educational institution (whether or not any particular school or institution); or

    • (c) for any purpose related to or connected with a school or other educational institution (whether or not any particular school or institution); or

    • (d) for any similar purpose.

    Compare: 1949 No 24 s 5A

    Sections 70A to 70C were inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 8(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19). See section 8(2) and (3) of that Act as to: a lease or licence to occupy entered into under Part 1 of the Education Lands Act 1949; and an agreement to which section 70C of this Act applies that is in force immediately before 17 May 2006.

70B Leases and licences granted by Boards
  • (1) A Board may, with the written consent of the Secretary, grant a lease or a licence to occupy to any person in respect of any land, buildings, or facilities occupied by the Board.

    (2) The Secretary may agree to the grant of a lease or a licence by the Board only if satisfied that—

    • (a) the land, building, or facilities are not needed or used for the purposes of the school during the time covered by the lease or licence; and

    • (b) the lease or licence is in the public interest; and

    • (c) the lease or licence—

      • (i) is for a purpose associated with educational outcomes and will bring educational benefit to the school or its community, or to any other school; or

      • (ii) is for a community purpose, and will bring no educational disadvantage to the school.

    (3) The Secretary must determine the terms and conditions of any lease or licence granted by a Board, and may do so by either or both of the following:

    • (a) by notice in the Gazette specifying general terms and conditions that apply to all, or specified classes of, leases or licences:

    • (b) by written notice to the Board.

    (4) Section 70(5) applies to a Gazette notice under subsection (3)(a).

    (5) In relation to an integrated school, this section applies subject to the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975 and to any integration agreement in force between the Minister and the proprietors of the school.

    Compare: 1949 No 24 ss 6, 6A

    Sections 70A to 70C were inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 8(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19). See section 8(2) and (3) of that Act as to: a lease or licence to occupy entered into under Part 1 of the Education Lands Act 1949; and an agreement to which section 70C of this Act applies that is in force immediately before 17 May 2006.

70C Other agreements to occupy school land or buildings
  • (1) In this section, agreement means an agreement, other than a lease or a licence to occupy under section 70B, between a Board and any other person for the use of land, buildings, or facilities occupied by the Board.

    (2) A Board may not enter into an agreement unless—

    • (a) the agreement is of a type permitted by Gazette notice under subsection (5); and

    • (b) the agreement is consistent with this section and any conditions set out in Gazette notices made under subsection (5).

    (3) It is a condition of every agreement that the Board has the right to enter at any time the land, buildings, or facilities that are the subject of the agreement.

    (4) No person has the right under an agreement to use or occupy any land, buildings, or facilities in such a way as to unduly interfere with the use by the Board for school purposes of that land or those buildings or facilities, or any other land, buildings, or facilities of the school.

    (5) The Secretary may, by notice in the Gazette,—

    • (a) identify the kinds of agreements (such as, for example, agreements for the use of playing fields) that Boards may enter into; and

    • (b) specify conditions to which agreements, or specified types of agreements, are subject.

    (6) Section 70(5) applies to a Gazette notice under subsection (5)(b).

    (7) In relation to an integrated school, this section applies subject to the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975 and to any integration agreement in force between the Minister and the proprietors of the school.

    Sections 70A to 70C were inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 8(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19). See section 8(2) and (3) of that Act as to: a lease or licence to occupy entered into under Part 1 of the Education Lands Act 1949; and an agreement to which section 70C of this Act applies that is in force immediately before 17 May 2006.

71 Courses and visits
  • (1) Except as provided in this section, a Board may authorise any students to—

    • (a) Undertake courses of education; or

    • (b) Obtain work experience; or

    • (c) Make visits;—

    outside the school premises; and where the board has done so, a student shall be deemed to be attending the school while undertaking the course, obtaining the experience, or making the visit.

    (2) Except in accordance with conditions for the time being prescribed by the Minister in that behalf by notice in the Gazette no principal, teacher, or occupier of a workplace shall allow a student to go into, or remain in, a workplace to get work experience.

    (3) Subject to subsection (4) of this section, a student who is in a workplace (other than an undertaking within the meaning of the Factories and Commercial Premises Act 1981) to get work experience is deemed to be employed there; and every enactment, and collective agreement, (to the extent that it relates to the safety, health, and welfare of workers) applies to the student and the occupier of the workplace accordingly.

    (4) Subsection (3) of this section does not—

    • (a) Entitle a student to be paid; or

    • (b) Require a student to join or belong to a union; or

    • (c) Entitle a student to enter or remain in a workplace; or

    • (d) Require any person to pay any levy, fee, or charge, of any kind.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 117A

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 2 October 2000, by section 240 Employment Relations Act 2000 (2000 No 24) by substituting the words and collective agreement for the words award, and agreement.

72 Bylaws
  • Subject to any enactment, the general law of New Zealand, and the school's charter, a school's Board may make for the school any bylaws the Board thinks necessary or desirable for the control and management of the school.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 61(2)

73 Restrictions on acquisition of securities
  • (1) Sections 160 and 161 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply.

    (2) Therefore, a Board must not acquire securities other than—

    • (a) a debt security denominated in New Zealand dollars that is issued by a registered bank, or by any other entity, that satisfies a credit-rating test that is specified in either regulations made under Part 4 of that Act or a notice in the Gazette published by the Minister of Finance:

    • (b) a public security:

    • (c) as provided in—

      • (i) any regulations made under Part 4 of that Act; or

      • (ii) any approval given jointly by the Minister of Education and the Minister of Finance: or

      • (iii) this Act.

    Subsection (3) Subsidiary was substituted, as from 1 July 1994, by section 2 Company Law Reform (Transitional Provisions) Act 1994 (1994 No 16).

    Section 73 was substituted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 9 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Section 73 was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

74 Work for other Boards
  • (1) Any 2 Boards may agree in writing for—

    • (a) One of them to acquire materials for and supply them to the other; or

    • (b) One of them to do work for the other,—

    and for the other to pay the Board acquiring and supplying the materials or doing the work.

    (2) An agreement under subsection (1) of this section does not absolve a Board from any responsibilities imposed by this Act.

75 Boards to control management of schools
  • Except to the extent that any enactment or the general law of New Zealand provides otherwise, a school's Board has complete discretion to control the management of the school as it thinks fit.

76 Principals
  • (1) A school's principal is the Board's chief executive in relation to the school's control and management.

    (2) Except to the extent that any enactment, or the general law of New Zealand, provides otherwise, the principal—

    • (a) Shall comply with the Board's general policy directions; and

    • (b) Subject to paragraph (a) of this subsection, has complete discretion to manage as the principal thinks fit the school's day to day administration.

77 Guidance and counselling
  • The principal of a state school shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that—

    • (a) Students get good guidance and counselling; and

    • (b) A student's parents are told of matters that, in the principal's opinion,—

      • (i) Are preventing or slowing the student's progress through the school; or

      • (ii) Are harming the student's relationships with teachers or other students.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 193A

77A Enrolment records
  • (1) The principal of a registered school must ensure that an enrolment record in such form and containing such information as may be specified under subsection (3) is kept for each student who is enrolled at the school.

    (2) When a student moves from one registered school to another registered school, the principal of the first school must take reasonable steps to send the student's enrolment record to the principal of the second school.

    (3) The Secretary may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, make rules setting out administrative and procedural requirements relating to enrolment records, including (without limitation) rules—

    • (a) Setting out the duties of principals concerning enrolment records and the information contained in enrolment records:

    • (b) Requiring principals to inform students and parents about enrolment records and the use and distribution of enrolment records, and specifying the particulars about which students and parents are to be informed:

    • (c) Specifying the form and content of enrolment records:

    • (d) Specifying exceptions to particular requirements of the rules.

    (4) A principal of a registered school must comply with rules for the time being in force under subsection (3).

    Section 77A was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 23 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

78 Regulations relating to control and management of schools
  • (1) Subject to the provisions of this Act and any other enactment, the Governor-General may from time to time make regulations providing for the control, management, organisation, conduct, and administration of schools.

    (2) Different provision may be made for schools of different classes or descriptions.

    (3) Regulations made under this section may give powers to, or impose duties on, Boards, principals, or both.

    (4) Regulations made under this section prescribing a course of study shall not restrict the method by or manner in which any subject forming part of the course is to be taught, except to the extent necessary to ensure that the teaching of the subject is consistent with the general aims of the course.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 ss 59, 76

78A Powers of entry and inspection
  • (1) Any person holding an authorisation under subsection (2) may, at any reasonable time,—

    • (a) Enter and inspect any registered school:

    • (b) Inspect, photocopy, print out, or copy onto disk any documents (whether held in electronic or paper form) that the person believes on reasonable grounds to be those of the Board of the school:

    • (c) Remove any document described in paragraph (b), whether in its original form or as an electronic or paper copy.

    (1A) If any original documents are removed from a school under subsection (1)(c), the person who removes the documents must—

    • (a) Leave at the school a list of the documents removed; and

    • (b) Return the documents, or a copy of them, to the school as soon as practicable unless to do so would prejudice any investigation being or to be carried out by the Ministry.

    (2) The Secretary may authorise in writing any person to exercise the powers in subsection (1).

    (3) Every written authorisation under subsection (2) of this section shall contain—

    • (a) A reference to this section; and

    • (b) The full name of the person authorised; and

    • (c) A statement of the powers conferred on that person by this section.

    (4) Every person exercising any power under subsection (1) shall possess the appropriate written authorisation , and evidence of identity, and shall produce them to the person in charge of the premises concerned (or, as the case may be, the person having possession or control of the books, records, or accounts concerned)—

    • (a) On first entering the premises; and

    • (b) Whenever subsequently reasonably required to do so by the person in charge.

    (5) For the purposes of this section, inspection, in relation to any school, includes—

    • (a) Access to the written and recorded work of students enrolled there; and

    • (b) Meeting and talking with students enrolled there.

    Section 78A was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 12(1) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Section 78A was substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 19(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Paragraph (b) of the substituted subsection (2) was repealed, as from 25 June 1993, by section 26(4)(a) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Subsection (1) was substituted, subsection (1A) was inserted, and subsection (2) was substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 24(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 25(2)(a) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the words under subsection (1) for the words of entry or inspection under this section. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 25(2)(b) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 by omitting the words (where applicable). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

78B Entry where school suspected of being unregistered
  • (1) A person who holds an authorisation under section 78A(2), and who has reasonable cause to believe that any premises are being used as a school in contravention of section 35A(12), may apply for a warrant to enter the premises.

    (2) An application for a warrant must be in writing, on oath, and be made to a District Court Judge, Justice of the Peace, or Registrar or Deputy Registrar of any Court.

    (3) A warrant may be issued on an application under subsection (1) if the person issuing it is satisfied that there is reasonable cause to believe that the premises are being used as a school in contravention of section 35A(12).

    (4) A warrant issued under subsection (3) must contain—

    • (a) A reference to this section; and

    • (b) The full name of the person authorised; and

    • (c) A description of the premises concerned; and

    • (d) The date on which it was issued and the date on which it expires.

    (5) A warrant issued under subsection (3) must authorise the person named in it, at any reasonable time within 4 weeks of the date on which it is issued, to enter and inspect the premises described in the warrant to ascertain whether those premises are being used as a school in contravention of section 35A(12).

    (6) A person acting under a warrant under subsection (3) must retain the warrant and must show it, along with evidence of identity, to the occupier of the premises concerned—

    • (a) On first entering the premises; and

    • (b) Whenever subsequently reasonably required to do so by that occupier.

    Section 78B was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 25 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

78C Police vetting of non-teaching and unregistered employees at schools
  • (1) Before appointing a person who is not a registered teacher or holder of a limited authority to teach to a position at a school, the Board of the school, or (in the case of a school registered under section 35A) the management of the school, must obtain a police vet of the person from the New Zealand Teachers Council.

    (2) The Board of every state school, and the management of every school registered under section 35A, must apply to the New Zealand Teachers Council for a police vet of every person who is employed by the Board or management but is not a registered teacher or holder of a limited authority to teach—

    • (a) within 2 weeks of first employing the person on a casual or temporary basis at the school:

    • (b) in the case of a person employed at the school when this section comes into force, as required by the Teachers Council:

    • (c) in the case of a person on whom a police vet has been conducted within the last 3 years, on or about the third anniversary of the previous police vet.

    (3) Despite subsections (1) and (2), no Board of a state school, or management of a school registered under section 35A, is obliged to seek a police vet of a person employed solely to provide classes that are usually held outside normal school hours and that are open to people not enrolled full-time at the school.

    Sections 78C to 78CB were inserted, as from 22 April 2002, by section 18 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(3)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

78CA Police vetting of contractors and their employees who work at schools
  • (1) The Board of every state school, and the management of every school registered under section 35A, must apply to the New Zealand Teachers Council for a police vet of every contractor who regularly works at the school during school hours—

    • (a) within 2 weeks of the contractor first starting to work at the school:

    • (b) in the case of a contractor working at the school when this section comes into force, as required by the Teachers Council:

    • (c) in the case of a contractor on whom a police vet has been conducted within the last 3 years, on or about the third anniversary of the previous police vet.

    (2) In this section, contractor means both—

    • (a) a person who, under contract (other than an employment contract), works at a school; and

    • (b) a person employed by a person referred to in paragraph (a) who, in the course of that employment, works at a school.

    Sections 78C to 78CB were inserted, as from 22 April 2002, by section 18 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(3)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

78CB Internal procedures relating to police vets
  • (1) In this section, requester means the Board of a state school or the management of a school registered under section 35A that has applied to the Teachers Council for a police vet of a person.

    (2) Every requester must establish internal procedures for dealing with police vets that are received as a result of a request under section 78C or section 78CA, which must, in particular,—

    • (a) identify the person or office-holder within the requester to whom police vets must be sent by the Teachers Council; and

    • (b) ensure that strict confidentiality is observed for police vets.

    (3) A requester may not take adverse action in relation to a person who is the subject of a police vet until—

    • (a) the person has validated the information contained in the vet; or

    • (b) the person has been given a reasonable opportunity to validate the information, but has failed to do so within a reasonable period.

    Sections 78C to 78CB were inserted, as from 22 April 2002, by section 18 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(3)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

78D School risk management scheme
  • (1) In this section, and in sections 78E and 78F,—

    participating school Board

    • (a) means the Board of a state school; and

    • (b) includes a commissioner appointed in place of a Board; but

    • (c) does not include a Board of a state school or a Commissioner if that party has been a participant but, with the Minister's approval, has withdrawn from and is not for the time being a participant in a school risk management scheme

    school risk management scheme means the school risk management scheme for the time being having effect under this section.

    (2) The Minister may, in accordance with this section, establish a school risk management scheme for the purpose of indemnifying participating school Boards—

    • (a) against accidental loss or damage to property of the Board:

    • (b) for any other purpose authorised by regulations made under section 78F.

    (3) An indemnity under the school risk management scheme must be given in a form and contain terms and conditions authorised by regulations made under this Act.

    (4) A participating school Board is liable to pay to the Crown the annual fee set under sections 78E.

    (5) The Minister may at any time, on giving reasonable notice to all participating school Boards, discontinue a school risk management scheme and direct the Secretary to wind up the scheme.

    (6) Until a school risk management scheme is established under subsection (2), the deed signed by the Minister on 24 December 1999 entitled Ministry of Education—Risk Management Scheme for School Contents constitutes the school risk management scheme.

    Sections 78D to 78G were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 19 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78E School risk management scheme fees
  • (1) In respect of each year in which a school risk management scheme has effect, the Minister must, by notice in the Gazette, set the amount of the annual fee payable by a participating school Board or the rate at which the amount is to be assessed.

    (2) The purpose of the annual fee is to recover the administration, insurance, and claims costs of the scheme.

    (3) The Secretary must deduct the fee from grants made to the Board under section 79.

    (4) The Secretary must establish a separate bank account for the purposes of this section, and—

    • (a) all fees deducted under subsection (3) must be paid into the account; and

    • (b) the Secretary may authorise payments to be made from the account for the purposes of administering the scheme.

    (5) If the school risk management scheme is discontinued, the money held in the separate account after the scheme has been wound up must be paid into the Crown Bank Account in accordance with any directions of the Secretary to the Treasury.

    Sections 78D to 78G were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 19 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78F Regulations relating to school risk management scheme
  • The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations for all or any of the following purposes:

    • (a) providing for the form of legal instrument by which a school risk management scheme may be established:

    • (b) defining accidental loss or damage and other terms for the purposes of the regulations and the legal instrument:

    • (c) setting out the scope of the indemnity that may be given by the Crown, including any exclusions:

    • (d) setting out the procedure for lodging claims and their determination:

    • (e) listing the kinds of costs that the Crown may deduct from money payable under the scheme to a participating school Board:

    • (f) providing for the manner in which the parties may withdraw from the scheme:

    • (g) providing for the manner in which the legal instrument may be varied, replaced, or terminated.

    Sections 78D to 78G were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 19 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78G Former school risk management schemes
  • (1) The scheme referred to in section 78D(6), and all former schemes established for similar purposes by or on behalf of the Minister in 1991 or subsequent years, must be treated as if they were authorised by this section when executed.

    (2) All levies collected from school Boards for the purposes of a scheme to which this section applies, and payments made from those fees, must be treated as having been collected or paid under the authority of this section.

    Sections 78D to 78G were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 19 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

Part 7A
Interventions in schools

  • Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78H Purpose of Part
  • The purpose of this Part is to provide for a range of interventions that may be used to address risks to the operation of individual schools or to the welfare or educational performance of their students.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78I Application of interventions
  • (1) The interventions in schools that are available are as follows:

    • (a) a requirement by the Secretary for information:

    • (b) a requirement by the Secretary for a Board to engage specialist help:

    • (c) a requirement by the Secretary for a Board to prepare and carry out an action plan:

    • (d) the appointment by the Secretary, at the direction of the Minister, of a limited statutory manager:

    • (e) the dissolution of a Board by the Minister, and the appointment of a commissioner:

    • (f) the dissolution of a Board by the Secretary, and the appointment of a commissioner.

    (2) The Minister or Secretary (as the case may be) may apply any of the interventions described in subsection (1)(b) to (e) to a school if he or she has reasonable grounds to believe that there is a risk to the operation of the school, or to the welfare or educational performance of its students.

    (3) The Minister or Secretary (as the case may be) may apply any of the interventions described in subsection (1) to a school if either of the following requests an intervention:

    • (a) the Board of the school:

    • (b) in the case of an integrated school, the school's proprietors.

    (4) When applying an intervention, the Minister or Secretary (as the case may be) must apply whichever intervention he or she considers is reasonable to deal with the risk without intervening more than necessary in the affairs of the school.

    (5) The application of any 1 intervention does not preclude the application of any other intervention, either simultaneously or at any other time.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78J Requirement to provide information
  • (1) The Secretary may, by written notice to the Board of a school, require the Board to provide specified information—

    • (a) as at a given time; or

    • (b) at specified intervals; or

    • (c) both.

    (2) The Secretary may give a notice under subsection (1) only if he or she has reasonable grounds for concern about the operation of the school, or the welfare or educational performance of its students.

    (3) A Board that receives a notice under subsection (1) must provide the Secretary with the information required—

    • (a) within or at the time or times specified in the notice; and

    • (b) in the form (if any) specified by the Secretary.

    (4) The Secretary may at any time amend or revoke a notice under subsection (1), and the amendment or revocation takes effect on the date specified in the notice.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78K Specialist help
  • (1) The Secretary may, by written notice to the Board of a school, require the Board to engage specified specialist help.

    (2) A notice given under subsection (1) must identify particular persons or organisations, or types of persons or organisations, whom the Board must engage.

    (3) A Board that receives a notice under subsection (1) must comply with the notice as soon as practicable, and must pay the fees and reasonable expenses of any person or organisations engaged to provide specialist help.

    (4) The Secretary may at any time amend or revoke a notice under subsection (1), and the amendment or revocation takes effect on the date specified in the notice.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78L Action plans
  • (1) The Secretary may, by written notice to the Board of a school, require the Board to prepare and carry out an action plan, and every such notice must specify—

    • (a) the matters that the action plan must address; and

    • (b) the outcomes sought; and

    • (c) the time within which a draft action plan must be prepared.

    (2) A Board that receives a notice under subsection (1) must comply with it by preparing a draft action plan within the time specified in the notice and presenting it to the Secretary for approval.

    (3) The Secretary may negotiate with the Board over the draft action plan in order to reach an agreed plan but, if after a reasonable period the Board and Secretary have not reached agreement over the content of the action plan, the Secretary may give notice to the Board that he or she will approve a particular version of the plan.

    (4) When the Secretary has approved an action plan, the Board—

    • (a) must implement it in accordance with its terms, unless or until the Secretary directs otherwise; and

    • (b) must make the plan available as if it were part of the school's charter.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78M Limited statutory manager
  • (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, direct the Secretary to appoint a limited statutory manager for the Board of a school.

    (2) A notice under subsection (1) must specify—

    • (a) any functions, powers, and duties of the Board (whether statutory or otherwise) that are to be vested in the limited statutory manager; and

    • (b) any matters on which the limited statutory manager may or must advise the Board; and

    • (c) any conditions attaching to the exercise of the powers by the Board or by the limited statutory manager.

    (3) Upon publication of the Gazette notice, the Secretary must, by notice to the Board,—

    • (a) appoint a person to be the limited statutory manager for the Board; and

    • (b) state the date on which the appointment takes effect.

    (4) On and from the date on which his or her appointment takes effect,—

    • (a) any functions, powers, or duties of the Board specified in a notice under subsection (1) vest in the limited statutory manager; and

    • (b) the Board must take into consideration advice given by the limited statutory manager on any matter on which he or she is obliged to give advice; and

    • (c) any conditions specified in the notice apply.

    (5) The Board must pay the fees and expenses of a limited statutory manager appointed for it.

    (6) The Minister may at any time, by notice in the Gazette, amend a notice under subsection (1), and the amendment takes effect on and from the date given in the notice.

    (7) When the Minister is satisfied that the appointment of the limited statutory manager is no longer required, he or she must revoke the notice under subsection (1), in which case the appointment terminates from the date of the revocation.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78N Dissolution of Board and appointment of commissioner
  • (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, dissolve the Board of a school and direct the Secretary to appoint a commissioner to replace that Board.

    (2) On publication of a notice under subsection (1), the Secretary must, by notice in the Gazette, appoint a commissioner for the school, and state the date on which the appointment takes effect.

    (3) The Secretary may, by notice in the Gazette, dissolve the Board of a school and appoint a commissioner it its place, as from a specified date, if any of the following applies:

    • (a) the Board has not held a meeting during the previous 3 months:

    • (b) so many casual vacancies have arisen that there is no longer any member of the Board who is eligible to preside at meetings of the Board:

    • (c) the result of an election of trustees is that the Board has fewer than 3 trustees elected by parents:

    • (d) an election of trustees has not been held as required by this Act:

    • (e) it is impossible or impracticable to discover the results of an election of trustees.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78NA No compensation for loss of office
  • (1) A trustee is not entitled to any compensation or other payment or benefit relating to his or her ceasing for any reason to hold office as a trustee.

    (2) A Board must ensure, to the extent of its powers, that each of its Crown entity subsidiaries does not pay directors of the subsidiary any compensation or other payment or benefit, on any basis, for ceasing for any reason to hold office.

    (3) However, subsections (4) and (5) apply to a person who is entitled, at the commencement of this section under any contract or arrangement, to any compensation or other payment or benefit relating to his or her ceasing for any reason to hold office.

    (4) The entitlement is not affected by the enactment of this section.

    (5) The entitlement is cancelled on the date of reappointment of the trustee or director or of the member to the committee (if any).

    Section 78NA was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

78O Commissioners
  • (1) A commissioner appointed under section 78N has all the functions, powers, and duties of the Board that he or she is appointed to replace.

    (2) Anything that, if done by or on behalf of the Board, must be done by affixing the Board's seal, or by the signature of 2 or more trustees, or both, may be done by the signature of the commissioner.

    (3) The remuneration of the commissioner must be determined by the Secretary and paid for out of funds of the Board.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78P Commissioner sets date for election of trustees
  • (1) In the case of a commissioner appointed under section 78N(2), when the Secretary is satisfied that a commissioner is no longer required for the school, the commissioner must appoint a date for the election of trustees.

    (2) In the case of a commissioner appointed under section 78N(3), when the Secretary is satisfied that an election of trustees will produce a functioning Board, the commissioner must appoint a date for the election of trustees.

    (3) A commissioner's appointment ends 7 days after the date that he or she has set for the election of trustees.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78Q Protection of limited statutory managers and commissioners
  • No limited statutory manager, and no commissioner, is personally liable for any act done or omitted by him or her, or for any loss arising out of any act done or omitted by him or her, if the act or omission was in good faith and occurred in the course of carrying out his or her functions.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78R Annual review of interventions
  • Within 1 year of the date of a notice under any of sections 78J(1), 78K(1), 78L(1), 78M(1), or 78N(1) or (3), the Secretary must review the operation of the intervention commenced by each notice, and after that must review the operation of the intervention annually.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78S Application of interventions to integrated schools
  • (1) The Secretary must, if practicable, consult with the proprietors of an integrated school before appointing a limited statutory manager or commissioner for the school, and must have regard to any recommendations made by the proprietors.

    (2) If the Secretary considers that it is not practicable to consult with the proprietors before making an appointment, the Secretary must consult with the proprietors after making the appointment and must consider whether, in light of any recommendations made by the proprietors, a different person should be appointed in place of the original appointee.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

78T Application of interventions to Kura Kaupapa Maori
  • (1) Before applying any of the interventions in this Part to a Kura Kaupapa Maori, the Secretary must consult with te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua (as defined in section 155B).

    (2) Subsection (1) applies only to Kura Kaupapa Maori that are required by their charters to operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua.

    Part 7A (comprising sections 78H to 78T) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 20 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

Part 8
Financial

79 Grants for Boards
  • (1) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, in each financial year, a Board shall be paid, out of public money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose, such grants, and supplementary grants of such amounts, as the Minister determines.

    (2) In determining the amount of any grant, the Minister shall take no account of foreign students (other than students exempted under section 4A(1) of this Act) enrolled or likely to be enrolled at any school or institution the Board concerned administers.

    (3) A supplementary grant is paid subject to the condition that it will be used for the purposes set out in the grant, and a Board that receives a supplementary grant must use it for those purposes only.

    Subsection (3) was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 13(1) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Section 79 was substituted, and sections 80 and 81 were repealed, as from 8 August 1991, by section 5(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (No 2) (1991 No 90).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 21(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by inserting, after the word grants, the words and supplementary grants. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (3) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 21(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

80 No transfer between grants
  • [Repealed]

    Section 79 was substituted, and sections 80 and 81 were repealed, as from 8 August 1991, by section 5(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

81 Payment of teacher salaries from sources other than grants
  • [Repealed]

    Subsection (2) was substituted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 13(2) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Section 79 was substituted, and sections 80 and 81 were repealed, as from 8 August 1991, by section 5(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

81A Grants for correspondence schools
  • Notwithstanding sections 79 to 81 of this Act,—

    • (a) The Board of a correspondence school shall in each financial year be paid, out of money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose, a single grant of an amount determined by the Minister:

    • (b) Any part of such a grant may be used for the payment of teacher salaries:

    • (c) The Board shall not out of money that is not part of such a grant pay any part (or all) of a teacher's salary, or pay to the Crown any part (or all) of a teacher's salary paid by the Crown, except—

      • (i) With the Minister's consent; and

      • (ii) In accordance with any conditions subject to which the consent was given:

    • (d) The Minister shall withhold consent under paragraph (c) of this section unless satisfied that special circumstances applying to the school make it inappropriate for the Minister to do so.

    Section 81A was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 20 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

81B Management of financial management system
  • [Repealed]

    Section 81B was inserted, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

    Paragraph (a) was substituted, as from 1 October 1996, by section 23 Institute of Chartered Accountants of New Zealand Act 1996 (1996 No 39).

    Section 81B was repealed, as from 25 October 2001, by section 22 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

82 Annual financial statements
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 82 to 86 were repealed, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

83 Responsibility for financial statements
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 82 to 86 were repealed, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

84 Audit report on financial statements
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 82 to 86 were repealed, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

85 Financial statements to be included in annual report
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 82 to 86 were repealed, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

86 Financial year
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 82 to 86 were repealed, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

87 Annual reports
  • (1) As soon as is practicable after the end of every financial year, and in any event no later than a day fixed by the Secretary, every Board shall give the Secretary an annual report in accordance with this section.

    (2) A report given under subsection (1) must include—

    • (a) the names of all the Board's elected trustees, appointed trustees, and co-opted trustees; and

    • (b) the date on which each trustee goes out of office; and

    • (c) the auditor's report in accordance with section 87A; and

    • (ca) in respect of the Board or, in the case of a Crown entity group, for each Crown entity in the group,—

      • (i) the total value of the remuneration (other than compensation and other benefits referred to in subparagraph (v)) paid or payable to the trustees in their capacity as trustees from the Board (or entities in the group, as the case may be), during that financial year; and

      • (ii) the total value of the remuneration (other than compensation, and other benefits referred to in subparagraph (v)) paid or payable to the committee members in their capacity as committee members from the Board (or entities in the group, as the case may be) during that financial year (except that this paragraph does not apply to trustees whose remuneration is disclosed under subparagraph (i)); and

      • (iii) the number of employees (other than principals of the school) to whom, during the financial year, remuneration (other than compensation and other benefits referred to in subparagraph (v)) was paid or payable in their capacity as employees, the total value of which is or exceeds $100,000 per annum, and the number of those employees in brackets of $10,000; and

      • (iv) a report, presented in the manner required by the Minister by notice in the Gazette, on the total remuneration (including benefits, any compensation, ex gratia payments, any other payments, and any other consideration paid or payable in the school principal's capacity as an employee) paid to a principal of the school; and

      • (v) the total value of any compensation or other benefits paid or payable to persons who ceased to be trustees, committee members, or employees during the financial year in relation to that cessation and the number of persons to whom all or part of that total was payable; and.

    • (d) the Board's annual financial statements; and

    • (e) a statement in which schools provide an analysis of any variance between the school's performance and the relevant aims, objectives, directions, priorities, or targets set out in the school charter:

    (3) The annual financial statements must be prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice, audited as required by section 87A, and include all of the following:

    • (a) a statement of the financial position of the Board as at its balance date:

    • (b) a statement of financial performance reflecting the revenue and expenses of the Board for the financial year:

    • (c) if required by generally accepted accounting practice, a statement of cash flows reflecting cash flows of the Board for the financial year:

    • (d) a statement of the commitments of the Board as at the balance date:

    • (e) a statement of the contingent liabilities of the Board as at the balance date:

    • (f) a statement of accounting policies:

    • (g) such other statements as are necessary to fairly reflect the financial operations of the Board for the financial year and its financial position at the end of the financial year:

    • (h) any other statements that the Secretary determines in consultation with the Auditor-General:

    • (i) in relation to each statement required by paragraphs (a) to (c) and, if appropriate, by paragraph (g), budgeted figures for the financial year:

    • (j) in relation to each statement required by paragraphs (a) to (c), paragraph (d), and paragraph (e) and, if appropriate, by paragraph (g), comparative actual figures for the previous financial year.

    (3A) In addition, a Board that is a parent in a Crown entity group must, to the extent required to do so by generally accepted accounting practice, prepare consolidated financial statements in relation to the group for that financial year.

    (4) The annual financial statements must be accompanied by a statement of responsibility that complies with section 155 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 but that is signed by the chair of the Board and principal instead of 2 members.

    (5) In subsection (2), trustee and employee include a person who was a trustee or employee at any time during the applicable financial year but who is no longer a trustee or employee.

    (6) The requirements of this section and section 87A as to annual financial statements also apply to a Crown entity subsidiary of a Board as if the subsidiary were a Board and with all necessary modifications.

    (7) Subsection (2)(ca)(iv) and (v) applies in respect of each financial year that ends on or after 31 December 2004.

    (8) The rest of the amendments made to this section by Schedule 6 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply as provided in section 198 of that Act.

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 22(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words an annual report in accordance with this section for the words a report on its operations for the year. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (2) was inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 6 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

    Subsection (2)(b) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 23(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by adding the word and. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (2)(c) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 23(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (2)(c) was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (2)(ca) was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (2)(d) and (2)(e) were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 23(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (3) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 23(3) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by substituting the expression section 87A for the words section 41(3) of the Public Finance Act 1989.

    Subsection (3A) was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (4) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 23(3) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (4) was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsections (5) to (8) were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

87A Audit
  • (1) Each Board must submit its annual financial statements to the Auditor-General within 90 days after the end of each financial year.

    (2) The Auditor-General must audit the financial statements and provide an audit report on them to the Board.

    Sections 87A to 87C were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

87B Report on performance of schools' sector
  • (1) The Minister of Education must in each year, not later than 30 September, prepare and present to the House of Representatives a report on the performance of the schools' sector in the immediately preceding financial year ending on 31 December.

    (2) The report must include information on—

    • (a) the performance of the schools' sector in the supply of outputs:

    • (b) the management performance in the schools' sector, including the quality of the management systems and practices in the schools' sector and the management of all the assets used in the schools' sector:

    • (c) the effectiveness of the schools' sector in terms of educational achievement.

    (3) The report—

    • (a) must relate to all of the schools owned by the Crown; and

    • (b) may relate to other schools.

    Sections 87A to 87C were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

87C Annual financial statements of Boards
  • (1) A Board must provide its audited annual financial statements to the Secretary no later than 31 May in the year after the previous financial year.

    (2) The Minister must in each year send to each member of Parliament copies of the statements provided to the Secretary under subsection (1) by the Boards in respect of schools situated in the member's electoral district.

    (3) Those copies must be sent no later than 1 month after the date on which the statements were provided to the Secretary.

    Sections 87A to 87C were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

88 Payment of travel costs and attendance fees
  • (1) The Minister may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, fix a scale of maximum fees and payments to be made to trustees.

    (2) Subject to subsection (3) of this section, every trustee may be paid, out of the Board's funds and in accordance with the scale, travel costs and attendance fees fixed by the Board.

    (3) In determining the attendance fees paid to trustees, a Board shall have regard both to loss of income and to the cost of child care.

88A Rent for teachers' residences
  • (1) A teacher who is provided with a teacher's residence in respect of his or her teaching position must pay rent in accordance with a scheme prescribed by the Minister and notified in the Gazette.

    (2) Until a rental scheme under subsection (1) takes effect, rents for teachers' residences must be determined in accordance with the scheme operating immediately before subsection (1) comes into force.

    Section 88A was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 9 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

89 Payroll service
  • (1) The Secretary shall ensure that there are established and maintained, within or on behalf of the Ministry, staff and facilities for, and sufficient for, servicing the payrolls of Boards (in this section referred to as the payroll service).

    (2) Unless authorised by the Secretary not to do so, every Board shall use the payroll service for the calculation and payment of the salaries and wages of all employees of the Board who are in the Education Service (within the meaning of the State Sector Act 1988).

    (3) Every Board required by subsection (2) of this section to use the payroll service shall keep all records, and give the Secretary all information, necessary to enable it to do so.

90 Application of Public Finance Act 1989
  • [Repealed]

    Section 90 was amended, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142) by substituting the words Crown entity for the words local authority.

    Section 90 was repealed, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

91 Transitional funding arrangements for teacher salaries
  • [Repealed]

    Section 91 was repealed, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(4)(a) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

Part 8A
Payment of teacher salaries

  • Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

91A Interpretation
  • (1) In this Part of this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Application period means the period commencing on the commencement of the Education Amendment Act 1992, and ending with the 31st day of December 1994 (as from time to time extended under section 91M(1) of this Act)

    Board means a Board of trustees constituted under Part 9 of this Act; and, in relation to a school, means the school's Board

    Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part of this Act

    Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part of this Act

    Payrolled school means a school to which section 91C of this Act applies

    Regular teacher means a teacher who is not a relieving teacher

    Relieving teacher, at any time, means a teacher employed at that time by a Board to undertake some or all of the duties of a regular teacher who, at that time, is absent from work but remains employed (on salary) by the Board

    School means an institution that is—

    • (a) A state school within the meaning of section 2 of this Act; or

    • (b) A special institution within the meaning of section 92 of this Act:

    Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry

    Teacher includes the principal of a school, and any deputy or associate principal (however described) of a school.

    (2) [Repealed]

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

    Subsection (2) was repealed, as from 15 July 1998, by section 2(2)(a) Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

91B Application
  • Section 91C of this Act applies to every school other than—

    • (a) A school established under section 152 of this Act as a correspondence school:

    • (b) [Repealed]

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

    Paragraph (b) was repealed, as from 8 July 2000, by section 7 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Payment of salaries

91C Salaries of teachers at certain schools to be paid by the Crown
  • Notwithstanding anything in Part 8 of this Act, the Secretary shall cause to be paid out of public money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose the salaries (in respect of employment during the application period) of all regular teachers employed at payrolled schools.

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

    Section 91C was amended, as from 15 July 1998, by section 2(2)(b) Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21) by omitting the words but subject to section 91E of this Act,.

91D Agreements to move from central payment of teacher salaries
  • [Repealed]

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

    Section 91D was repealed, as from 8 July 2000, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). See section 29 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to bulk funding agreements. See section 30 of that Act as to the Crown providing financial assistance to schools that are unable to meet their liabilities under employment contracts.

91E Payment of salaries of certain teachers out of grants
  • [Repealed]

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

    Section 91E was repealed, as from 15 July 1998, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

91F Restrictions on payment of salaries of regular teachers by Boards of payrolled schools
  • No Board shall pay all or any part of the salary of a regular teacher in respect of employment during the application period at a payrolled school it administers unless—

    • (a) [Repealed]

    • (b) The Minister has consented to the payment, and the Board complies with any conditions subject to which the consent was given.

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

    Paragraph (a) was repealed, as from 15 July 1998, by section 2(2)(c) Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

91G Relieving teachers
  • (1) Except as provided in subsection (3) of this section, Boards shall pay the salaries of relieving teachers employed at schools they administer.

    (2) The Governor-General may from time to time, by Order in Council, declare any circumstances to be circumstances in which the employment of a relieving teacher justifies the central payment of the teacher's salary, either—

    • (a) Immediately; or

    • (b) After employment for an initial period (specified in the order) of consecutive school days on which the school at which the teacher is employed is open for instruction.

    (3) The Secretary shall cause a relieving teacher's salary to be paid out of public money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose if (and only if), by virtue of an order under subsection (2) of this section, the employment to which the payment relates justifies the central payment of the salary.

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

Limitations on staffing

91H Limitations on appointment and employment of regular teachers at payrolled schools
  • (1) For the purpose of limiting the financial liability of the Crown arising out of its obligation under section 91C of this Act to pay the salaries of all regular teachers employed at payrolled schools, the Governor-General shall in every year, by Order in Council, prescribe limitations on the number of regular teachers who may be employed at payrolled schools during the next year—

    (2) An order under subsection (1) may do any 1 or more of the following:

    • (a) apply different limitations to different types of school, or to particular schools:

    • (b) impose limitations on the numbers of particular types of teachers who may be employed:

    • (c) set out 1 or more mechanisms by which the applicable limitations are calculated:

    • (d) specify circumstances in which the Secretary may exempt any school or type of school from a limitation, and any conditions applying to such an exemption.

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 9(1) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by substituting the words limitations on the number of regular teachers who may be employed at payrolled schools during the next year for all the words after the word prescribe.

    Subsection (2) was substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 9(2) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

91I Secretary may grant exemptions in individual cases
  • The Secretary may, in the circumstances and in accordance with any conditions specified in an order under section 91H(1) of this Act, by written notice to a Board—

    • (a) Exempt the Board, to any extent specified in the notice, from any limitation prescribed by the order in relation to a school the Board administers; or

    • (b) Amend or revoke any notice under this section;—

    and the Board may appoint and employ teachers at the school accordingly.

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

    Section 91I was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 10 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by substituting the words in the circumstances and in accordance with any conditions for the words in accordance with criteria.

91J Boards to comply with limitations
  • Subject to section 91I of this Act, the Board of a school in relation to which a limitation is prescribed by an order under section 91H(1) of this Act shall ensure that the appointment and employment of teachers at the school is at all times during the application period in accordance with the limitation.

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

91K Reduction in grants where limitations not complied with
  • In determining for the purposes of section 79 of this Act the amount of any grant payable to a Board in respect of a school, the Minister—

    • (a) Shall have regard to the extent to which the Secretary has (by virtue of this Part of this Act) caused to be paid to teachers employed at the school salaries greater in total than the salaries that would have been payable if the Board had complied with sections 91G(1), 91J, and 91L(1) of this Act; and

    • (b) May, after consulting the Board, determine for the grant an amount that is (to that extent or some lesser extent) less than it would otherwise have been.

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

91L Staffing levels for 1992
  • (1) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, the Board of a payrolled school shall ensure that at all times before the 1st day of January 1993 there are not employed at the school more regular teachers of any grade than the number of regular teachers of that grade employed there at the close of the 18th day of November 1992.

    (2) The Secretary may, by written notice to a payrolled school's Board, authorise an increase in the number of regular teachers of any grade to be employed at the school in 1992; and teachers may be employed at the school accordingly.

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

Application period may be extended

91M Application period may be extended
  • (1) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, the Governor-General may from time to time, by Order in Council, extend the application period to a day specified in the order.

    (2) No order shall be made under subsection (1) of this section after the application period (as from time to time extended) has expired.

    Part 8A, comprising sections 91A to 91M, was inserted, as from 7 December 1992, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 107).

91N Power of Secretary to employ teachers
  • (1) The Secretary may, in his or her discretion, employ any person to work in a school as a teacher.

    (2) In applying any Order in Council under this Part limiting the number of teachers who may be employed at a school, teachers employed under this section are not to be counted.

    (3) The provisions of Parts 10 and 10A apply in relation to persons employed as teachers under this section as if the Secretary were a school Board and with any other necessary modifications.

    Section 91N was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 24 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

Part 9
School boards

92 Interpretation
  • (1) In this Part of this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Adult student means a student who has turned 20

    Board means a Board of Trustees constituted under this Part of this Act; and—

    • (a) In relation to a school or institution, means the Board of the school or institution; and

    • (b) In relation to a trustee, means the Board of which the trustee is a member:

    Board staff, in relation to a Board on any day, means the people who, on the day, are not students enrolled full-time at a school or institution administered by the Board, and who—

    • (a) On the day have taken up a permanent appointment to a position in the employment of the Board, or a position (at a school or institution administered by the Board) in the employment of a body established under this Act or the Education Act 1964, or of the Secretary; or

    • (b) During the period of 2 months ending with that day, have been continuously employed in one or more such positions:

    Casual vacancy means a vacancy in the membership of a Board arising under section 104 of this Act

    Combined Board means a Board that administers more than one school or institution

    Commissioner means a person for the time being appointed under this Act or the School Trustees Act 1989 to act in place of a Board; and, in relation to a Board, means a commissioner appointed to act in its place

    Composite school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) of this Act

    Composite school: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(3) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Correspondence school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) of this Act

    Correspondence school: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(3) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Election year means a year divisible by 3

    Household does not include hostel

    Immediate caregiver, subject to subsection (3) of this section,—

    • (a) In relation to a student who usually lives in a household that includes the student's father or mother but not both, but also includes the spouse or partner of the father or mother, means the spouse or partner; and

    • (b) In relation to a student who usually lives in a household that includes the student's father or mother and no spouse or partner of the father or mother, but also includes a person who has turned 20 and has a day to day responsibility for the student clearly greater than that of any other person, means that person; and

    • (c) In relation to a student who usually lives in a household that does not include the student's father or the student's mother, means any member of the household who has turned 20 and has a day to day responsibility for the student clearly greater than that of any other person:

    immediate caregiver: this definition was amended, as from 26 April 2005, by section 7 Relationships (Statutory References) Act 2005 (2005 No 3) by inserting the words or partner after the word spouse wherever it appears.

    Institution,—

    • (a) In relation to a lone Board that administers a special institution, means that institution; and

    • (b) In relation to a combined Board that administers special institutions, means those institutions or any of them; and

    • (c) In relation to a trustee of a lone Board that administers a special institution, means that institution; and

    • (d) In relation to a trustee of a combined Board that administers special institutions, means those institutions or any of them:

    Integrated, in relation to a school, or a school of a particular class, means for the time being established as an integrated school, or integrated school of that class, under the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975

    Intermediate school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) of this Act

    Intermediate school: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(3) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Lone Board means a Board that administers only one school or institution

    Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part of this Act

    Minister: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(4) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part of this Act

    Ministry: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(4) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Parent, in relation to any person, means a person who is the person's father, mother, guardian, or immediate caregiver

    partner, in the phrase spouse or partner and in related contexts, means civil union partner or de facto partner.

    partner: this definition was inserted, as from 26 April 2005, by section 7 Relationships (Statutory References) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).

    Primary school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) of this Act

    Primary school: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(3) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Principal, in relation to a school or institution, means the principal or other chief executive of the school or institution; and except in section 94(c) of this Act includes an acting principal

    Review Office means the Education Review Office

    Secondary school has the same meaning as in section 145(1) of this Act

    Secondary school: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(3) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry

    Secretary: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(4) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Special institution means an institution that is—

    • (a) For the time being specified in Schedule 5 to this Act; or

    • (b) A correspondence school; or

    Special institution: paragraph (c) of this definition was amended, as from 1 October 1999, by section 13 Department of Child, Youth and Family Services Act 1999 (1999 No 82) by substituting the words chief executive of the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Children, Young Persons, and Their Families Act 1989 for the words Director of Social Welfare.

    Special institution: paragraph (c) of this definition was amended, as from 1 October 2002, by section 58(1) Health and Disability Services (Safety) Act 2001 (2001 No 93) by substituting the words a hospital care institution within the meaning of section 58(4) of the Health and Disability Services (Safety) Act 2001 for the words or a hospital (within the meaning of section 2 of the Hospitals Act 1957, section 2 of the mental Health Act 1969, or section 2 of the Area Health Boards Act 1983). See section 11 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Spouse

    [Repealed]

    Spouse: this definition was repealed, as from 26 April 2005, by section 7 Relationships (Statutory References) Act 2005 (2005 No 3).

    State school means an institution that is a primary school, a composite school, or a secondary school; and—

    • (a) In relation to a lone Board that administers a school, means that school; and

    • (b) In relation to a combined Board that administers schools, means those schools or any of them; and

    • (c) In relation to a trustee of a lone Board that administers a school, means that school; and

    • (d) In relation to a trustee of a combined Board that administers schools, means those schools or any of them:

    Trustee means a member of a Board; and, in relation to a Board, a school, or an institution, means a member of the Board, or the Board of the school or institution.

    (2) [Repealed]

    (3) Notwithstanding subsection (1) of this section, for the purposes of this Part of this Act, a student who—

    • (a) Usually lives in a household that includes the student's father and mother; or

    • (b) Usually spends approximately equal time in 2 or more households; or

    • (c) Does not usually live in a household,—

    has no immediate caregiver.

    (4) The Governor-General may from time to time, by Order in Council, amend Schedule 5 to this Act by—

    • (a) Adding the name of an institution to it; or

    • (b) Omitting the name of an institution from it; or

    • (c) Substituting for the name of an institution any different name.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 2

    Subsection (2) was repealed, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(5)(g) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

93 Schools and special institutions to have Boards of Trustees
  • (1) Except as provided in this Act, there shall be one Board of Trustees for every state school.

    (2) Whether or not it is a state school, every special institution shall have one Board of Trustees.

    (3) Notwithstanding subsections (1) and (2) of this section, a school or institution does not have to have a Board of Trustees while a commissioner holds office to act in place of its Board of Trustees.

    (4) Every Board of Trustees constituted under the School Trustees Act 1989 shall be deemed to have been constituted under this Act too.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 4

94 Constitution of Boards of state schools
  • (1) Subject to sections 94A, 94B, 94C, and 95(1) of this Act, the Board of a state school shall comprise—

    • (a) No more than 7 and no fewer than 3 parent representatives; and

    • (b) the principal of the school or, in the case of a combined Board, the principals of the schools administered by the Board; and

    • (c) Except where the principal is the only member of the school staff, one staff representative; and

    • (d) A number (determined by the Board) of trustees either—

      • (i) Co-opted by the Board; or

      • (ii) Appointed by bodies corporate approved by the Board for the purpose; and

    • (e) In the case of a Board that administers any integrated school, not more than 4 trustees appointed by the school's proprietors; and

    • (f) In the case of a Board that administers a school where students are enrolled full-time in classes above form III, one student representative.

    (2) Notwithstanding subsection (1) of this section, but subject to section 95(1) of this Act, except to the extent that a Board has decided otherwise, it shall have—

    • (a) 6 parent representatives, in the case of a Board that administers more than 2 schools; and

    • (b) 5 parent representatives, in every other case.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 5

    Section 94 was substituted and sections 94A to 94C were inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 13 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (1)(b) was substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 11 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

94A Proprietors of integrated schools may vary number of trustees they appoint
  • (1) Notwithstanding section 94(1) of this Act, except as provided in this section, a Board that administers any integrated school shall have 4 trustees appointed by the school's proprietors.

    (2) The proprietors of an integrated school may, by written notice to the Board, consent to a reduction in the number of trustees the proprietors are entitled to appoint to the Board.

    (3) Every notice under subsection (2) of this section shall either—

    • (a) Specify that it is to take effect on the occurrence of the earlier of the following events:

      • (i) The going out of office under section 102(8) of this Act of trustees of the Board:

      • (ii) The appointment under section 78N(2) of a commissioner to act in the Board's place; or

    • (b) Specify a day on which it is to take effect, and contain the dismissal (with effect on that day) of enough trustees appointed by the proprietors to give effect to the reduction consented to.

    (4) The proprietors of an integrated school may, by written notice to the Board, require an increase (to no more than 4) in the number of trustees the proprietors are entitled to appoint to the Board;.

    (5) A notice under subsection (4) of this section shall take effect on the occurrence of the earlier of the following events:

    • (a) The going out of office under section 102(8) of this Act of trustees of the Board:

    • (b) The appointment under section 78N(2) of a commissioner to act in the Board's place.

    Section 94 was substituted and sections 94A to 94C inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 13 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 26(a) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by omitting the words ; and, subject to subsections (3) and (4) of this section, every notice shall have effect according to its tenor. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (3)(a)(ii) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the expression section 78N(2) for the words section 107 of this Act. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 26(b) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by omitting the words ; and, subject to subsection (5) of this section, every notice shall have effect according to its tenor. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (5)(b) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the expression section 78N(2) for the words section 107 of this Act. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

94B Boards may alter their own constitutions
  • (1) A Board may from time to time, in accordance with this section, decide—

    • (a) To increase to no more than 7 the number of trustees who are parent representatives:

    • (b) To decrease to no fewer than 3 the number of trustees who are parent representatives:

    • (c) To approve a body corporate for the purpose of appointing a specified number of trustees to the Board:

    • (d) To modify an approval under paragraph (c) of this subsection by increasing the number of trustees a body corporate may appoint to the Board:

    • (e) In its absolute discretion, and without giving reasons, to modify an approval under paragraph (c) of this subsection by reducing the number of trustees a body corporate may appoint to the Board:

    • (f) In its absolute discretion, and without giving reasons, to withdraw an approval under paragraph (c) of this subsection:

    • (g) [Repealed]

    • (h) [Repealed]

    (2) Every decision under subsection (1) of this section shall be made by the Board by resolution passed at a meeting of the Board open to all parents of students enrolled at the school or schools administered by the Board.

    (3) Before making a decision under subsection (1) of this section, a Board shall take reasonable steps to ensure that the parents of students enrolled at the school or schools administered by the Board have reasonable notice of—

    • (a) The time, day, and place of the meeting of the Board at which the decision is to be made; and

    • (b) The nature of the decision; and

    • (c) The fact that they have a right to attend the meeting.

    (4) Where a Board decides to decrease the number of trustees who are parent representatives,—

    • (a) No parent representative shall go out of office; but

    • (b) No casual vacancy for a parent representative shall be filled unless the occurrence of the vacancy has reduced the number of parent representatives on the Board to fewer than the decreased number decided by the Board.

    (5) Where a Board decides to decrease the number of trustees who are parent representatives to a number that is not more than the total number of—

    • (a) Co-opted trustees for the time being holding office; and

    • (b) Trustees capable of being appointed pursuant to approvals under subsection (1)(c) of this section,—

    all co-opted trustees shall then go out of office as if they had resigned.

    (6) If, when any co-opted trustees have gone out of office under subsection (5) of this section the number of trustees on the Board concerned who are parent representatives is not more than the number of trustees capable of being appointed pursuant to approvals under subsection (1)(c) of this section,—

    • (a) The approvals under subsection (1)(c) of this section of the organisations by whom they may be appointed shall, starting with the most recent and continuing successively to the least recent, be deemed to have been withdrawn; and

    • (b) All trustees appointed by an organisation whose approval has been deemed to have been withdrawn shall then go out of office as if they had resigned,—

    until the number of trustees who are parent representatives is more than the number of trustees capable of being appointed pursuant to approvals under subsection (1)(c) of this section.

    (7) [Repealed]

    (8) Every vacancy on a Board caused by a decision to increase the number of members who are parent representatives shall be filled by election under section 105 of this Act as if it is a casual vacancy; but is not capable of being filled by selection.

    (9) A Board that makes a decision under subsection (1) of this section shall ensure that, as soon as is practicable after making it, the Secretary is given written notice of the nature of the decision and the day on which it was made.

    Section 94 was substituted and sections 94A to 94C inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 13 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (1)(g) was repealed, as from 8 July 2000, by section 12(1) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

    Subsection (1)(h) was repealed, as from 8 July 2000, by section 12(2) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

    Subsection (7) was repealed, as from 8 July 2000, by section 12(1) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

    Subsection (8) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 12(3) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by omitting the words to have a member who is a student representative or.

    Subsection (8) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 15(5) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the word selection for the word appointment.

94C Limitations on co-option and appointment of trustees
  • (1) [Repealed]

    (2) No Board shall co-opt a trustee if the effect of the co-option would be that the Board did not have more parent representatives than the total number of trustees co-opted by the Board or appointed.

    (3) No Board shall—

    • (a) Approve a body corporate for the purpose of appointing a specified number of trustees to the Board; or

    • (b) Modify an approval under section 94B(1)(a) of this Act by increasing the number of trustees a body corporate may appoint to the Board,—

    if the effect of the appointment of the maximum number of trustees under such approvals would be that the Board could have a number of parent representatives that was not greater than the total number of trustees co-opted by the Board or appointed.

    (4) No more than one non-permanently appointed member of the Board staff may be co-opted on to the Board at any one time.

    Section 94 was substituted and sections 94A to 94C inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 13 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (1) was repealed, as from 17 May 2006, by section 10(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsections (2) and (3) were amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 10(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by omitting the words (otherwise than to a casual vacancy for a parent representative).

    Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (4) was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 10(3) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

95 Boards of correspondence schools and certain other educational institutions
  • (1) The composition of the Board of a special institution shall be determined by the Minister by notice in the Gazette.

    (2) A notice under subsection (1) of this section—

    • (a) May apply to a specified institution or institutions, or to institutions of a specified class or description:

    • (b) Subject to subsection (3) of this section, may revoke or amend any other such notice.

    (3) No trustee shall go out of office by reason only of the amendment or revocation of a notice under subsection (1) of this section.

    (4) One Board may administer a number of special institutions.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 6

96 Parent representatives
  • (1) The parent representatives on the lone Board of an intermediate school shall be elected by people who are—

    • (a) Parents of students (other than adult students)—

      • (i) Enrolled full-time at the school when the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes; or

      • (ii) Likely to be enrolled full-time at the school in the year after the year the election is held; or

    • (b) Adult students (other than adult students who are also parents of students so enrolled) enrolled full-time at the school when the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes

    (2) The parent representatives on the lone Board of any other state school shall be elected by people who are—

    • (a) Parents of students (other than adult students) enrolled full-time at the school when the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes; or

    • (b) Adult students (other than adult students who are also parents of students so enrolled) enrolled full-time at the school when the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes

    (3) The parent representatives on the combined Board of 2 or more state schools shall be elected by people who are—

    • (a) Parents of students (other than adult students) enrolled full-time at a school that the Board administers when the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes; or

    • (b) Parents of students (other than adult students) likely to be enrolled full-time at an intermediate school that the Board administers in the year after the year the election is held; or

    • (c) Adult students (other than adult students who are also parents of students so enrolled) enrolled full-time at a school administered by the Board when the roll for the election closes

    Subsections (1), (2) and (3) were amended, as from 1 January 1992, by section 14(a) and (b) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by inserting the words elected by and by omitting the words elected from among themselves, respectively.

97 Staff and student representatives
  • (1) A staff representative on a Board shall be a person (other than the principal) who, on the day on which the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes, is a member of the Board staff, elected by people (other than principals) who are members of the Board staff on that day.

    (2) A student representative on a Board shall be a person who, on the day on which the roll for the election (or, where there is a supplementary roll, the supplementary roll) closes, is a student (other than an adult student) enrolled full-time in a class in form III or above at a school or institution administered by the Board, elected by students (other than adult students) enrolled full-time in a class in form III or above at a school or institution administered by the Board.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 5(4), (6)

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 13 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by substituting the words in form III or above for the words above form III.

98 Boards of newly established schools
  • (1) Notwithstanding section 94 of this Act, until a newly established state school is opened and the members described in paragraphs (a), (c), and (f) of that section have been elected, its members shall be—

    • (a) At the option of the Minister, either—

      • (i) 5 people appointed by the Minister; or

      • (ii) 5 people elected by parents of students (other than adult students) likely to be enrolled at the school in the year it opens or the next year; and

    • (b) The principal or principal designate (if any); and

    • (c) Not more than 4 persons co-opted by the Board.

    (2) Any trustee appointed, elected, or co-opted under subsection (1) of this section,—

    • (a) Goes out of office at the close of the day before the day on which the trustees who have been elected under section 101 take office under section 102; but

    • (b) Shall (subject to section 103 of this Act) be eligible to be appointed, elected, or co-opted as a trustee.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 7

    Subsection (2)(a) was substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 27 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

99 Criteria for selecting co-opted and appointed trustees
  • (1) It is desirable, so far as is reasonably practicable,—

    • (a) That every Board should reflect—

      • (i) The ethnic and socio-economic diversity of the student body of the school or institution; and

      • (ii) The fact that approximately half the population of New Zealand is male and half female; and

      • (iii) The character of the school or schools, or institution, it administers; and

      • (iv) The character of the community (whether geographical or otherwise) served by the school or schools, or institution, it administers; and

    • (b) That every Board should have available from within its membership expertise and experience in management.

    (2) A Board or person, when co-opting or appointing trustees, shall have regard to subsection (1) of this section.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 9

    Subsection (1) was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 15 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

100 Availability of annual report
  • At the same time as a Board gives the Secretary the annual report as required by section 87, the Board must—

    • (a) give notice to the school community, by whatever means the Board considers will be most effective, of where and when a copy of the annual report is available for inspection; and

    • (b) ensure that a copy of the annual report is available for inspection at the school by members of the public during school opening hours.

    Section 100 was substituted, as from 1 January 1993, by section 16(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (1)(a) was substituted, as from 15 December 1994, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148).

    Subsection (2) was inserted, as from 15 December 1994, by section 2(2) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by substituting the expression section 87(3) for the words Part 5 of the Public Finance Act 1989.

    Section 100 was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 11(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

101 Elections of trustees
  • (1) Before 1 September in every year, the Board of a state school or of a special institution, that is required to have a student representative, must fix a day in September in that year for the holding of an election for a student representative.

    (2) The Board of a school or institution to which subsection (1) applies must hold an election of any student representative on the day fixed for that purpose under subsection (1).

    (3) Subject to subsection (5) of this section, in every election year a Board shall hold one or more elections of other elected trustees.

    (4) Elections under subsection (3) must be held,—

    • (a) in the case of a school that is not a correspondence school, on the second Tuesday in May, unless the Board, before 1 February in that year, fixes an earlier date for the election (being a date after 1 February); and

    • (b) in the case of a correspondence school, on the second Tuesday in July, unless the Board, before 1 April in that year, fixes an earlier date for the election (being a date after 1 April).

    (5) If—

    • (a) The first elections of trustees for the Board of a school established or integrated after the commencement of this section; or

    • (b) Elections under section 78P

    are held after the 31st day of October in the year before an election year and before the 31st day of December in the election year, the Board shall not hold an election (or, as the case requires, another election) under subsection (3) of this section in the election year.

    (6) Notwithstanding anything in sections 94 to 98 of this Act, where there are to be held (pursuant to subsection (3) of this section or section 78P, or in respect of a newly established or integrated school or institution) both—

    • (a) An election of one or more parent representatives on a Board; and

    • (b) An election of one or more staff representatives on the Board,—

    no person may both stand or vote in one of the elections and stand or vote in the other.

    (7) Subject to subsection (8) of this section, the first elections for and first meetings of Boards of schools and institutions established or integrated after the commencement of this Act shall be held on days fixed by the Minister by notice in the Gazette.

    (8) The days fixed by the Minister under subsection (7) of this section for the first elections for and first meeting of the Board of a school integrated after the commencement of this Act shall be days before the day on which the integration of the school takes effect.

    (9) The first elections (if any) for and first meeting of the Board of a special institution (being a special institution that was established before the commencement of this section but that had not had a first election or meeting before that commencement) shall be held on a day or days specified by the Minister by notice in the Gazette.

    (10) This section is subject to section 101A (which provides for the election of some parent representatives at the mid-point of an election cycle under this section).

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 11

    Subsections (1) and (2) were substituted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 14(1) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

    Subsection (4) was substituted, as from 1 January 1993, by section 17(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (4) was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 12 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsections (5)(b) and (6) were amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the expression section 78P for the words section 109(5) of this Act. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (10) was inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 14(2) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

101A Staggered elections for parent representatives
  • (1) This section and section 101B apply to the election of trustees who are parent representatives.

    (2) A Board may decide, in accordance with this section, to adopt a staggered election cycle in which half the number of its parent representatives are elected at an election held at a mid-term election, and the remainder are elected at an election held in an election year.

    (3) For the purposes of subsection (2), if there is an odd number of parent representatives on the Board, half the number of its parent representatives means the highest whole number less than half the total number of parent representatives.

    (4) A Board that has decided to adopt a staggered election cycle must—

    • (a) hold a mid-term election in the month that is 18 months after the month in which the election in the preceding election year was held; and

    • (b) conduct every mid-term election in accordance with the provisions of this Part and any regulations under this Act relating to the election of trustees (modified as necessary to give effect to this section and section 101B).

    (5) If the Board's decision under subsection (2) is made at a time when the next election due to be held is in an election year, the Board must ensure that at that election the nomination forms and voting papers indicate which nominees are standing for 18 months and which are standing for 3 years.

    (6) If the Board's decision under subsection (2) is made within 18 months after an election in an election year, the Board must decide which of its parent representatives will stand down at the mid-term election; and that decision must be by consensus of the parent representatives or, if consensus cannot be reached, by ballot of all the parent representatives.

    (7) Every parent representative who, in accordance with subsection (6), is to stand down at a mid-term election, goes out of office at the close of the day before the day on which the successor takes office following the election.

    (8) A Board that has a staggered election cycle may decide to revert to holding elections only in election years. In that case, at the next election held in an election year, all the parent representatives go out of office in accordance with section 102(8).

    Sections 101A and 101B were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 15 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

101B Consultation requirements for staggered elections of parent representatives
  • (1) Every decision under section 101A(2) must be made by the Board by resolution passed at a meeting of the Board open to all parents of students enrolled at the school or schools administered by the Board.

    (2) Before making a decision under section 101A(2), a Board must take reasonable steps to ensure that the parents of students enrolled at the school or schools administered by the Board have reasonable notice of—

    • (a) the time, day, and place of the meeting of the Board at which the decision is to be made; and

    • (b) the nature of the decision; and

    • (c) the fact that they have a right to attend the meeting.

    Sections 101A and 101B were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 15 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

102 Term of office
  • (1) Elected trustees take office 7 days after their election, unless otherwise provided in this section.

    (2) Trustees elected for a Board replacing a commissioner take office when the commissioner goes out of office.

    (3) [Repealed]

    (4) No trustee shall be co-opted until the Board has a vacancy for a co-opted trustee; and a co-opted trustee shall take office when co-opted.

    (5) A trustee appointed when the Board has a vacancy for a trustee appointed by the body or person concerned takes office on appointment.

    (6) Within 6 months before an appointed trustee's term of office expires, the person or body by whom or which the trustee was appointed (or the successor to that person or body) may appoint a trustee to succeed that trustee (or reappoint that trustee); but—

    • (a) The newly appointed trustee shall not take office until the day on which elected trustees take office under subsection (1) of this section; and

    • (b) If on that day the person or body concerned is no longer entitled to appoint a successor to the trustee holding office when the newly appointed trustee was appointed, the newly appointed trustee's appointment shall be deemed to have been void.

    (7) A trustee elected under section 101(2) of this Act shall go out of office 7 days after the day on which a further election under the said section 101(2) is held at the school or schools concerned.

    (8) Subject to subsection (9) of this section, all elected trustees (other than a trustee elected under section 101(2) of this Act) holding office at the close of the day before the day on which trustees take office under subsection (1) of this section shall then go out of office.

    (8A) Subject to subsection (9), the appointment or co-option of a trustee may be for a term not exceeding 3 years.

    (9) If—

    • (a) The first elections of trustees for a Board; or

    • (b) Elections under section 78P,—

    are held in an election year before the 1st day of May, no trustee shall go out of office under subsection (8) or subsection (8A) of this section in the election year.

    (10) A Board may, when co-opting a trustee, specify a term of office for the trustee; and in that case—

    • (a) If the term expires before the trustee goes out of office under subsection (8A) of this section, the trustee shall then go out of office; but

    • (b) Otherwise the trustee shall go out of office under that subsection.

    (11) This section is subject to sections 101A and 104 of this Act.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 12

    Subsection (1) was substituted, as from 1 January 1993, by section 18(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (1)(a) and (b) was substituted, as from 15 December 1994, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148).

    Subsection (1) was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 13(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsection (3) was repealed, as from 17 May 2006, by section 13(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsection (6) was amended, as from 15 December 1994, by section 3(2)(a) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148) by substituting the words third Tuesday in May for the words first Tuesday in August.

    Subsection (6) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 16(1) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by substituting the words an appointed trustee's term of office expires, the person or body by whom or which the trustee was appointed for the words the third Tuesday in May in an election year, the person or body by whom or which any trustee then holding office was appointed.

    Subsection (6)(a) was amended, as from 15 December 1994, by section 3(2)(b) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148) by substituting the words elected trustees take office under subsection (1) of this section for the words the annual meeting concerned is required by section 100 of this Act to be held.

    Subsection (7) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 16(3)(a) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by omitting the words (in the year following the year of election).

    Subsection (8) was amended, as from 15 December 1994, by section 3(2)(c) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148) by substituting the words at the close of the day before the day on which trustees take office under subsection (1) of this section shall then go out of office for the words immediately before the day in an election year on which the Board is required by section 100 of this Act to hold its annual meeting shall go out of office on that day.

    Subsection (8) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 16(3)(b) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by omitting the words immediately before the day in an election year on which the Board is required by section 100 of this Act to hold its annual meeting shall go out of office on that day

    Subsection (8A) was inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 16(2) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

    Subsection (9) was amended, as from 15 December 1994, by section 3(3)(d) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148) by substituting the word May for the word July.

    Subsection (9) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 16(3)(c) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by inserting the words or subsection (8A).

    Subsection (9)(b) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the expression section 78P for the words section 109(5) of this Act. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (10) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 16(3)(d) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by substituting the expression subsection (8A) for the expression subsection (8).

    Subsection (11) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 16(3)(e) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by substituting the expression sections 101A and 104 for the expression section 104.

103 Certain persons ineligible to be trustees
  • (1) A person who—

    • (a) [Repealed]

    • (c) is an undischarged bankrupt; or

    • (da) [Repealed]

    • (db) is ineligible to be a trustee under section 103A(2); or

    • (dd) is a person in respect of whom a personal order has been made under that Act that reflects adversely on the person's—

      • (i) competence to manage his or her own affairs in relation to his or her property; or

      • (ii) capacity to make or to communicate decisions relating to any particular aspect or aspects of his or her personal care and welfare; or

    • (de) is a person who has been convicted of an offence punishable by imprisonment for a term of 2 years or more, or who has been sentenced to imprisonment for any other offence, unless that person has obtained a pardon, served the sentence, or otherwise suffered the penalty imposed on the person; or.

    • (e) Is not a New Zealand citizen, and is—

      • (ii) A person obliged, by or pursuant to that Act or any other enactment, to leave New Zealand immediately or within a specified time (being a time that, when specified, was less than 12 months); or

      • (iii) Deemed for the purposes of that Act to be in New Zealand unlawfully,—

    may not become an elected, appointed, or co-opted trustee.

    (2) [Repealed]

    (2A) [Repealed]

    (3) Any permanently appointed member of the Board staff may, if otherwise eligible for election, be elected as a staff representative; but no permanently appointed member of the Board staff may be otherwise elected to the Board or be appointed or co-opted on to the Board.

    (4) A non-permanently appointed member of the Board staff may, if otherwise eligible, be elected, appointed, or co-opted on to the Board.

    (5) No person who has been appointed returning officer for an election of trustees is eligible to be nominated as a candidate in the election.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 13

    The reference to the Mental Health (Compulsory Assessment and Treatment) Act 1992 in subsection (1)(b) was substituted, as from 1 November 1992, for a reference to the Mental Health Act 1969 pursuant to section 137 Mental Health (Compulsory Assessment and Treatment) Act 1992 (1992 No 46).

    Subsection (1)(a) was repealed, as from 8 July 2000, by section 17 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

    Subsection (1)(c) and (1)(d) were substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (1)(d) was substituted, as from 25 October 2006, by section 25 Securities Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 46).

    Subsection (1)(da) was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 19(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (1)(da) was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (1)(da) was repealed, as from 17 May 2006, by section 14(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsection (1)(db) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 15 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (1)(db) was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (1)(dc) to (1)(de) were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (1)(e)(ii) was amended, as from 1 January 1992, by section 19(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by inserting the words (being a time that, when specified, was less than 12 months).

    Subsection (2) was repealed, as from 8 July 2000, by section 17 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

    Subsection (2A) was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 19(3) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (2A) was repealed, as from 17 May 2006, by section 14(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsections (3) and (4) were substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 14(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

103A Financial interests that disqualify persons from being trustees
  • (1) In this section,—

    contract, in relation to a Board,—

    • (a) means a contract made by any person directly with the Board; and

    • (b) includes any relationship with the Board that is intended to constitute a contract but is not an enforceable contract; but

    • (c) does not include any contract for the employment of any person as an officer or employee of the Board

    company means a company incorporated under the Companies Act 1993 or any former Companies Act or a society incorporated under the Industrial and Provident Societies Act 1908 or any former Industrial and Provident Societies Act

    subcontract, in relation to any contract made by a Board,—

    • (a) means a subcontract made with the contractor under that contract, or with another subcontractor, to do any work or perform any service or supply any goods or do any other act to which the head contract relates; and

    • (b) includes any subsidiary transaction relating to any such contract or subcontract.

    (2) A person is not capable of being a trustee of a Board or a member of a committee of a Board, if the total of all payments made or to be made by or on behalf of the Board in respect of all contracts made by it in which that person is concerned or interested exceeds in any financial year—

    • (a) the amount determined for the purpose by the Secretary, in consultation with the Auditor-General, by notice in the Gazette; or

    • (b) in the absence of an amount determined under paragraph (a), $25,000.

    (3) For the purposes of subsection (2), a trustee or a member of a committee of a Board is deemed to be concerned or interested in a contract made by a Board with a company, if—

    • (a) the trustee owns, whether directly or through a nominee, 10% or more of the issued capital of the company or of any other company controlling that company; or

    • (b) the trustee is the managing director or the general manager (by whatever names they are called) of the company.

    (4) For the purposes of this section, a company is deemed to control another company if it owns 50% or more of the issued capital of that other company or is able to control the exercise of 50% or more of the total voting powers exercisable by all the members of that other company.

    (5) Despite anything in this section,—

    • (a) a person is not disqualified under this section if the Secretary approves the contract at the request of the Board, whether or not the contract is already entered into; and

    • (b) the Secretary may, by notice in the Gazette, issue guidelines setting out the basis on which applications for approval under paragraph (a) will be considered.

    Section 103A was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 16 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

103B Requirements before appointment
  • Before a person is elected, co-opted, or appointed as a trustee, the person must confirm to the governing board that he or she is, to the best of his or her knowledge, eligible to be a trustee, having regard to the grounds of ineligibility in section 103 or section 103A.

    Section 103B was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

104 When casual vacancies arise
  • (1) When an elected, appointed, or co-opted trustee—

    • (a) Dies; or

    • (b) Resigns by written notice to the Board; or

    • (c) Without the prior leave of the Board, is absent from 3 consecutive meetings of the Board; or

    • (d) Becomes a person who (in terms of section 103(1) of this Act) may not become an elected, appointed, or co-opted trustee,—

    the trustee's office becomes vacant.

    (2) When a trustee elected by the Board staff ceases to be a member of the Board staff, the trustee's office becomes vacant.

    (3) On any day when—

    • (a) Already one co-opted trustee is a member of the Board staff; and

    • (b) A second co-opted trustee becomes a member of the Board staff,—

    the second trustee's office becomes vacant.

    (4) When the Board of an integrated school receives a written notice from the school's proprietors dismissing any trustee appointed by them, the trustee's office becomes vacant.

    (5) When a trustee elected by students ceases to be enrolled full-time at the school or institution, the trustee's office becomes vacant.

    (6) If—

    • (a) At any election of trustees fewer persons are elected than there are vacancies to be filled; and

    • (b) The Board is not then dissolved,—

    every unfilled vacancy is a casual vacancy, and shall be deemed to have arisen on the day on which the elected trustees take office.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 14

    Subsection (6) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 28 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the words on the day on which the elected trustees take office for the words on the day of the election. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

105 Filling casual vacancies of elected trustees
  • (1) Subject to subsections (2) to (9) of this section, every casual vacancy for an elected trustee shall be filled by the election of a trustee, in the same manner as that in which the vacating trustee was elected, for the residue of the vacating trustee's term.

    (2) If no nominations are received for the election of a trustee by students, or no trustee is elected at such an election, the vacancy shall not be filled until the next election required to be held by section 101(2) or section 78P.

    (3) Where a casual vacancy for an elected trustee occurs during any period of 6 months commencing on the 1st day of October in a year before an election year, the Board may, not later than 28 days after it occurs, resolve not to fill it; and in that case it shall not be filled.

    (4) When a casual vacancy for an elected trustee occurs at any other time, the Board must resolve, within 8 weeks of the vacancy occurring, whether to—

    • (a) hold an election to fill the vacancy; or

    • (b) fill the vacancy by selection.

    (5) If the Board resolves to fill the vacancy by selection it must, within 14 days of the resolution, publish a notice in a newspaper circulating in the area stating that there is a vacancy and that the Board proposes to fill it by selection.

    (6) A Board may not resolve to fill a casual vacancy by selection if the effect would be that the number of elected parent representatives on the Board is less than, or equal to, the number of parent representatives on the Board who have not been elected.

    (7) Despite resolving to fill a vacancy by selection, the Board must hold an election to fill the vacancy if, within 28 days of the publication of the notice referred to in subsection (5), a total of at least 10% of the people entitled to vote in an election for trustees advises the Board, in writing, that they wish the vacancy to be filled by an election.

    (8) An election to fill a casual vacancy for an elected trustee must be held,—

    • (a) if the Board resolved under subsection (4)(a) to hold an election, on the 15th Friday after the date on which the vacancy occurred, or on any earlier date fixed by the Board at least 6 weeks before the election date; or

    • (b) if the Board holds an election as a result of a request under subsection (7), on the 10th Friday after receiving the request, or on any earlier date fixed by the Board at least 6 weeks before the election date.

    (9) If the Board resolved under subsection (4) to fill a casual vacancy by selection, then, once the last date for lodging a request under subsection (7) has passed, the Board must select a person within 6 weeks of that date, and the person selected takes office on the day of selection by the Board.

    (10) This Act applies to a trustee selected under this section to fill a casual vacancy of an elected trustee as if the person had been elected, and every reference to an elected trustee (except in subsection (6)) includes a reference to a trustee so selected.

    The heading to section 105 was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 15(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the words casual vacancies of elected trustees for the words of casual vacancies.

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 23 July 1990, by section 23(2) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60) by substituting the expression (4A) for the expression (4).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 15(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the expression (9) for the expression (4A). See section 15(4) Education Amendment Act 2006 as to a trustee who holds office as a result of an appointment under this section (as it was immediately before section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force) being treated, after section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force, as a trustee selected under that section.

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the expression section 78P for the words section 109(5) of this Act. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 15 December 1994, by section 3(3) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148) by substituting the words during any period of 6 months commencing on the 1st day of October in a year before for the words less than 6 months before the 1st day of July in.

    Subsection (4) was substituted, and subsection (4A) was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 23(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 1 January 1992, by section 20(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the words Subject to sections 94B(8) and 94C(1) of this Act, a for the word A.

    Subsection (4A)(b) was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 20(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (4) was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19). See section 15(4) Education Amendment Act 2006 as to a trustee who holds office as a result of an appointment under this section (as it was immediately before section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force) being treated, after section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force, as a trustee selected under that section.

    Subsection (4A) was repealed, as from 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19). See section 15(4) Education Amendment Act 2006 as to a trustee who holds office as a result of an appointment under this section (as it was immediately before section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force) being treated, after section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force, as a trustee selected under that section.

    Subsections (5) to (7) were substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19). See section 15(4) Education Amendment Act 2006 as to a trustee who holds office as a result of an appointment under this section (as it was immediately before section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force) being treated, after section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force, as a trustee selected under that section.

    Subsection (8) was amended, as from 1 January 1992, by section 20(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the words Subject to sections 94B(8) and 94C(1) of this Act, a for the word A.

    Subsection (8) was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19). See section 15(4) Education Amendment Act 2006 as to a trustee who holds office as a result of an appointment under this section (as it was immediately before section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force) being treated, after section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force, as a trustee selected under that section.

    Subsections (9) and (10) were inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 15(3) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19). See section 15(4) Education Amendment Act 2006 as to a trustee who holds office as a result of an appointment under this section (as it was immediately before section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force) being treated, after section 15 Education Amendment Act 2006 came into force, as a trustee selected under that section.

105A Minister may approve alternative constitution in certain cases
  • (1) The Minister may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, approve an alternative constitution under this section for the Board of a state school, or the combined Board of state schools, if—

    • (a) the Minister has reasonable cause to believe that an alternative constitution is in the best interests of the school or schools governed by the Board, and—

      • (i) the Chief Review Officer, in a written report, recommends the Minister consider devising an alternative constitution; or

      • (ii) 20% or more of the parents of children enrolled at the school or schools have requested an alternative constitution; or

      • (iii) the Board has requested an alternative constitution; and

    • (b) the Minister has consulted such persons or organisations as the Minister considers appropriate about whether an alternative constitution is in the best interests of the school or schools.

    (2) In the case of an integrated school, the Minister must consult with the proprietor of the school when conducting the consultation required under subsection (1)(b).

    (3) A constitution approved under this section applies instead of a constitution under section 94.

    (4) A notice under this section must establish a Board comprising 1 or more persons who are to be elected or appointed as trustees in the manner specified in the notice; and the notice may (without limitation)—

    • (a) set out a procedure for any election, appointment, or co-option of trustees:

    • (b) set out the manner in which vacancies are to be filled:

    • (c) provide for the appointment of returning officers and set out their functions:

    • (d) set out other formal and procedural provisions for the purposes of any election, appointment, or co-option of trustees.

    (5) While a notice that approves an alternative constitution under this section is in force, sections 94, 94A, 94B, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 101, 102, 104, and 105 do not apply in respect of the Board concerned and the schools governed by it.

    (6) In their application to a Board that has an alternative constitution under this section, the other sections and any schedules of this Act relating to Boards must be read subject to this section and subject also to all modifications necessary to give effect to this section.

    Section 105A was inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 18 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21)

106 Commissioner may be appointed if Board inactive or trustees too few
  • [Repealed]

    Subsection (1)(aa) was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 24 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Sections 106 to 109 were repealed, as from 25 October 2001, by section 22 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

107 Minister may dissolve Board for cause, and direct appointment of commissioner
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 106 to 109 were repealed, as from 25 October 2001, by section 22 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

108 Consultation with proprietors of integrated school
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 106 to 109 were repealed, as from 25 October 2001, by section 22 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

109 Commissioners
  • [Repealed]

    Subsection (6)(a) was amended, as from 15 December 1994, by section 3(4)(a) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148) by substituting the word April for the word July.

    Subsection (6)(b) was amended, as from 15 December 1994, by section 3(4)(b) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148) by substituting the words 31st day of August for the words 30th day of November, and the word September for the word December.

    Subsection (7)(a) was amended, as from 15 December 1994, by section 3(4)(c) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148) by substituting the words 31st day of March for the words 30th day of June.

    Subsection (7)(b) was amended, as from 15 December 1994, by section 3(4)(d) Education Amendment Act 1994 (1994 No 148) by substituting the words 31st day of March for the words 30th day of June, and the words third Tuesday of the following May for the words first Tuesday of the following August.

    Subsections (7A) and (7B) were inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 29(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (9) was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 29(2) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Sections 106 to 109 were repealed, as from 25 October 2001, by section 22 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

109A Provisions relating to Board with staggered election cycle where commissioner appointed
  • (1) This section applies if a commissioner has been appointed in place of a Board that has, or had decided to have, a staggered election cycle, and the commissioner has appointed a date under section 78P for the holding of elections of trustees for a new Board.

    (2) Despite anything in section 102, the nomination forms and voting forms for the election must show which nominees are standing only until the next election, and which are standing until the election after the next election.

    (3) Despite anything in section 102, trustees who are elected only until the next election go out of office at the close of the day before the day on which the successor takes office following the election.

    (4) If the date that the commissioner has appointed under section 78P is a date that is within 6 months before the date on which an election is due to be held, the Board does not have to hold an election on that date and this section applies as if that election were not due to be held.

    Section 109A was inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 19 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21)

    Subsections (1) and (4) were amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting in both places the expression section 78P for the words section 109(5). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

110 Boards may combine
  • (1) Subject to section 111 of this Act, if satisfied that—

    • (a) Each of the Boards concerned has made reasonable efforts to consult the parents of students (other than adult students) enrolled full-time at its school or schools (or institution or institutions) about combining with the other Boards; and

    • (b) The consultation that has in fact taken place has been adequate in all the circumstances; and

    • (ba) the number of trustees on the Board who are parent representatives will exceed the number of other trustees on the Board; and

    • (c) [Repealed]

    • (d) [Repealed]

    • (e) The proposed combined Board is appropriate in all the circumstances,—

    the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, establish a single Board (called a combined Board) to administer all the schools or institutions concerned, with effect on a date specified in the notice.

    (2) Subject to subsection (3) of this section, this Act shall apply to a combined Board as if—

    • (a) The Board had been in existence immediately before the day on which the notice establishing it was published; and

    • (b) Every trustee had resigned on that day.

    (3) Until the day specified in the notice establishing a combined Board,—

    • (a) It shall have no powers, functions, duties, or rights; and

    • (b) The existing Boards shall continue in existence as if the combined Board had not been established.

    (4) On the day specified in the notice establishing a combined Board, all rights, assets, liabilities, and debts of the existing Boards shall become rights, assets, liabilities, and debts of the combined Board.

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 16(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the words establish a single Board (called a combined Board) to administer all the schools or institutions concerned for the words establish a combined Board for the schools or institutions that the applicant Boards administer.

    Subsection (1)(ba) was inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 20 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21)

    Subsection (1)(c) and (d) was repealed, as from 19 December 1998, by section 30 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (3)(b) and (4) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 16(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the word existing for the word applicant.

111 Restrictions on combining
  • (1) No Board that administers a special institution may combine with a Board that does not.

    (2) [Repealed]

    (3) No Board that administers an integrated school may combine with a Board that does not.

    (4) No Board that administers an integrated school may combine with any other Board unless all the schools they administer have the same proprietors.

    Subsection (2) was repealed, as from 8 July 2000, by section 21 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

112 Minister may split combined Board
  • (1) If satisfied, after consulting the Review Office and the Board concerned, that in all the circumstances it is appropriate for a combined Board to be split, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, establish 2 or more Boards for the schools or institutions the combined Board administers, with effect on a date specified in the notice.

    (2) If any of the Boards established by a notice under subsection (1) of this section is a combined Board, the notice shall specify the schools or institutions it is to administer.

    (3) Subject to subsection (4) of this section, this Act shall apply to a Board established by a notice under subsection (1) of this section as if—

    • (a) The Board had been in existence immediately before the day on which the notice was published; and

    • (b) Every trustee had resigned on the day.

    (4) Until the day specified in a notice under subsection (1) of this section establishing 2 or more Boards,—

    • (a) The Boards established shall have no powers, functions, duties, or rights; and

    • (b) The combined Board they replace shall continue in existence as if they had not been established.

113 Property held in trust
  • (1) Where any property is, on the day a notice under section 112(1) of this Act is published, held in trust by the combined Board of the schools or institutions to which the notice relates, the following provisions apply:

    • (a) The Board shall, within 28 days of the day specified in the notice, notify Public Trust of the existence and nature of the trust; and Public Trust shall forthwith notify the Secretary:

    • (b) Public Trust shall take all reasonable steps to try to consult the Board, within 70 days of the day specified in the notice, as to—

      • (i) How the property should vest; and

      • (ii) The extent (if any) to which the trust should otherwise be modified:

    • (c) On the 70th day after the day specified in the notice the property shall vest in Public Trust:

    • (d) As soon as is practicable after becoming aware that the property has vested, Public Trust, after consulting the Boards established by the notice, as to—

      • (i) How the property should vest; and

      • (ii) The extent (if any) to which the trust concerned should otherwise be modified,—

    shall devise and send to the Solicitor-General a scheme to modify the trust.

    (2) Where any property is, on the day a notice under section 112(1) of this Act is published, held in trust for the combined Board of the schools or institutions to which the notice relates (otherwise than by the Board), the following provisions apply:

    • (a) The person who holds the property shall, within 28 days of the day specified in the notice, notify Public Trust of the existence and nature of the trust; and Public Trust shall forthwith notify the Secretary:

    • (b) Public Trust shall take all reasonable steps to try to consult the person, within 70 days of the day specified in the notice, as to—

      • (i) Which of the Boards established by the notice the property (or any part of it) should be held for; and if more than one, how; and

      • (ii) The extent (if any) to which the trust should otherwise be modified:

    • (c) On the 70th day after the day specified in the notice the property shall vest in Public Trust:

    • (d) As soon as is practicable after becoming aware that the property has vested, Public Trust, after consulting the Boards established by the notice, as to—

      • (i) Whether all or any of the property should be held for them and if so which of it, which of them, and in what proportions; and

      • (ii) The extent (if any) to which the trust should otherwise be modified,—

      Public Trust shall devise and send to the Solicitor-General a scheme to modify the trust.

    (3) Where, on the day a notice under section 112(1) of this Act is published, any trust (being a trust established by an enactment, instrument, or will, that requires or requests the trustees to consult, notify, or act only with the approval or concurrence of, a combined Board of the schools or institutions to which a notice under section 112(1) of this Act relates) exists, the following provisions apply:

    • (a) The trustees may apply to Public Trust for directions as to which Boards established by the notice should act (jointly or severally) in place of the combined Board; and in that case Public Trust shall devise and send to the Solicitor-General draft directions to the trustees; and

    • (b) The trustees shall not take any action for which consultation, notification, approval, or concurrence, is required or requested except in accordance with—

      • (i) Directions approved under this section; or

      • (ii) Directions given by the Solicitor-General in circumstances that appear to constitute an emergency; or

    (4) Within 90 days (or any longer period the Solicitor-General and Public Trust in any case, before the expiration of that period, agree) of being notified of a scheme or draft directions under this section, the Solicitor-General may, by written notice to Public Trust,—

    • (a) Approve the scheme or directions (as originally notified by Public Trust, or with amendments agreed by Public Trust); or

    • (b) Suggest amendments to the scheme or directions; or

    • (c) Direct that the scheme should not proceed, or that the directions should not be given; and in that case the matter shall be dealt with under the Charitable Trusts Act 1957.

    (5) If within 90 days (or any longer period agreed under subsection (4) of this section) of being notified of a scheme or draft directions under this section, the Solicitor-General does not under that subsection approve the scheme or directions, or direct that the scheme or directions should not proceed, the Solicitor-General shall be deemed to have approved the scheme or directions.

    (6) If the Solicitor-General approves a scheme under this section, Public Trust shall, in accordance with it,—

    • (a) By notice in the Gazette, modify the trust concerned; and

    • (b) Take all steps necessary to effect any necessary transfers of the property concerned.

    (7) If the Solicitor-General approves any draft directions under this section,—

    • (a) Public Trust shall give them to the trustees concerned; and

    • (b) They shall have effect according to their tenor.

    (8) Every scheme, draft direction, and suggested and agreed amendment, under this section shall be such that, in the opinion of Public Trust or the Solicitor-General (as the case may be),—

    • (a) It best gives effect to the intentions of the testator, settlor, or other person or body by whom or which the trust concerned was established; and

    • (b) Subject to paragraph (a) of this subsection, it effects the minimum change necessary to enable the trust concerned to operate satisfactorily in the light of—

      • (i) The splitting of the former combined Board; and

      • (ii) The establishment of the new Boards concerned; and

      • (iii) Any transfers of property effected or to be effected.

    (9) The reasonable costs of Public Trust in acting under this section shall be paid out of money appropriated by Parliament for the purpose.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 19

    Section 113 was amended, as from 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100) by substituting the words Public Trust for the words the Public Trustee (or The Public Trustee) wherever they occur. See clause 2 Public Trust Act Commencement Order 2002 (SR 2002/11).

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100) by substituting the words and Public Trust for the words and Public Trustee. See clause 2 Public Trust Act Commencement Order 2002 (SR 2002/11).

114 Allocation of employees after combined Board split
  • Every notice under section 112(1) of this Act shall specify one of the Boards it establishes as the residual employer of the employees of the combined Board to which it relates; and—

    • (a) Subject to paragraph (b) of this section, the people who were, immediately before the day specified in the notice, employees of the combined Board shall on that day become employees of the Board specified; and their service in the employment of the combined Board shall be treated for all purposes as service in the employment of the Board specified; and

    • (b) Before that day, the Secretary may, by written notice to any employee of the combined Board, specify one of the Boards the notice establishes as the Board by which the employee is to become employed; and in that case, if the employee is still employed by the combined Board immediately before that day,—

      • (i) The employee shall on that day become an employee of the Board specified; and

      • (ii) The employee's service in the employment of the combined Board shall be treated for all purposes as service in the employment of the Board specified.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 21

115 Transfer of assets of split combined Board
  • (1) Subject to sections 113 and 114 of this Act,—

    • (a) All rights, assets, liabilities and debts that a combined Board split by a notice under section 112 of this Act had immediately before the day specified in the notice shall be deemed to have become rights, assets, liabilities, and debts of the Boards established by the notice; and

    • (b) Any property that, immediately before it became an asset of a Board under this section, was subject to a trust, shall vest in the Board subject to the trust.

    (2) Subject to sections 113 and 114 of this Act, if any dispute arises as to whether any right, asset, liability, or debt has, under subsection (1) of this section, become a right, asset, liability, or debt of one Board or another, the dispute shall be referred to the Secretary; and

    • (a) The Secretary shall attempt by mediation to bring the parties to the dispute to an agreement; but

    • (b) Where, in the Secretary's opinion, further mediation is unlikely to achieve agreement, the Secretary shall determine the dispute, and the determination shall be final.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 22

116 Each school to be represented on combined Board
  • (1) In an election for parent representatives on a combined Board,—

    • (a) Each candidate shall be nominated in respect of one school or institution the Board administers; and

    • (b) The highest polling candidate nominated in respect of each school or institution shall become a trustee, regardless of the votes cast for the other candidates.

    (2) [Repealed]

    Subsection (1)(a) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 31(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by omitting the words (being a school in respect of which the candidate is a parent or adult student). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (2) was repealed, as from 19 December 1998, by section 31(2) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

116A Appointment of principal of combined Board
  • The powers conferred on a combined Board by section 65 include the power to appoint 1 person to be the principal of 2 or more schools administered by the Board.

    Section 116A was inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 22 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

117 Other provisions applying to Boards
  • The provisions set out in Schedule 6 to this Act apply to Boards.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 18

118 Regulations
  • (1) Subject to section 116 of this Act, the Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations prescribing either or both of the following matters:

    • (a) The manner in which elections of trustees are to be held:

    • (b) Subject to subsection (3) of this section, the manner in which returning officers are to be appointed for the purpose of the election of trustees.

    (2) Regulations made under this Act may—

    • (a) Provide for persons forbidden by section 101(6) of this Act to participate in 2 elections to choose the election in which they prefer to stand, vote, or both; and

    • (b) Provide for persons who do not exercise their choice within the time or in the manner provided for to be restricted to standing, voting, or both, in only one election; and

    • (c) Require a person who has chosen or been restricted to one election to continue to be restricted to elections of the kind concerned if elections are later held to fill casual vacancies.

    (3) No person who has been nominated for election to a Board is eligible to be appointed returning officer for the election.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 20

119 Savings
  • Every reference in any—

    • (a) Act, regulation, or other enactment; or

    • (b) Contract, agreement, deed, instrument, application, lease, licence, notice, award, or other document entered into, made, granted, given, or executed before the 18th day of May 1989,—

    to the school committee, committee of management, or Board of governors of a primary, secondary, composite, or special school shall be read as a reference to the school's Board.

    Compare: 1989 No 3 s 22(3)(b)

Part 10
Teacher registration

120 Interpretation
  • In this Part of this Act and Schedule 7 to this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Authorisation, in relation to any person, means the entry of the person's name on the list of authorised persons; and to authorise has a corresponding meaning

    Authorisation: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 10(1) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Early childhood education and care service means—

    • (a) a free kindergarten that is an early childhood service whose licence permits no child to attend for a period of more than 4 hours on any day; and

    • (b) any other early childhood service that is declared by regulations made under section 69(2) of the Education Standards Act 2001 to be an early childhood education and care service for the purposes of this Part

    Early childhood education and care service: this definition was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Early childhood education and care service: paragraphs (a) and (b) of this definition were substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 17(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Early childhood service means—

    • (a) a chartered service, as defined in section 308; and

    • (b) an early childhood centre licensed under section 317

    Early childhood service: this definition was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Employer means any 1 of the following who employs, or intends to employ, 1 or more teachers or authorised persons in a teaching position

    • (a) the Board of Trustees of a state school:

    • (b) the managers of a school registered under section 35A:

    • (c) the management of an early childhood education and care service

    • (d) the Secretary, in his or her capacity as an employer under section 91N

    Employer: this definition was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Free kindergarten means an early childhood centre (as defined in section 308) controlled by a free kindergarten association founded for the purpose of establishing and maintaining a kindergarten or kindergartens.

    Free kindergarten: this definition was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    General education system means the system of education provided in—

    • (a) registered schools (as defined in section 2); and

    • (b) early childhood services; and

    • (c) other educational institutions and services established or deemed to have been established, or provided, under this Act or the Education Act 1964.

    General education system: paragraph (ba) of this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98). See also section 9 of that Act as to the transitional provisions.

    General education system: this definition was substituted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    List of authorised people means the list kept under section 130F of this Act

    List of authorised people: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 10(1) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part of this Act

    Minister: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Practising certificate means a certificate issued under section 130(1A) or (6) of this Act

    Practising certificate: this definition was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the expression 130(1A) or (6) for the expression 130(1). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions, and clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Professional leader means,—

    • (a) in the case of a school, the principal:

    • (b) in the case of an early childhood service, the professional leader of the service:

    • (c) in the case of any other educational institution, the chief executive or person occupying an equivalent position.

    Professional leader: this definition was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(3) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Register means the list kept under section 128 of this Act

    Registered private school

    [Repealed]

    Registered private school: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 3(2) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98). See also section 9 of that Act as to the transitional provisions.

    Registered private school: this definition was repealed, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(6) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Registration, in relation to any person, means the entry of the person's name on the register; and to register has a corresponding meaning

    Registration Board

    [Repealed]

    Registration Board: this definition was repealed, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(6) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Satisfactory recent teaching experience, in relation to any person at any time, means—

    • (a) An uninterrupted period of employment of 2 years (or some shorter period or periods approved by the Teachers Council for the person) in a teaching position or teaching positions in the general education system; or

    • (b) A period of employment of 2 years (or some shorter period or periods approved by the Teachers Council for the person), in a position (or positions) that (or each of which) was in the Teachers Council's opinion equivalent to a teaching position, in an educational institution in New Zealand approved by the Teachers Council for the purposes of this part of this Act—

    satisfactorily completed by the person during the 5 years before that time

    Satisfactory recent teaching experience: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 3(2) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98). See also section 9 of that Act as to the transitional provisions.

    Satisfactory recent teaching experience: this definition was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board wherever they appear, and by substituting the words Teachers Council's for the words Registration Board's. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions, and clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    School authority

    [Repealed]

    School authority: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 3(2) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98). See section 9 of that Act as to the transitional provisions.

    School authority: this definition was repealed, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(6) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    School Board

    [Repealed]

    School Board: this definition was repealed, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(6) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    State school

    [Repealed]

    State school: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(4) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    State school: this definition was repealed, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(6) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    State school: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 15(4) Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Teaching position means a position in the general education system that—

    • (a) Requires its holder to instruct students; or

    • (b) is the professional leader, deputy professional leader (however described), or assistant principal of a school; or

    • (c) is the professional leader of an early childhood service or other educational institution.

    Teaching position: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 3(2) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98). See also section 9 of that Act as to the transitional provisions.

    Teaching position: paragraph (b) of this definition was substituted, and paragraph (c) was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(4) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Teachers Council means the New Zealand Teachers Council established under Part 10A.

    Teachers Council: this definition was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 25(5) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

Restrictions on appointment and employment of teaching staff

  • The heading Restrictions on Appointment and Employment of Teaching Staff was inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

120A Restrictions on appointment of teachers
  • (1) No employer shall appoint to any teaching position—

    • (a) Any person—

      • (i) Whose registration as a teacher has been cancelled; and

      • (ii) Who has not since been registered as a teacher again; or

    • (b) Any person whose authorisation has been cancelled, and who has not since—

      • (i) Been granted an authorisation again; or

      • (ii) Been registered as a teacher.

    (2) No employer shall permanently appoint to any teaching position any person who does not hold a practising certificate.

    (3) [Repealed]

    Sections 120A and 120B were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting employer for school authority. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting employer for School Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (3) was repealed, as from 1 February 2002, by section 26 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

120B Restrictions on continued employment of teachers
  • (1) No employer shall continue to employ in any teaching position—

    • (a) Any person—

      • (i) Whose registration as a teacher has been cancelled; and

      • (ii) Who has not since been registered as a teacher again; or

    • (b) Any person whose authorisation has been cancelled, and who has not since—

      • (i) Been granted an authorisation again; or

      • (ii) Been registered as a teacher.

    (2) No employer shall continue to employ in any teaching position any person who holds neither a practising certificate nor an authorisation, if that person is not under the general supervision of a person who holds a practising certificate.

    (3) No employer shall in any calendar year continue to employ in any teaching position any person who holds neither a practising certificate nor an authorisation, if the sum of—

    • (a) The period or periods for which that person has already during that year been employed by the employer in a teaching position or positions; and

    • (b) Any period or periods (of which the employer is aware) for which that person has already during that year been employed by any other employer in a teaching position or positions; and

    • (c) Any period or periods (of which the employer is aware) for which that person has during that year been employed as a teacher by the management of an early childhood education and care service,—

    is not less than the period specified in subsection (4) of this section.

    (4) The period referred to in subsection (3) of this section is—

    • (a) 20 half-days; or

    • (b) Any greater number of half-days the Teachers Council has allowed in any particular case,—

    each being a half-day on which the school or early childhood education and care service at which the person was then employed was open for instruction.

    (5) [Repealed]

    Sections 120A and 120B were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 4 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Section 120B was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the word employer for the words school authority and authority, wherever they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (3)(c) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting education and care service for centre that is a kindergarten for the purposes of section 315(1) of this Act. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words early childhood education and care service for the word kindergarten. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (4)(b) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 18 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the word Board.

    Subsection (5) was repealed, as from 1 February 2002, by section 27 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

Teacher registration

  • The heading Teacher Registration was inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 10(2) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

121 Applications for registration as teacher
  • Any person may apply to the Teachers Council, on a form provided by the Teachers Council for the purpose and signed by the applicant, for registration as a teacher.

    Compare: 1987 No 177 s 14 (new s 136D)

    Section 121 was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

122 Full registration
  • The Teachers Council shall register an applicant under section 121 of this Act if satisfied that the applicant—

    • (a) Is of good character; and

    • (b) Is fit to be a teacher; and

    • (c) Is satisfactorily trained to teach; and

    • (d) Has satisfactory recent teaching experience.

    Compare: 1987 No 177 s 14 (new 136E)

    Paragraph (c) was substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 26(2) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Paragraph (d) was substituted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 3(3) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Section 122 was amended, as 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

123 Provisional registration
  • (1) Subject to subsections (2) and (3) of this section, the Teachers Council shall register an applicant under section 121 of this Act who is not eligible for registration under section 122 or section 124 of this Act if satisfied that the applicant—

    • (a) Is of good character; and

    • (b) Is fit to be a teacher; and

    • (c) Is satisfactorily trained to teach; and

    • (d) Either—

      • (i) Has not previously been registered; or

      • (ii) Is likely to be a satisfactory teacher.

    (2) Where the Teachers Council registers a teacher under subsection (1) of this section, it shall ensure that the registration shows that the teacher's registration is provisional only.

    (3) Where, before a teacher's registration under subsection (1) of this section expires or is cancelled, the Teachers Council is satisfied that the teacher has satisfactory recent teaching experience, it shall confirm the registration and amend the entry in the register so as to make clear that the registration has been confirmed.

    (4) [Repealed]

    Subsection (1)(c) was substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 26(3) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (3) was substituted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 3(4) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Subsection (4) was repealed, as from 25 June 1993, by section 10(3) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Section 123 was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board wherever they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

124 Registration of experienced teachers
  • (1) Subject to subsections (2) and (3) of this section, the Teachers Council shall register an applicant under section 121 of this Act who is not eligible for registration under section 122 of this Act if satisfied that the applicant—

    • (a) Is of good character; and

    • (b) Is fit to be a teacher; and

    • (c) Is satisfactorily trained to teach; and

    • (d) Either—

      • (i) Has not previously been registered under this section; or

      • (ii) Is likely to be a satisfactory teacher; and

    • (e) Either—

      • (i) Has previously been registered (or has been deemed to have been registered) under section 122 of this Act; or

      • (ii) Has had adequate and suitable teaching experience .

    (2) Where the Teachers Council registers a teacher under subsection (1) of this section, it shall ensure that the registration shows that the teacher's registration is subject to confirmation.

    (3) Where, before a teacher's registration under subsection (1) of this section expires or is cancelled,—

    • (a) The Teachers Council is satisfied that the teacher—

      • (i) Is familiar enough with current curricula and procedures in the general education system; and

      • (ii) Is a satisfactory teacher; and

    • (b) Either—

      • (i) A year has passed since the registration; or

      • (ii) More than 3 months has passed since the registration, and the professional leader of the school, early childhood service, or other educational institution within the general education system at which the teacher is employed so recommends,—

    the Teachers Council shall confirm the registration, and amend the entry in the register so as to make clear that the registration has been confirmed.

    (4) [Repealed]

    Subsection (1)(c) was substituted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 24(4) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1)(e)(ii) was amended, as from 23 July 1990, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60) by omitting the words gained outside New Zealand.

    Subsection (4) was repealed, as from 25 June 1993, by section 10(3) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Section 124 was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board wherever they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (3)(b)(ii) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88), by substituting the words professional leader of the school, early childhood service, or other educational for the words principal or chief executive of a school or. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

124A Determining whether or not training satisfactory
  • (1) In determining whether or not a person is satisfactorily trained to teach, the Teachers Council may take into account any relevant matters.

    (2) In determining whether or not a person is satisfactorily trained to teach, the Teachers Council shall take into account—

    • (a) The person's qualifications; and

    • (b) Whether or not the person has satisfactorily completed training recognised by the Teachers Council as suitable for people who want to teach.

    (3) Subsection (2) of this section does not affect the generality of subsection (1) of this section.

    Section 124A was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 26(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 124A was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board wherever they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

124B Determining good character and fitness to be teacher
  • (1) For the purpose of determining whether a person is of good character and fit to be a teacher, the Teachers Council must obtain a police vet of the person.

    (2) Subsection (1) does not limit any other matters that the Teachers Council may take into account in determining character and fitness to be a teacher.

    Section 124B was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 28 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

125 Determining whether or not employment satisfactorily completed
  • (1) In determining whether or not a period of employment was satisfactorily completed by a person, the Teachers Council may take into account any relevant matters.

    (2) In determining whether or not a period of employment at a school, early childhood service, or other educational institution in New Zealand was satisfactorily completed by a person, the Teachers Council may take into account—

    • (a) the views of the professional leader of the school, early childhood service, or other educational institution; or

    • (b) if the person was the professional leader of a school, early childhood service, or other educational institution, the views of his or her employer.

    (3) Subsection (2) of this section does not affect the generality of subsection (1) of this section.

    Section 125 was substituted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 5 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (2) was substituted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

126 Appeals from decisions of Teachers Council
  • (1) A person who is dissatisfied with all or any part of a decision of the Teachers Council under sections 122, 123, 124, 129(1)(a) or (b), or 130 of this Act (whether a decision to act or a decision to refuse to act) may, within 28 days of receiving notice of the decision from the Teachers Council or any longer period the Court, on application made before or after the end of the period, allows, appeal to a District Court against the decision.

    (2) [Repealed]

    (3) The Court shall hear the appeal as soon as is practicable, and may confirm, reverse, or modify the decision concerned, or may refer the matter back to the Teachers Council in accordance with rules of Court, or may give any decision that the Teachers Council could have given.

    (4) Nothing in this section gives the Court power to review any part of the Teachers Council's decision that the appellant has not appealed against.

    (5) Subject to any order of the Court, every decision of the Teachers Council continues in force and has effect pending the determination of an appeal against it.

    (6) On any appeal under this section, the Court may order the Teachers Council or the appellant to pay the costs incurred by the other party in respect of the appeal.

    (7) The Teachers Council or the appellant may, with the leave of the High Court or the Court of Appeal, appeal to the Court of Appeal against any decision on a question of law made by the District Court on an appeal under this section.

    The heading to section 126 and section 126 was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 January 1997, by section 6(a) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98) by omitting the word High.

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 January 1997, by section 6(b) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98) by substituting the words a District for the words the High.

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 January 1997, by section 7(3) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98) by inserting the expression 127(5).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the expression 129(1)(a), (b), or (c) for the expression 129 of this Act. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 19(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the words 129(1)(a) or (b), or 130 for the words 127(5), or 129(1)(a), (b), or (c).

    Subsection (2) was repealed, as from 15 August 1991, by section 3(4) Judicature Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 60).

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council's for the words Registration Board's. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (7) was amended, as from 15 August 1991, by section 3(4) Judicature Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 60) by omitting the words the Administrative Division of.

    Subsection (7) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 19(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the words the District Court for the words the High Court in the second place where they appear.

127 Expiry of teacher registration
  • (1) A teacher's registration expires,—

    • (a) in the case of a registration under section 124(1) that has not earlier been confirmed under section 124(3), after 3 years:

    • (b) in the case of the registration of a teacher who has never held a practising certificate, after 5 years:

    • (c) in the case of a provisional registration under section 123(1) that has not earlier been confirmed under section 123(3), after—

      • (i) 5 years; or

      • (ii) if the Teachers Council has, before the expiration of 5 years, allowed the teacher a further year, 6 years:

    • (d) in the case of the registration of a teacher who has held a practising certificate but no longer holds one, on the 5th anniversary of the expiry of the practising certificate most recently issued to the teacher:

    • (e) when the teacher dies.

    (2) When a teacher's registration expires, the teacher's name must be removed from the register kept under section 128.

    Subsection (1) was substituted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 10(1) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Subsection (1)(a) was amended, as from 1 January 1997, by section 7(1) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98) by substituting the expression 3 years for the expression 2 years.

    Subsection (1)(e) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the word Council's for the word Board's. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsections (2) to (4) were repealed, as from 25 June 1993, by section 10(1) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Subsection (5) was substituted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 7(2) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98) by substituting the expression 3 years for the expression 2 years.

    Subsection (6)(b) was amended, as from 25 June 1993, by section 10(2) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51) by omitting the words shall be deemed to have expired and substituting the word expires.

    Section 127 was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board wherever they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Section 127 was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 20 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

127A Voluntary deregistration
  • (1) The Teachers Council must deregister a person if—

    • (a) the Teachers Council receives a written request from the person seeking deregistration; and

    • (b) the Teachers Council is satisfied that the person is not the subject of an investigation under Part 10A.

    (2) This section applies to both teachers and holders of limited authorities to teach.

    Section 127A was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 21 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

128 Teachers Council to keep register
  • (1) For the purposes of this Part of this Act, the Teachers Council shall keep a list of people for the time being registered as teachers.

    (2) If the Teachers Council is satisfied that any of the information contained in the register is incorrect, the Council must ensure that the error is corrected.

    Compare: 1987 No 177 s 14 (new s 136C)

    Section 128 was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (2) was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 22 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

129 Cancellation of registration as teacher and cancellation of limited authority to teach
  • (1) The Teachers Council must cancel a person's registration or limited authority to teach, if—

    • (a) the Teachers Council is satisfied on reasonable grounds that,—

      • (i) in the case of a teacher, the teacher no longer satisfies the requirements for registration as a teacher (as set out in section 122); or

      • (ii) in the case of an authorised person, the person no longer satisfies the requirements for holding a limited authority to teach (as set out in section 130B(2)); or

    • (b) the Teachers Council is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the registration or authorisation was effected by mistake or obtained by fraud; or

    • (c) the Disciplinary Tribunal has ordered, under section 139AW(1)(g), that the registration or limited authority to teach be cancelled; or

    • (d) the Teachers Council has ordered, under section 139AZC(8)(c), that the registration or limited authority to teach be cancelled.

    (2) The Teachers Council may not cancel a teacher's registration or an authorised person's limited authority to teach under subsection (1)(a) or (b) without first—

    • (a) taking all reasonable steps to ensure that the teacher or authorised person is given notice of the reasons for the proposed cancellation; and

    • (b) giving the teacher or authorised person a reasonable opportunity to make submissions and be heard, either in person or by counsel or other representative, on the proposed cancellation.

    (3) The fact that a teacher's registration or an authorised person's limited authority to teach has been cancelled does not prevent the teacher or authorised person from again being registered or being given a limited authority to teach.

    (4) If a person's registration is ordered to be cancelled under section 139AZC(8)(c), and the person later applies for registration or for a limited authority to teach, he or she must be treated as a person who has not held a practising certificate for 5 years.

    (5) The Teachers Council must take all reasonable steps to ensure that employers are informed of the name of every person whose registration or limited authority to teach is cancelled—

    • (a) under this section; or

    • (b) as a result of the Teachers Council refusing to renew the person's registration, or to grant a limited authority to teach, on the ground that the person is not of good character or is not fit to be a teacher.

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 25 June 1993, by section 11(1) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51) by substituting the words subsections (2A) and (3) of this section, the Registration Board may for the words subsection (3) of this section, the Registration Board may, on the application of the principal or chief executive (or, in the case of an application made in respect of a principal, on the application of the School Board) of a school or educational institution at which a teacher is or has been employed.

    Subsection (2A) was inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 11(2) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    The heading to section 129 was substituted for the heading Deregistration, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Section 129 was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board wherever they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (2A)(a) was substituted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Section 129 was substituted, as from 1 September 2004, by section 29 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(a) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

    Section 129 was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 23 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

129A Reclassification of teacher's registration
  • (1) The Teachers Council may, instead of cancelling a teacher's registration under section 129(1)(a), reclassify the registration if the Teachers Council is satisfied that the only requirement that the teacher does not meet is the requirement for recent teaching experience (as required by section 122(d)).

    (2) If a teacher's registration is reclassified, the registration must show that it is subject to confirmation; and this Act applies as if the teacher were registered under section 124(1).

    Section 129A was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 24 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

130 Practising certificates
  • (1) Any person may apply to the Teachers Council, on a form provided by the Council, for a practising certificate.

    (1A) The Teachers Council must issue a practising certificate to every applicant who—

    • (a) is registered as a teacher; and

    • (b) has had a satisfactory police vet within the past 3 years.

    (2) A teacher's practising certificate shall show clearly that the teacher is—

    • (a) Fully registered; or

    • (b) Registered subject to confirmation; or

    • (c) Provisionally registered.

    (3) Where a teacher's registration under section 123(1) or section 124(1) of this Act is confirmed, the teacher may obtain, in place of a current practising certificate showing that the teacher is registered subject to confirmation or is provisionally registered, a practising certificate showing that the teacher is fully registered.

    (4) Unless it is sooner cancelled or expires—

    • (a) A practising certificate issued under subsection (3) of this section expires when the practising certificate in place of which it was issued would have expired:

    • (b) Except as provided in paragraph (a) of this subsection, a practising certificate issued to a teacher who already holds a current practising certificate expires on the third anniversary of the day on which the certificate already held expires:

    • (c) A practising certificate issued to a teacher who does not already hold a current practising certificate expires on the third anniversary of the day it is issued:

    • (d) A practising certificate expires when the holder's registration expires.

    (5) A practising certificate expires when its holder's registration is cancelled.

    (6) If a teacher applies to renew his or her practising certificate, the Teachers Council may issue a renewed practising certificate only if it is satisfied that the teacher—

    • (a) continues to meet the criteria for registration; and

    • (b) has satisfactory recent teaching experience; and

    • (c) has had a satisfactory police vet within the past 3 years; and

    • (d) has completed satisfactory professional development during the past 3 years.

    Subsection (1) was substituted, and subsection (1A) was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 30 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(b) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (6) was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 30(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(b) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

Limited authority to teach

  • The heading Limited Authority to Teach was inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

130A Purpose of limited authority to teach
  • Where any person has skills and experiences that are appropriate to advance the learning of a student or group of students in any particular institution, but who may not have a specific qualification normally associated with teaching, and provided that person meets the tests set out in section 130B of this Act, that person shall on application to the Teachers Council, be granted a limited authority to teach.

    Sections 130A to 130H were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Section 130A was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

130B Limited authority to teach
  • (1) Any person may apply to the Teachers Council, on a form provided by it for the purpose, for limited authority to teach.

    (2) The Teachers Council shall authorise an applicant if (and only if) satisfied that the applicant—

    • (a) Is of good character; and

    • (b) Is fit to be a teacher; and

    • (c) Is likely to be a satisfactory teacher.

    (3) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, and subsection (2) of section 130E of this Act, a person who has previously been authorised may be authorised again, whether before or after the expiry or cancellation of the previous authorisation.

    Sections 130A to 130H were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Section 130B was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board in both places where they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

130C Determining character and likely teaching ability
  • (1) In determining—

    • (a) Whether or not a person is of good character; or

    • (b) Whether or not a person is fit to be a teacher; or

    • (c) Whether or not a person is likely to be a satisfactory teacher,—

    the Teachers Council shall take into account and give due weight to—

    • (d) The purpose of the limited authority to teach as set out in section 130A of this Act; and

    • (e) the views of the professional leader of the school, early childhood service, or other educational institution at which the person has been employed; and

    • f) if the person is the professional leader of a school, early childhood service, or other educational institution, the views of his or her employer; and

    • (g) Any relevant skills and experiences of the applicant; and

    • (h) Any other relevant matters.

    (2) For the purpose of determining whether a person is of good character and fit to be a teacher, the Teachers Council must obtain a police vet of the person.

    (3) Subsection (2) does not limit any other matters that the Teachers Council may take into account in determining good character and fitness to be a teacher.

    Sections 130A to 130H were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Section 130C was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (1)(e) and (f) were substituted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsections (2) and (3) were inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 31 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(b) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

130D Appeals from decisions
  • (1) Any person who is dissatisfied with all or any part of a decision of the Teachers Council under section 130B (whether a decision to act or a decision to refuse to act) may, within 28 days of receiving notice of the decision from the Teachers Council or any longer period the Court (on application made before or after the end of the period) allows, appeal against the decision to a District Court.

    (2) Subsections (3) to (7) of section 126 of this Act apply to every appeal under subsection (1) of this section as if it is an appeal under subsection (1) of that section.

    Sections 130A to 130H and associated headings were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98). See also section 9(3) of that Act as to the transitional provisions.

    Section 130D was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board in both places where they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by omitting the words or section 130G of this Act. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

130E Period of authorisation
  • (1) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, a teacher's authorisation expires after 12 months.

    (2) Notwithstanding subsection (1) of this section, the Teachers Council may grant the authorisation for a period longer than 12 months.

    Sections 130A to 130H were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98). See also section 9(3) of that Act as to the transitional provisions.

    The heading to section 130E was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

130F Teachers Council to keep list
  • The Teachers Council shall keep a list of people for the time being authorised.

    Sections 130A to 130H and associated headings were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Section 130F was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

130G Cancellation of authorisation
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 130A to 130H were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Section 130G was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board in both places where they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Section 130G was repealed, as from 1 September 2004, by section 32 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(b) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

130H Fees and costs
  • (1) The Teachers Council may from time to time by notice in the Gazette, with the written approval of the Minister, fix fees for the granting of limited authority to teach.

    (2) Notwithstanding anything in this Act, the Teachers Council may refuse to grant any person a limited authority to teach until the appropriate fee has been paid.

    (3) Where the Teachers Council cancels a limited authority to teach, it may, by written notice to the person concerned, require the person to pay the Teachers Council any reasonable costs specified in the notice that were incurred by the Teachers Council in dealing with the proposal to cancel the authority or with the cancellation itself.

    (4) The Teachers Council may recover from any person as a debt due to it costs required by subsection (3) of this section to be paid to the Teachers Council by that person.

    Sections 130A to 130H were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 8 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Section 130H was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board wherever they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

Teacher Registration Board

  • The heading Teacher Registration Board was repealed, as from 1 February 2002, by section 33 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

131 Teacher Registration Board
132 Membership of Registration Board
  • [Repealed]

    Subsection (3) was substituted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 11 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Sections 131 to 135 were repealed, as from 1 February 2002, by section 33 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(c) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

133 Certain people ineligible to be members
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 131 to 135 were repealed, as from 1 February 2002, by section 33 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(c) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    The reference to the Mental Health (Compulsory Assessment and Treatment) Act 1992 in paragraph (b) was substituted, as from 1 November 1992, for a reference to the Mental Health Act 1969 pursuant to section 137 Mental Health (Compulsory Assessment and Treatment) Act 1992 (1992 No 46).

134 Co-opted members
135 Powers of Registration Board
135A Teachers Council may disclose certain information
  • The management of any registered early childhood centre (other than a free kindergarten) and the managers of any registered private school may ask the Teachers Council to comment on any person who is a prospective employee; and in that case the Teachers Council may—

    • (a) Make in respect of that person any inquiry it might have made if that person had applied for registration as a teacher:

    • (b) Disclose to the management any information it holds or has obtained about that person.

    Section 135A was inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 12 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Section 135A and the heading to section 135A was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board wherever they appear, and by substituting the words that is not an early childhood education and care service for the words (other than a free kindergarten) and the managers of any registered private school. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Paragraph (b) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by omitting the words or managers. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

136 Teachers Council may charge fees and impose costs
  • (1) The Teachers Council may from time to time by notice in the Gazette, with the written approval of the Minister, fix fees for registration as a teacher or for the issue of practising certificates; and different fees may be fixed—

    • (a) In respect of registration effected in different circumstances; and

    • (b) For practising certificates of different kinds.

    (2) Notwithstanding anything in this Act, the Teachers Council may refuse to register a person as a teacher or issue a practising certificate until the appropriate fee has been paid.

    (3) Where the Teachers Council cancels a teacher's registration it may, by written notice to the teacher, require the teacher to pay the Teachers Council any reasonable costs specified in the notice that were incurred by the Teachers Council in dealing with the proposal to cancel the registration or with the cancellation itself.

    (4) The Teachers Council may recover from a teacher as a debt due to it costs required under subsection (3) of this section to be paid to the Teachers Council by the teacher.

    Section 136 and the heading to section 136 was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board wherever they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

137 Offences
  • (1) Every person commits an offence, and is liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding $2,000, who—

    • (a) Makes to the Teachers Council any statement as to any person's qualifications or experience that would amount to perjury if made on oath in judicial proceedings; or

    • (b) Not being a registered teacher uses, or permits to be used, in connection with the person's name or business, the words registered teacher, or any words or initials intended or likely to make any other person believe that the person is a registered teacher; or

    • (c) Wilfully makes, or causes to be made, a false entry in or falsification of the register or a practising certificate; or

    • (d) Falsely represents a document that is not a practising certificate to be a practising certificate; or

    • (e) Falsely represents a document that is not a limited authority to teach to be a limited authority to teach; or

    • (f) Is appointed to or continues to be employed in a position, knowing that the appointment or employment is contrary to section 120A or section 120B of this Act; or

    • (g) [Repealed]

    • (h) Being a person who holds neither a practising certificate nor a limited authority to teach, in any calendar year continues in the employment of an employer in a teaching position after the sum of—

      • (i) The period or periods for which that person has already during that year been employed by the employer in a teaching position or positions; and

      • (ii) Any period or periods for which that person has already during that year been employed by any other employer in a teaching position or positions; and

      • (iii) Any period or periods for which that person has during that year been employed as a teacher by the management of an early childhood education and care service,—

      is not less than 20 half-days, or any greater number of half-days the Teachers Council has allowed that person (each being a half-day on which a school or early childhood education and care service at which the person was then employed was open for instruction); or

    • (i) Being a person who holds neither a practising certificate nor a limited authority to teach, in any calendar year continues in the employment of the management of a early childhood education and care service as a teacher after the sum of—

      • (i) The period or periods for which that person has already during that year been employed by the management as a teacher; and

      • (ii) Any period or periods for which that person has already during that year been employed by the management of any other early childhood education and care service as a teacher; and

      • (iii) Any period or periods for which that person has during that year been employed in a teaching position by the employer at a state school,—

      is not less than 20 half-days, or any greater number of half-days the Teachers Council has allowed that person (each being a half-day on which an early childhood education and care service or school at which the person was then employed was open for instruction).

    (2) Every person commits an offence, and is liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding $5,000, who appoints any person to a position, or continues to employ any person in a position, knowing that the appointment or employment is contrary to section 120A or section 120B.

    Compare: 1987 No 177 s 14 (new s 136)

    Subsection (1)(d) was substituted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 10(3) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Paragraphs (e) and (f) were inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 27 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Paragraphs (e) and (f) were repealed, as from 8 August 1991, by section 3(2) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

    New subsection (1)(e) and (f) were inserted, and subsection (1)(g) to (i) were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 10(3) Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Subsection (1)(f) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by omitting the words or section 315 of this Act. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (1)(g) was repealed, as from 1 February 2002, by section 34(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(c) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (1)(h) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words an employer for the words a school authority, and by substituting the words early childhood education and care service for the word kindergarten. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (1)(h)(i) and (ii) were amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the word employer for the words school authority in both places where they occur. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (1)(h)(iii) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words education and care service for the words centre that is a kindergarten for the purposes of section 315(1) of this Act. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (1)(i) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words early childhood education and care service for the word free kindergarten in both places where they appear, and by substituting the words an early childhood education and care service for the words a kindergarten. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (1)(i)(iii) was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words employer at a state school for the words school authority (within the meaning of section 2 of this Act) of a state school (within the meaning of that section). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (2) was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 34(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(c) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Section 137 was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board wherever they appear. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

138 Council to notify cancellations
  • [Repealed]

    Section 138 was substituted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 13 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    The heading to section 138 was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the word Council for the word Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Section 138 was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words Teachers Council for the words Registration Board, and by substituting the words employer is for the words school authority, and the management of every free kindergarten (within the meaning of section 315(1) of this Act), are. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Section 138 was repealed, as from 1 September 2004, by section 35 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(c) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

138A Notification of convictions
  • [Repealed]

    Sections 138A and 138B were inserted, as from 1 January 1997, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 98).

    Section 138A was amended, as from 1 February 2002, by section 82(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the word Teachers Council for the word Registration Board. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(f) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Sections 138A and 138B were repealed, as from 1 September 2004, by section 36 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

138B Notification by certain employers
139 Transitional provisions
  • (1) This Act shall apply to any period of registration as a teacher under the Education Act 1964 as if it was a period of registration under this Act.

    (2) [Repealed]

    (3) [Repealed]

    (4) [Repealed]

    (5) For the purposes only of sections 122 to 124 of this Act, employment before the commencement of this section in a registered school (within the meaning of the Education Act 1964) shall be deemed to have been employment in the general education system.

    Subsections (2) to (4) were repealed, as from 8 August 1991, by section 3(2)(a) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1991 (1991 No 90).

Part 10A
New Zealand Teachers Council

139AA Purpose of Part
  • The purpose of this Part is to provide professional leadership in teaching, enhance the professional status of teachers in schools and early childhood education, and contribute to a safe and high quality teaching and learning environment for children and other learners.

    Sections 139AA to 139AJ were inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 70 to 77 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

139AB Interpretation
  • (1) In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    authorised person means the holder of a limited authority to teach given under Part 10

    Complaints Assessment Committee means the Complaints Assessment Committee established by rules

    disciplinary body means either or both of the Complaints Assessment Committee and the Disciplinary Tribunal

    Disciplinary Tribunal means the Disciplinary Tribunal established by rules

    rules means rules made under section 139AJ

    serious misconduct means conduct by a teacher—

    • (a) that—

      • (i) adversely affects, or is likely to adversely affect, the well-being or learning of 1 or more students; or

      • (ii) reflects adversely on the teacher's fitness to be a teacher; and

    • (b) is of a character or severity that meets the Teachers Council's criteria for reporting serious misconduct

    teacher includes—

    • (a) a registered teacher; and

    • (b) a former registered teacher; and

    • (c) an authorised person; and

    • (d) a former authorised person.

    (2) Terms in this Part that are defined in section 120 have the meanings given to them by that section.

    Sections 139AA to 139AJ were inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 70 to 77 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

Teachers council

139AC New Zealand Teachers Council established
  • (1) The New Zealand Teachers Council (Teachers Council) is established.

    (2) The Teachers Council is owned by the Crown.

    (3) The Teachers Council is a Crown entity for the purposes of section 7 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (4) The Crown Entities Act 2004 applies to the Teachers Council except to the extent that this Act expressly provides otherwise.

    (5) The members of the Teachers Council are the board for the purposes of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Sections 139AA to 139AJ were inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 70 to 77 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Section 139AC was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

139AD Composition of Teachers Council
  • (1) The Teachers Council comprises 11 members, as follows:

    • (a) 4 members appointed by the Minister:

    • (b) 4 elected members (each of whom must be a registered teacher holding a current practising certificate), being—

      • (i) 1 teacher representing the early childhood sector, elected by teachers from that sector; and

      • (ii) 1 teacher representing the primary sector, elected by teachers from that sector; and

      • (iii) 1 teacher representing the secondary sector, elected by teachers from that sector; and

      • (iv) 1 principal, elected by principals:

    • (c) 1 person appointed by the Minister on the nomination of the New Zealand Educational Institute:

    • (d) 1 person appointed by the Minister on the nomination of the New Zealand Post Primary Teachers' Association:

    • (e) 1 person appointed by the Minister on the nomination of the New Zealand School Trustees Association.

    (1A) The Minister must appoint 1 of the members appointed under subsection (1)(a) as chairperson, despite clause 1 of Schedule 5 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (2) The elected members of the Teachers Council must be elected in accordance with rules made under section 139AJ(1)(a) by registered teachers who each hold a current practising certificate.

    (3) The first elections for the elected members must be held as soon as practicable after the commencement of this section but, until the date on which the elected members take office following those elections, the positions of the elected members must be filled by persons appointed by the Minister.

    (4) In order to provide for the staggered turnover of members, the Minister may specify, when appointing members to hold office when this section comes into force, which members are to hold office for 3 years (which is the standard term of office), and which are to hold office for 18 months.

    (5) An elected member becomes a member of the Council on the date fixed by the Council as the date on which elected members take office.

    (6) The term of office of every elected member is 3 years.

    (7) Despite subsection (6), every elected member continues in office until his or her successor comes into office.

    Sections 139AA to 139AJ were inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 70 to 77 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsection (1)(a) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by omitting the words , 1 of whom the Minister must appoint as chairperson.

    Subsection (1A) was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsections (5) to (7) were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

139AE Functions of Teachers Council
  • The functions of the Teachers Council are as follows:

    • (a) to provide professional leadership to teachers and others involved in schools and early childhood education:

    • (b) to encourage best teaching practice:

    • (c) to carry out the functions under Part 10 relating to teacher registration:

    • (d) to determine standards for teacher registration and the issue of practising certificates:

    • (e) to establish and maintain standards for qualifications that lead to teacher registration:

    • (f) to conduct, in conjunction with quality assurance agencies, approvals of teacher education programmes on the basis of the standards referred to in paragraph (e):

    • (g) to develop a code of ethics for teachers, after consultation with the State Services Commissioner and after having regard to any code of conduct issued by him or her under section 57 of the State Sector Act 1988:

    • (h) to exercise the disciplinary functions in this Part relating to teacher misconduct and reports of teacher convictions:

    • (i) to set the criteria for reporting serious misconduct and for reporting on competence issues:

    • (j) to exercise the functions in this Part relating to teacher competence:

    • (k) to co-ordinate a system providing for the vetting by the police of all teachers and other people employed in schools and early childhood services:

    • (l) to identify research priorities and, where appropriate, to promote and sponsor research according to those priorities:

    • (m) to exercise any other functions conferred on it by this Act, any other enactment, or the Minister in accordance with section 112 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Sections 139AA to 139AJ were inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 70 to 77 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Paragraph (g) was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 18 State Sector Amendment Act (No 2) 2004 (2004 No 114).

    Paragraph (m) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by inserting the words in accordance with section 112 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

139AF Powers of Teachers Council
  • (1) [Repealed]

    (2) [Repealed]

    (3) The Teachers Council may not charge a commercial rate for any goods and services that it provides unless the Minister has given his or her approval.

    (4) The Teachers Council may, by notice in the Gazette, fix fees for all or any of the following:

    • (a) any addition or alteration to a person's registration as a teacher:

    • (b) any addition or alteration to, or extension of, a person's limited authority to teach:

    • (c) any addition or alteration to a person's practising certificate:

    • (d) inspection of the register of registered teachers or any other register or any other documents kept by the Teachers Council that are open to inspection:

    • (e) the supply of a copy of any entry in a register or other document referred to in paragraph (d):

    • (f) any other matter for which this Act provides that the Teachers Council may charge fees.

    Sections 139AA to 139AJ were inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 70 to 77 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsections (1) and (2) were repealed, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (3) was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

139AG Ministerial directions
  • (1) The Minister may not give directions to the Council in respect of its functions under section 139AE(a) and (b) (which relate to professional leadership and best teaching practice).

    (2) Subsection (1) is an exception to section 104 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (3) [Repealed]

    (4) [Repealed]

    (5) [Repealed]

    Sections 139AA to 139AJ were inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 70 to 77 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

    Subsections (1) and (2) were substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsections (3) to (5) were repealed, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

139AH Advisory groups
  • (1) The Teachers Council must establish—

    • (a) an early childhood advisory group; and

    • (b) a Maori-medium advisory group.

    (2) The Council may establish any other advisory groups, whether on an ongoing basis or for a fixed term.

    (3) The Council must determine the membership of advisory groups, and their terms of reference, budget, and other matters necessary to ensure their efficient and effective operation.

    (4) The Council must have regard to advice given by an advisory group about any matter within its area of expertise.

    Sections 139AA to 139AJ were inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 70 to 77 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

139AI Code of ethics
  • (1) The code of ethics prepared under this section is binding on all teachers who hold a practising certificate and on all authorised persons.

    (2) The Teachers Council must, as soon as practicable after the first elected members of the Council take office, prepare a code of ethics for teachers.

    (3) When preparing the code of ethics (and any amendments to it), the Teachers Council must take all reasonable steps to consult with those who will be bound by it.

    (4) The code of ethics must be signed by the chairperson of the Teachers Council and—

    • (a) notice of it must be given in the Gazette; and

    • (b) the notice must say where copies of the code may be obtained free of charge; and

    • (c) the notice must give the date on which the code comes into force, which must be a date on or after the date of the Gazette notice; and

    • (d) the Teachers Council must take all reasonable steps to ensure that those bound by the code hear of it and are able to obtain copies of it.

    (5) The Council may amend the code of ethics, and every amendment—

    • (a) must be notified in the Gazette; and

    • (b) forms part of the code on the date specified in the notice as the date on which it will come into force.

    Sections 139AA to 139AJ were inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 70 to 77 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

139AJ Teachers Council to make rules
  • (1) The Teachers Council must, as soon as practicable after the commencement of this section, make rules providing for—

    • (a) the conduct of elections for elected members and the establishment of rolls for the election of each elected member; and

    • (b) a Complaints Assessment Committee to—

      • (i) investigate complaints of misconduct about, and reports of convictions of, teachers; and

      • (ii) carry out any other function, and exercise any power given under this Act or delegated to it by the Teachers Council; and

    • (c) a Disciplinary Tribunal to conduct hearings relating to misconduct by, and convictions of, individual teachers, and to exercise the powers given under this Act; and

    • (d) the practices and procedures of the disciplinary bodies; and

    • (e) the procedures of the Teachers Council for dealing with reports received under the mandatory reporting provisions in sections 139AK, 139AL, 139AM, 139AN, and 139AP; and

    • (f) the procedures relating to police vets, and in particular the rights of persons who are vetted; and

    • (g) the amendment and replacement of rules made under this subsection, including any consultation require-ments.

    (2) The Teachers Council may make rules for any other purpose relating to the performance of its functions.

    (3) When preparing rules (and any amendments to them), the Teachers Council must take all reasonable steps to consult with those affected by the rules.

    (4) When rules are made under this section,—

    • (a) notice of them must be given in the Gazette; and

    • (b) the notice must say where copies of the rules may be obtained free of charge; and

    • (c) the notice must give the date on which the rules come into force, which must be a date on or after the date of the Gazette notice; and

    • (d) the Teachers Council must take all reasonable steps to ensure that those affected by the rules hear of them and are able to obtain copies of them.

    (5) Rules made under this section are regulations for the purposes of the Regulations (Disallowance) Act 1989.

    Sections 139AA to 139AJ were inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 70 to 77 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

139AJA Delegations
  • (1) The Council may not delegate any of its functions or powers—

    • (a) to make rules:

    • (b) relating to deregistration:

    • (c) to appoint a chief executive.

    (2) This section applies despite section 73 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Sections 139AJA to 139AJC were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

139AJB Chief Executive
  • The Council must from time to time appoint a chief executive, on terms and conditions agreed between the Council and the person appointed, in accordance with section 117 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Sections 139AJA to 139AJC were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

139AJC Superannuation
  • (1) Any person who, immediately before becoming an employee of the Council, is a contributor to the Government Superannuation Fund under Part 2 or Part 2A of the Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 is deemed for the purpose of that Act to be employed in the Government service so long as he or she continues to be an employee of the Council.

    (2) The Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 applies to the person in all respects as if the person's service as an employee of the Council were Government service.

    (3) Nothing in subsection (2) entitles a person to become a contributor to the Government Superannuation Fund if the person has ceased to be a contributor.

    (4) For the purpose of applying the Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956, the chief executive of the Council is the controlling authority.

    Sections 139AJA to 139AJC were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Mandatory reporting

139AK Mandatory reporting of dismissals and resignations
  • (1) When an employer dismisses a teacher for any reason, the employer must immediately report the dismissal to the Teachers Council.

    (2) An employer must immediately report to the Teachers Council when a teacher resigns from a teaching position if, within the 12 months preceding the resignation, the employer had advised the teacher that it was dissatisfied with, or intended to investigate, any aspect of the conduct of the teacher, or the teacher's competence.

    (3) Every report under this section must be in writing, and must include,—

    • (a) in the case of a report of dismissal, the reason for the dismissal; and

    • (b) in the case of a report of a resignation,—

      • (i) a description of the conduct or competency issues that the employer had been concerned about; and

      • (ii) a report of what action (if any) the employer had taken with respect to the conduct or competency issues.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

139AL Mandatory reporting of complaints received about former employees
  • (1) The former employer of a teacher must immediately report to the Teachers Council if, within 12 months after a teacher ceases to be employed by the employer, the employer receives a complaint about the teacher's conduct or competence while he or she was an employee.

    (2) Every report under this section—

    • (a) must be in writing; and

    • (b) must set out the nature of the complaint; and

    • (c) may include any additional information that the employer considers relevant.

    (3) A former employer must not report a complaint under this section if—

    • (a) it is satisfied that the complaint is malicious, vexatious, or without any foundation; or

    • (b) the complaint is about competence, and the complaint does not meet the Teachers Council's criteria for reporting about competence issues.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

139AM Mandatory reporting of possible serious misconduct
  • (1) The employer of a teacher must immediately report to the Teachers Council if it has reason to believe that the teacher has engaged in serious misconduct.

    (2) Every report under this section must—

    • (a) be in writing; and

    • (b) include a description of the conduct of the teacher that the employer believes to be serious misconduct; and

    • (c) include a description of what action (if any) the employer has taken in relation to it.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

139AN Mandatory reporting of failure to reach required level of competence
  • (1) The employer of a teacher must immediately report to the Teachers Council if it is satisfied that, despite undertaking competency procedures with the teacher, the teacher has not reached the required level of competence.

    (2) Every report under this section must—

    • (a) be in writing; and

    • (b) include a description of the competency issues leading to the report; and

    • (c) include a description of the action that the employer has taken in relation to it.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

139AO Offence to fail to report
  • (1) An employer or former employer commits an offence and is liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding $5,000 if it fails without reasonable justification to report to the Teachers Council as required under any of sections 139AK, 139AL, 139AM, or 139N.

    (2) It is a defence to a charge under subsection (1) against the former employer of a teacher if the former employer proves that it believed on reasonable grounds that, by virtue of section 139AL(3), it was not required to report to the Teachers Council.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

139AP Mandatory reporting of convictions
  • (1) Every teacher who is convicted of an offence punishable by imprisonment for 3 months or more must, within 7 days of conviction, report the conviction to the Teachers Council.

    (2) Failure to report a conviction to the Teachers Council in accordance with subsection (1) is misconduct that may give rise to disciplinary proceedings.

    (3) The Registrar of every court must, unless the court expressly orders otherwise in a particular case, report to the Teachers Council when a person whom the Registrar believes to be, or to have been, a teacher is convicted of an offence punishable by imprisonment for 3 months or more.

    (4) If the Registrar has reported a conviction to the Teachers Council under subsection (3), then, if that conviction is subsequently quashed, the Registrar must notify the Teachers Council of that fact.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

Disciplinary functions

139AQ Disciplinary bodies
  • (1) The constitution of the disciplinary bodies must be set out in the rules, and those rules must be consistent with this section.

    (2) Both disciplinary bodies may have members who are not members of the Teachers Council.

    (3) Both disciplinary bodies may operate in panels, and more than one panel of each body may operate at any one time.

    (3A) Both disciplinary bodies must include at least one member of the Teachers Council.

    (3B) The Disciplinary Tribunal must include at least one person who is selected from a list, prepared by the Minister after consultation with the Teachers Council, of people who are neither members of the Teachers Council, nor teachers, employers, or members of an employing body.

    (3C) The majority of members on the Disciplinary Tribunal, and on every panel of the Disciplinary Tribunal, must be registered teachers.

    (4) No member of the Complaints Assessment Committee may be a member of the Disciplinary Tribunal.

    (5) Rules must provide for the replacement of any member of a disciplinary body who, in relation to a particular complaint,—

    • (a) made the complaint; or

    • (b) is otherwise in a position of conflict of interest.

    (6) When performing their functions and exercising their powers, the disciplinary bodies must act in accordance with the rules of natural justice.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

    Subsections (2) and (3) were substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 27 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsections (3A) to (3C) were inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 27 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

139AR Complaints of misconduct
  • (1) A person who wishes to make a complaint about the conduct of a teacher must first make the complaint to the teacher's employer, unless 1 of the circumstances in subsection (2)(a) to (d) applies.

    (2) Any person (including a parent, employer, or member of the Teachers Council) may, at any time, make a written complaint to the Teachers Council about the conduct of a teacher—

    • (a) if the complaint is about a teacher who is not currently employed by an employer; or

    • (b) if the complainant considers, on reasonable grounds, that the employer will not be able to deal with the complaint effectively because of an actual or perceived conflict of interest; or

    • (c) if the complaint has been made to the employer, but the complainant is not satisfied with the way in which the complaint is being, or was, dealt with; or

    • (d) in any other exceptional circumstance.

    (3) A complaint under this section by an employer or former employer must include a report of any action that the employer or former employer has taken in relation to it.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

139AS Complaints and reports relating to teacher conduct
  • (1) The Teachers Council must refer to the Complaints Assessment Committee—

    • (a) every report received by it under any of sections 139AK, 139AL, or 139AM that relates to teacher conduct; and

    • (b) [Repealed]

    • (c) every complaint received by it under section 139AR.

    (2) In relation to a complaint received under section 139AR from a person other than the current employer of the teacher concerned,—

    • (a) if the Complaints Assessment Committee considers that the complaint should have been sent first to the teacher's employer, it must refer the matter to the employer; and

    • (b) in any other case, it must notify the employer (if the teacher is currently employed by an employer) that it has received a complaint about the teacher.

    (3) An employer to whom a complaint is referred under subsection (2), or who is required to provide information in the course of an investigation by the Complaints Assessment Committee, must report to the Committee as required by it.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

    Subsection (1)(a) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 28(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the word relates for the word relate.

    Subsection (1)(b) was repealed, as from 17 May 2006, by section 28(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

139AT Powers of Complaints Assessment Committee
  • (1) The Complaints Assessment Committee may investigate any complaint or report referred to it under section 139AS.

    (2) Following an investigation, the Complaints Assessment Committee may, in respect of any matter other than a conviction to which section 139AV relates, do any of the following:

    • (a) dismiss the matter, or resolve to take it no further:

    • (b) refer the teacher concerned to a competency review:

    • (c) refer the teacher concerned to an impairment process which may involve assessing, and (if necessary) assisting with, an impairment:

    • (d) by agreement with the teacher and the person who made the complaint or report, do any of the following:

      • (i) censure the teacher:

      • (ii) impose conditions on the teacher's practising certificate or authority, such as (without limitation) requiring the teacher to undergo supervision or professional development:

      • (iii) suspend the teacher's practising certificate or authority for a specified period, or until specified conditions are met:

      • (iv) annotate the register or the list of authorised persons in a specified manner.

    (3) The Complaints Assessment Committee may, at any time, refer a matter to the Disciplinary Tribunal for a hearing.

    (4) The Complaints Assessment Committee must refer a matter concerning a teacher to the Disciplinary Tribunal if it is satisfied on reasonable grounds that—

    • (a) the teacher has engaged in serious misconduct; and

    • (b) the matter should be referred to the Disciplinary Tribunal.

    (5) If a matter is referred to the Disciplinary Tribunal under subsection (4), a notice must be sent to the teacher concerned setting out the charge of misconduct against him or her.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 29(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the words any matter other than a conviction to which section 139AV relates, do any of the following: for the words a complaint or report referred to it under section 139AS,—.

    Subsection (2)(d) was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 29(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsection (4) was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 29(3) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsection (5) was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 29(3) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

139AU Interim suspension to enable investigation
  • (1) For the purpose of investigating a complaint of possible serious misconduct about a teacher, the Complaints Assessment Committee may at any time apply to the Disciplinary Tribunal for an interim suspension of the teacher's practising certificate or authority.

    (2) On an application for an interim suspension, the Disciplinary Tribunal may, either with or without a hearing, suspend the teacher's practising certificate or authority for a specified period, or until specified conditions have been met, but in any case for not more than 3 months.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 31 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by inserting the word possible after the words a complaint of.

139AV Investigation by Complaints Assessment Committee of reports of convictions
  • (1) Every report of the conviction of a teacher for an offence punishable by 3 months' or more imprisonment that is received by, or comes to the attention of, the Teachers Council must be investigated by the Complaints Assessment Committee.

    (2) Following the investigation of such a conviction, the Complaints Assessment Committee may do any of the following:

    • (a) dismiss the matter, or resolve to take it no further:

    • (b) refer the teacher concerned to a competency review:

    • (c) refer the teacher concerned to an impairment process which may involve assessing, and (if necessary) assisting with, an impairment:

    • (d) by agreement with the teacher, do any of the following:

      • (i) censure the teacher:

      • (ii) impose conditions on the teacher's practising certificate or authority, such as (without limitation) requiring the teacher to undergo supervision or professional development:

      • (iii) annotate the register or the list of authorised persons in a specified manner.

    (3) If the Complaints Assessment Committee considers that the conviction may warrant action by the Disciplinary Tribunal, it must refer the report to the Disciplinary Tribunal for a hearing.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

    The heading to section 139AV was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 30(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by inserting the words by Complaints Assessment Committee after the word Investigation.

    Subsection (2) was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 30(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

139AW Powers of Disciplinary Tribunal
  • (1) Following a hearing of a charge of serious misconduct, or a hearing into the conduct of a teacher, the Disciplinary Tribunal may do any 1 or more of the following:

    • (a) any of the things that the Complaints Assessment Committee could have done under section 139AT(2):

    • (b) censure the teacher:

    • (c) impose conditions on the teacher's practising certificate or authority for a specified period:

    • (d) suspend the teacher's practising certificate or authority for a specified period, or until specified conditions are met:

    • (e) annotate the register or the list of authorised persons in a specified manner:

    • (f) impose a fine on the teacher not exceeding $3,000:

    • (g) order that the teacher's registration or authority be cancelled (see section 129(1)):

    • (h) require any party to the hearing to pay costs to any other party:

    • (i) require any party to pay a sum to the Teachers Council in respect of the costs of conducting the hearing.

    (2) Despite subsection (1), following a hearing that arises out of a report under section 139AP of the conviction of a teacher, the Disciplinary Tribunal may not do any of the things specified in paragraphs (d), (f), (h), or (i) of subsection (1).

    (3) A fine imposed on a teacher, and a sum ordered to be paid to the Teachers Council under subsection (1)(i), are recoverable as debts due to the Teachers Council.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

    Subsection (1)(g) was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 32 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

139AX Evidence at hearings
  • (1) The Disciplinary Tribunal may—

    • (a) receive evidence on oath (and for that purpose an officer or employee of the Teachers Council may administer an oath); and

    • (b) permit a person appearing as a witness before it to give evidence by written statement, and verify that statement by oath.

    (2) A hearing before the Disciplinary Tribunal is a judicial proceeding for the purposes of section 109 of the Crimes Act 1961 (which relates to punishment for perjury).

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

139AY Powers of Disciplinary Tribunal in relation to witnesses
  • (1) The Disciplinary Tribunal may require a person to do either or both of the following:

    • (a) attend and give evidence at a hearing of the Disciplinary Tribunal:

    • (b) produce any documents, records, or other information in his or her custody or control that relate to the subject matter of the hearing, whether specified by the Disciplinary Tribunal or not.

    (2) A requirement under subsection (1) must be in writing signed by the chairperson of the Disciplinary Tribunal.

    (3) A person required to attend a hearing is entitled to be paid, by the party calling the person (or, if called on the volition of the Disciplinary Tribunal itself, by the Teachers Council), witnesses' fees, allowances, and travelling expenses, according to the scales for the time being prescribed by regulations made under the Summary Proceedings Act 1957, and those regulations apply accordingly.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

139AZ Offences
  • (1) A person commits an offence, and is liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding $500 who, without lawful justification, fails or refuses—

    • (a) to attend and give evidence when required by the Disciplinary Tribunal; or

    • (b) to answer truly and fully any question put to him or her by a member of the Disciplinary Tribunal; or

    • (c) to produce any document, record, or other information as required by the Disciplinary Tribunal.

    (2) A person commits an offence, and is liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding $1,000, if, without lawful excuse, he or she breaches an order made by the Disciplinary Tribunal under rules made under section 139AJ that—

    • (a) provide for a hearing to be held in private; or

    • (b) provide for evidence at a hearing to be given in private; or

    • (c) impose restrictions on the publication of any information relating to a particular hearing.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

    The heading to section 139AZ was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 33(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by omitting the words relating to witnesses.

    Subsection (2) was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 33(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

139AZA Privileges and immunities
  • (1) Every person who does any of the following has the same privileges as witnesses have in a court:

    • (a) provides documents, things, or information to a disciplinary body:

    • (b) produces documents or things to a disciplinary body:

    • (c) gives evidence to, or answers questions by, a disciplinary body.

    (2) Every counsel appearing before a disciplinary body has the same privileges and immunities as counsel in a court.

    (3) If a person is represented at a hearing before the Disciplinary Tribunal by a person other than a barrister or solicitor,—

    • (a) any communications between the person and the representative in relation to the hearing are as privileged as they would have been if the representative had been a barrister or solicitor; and

    • (b) the representative is a counsel for the purposes of subsection (2).

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

139AZB Appeals
  • (1) The teacher who is the subject of a decision by the Disciplinary Tribunal made under section 139AU(2) or section 139AW, or a decision by the Teachers Council made under section 139AZC, may appeal that decision to a District Court.

    (1A) The Complaints Assessment Committee may, with the leave of the Teachers Council, appeal to a District Court against a decision of the Disciplinary Tribunal made under section 139AU(2) or section 139AW.

    (2) An appeal under this section must be made within 28 days of receipt of written notice of the decision, or any longer period that the court allows.

    (3) Subsections (3) to (7) of section 126 apply to every appeal under this section as if it were an appeal under subsection (1) of section 126.

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

    Subsection (1) was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 34 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsection (1A) was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 34 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Review of competence

139AZC Complaints about competence
  • (1) A person who wishes to make a complaint about a teacher's competence must first make the complaint to the teacher's employer, unless 1 of the circumstances in subsection (2)(a) to (d) applies.

    (2) Any person (including a parent, employer, or member of the Teachers Council) may, at any time, make a written complaint to the Teachers Council about the competence of a teacher—

    • (a) if the complaint is about a teacher who is not currently employed by an employer; or

    • (b) if the complainant considers, on reasonable grounds, that the employer will not be able to deal with the complaint effectively because of an actual or perceived conflict of interest; or

    • (c) if the complaint has been made to the employer, but the complainant is not satisfied with the way in which the complaint is being, or was, dealt with; or

    • (d) in any other exceptional circumstance.

    (3) A complaint under this section by an employer or former employer must include a description of the competency issues leading to the complaint and the actions (if any) that the employer or former employer has undertaken in relation to them.

    (4) If the Teachers Council considers that a complaint under this section should have been sent first to the teacher's employer, it must refer the matter to the employer; and in any other case, it must notify the employer (if the teacher is currently employed by an employer) that it has received a complaint about the teacher.

    (5) When the Teachers Council refers a complaint to an employer, the employer must report as required by the Teachers Council.

    (6) If the Teachers Council is satisfied that the employer has not responded, or has not been able to respond, to the complaint in a satisfactory way, the Teachers Council may investigate the complaint.

    (7) When a complaint about competence is made by a member of the Teachers Council, that member may not be involved in any investigation of the complaint.

    (8) If, after investigation, the Teachers Council is satisfied that the teacher has not attained the required level of competence, it may—

    • (a) impose conditions on the teacher's practising certificate or authority:

    • (b) refer the teacher to an impairment process involving the assessment of, and (if necessary) assistance with, an impairment:

    • (c) order that the teacher's registration or authority be cancelled (see section 129(1)).

    Sections 139AK to 139AZC were inserted by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See clause 2(2) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384) as to those sections coming into force on a date to be appointed by Order in Council. Sections 139AK to 139AZC came into force, as from 1 September 2004, pursuant to clause 3 Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2004 (SR 2004/235).

    Subsection (8)(c) was substituted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 35 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

Police vetting

139AZD Teachers Council must co-ordinate police vetting
  • (1) The Teachers Council must establish a system for co-ordinating police vetting that is requested by—

    • (a) the Teachers Council, in relation to—

      • (i) teacher registration and the issue of practising certificates; and

      • (ii) the granting of limited authorities to teach; and

    • (b) Boards of state schools, and the management of schools registered under section 35A, in relation to—

      • (i) current and prospective non-teaching and unregistered employees; and

      • (ii) contractors who work regularly at the school during school hours; and

    • (c) the management of early childhood services, in relation to—

      • (i) current and prospective non-teaching and unregistered employees; and

      • (ii) contractors who work regularly at the service during normal opening hours.

    (2) A copy of the result of the police vet of a person must be given to both the person or body that requested it and the person who is the subject of the vet.

    (3) The Teachers Council may charge fees to any Board or management that requests a police vet, to cover its administrative costs associated with providing vets and co-ordinating the system of police vetting.

    (4) The Teachers Council must establish internal procedures for dealing with police vets requested for its own purposes and for those requested by Boards and managements which must, in particular,—

    • (a) identify the person or office-holder within the Council to whom police vets must be sent; and

    • (b) ensure that strict confidentiality is observed for police vets.

    (5) The Teachers Council may not take adverse action in relation to a person who is the subject of a police vet until—

    • (a) the person has validated the information contained in the vet; or

    • (b) the person has been given a reasonable opportunity to validate the information, but has failed to do so within a reasonable period.

    Section 139AZD was inserted, as from 1 February 2002, by section 37(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 70 to 77 of that Act for transitional provisions. See clause 2(1)(d) Education Standards Act Commencement Order 2001 (SR 2001/384).

Part 11
Miscellaneous

139A No corporal punishment in early childhood centres or registered schools
  • (1) No person who—

    • (a) Is employed by a Board (within the meaning of section 2(1) of this Act) at or in respect of a school or institution administered by the Board; or

    • (b) Is employed by the managers (within the meaning of section 35A(1) of this Act) of a private school at or in respect of the school; or

    • (c) Is employed by the management of an early childhood centre (within the meaning of section 308(1) of this Act) at or in respect of the centre; or

    • (d) Owns, manages, or controls an early childhood centre (within the meaning of section 308(1) of this Act),—

    shall use force, by way of correction or punishment, towards any student or child enrolled at or attending the school, institution, or centre.

    (2) No person who is supervising or controlling—

    • (a) On behalf of a Board (within the meaning of section 2(1) of this Act) any student enrolled at or attending a school or institution administered by the Board; or

    • (b) On behalf of the managers (within the meaning of section 35A(1) of this Act) of a private school any student enrolled at or attending the school; or

    • (c) On behalf of the management of an early childhood centre (within the meaning of section 308(1) of this Act) any child enrolled at or attending the centre,—

    shall use force, by way of correction or punishment, towards the student or child.

    Section 139A was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 28(1) Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsections (1) and (2) were amended, as from 21 June 2007, by section 6(2) Crimes (Substituted Section 59) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 18) by omitting , unless that person is a guardian of the student or child.

139B Building Act 2004
  • (1) Where any person making an inspection under this Act believes that any building or sitework does not comply with the Building Act 2004, that person shall by notice in writing give to the appropriate territorial authority details of the respects in which the building or sitework is not believed not to comply.

    (2) For the purposes of this section, the terms building, sitework, and territorial authority, have the meanings ascribed to them by the Building Act 2004.

    Section 139B was inserted, as from 1 July 1992, by section 22(2) Building Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 99).

    Section 139B was amended, as from 31 March 2005, by section 414 Building Act 2004 (2004 No 72) by substituting the words Building Act 2004 for the words Building Act 1991 wherever they appear.. See subpart 4 of Part 5 of that Act (comprising sections 416 to 451) as to the transitional provisions.

139C Offence of insulting, abusing, or intimidating staff
  • (1) Every person commits an offence, and is liable on summary conviction to a fine not exceeding $1,000, who intentionally insults, abuses, or intimidates a teacher or member of staff of a school—

    • (a) within the presence or hearing of any student of the school; and

    • (b) while on school premises, or in any other place where students of the school are assembled for school purposes.

    (2) However, no student of the school may be charged with an offence under subsection (1).

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 195

    Sections 139C to 139E were inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 36 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

139D School transport
  • (1) The Secretary for Education may assist in the provision of school transport by doing any of the following:

    • (a) paying schools to provide school transport to their students:

    • (b) arranging transport providers to provide school transport:

    • (c) contributing to the cost of parents providing school transport.

    (2) In this section,—

    school means registered schools, early childhood services (as defined in section 120), and certified playgroups

    school transport means the transport of students to and from school, to and from any educational activity approved by the Secretary, or both.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 ss 201A–201D

    Sections 139C to 139E were inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 36 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

139E Bonds for trainee teachers
  • (1) The Minister may enter into an agreement under this section with any person who undertakes teacher training.

    (2) The agreement must provide for—

    • (a) payment by the Minister to the person of an amount of money on condition that the person will work in New Zealand as a teacher, on completion of the teacher training, for a specified period; and

    • (b) an undertaking by the person that, if he or she defaults on the condition, he or she will repay (in full or on a pro-rata basis, as determined under the agreement) the amount paid under the agreement.

    (3) The Minister may require that the agreement be signed by a guarantor for the person, in which case the guarantor is jointly and severally liable with the person under the agreement.

    (4) [Repealed]

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 197

    Sections 139C to 139E were inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 36 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Section 139E(4): repealed, on 20 September 2007, by section 4 of the Education Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 52).

140 Initial appointment of primary teachers
  • [Repealed]

    Section 140 was repealed, as from 19 December 1998, by section 32 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

141 Consequential amendments to Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975
142 Other consequential amendments, repeals, revocations, and savings
  • (1) The provisions of the Education Act 1964 specified in Schedule 9 to this Act are hereby consequentially amended in the manner indicated in it.

    (2) The enactments specified in Schedule 10 to this Act are hereby consequentially amended in the manner indicated in it.

    (3) The enactments specified in Schedule 11 to this Act are hereby consequentially repealed.

    (4) The regulations specified in Schedule 12 to this Act are hereby consequentially revoked.

    (5) The repeal by subsection (3) of this section of section 12 of the Education Amendment Act 1932-33 does not affect the proviso to section 2 of the Wellington College and Girls' High School Act 1887.

143 Education Boards and Secondary Schools Councils abolished
  • (1) Every Education Board and Secondary Schools Council established, or deemed to have been established, under the Education Act 1964 is hereby abolished.

    (2) All rights, assets, liabilities, and debts that an Education Board or Secondary Schools Council had immediately before the commencement of this section shall be deemed to have become rights, assets, liabilities, and debts of the Minister.

    (3) [Repealed]

    (4) Notwithstanding subsection (2) of this section, where rights and liabilities under a contract of an Education Board or Secondary Schools Council have become rights and liabilities of the Minister, the Minister may, by notice in writing to the other party or parties to the contract and to the Board or Boards concerned, declare the Board or Boards to be successors to the Education Board or Secondary Schools Council in relation to the contract; and in that case, all the Minister's rights and liabilities under the contract shall be deemed to have become rights and liabilities of the Board or Boards.

    (5) For the avoidance of doubt, it is hereby declared that the Minister may, without further authority than this section, give or transfer to, or vest in, the board of a school formerly administered by an Education Board or Secondary Schools Council any asset (including land)—

    • (a) Formerly owned by the Education Board or Secondary Schools Council; and

    • (b) Vested in the Minister by subsection (2) of this section,—

    unincumbered, or subject to any incumbrance.

    Subsection (3) was repealed, as from 21 April 2005, by section 67(1) Public Records Act 2005 (2005 No 40).

    Subsection (5) was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 29 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

144 Department of Education abolished
  • (1) The Department of Education that existed immediately before the commencement of this Part of this Act is hereby abolished.

    (2) All references in—

    • (a) Any Act, regulation, or other enactment, passed, made or enacted before the commencement of this Part of this Act; or

    • (b) Any contract, agreement, deed, instrument, application, licence, notice, or other document entered into, made, granted, given, or executed before that commencement,—

    to the Department of Education, or to the Director-General or Director of Education, shall be read, respectively, as references to the Ministry or the Secretary.

144A Secretary may require information for proper administration of Act
  • (1) The Secretary may, by written notice to—

    • (a) The Board of any state school (within the meaning of section 2(1) of this Act); or

    • (b) The management of any chartered care arranger or early childhood centre (within the meaning of section 308(1) of this Act); or

    • (c) The managers (within the meaning of section 35A(1) of this Act) of any private school registered under that section,—

    require the Board, management, or managers to give the Secretary, within a time specified in the notice, any information specified in the notice; and the Board, management, or managers shall within that time give the Secretary in writing all information so required that is reasonably necessary or desirable for the Secretary to have for the proper administration of this Act.

    (1A) Information required by the Secretary under this section that identifies individuals may be used only for the following purposes:

    • (a) statistical purposes:

    • (b) ensuring that institutions and students receive relevant resourcing:

    • (c) monitoring, and ensuring students' rights in respect of, enrolment and attendance.

    (2) For the purposes of section 35A(1) of this Act, information—

    • (a) Required under subsection (1) of this section to be given to the Secretary; and

    • (b) [Repealed]

    • (c) Reasonably necessary or desirable for the Secretary to have for the proper administration of this Act,—

    is relevant to the question of whether or not a registered school is efficient.

    Section 144A was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 30 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    The heading to section 144A was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 38(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words proper administration of the Act for the words statistical purposes. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 38(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the word information for the words statistical information (not being information that identifies, or discloses information about, any individual person). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (1A) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 38(3) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 38(3) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by omitting the word statistical, and by repealing paragraph (b). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

144B Purpose of sections 144C to 144E
  • The purpose of sections 144C to 144E is to help ensure the safety of students who board at hostels.

    Sections 144B to 144E were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 39 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

144C Regulations about school hostels
  • (1) The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations for all or any of the following purposes:

    • (a) adopting minimum standards that apply to hostel premises and facilities, whether the regulations set out the standards themselves or adopt standards contained in other documents:

    • (b) adopting codes of practice relating to the management of hostels, whether the regulations set out the codes themselves or adopt codes contained in other documents:

    • (c) prescribing offences for failing to comply with minimum standards or codes of practice adopted by regulations, and providing for a penalty on summary conviction for any such offence to be a fine not exceeding $10,000:

    • (d) providing for exemptions from the application of minimum standards or codes of practice:

    • (e) prescribing a system of licensing for hostels, which may include provisions—

      • (i) providing for different sorts of licences:

      • (ii) setting out the conditions to be met before a licence may be issued:

      • (iii) prescribing the circumstances in which conditions may be imposed on a licence:

      • (iv) setting out the conditions or type of conditions that may attach to a licence:

      • (v) prohibiting students from boarding at an unlicensed hostel:

      • (vi) prohibiting the payment of a boarding bursary, or any government subsidy relating to the cost of boarding at a hostel, in respect of a student boarding at an unlicensed hostel:

      • (vii) prescribing offences for failure to comply with all or any licence conditions, and providing for a penalty on summary conviction for any such offence to be a fine not exceeding $10,000:

      • (viii) providing for the suspension or cancellation of any licence:

      • (ix) establishing a licensing body:

      • (x) prescribing fees payable on application for, or renewal of, a licence, and for the return or refund of any fees in specified circumstances:

    • (f) establishing a complaints procedure relating to complaints by students, parents, or Boards, about hostels:

    • (g) providing for any other matters necessary or expedient for giving effect to the purpose described in section 144B.

    (2) Regulations made under subsection (1) may relate to all hostels, individual hostels, hostels of specified classes, or parts of hostels.

    Sections 144B to 144E were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 39 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

144D Inspection of hostels
  • (1) An authorised person may at any reasonable time do any or all of the following:

    • (a) enter any hostel premises and inspect the premises and facilities:

    • (b) inspect, and make and remove copies of, any information relating to the management of the hostel:

    • (c) require any person at a hostel to make or provide statements, in whatever form or manner is reasonable in the circumstances, about any matter relating to the safety of students who board at the hostel.

    (2) An authorised person may exercise the powers in subsection (1) only for the purpose of monitoring compliance with minimum standards, codes of practice, licences, or licence conditions.

    (3) The person in charge (or apparent charge) of the hostel must, if an authorised person requests it, co-operate in allowing the authorised person access to the premises, facilities, and information relating to the management of the hostel, including assisting the authorised person to copy (in usable form) any information required for the inspection.

    (4) The person in charge (or apparent charge) of a hostel commits an offence and is liable upon summary conviction to a fine not exceeding $5,000 if he or she fails, without reasonable excuse, to comply with subsection (3).

    (5) An authorised person may not enter or inspect the room or sleeping area of a student accommodated at the hostel unless—

    • (a) the authorised person believes on reasonable grounds that entry or inspection is necessary for a purpose specified in subsection (2); and

    • (b) prior notice of the inspection is given to the student, and the purpose of the inspection is explained; and

    • (c) the student is present during the inspection.

    Sections 144B to 144E were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 39 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

144E Authorised person for purpose of section 144D
  • (1) The Minister may, by notice in writing, appoint any person as an authorised person for the purpose of exercising the powers in section 144D.

    (2) An authorisation under subsection (1) must state—

    • (a) the name of the authorised person; and

    • (b) the powers that he or she may exercise under section 144D; and

    • (c) the date on which the authorisation was given, and the date (if any) on which it expires.

    (3) When an authorised person is exercising powers under section 144D, he or she must carry a copy of his or her authorisation, and must show it,—

    • (a) on entering a hostel to be inspected, to the person in charge, or apparent charge, of the hostel; and

    • (b) if the authorised person wishes to speak to any person in connection with the inspection, to that person.

    Sections 144B to 144E were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 39 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

Part 12
Establishment of schools

  • Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

145 Interpretation
  • (1) In this Part of this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Board means a Board of Trustees constituted under Part 9 of this Act; and, in relation to a state school, means the school's Board

    Community education convenor

    [Repealed]

    Community education convenor: this definition was repealed, as from 20 June 1991, by section 11(3) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Composite school means a school established under section 146 of this Act as a composite school

    Correspondence school means a school for the time being designated under section 152(1) as a correspondence school

    Correspondence school: this definition was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 33 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Integrated school means a school for the time being established as an integrated school under the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975

    Intermediate department means a department established under section 149 of this Act

    Intermediate school means a school established under section 146 of this Act as an intermediate school

    Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part of this Act

    Minister: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(5) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part of this Act

    Ministry: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(5) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Primary school means a school established under section 146 of this Act as a primary school or an intermediate school

    Secondary school means a school established under section 146 of this Act as a secondary school

    Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry

    single sex school means a school maintained wholly or principally for students of one sex; and includes a school declared by notice under section 146A to be a boys' school or a girls' school.

    single sex school: this definition was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 40 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    State school means a school that is a primary, composite, or secondary school

    Teachers college means a college established under section 106 of the Education Act 1964.

    (2) For the purposes of this Act,—

    • (aa) Every school—

      • (i) That was, or is deemed by this subsection to have been, established under section 146 of this Act; and

      • (iii) At which no male students (or female students) were enrolled in 1990,—

      shall be deemed to have been established as a girls' school (or a boys' school) under section 146 of this Act:

    • (a) Every school other than a composite school that was, on the 31st day of December 1989, a primary school within the meaning of section 2(1) of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been established under section 146 of this Act as a primary school:

    • (b) Every school other than a composite school that was, on the 31st day of December 1989, a secondary school within the meaning of section 2(1) of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been established under section 146 of this Act as a secondary school:

    • (c) Every department that was, on the 31st day of December 1989, an intermediate department within the meaning of section 2(1) of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been established under section 149 of this Act as an intermediate department:

    • (d) Every school other than a composite school that was, on the 31st day of December 1989, an intermediate school within the meaning of section 2(1) of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been established under section 146 of this Act as an intermediate school:

    • (e) Every school that was, on the 31st day of December 1989, a composite school within the meaning of section 2(1) of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been established under section 146 of this Act as a composite school.

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (2)(aa) was inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 9(3) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

146 Minister may establish schools
  • (1) Subject to section 157 of this Act and to subsection (2) of this section, the Minister may by notice in the Gazette

    • (a) Describing the place where the school is to be located; and

    • (ab) In the case of a secondary school, specifying whether it is a boys' school, a girls' school, or a co-educational school; and

    • (b) Specifying a name for the school,—

    establish a new school.

    (2) Every new school established under this section shall be established as a primary, intermediate, secondary, or composite school; and the notice establishing it shall specify which class of school it is.

    (3) A notice under subsection (1) establishing a new school may specify the class levels for which education may be given at the school and may provide for different class levels to be phased in over a specified period or periods.

    (4) A notice under subsection (1) establishing a new primary school may designate the school as a contributing school.

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (1)(ab) was inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 9(2) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Subsections (3) and (4) were inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 34 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

146A Single sex schools
  • (1) Subject to section 157 of this Act, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, declare any school to be a boys' school, a girls' school, or a co-educational school.

    (2) The declaration shall come into effect on the day 5 months after the 1st day of August after the notice is published.

    (3) Subject to section 157(2), the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, limit, in relation to a specified single sex school,—

    • (a) in the case of a boys' school, the number of girls who may enrol at it, or the proportion of the total roll of the school that may be girls:

    • (b) in the case of a girls' school, the number of boys who may enrol at it, or the proportion of the total roll of the school that may be boys.

    (4) In setting limits on a school under subsection (3), the Minister must have regard to the necessity of safeguarding the single-sex nature of the school.

    Section 146A was inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 9(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by omitting the word secondary.

    Subsections (3) and (4) were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 41 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

147 Names of state schools
  • (1) Subject to subsections (2) and (4) of this section, the name of a state school established after the 31st day of December 1989 shall be the name specified in the notice establishing it.

    (2) Subject to subsection (4) of this section, the name of a state school whose class has been changed under section 153 of this Act shall be the name specified in the last notice changing its class.

    (3) Subject to subsections (2) and (4) of this section, the name of a state school established before the 1st day of January 1990 shall be the name it had on the 1st day of December 1989.

    (4) With the Secretary's written consent, the Board of a state school may, subject to section 155(6) of this Act, by resolution, change the school's name.

    (5) The Secretary shall not withhold consent to the change of a state school's name unless satisfied that the proposed new or amended name is inappropriate.

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (5) was amended, as from 1 January 1992, by section 21 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the words proposed new or amended name is for the words name is.

148 Normal schools, etc
  • (1) Subject to section 157 of this Act, the Minister may by notice in the Gazette

    • (a) Designate one or more specified primary schools as normal or model schools for providers of pre-service teacher education:

    • (b) Designate within a specified primary school a normal or model school, or model class, for providers of pre-service teacher education:

    • (c) Revoke any designation under this section.

    (2) Nothing in subsection (1) of this section applies to an integrated school.

    (3) Every school that was on the 31st day of December 1989 designated a normal or model school under section 72 of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed to have been designated a normal school under this section.

    (4) Every normal or model school, or model class, that was on the 31st day of December 1989 designated within a primary school under section 72 of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed so to have been designated under this Act.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 72

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (1)(a) and (b) were amended, as from 23 July 1990, pursuant to section 162(1)(b) of this Act by substituting the words teachers college of education for the words teachers college.

    Subsection (1)(a) and (b) were amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 35 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the words providers of pre-service teacher education for the words a specified college of education. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

149 Intermediate departments
  • Subject to section 157 of this Act, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette,—

    • (a) Establish an intermediate department—

      • (i) Within a composite school that is not an integrated school; or

      • (ii) To form part of a secondary school that is not an integrated school; or

    • (b) Disestablish any intermediate department.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 73

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

150 Contributing schools
  • (1) Subject to section 157 of this Act, and to section 33 of the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975, the Minister shall from time to time determine which primary schools are to be contributing schools.

    (2) Where the Minister determines that a primary school is to be or cease to be a contributing school, the Minister shall give the Board of the primary school written notice of the determination.

    (3) Subject to subsection (4) of this section, while a primary school is a contributing school, the Board shall limit the education given at the school to the education described in the syllabus for—

    • (a) Classes not higher than standard 4; and

    • (b) Where the Minister so allows in a notice under subsection (2) of this section, classes not higher than form 1.

    (4) If satisfied that there are enrolled at a contributing school students whose education at the school is wholly or in part bilingual, the Minister may, by written notice to the Board specifying the languages concerned, permit the Board to give education to such students in accordance with conditions specified in the notice.

    (5) Every school that was on the 31st day of December 1989 a contributing school of any other school under section 74 of the Education Act 1964 shall be deemed so to have been designated under subsection (1) of this section.

    (6) This section applies to a school designated as a contributing school under section 146(4) as if the school had become a contributing school under subsection (1) of this section and the Minister had given the school's Board the appropriate notice under subsection (2) of this section.

    (7) In determining that a school should be or should cease to be a contributing school, the Minister may provide for the provision of education at specified class levels to be phased in or phased out (as the case may require) over a specified period or periods.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 74

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 20 June 1991, by section 10(1)(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43) by omitting the words of every intermediate school and intermediate department, and every composite school whose provision of primary education is limited under section 151 of this Act; and.

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 20 June 1991, by section 10(1)(b) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43) by omitting the words of any intermediate school or department, or any composite school.

    Subsections (6) and (7) were inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 36 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

151 Provision of education at composite schools
  • Subject to section 157 of this Act, and to section 33 of the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975, the Minister may from time to time, by written notice to the Board of a composite school, require the Board to provide education for the class levels specified in the notice; and the Board must provide education at the school accordingly.

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Section 151 was substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 37 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

152 Correspondence schools
  • (1) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette,—

    • (a) When establishing the school, or at any other time, designate a state school that is not an integrated school as a correspondence school; or

    • (b) At any time, remove a designation under paragraph (a) of this subsection.

    (2) The Minister shall not designate a school as a correspondence school, or cancel a designation as a correspondence school, without having regard to the education of people unable conveniently to get tuition from a suitable state school that is not a correspondence school.

    (3) Subject to sections 102(7) and 104 of this Act, where an existing state school is designated as a correspondence school, its Board shall continue in office as constituted until a day specified by the Minister in the notice in the Gazette under section 95(1) of this Act determining the composition of its Board, but shall go out of office on that day.

    (4) With the consent of the Minister, a correspondence school may provide early childhood education.

    (5) The school that was, immediately before the commencement of the Education Amendment Act 1989, a correspondence school shall be deemed to have been—

    • (a) Established under section 146 of this Act as a composite school; and

    • (b) Designated under subsection (1) of this section as a correspondence school.

    Compare: 1964 No 135 s 105

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (5)(b) was amended, as from 23 July 1990, by section 31 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60) by substituting the word section for the word Act.

153 Minister may change class of school
  • (1) Subject to section 157 of this Act, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette,—

    • (a) Declare a composite school to be a primary, intermediate, or secondary school; or

    • (b) Declare a primary, intermediate, or secondary school to be a composite school; or

    • (c) Declare an intermediate school to be a primary or secondary school; or

    • (d) Declare a primary or secondary school to be an intermediate school.

    (1A) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, specify the class levels for which education must be given at a school (whether it is an existing school or a school whose class has been changed under subsection (1)) and provide for class levels to be phased in over a specified period or periods.

    (2) Nothing in subsection (1) of this section applies to an integrated school.

    (3) A notice under subsection (1) of this section, shall specify a day (not earlier than the end of the term after the term during which the notice is published) on which it is to take effect; and the school shall become a school of the class concerned, and cease to be a school of the class it was, on the day specified.

    (4) Subject to sections 102(7) and 104 of this Act, where an existing state school becomes a school of a different class, its Board shall continue in office as constituted until the close of the 7th day after the first election following its change of class.

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (1A) was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 38(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 38(2) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the words close of for the words day before. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 11(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by substituting the words until the close of the 7th day after the first election following its change of class for the words until the close of the day on which its annual meeting is next required by section 100 of this Act to be held.

154 Closure of schools
  • (1) Subject to section 157 of this Act, and to section 17 of the Private Schools Conditional Integration Act 1975, where, after consulting the Board of a state school, the Minister is satisfied that it should be closed, the Minister may, by written notice to the Board, ask the Board if it has any arguments in favour of the school's staying open.

    (2) The Minister may, after considering all arguments (if any) received from the Board within 28 days after it got notice under subsection (1) of this section, by notice in the Gazette specifying a day on which the school will close, close the school; and the school shall cease to be established on the day specified.

    (2A) If the Board of a state school at any time advises or indicates to the Minister in writing that it agrees to or does not oppose the proposed closure of the school, the Minister may (despite anything in subsection (1) or subsection (2) and regardless of whether the Minister has formally begun or completed the necessary consultation under subsection (1)) close the school by notice under subsection (2) at any time on or after receiving the Board's written advice.

    (3) Where a school is closed under this section,—

    • (a) Its Board shall thereupon be deemed to have been dissolved; and

    • (b) All assets, liabilities, and debts that the Board had immediately before dissolution shall be deemed to have become assets, liabilities, and debts of the Minister.

    (3A) Without limiting the rights or privileges conferred on the Minister by subsection (3)(b), the following provisions apply to property that was, immediately before dissolution, held by the Board in trust for the benefit of the school:

    • (a) The Minister may at any time apply to Public Trust to devise a scheme to modify the trust for the benefit of another school:

    • (b) If the Minister applies under paragraph (a) to Public Trust, subsections (2) to (7) of section 156C apply with any necessary modifications (as if the property were property to which that section applies).

    (4) A school that has been closed may not be reopened, except by being established again under this Act.

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (2A) was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 39(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (3A) was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 39(2) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

154A Minister may redesignate, or remove designation from, schools
  • (1) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, and after consultation with the Board of the affected school, do any of the following:

    • (a) designate a state school that is not a Kura Kaupapa Maori or a designated character school as a Kura Kaupapa Maori or a designated character school:

    • (b) remove the designation of a Kura Kaupapa Maori and redesignate it as a designated character school:

    • (c) remove the designation of a designated character school and redesignate it as a Kura Kaupapa Maori:

    • (d) remove the designation of a Kura Kaupapa Maori or a designated character school while keeping the school established as a state school.

    (2) The designation or removal of designation of a school under this section takes effect on the date specified in the notice under subsection (1) and, on and from that date,—

    • (a) section 155 applies to a school that is designated as a Kura Kaupapa Maori; and

    • (b) section 156 applies to a school that is designated as a designated character school; and

    • (c) section 155 ceases to apply to a school that has its designation as a Kura Kaupapa Maori removed; and

    • (d) section 156 ceases to apply to a school that has its designation as a designated character school removed.

    (3) The notice under subsection (1) may prescribe a new name for the redesignated school.

    (4) Section 155 applies in respect of a school that is, or is to be, redesignated as a Kura Kaupapa Maori in the same way as it would apply if the school were being established as a Kura Kaupapa Maori.

    (5) No school may have its designation as a Kura Kaupapa Maori removed unless the Minister has first consulted with te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua (as identified under section 155B).

    (6) No state school may be designated as a Kura Kaupapa Maori unless the Minister has first consulted with te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua on the ability of the school to operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua (as defined in section 155A).

    (7) Section 156 applies in respect of a school that is, or is to be, redesignated as a designated character school in the same way as it would apply if the school were being established as a designated character school.

    Section 154A was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 38 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

155 Kura Kaupapa Maori
  • (1) When establishing a state school the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, designate the school under this section.

    (2) The Minister has absolute discretion to refuse to establish a school under this section.

    (3) The Minister may not establish a school under this section unless satisfied that—

    • (a) The parents of at least 21 people who would, if the school were established, be entitled to free enrolment there, want there to be established a school—

      • (i) In which te reo Maori (the Maori language) is the principal language of instruction; and

      • (ii) In which the charter of the school requires the school to operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua (as defined in section 155A); and

      • (iii) That has the special characteristics (if any) set out in its charter that will give the school a particular character (in this section called special characteristics); and

    • (b) If a school of that type is established, students enrolled at the school will get an education of a kind not available at any other state school that children of the parents concerned can conveniently attend.

    (3A) The Minister may not establish a state school as a Kura Kaupapa Maori unless he or she has first consulted with te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua on the ability of the school to operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua (as defined in section 155A).

    (4) A notice under subsection (1) must—

    • (a) Specify the name of the school, which must at all times begin with the words Te Kura Kaupapa Maori o; and

    • (b) State that the school will operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua; and

    • (c) Summarise any special characteristics of the school; and

    • (d) Specify the constitution of the Board of the school.

    (5) After consultation with the Board, the Minister may from time to time, by notice in the Gazette, amend the name of the school (but not so as to omit the words Te Kura Kaupapa Maori o), its special characteristics, or the constitution of the Board.

    (6) Unless specifically provided otherwise, this Act and the Education Act 1964 apply to every school established under this section as if it were not so established.

    (7) The Board of a school established under this section must ensure that—

    • (a) Te reo Maori is the principal language of instruction at the school; and

    • (b) The school operates in accordance with Te Aho Matua.

    (8) The Board may refuse to enrol any person whose parents do not accept that the school operates in accordance with Te Aho Matua.

    (9) A school established under this section may have an enrolment scheme, but—

    • (a) The Secretary must from time to time, by written notice to the Board, fix a maximum roll for the school; and

    • (b) The Board must ensure that the number of students enrolled at the school is not more than the maximum roll.

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (9) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 6(2)(a) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the words A Kura Kaupapa Maori may for the words A Kura Kaupapa Maori shall not. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (9)(d) was repealed, as from 20 June 1991, by section 7(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Subsection (11) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 6(2)(b) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by inserting the words and section 11P. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Section 155 was substituted, as from 17 July 1999, by section 2 Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).

    Subsection (3A) was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 39 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

155A Te Aho Matua
  • (1) Te Aho Matua is a statement that sets out an approach to teaching and learning that applies to schools designated under section 155.

    (2) The official version of Te Aho Matua is the statement (including any Gazetted amendments) in te reo Maori that is—

    • (a) Prepared by te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua (as defined in section 155B); and

    • (b) Published in the Gazette under the authority of the Minister.

    (3) The Minister may from time to time authorise the reprinting of all, or the amendment of any part, of Te Aho Matua in the Gazette, but only if asked to do so by te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua.

    (4) When all, or an amendment to any part, of Te Aho Matua is published in the Gazette, the Minister must ensure that an explanation in English of Te Aho Matua, or of the amendment (as the case may be), is published in the same Gazette.

    (5) The explanation must be one that te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua has approved as being an accurate interpretation of the meaning of the Maori text.

    Sections 155A to 155F were inserted, as from 17 July 1999, by section 3 Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).

155B Te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua
  • Te kaitiaki o Te Aho Matua is the body commonly known as Te Runanga Nui o Nga Kura Kaupapa Maori o Aotearoa, being the most suitable to be responsible for determining the content of Te Aho Matua, and for ensuring that it is not changed to the detriment of Maori.

    Sections 155A to 155F were inserted, as from 17 July 1999, by section 3 Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).

155C Application of section 155
  • After the commencement of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999, the Minister may establish a school as a Kura Kaupapa Maori only in accordance with section 155 as substituted by that Act.

    Sections 155A to 155F were inserted, as from 17 July 1999, by section 3 Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).

155D Provisions applying to Kura Kaupapa Maori established before commencement of Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999
  • (1) In this section and section 155E,—

    Existing Kura means a Kura Kaupapa Maori established under section 155 before the commencement of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999

    New section 155 means section 155 as substituted by the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999.

    (2) After the commencement of this section, existing Kura remain established as Kura Kaupapa Maori even if they would not be entitled to be established under new section 155.

    (3) Subsections (6), (7)(a), and (9) of new section 155 apply to all existing Kura.

    (4) In relation to an existing Kura other than one acknowledged under section 155E, the Minister may from time to time, after consultation with the Board of the Kura, by notice in the Gazette, amend—

    • (a) The aims, purposes, and objectives of the Kura; or

    • (b) The constitution of the Board.

    (5) In relation to an existing Kura other than one acknowledged under section 155E, the Board of the Kura may refuse to enrol any person whose parents do not accept that the school operates in accordance with the school's aims, purposes, and objectives.

    Sections 155A to 155F were inserted, as from 17 July 1999, by section 3 Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).

155E Acknowledgment of adoption of Te Aho Matua
  • (1) The Minister may from time to time, after consultation with the Board of an existing Kura, by notice in the Gazette, acknowledge that the Kura operates in accordance with Te Aho Matua, and must, in the notice,—

    • (a) Replace the aims, purposes, and objectives of the Kura by a statement that the school will operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua (as referred to in new section 155(4)(b)); and

    • (b) Summarise any special characteristics of the school (as referred to in new section 155(4)(c)).

    (2) On publication of a notice under subsection (1), the Kura becomes subject to all the relevant provisions of new section 155.

    Sections 155A to 155F were inserted, as from 17 July 1999, by section 3 Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).

155F Protection of term Kura Kaupapa Maori
  • (1) No registered school may use the term Kura Kaupapa Maori in its name unless the school is established under section 155.

    (9) Subsection (1) does not apply to a registered school that, immediately before the commencement of this section, is not established under section 155 but uses the term Kura Kaupapa Maori in its name.

    Sections 155A to 155F were inserted, as from 17 July 1999, by section 3 Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).

156 Designated character schools
  • (1) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette when establishing the school, designate a state school as a designated character school.

    (2) The Minister shall not establish a school as a designated character school unless satisfied that—

    • (a) The parents of at least 21 people who would, if the school were established, be entitled to free enrolment there, want the school to be established; and

    • (b) The parents want the school to have a character that is in some specific way or ways different from the character of ordinary state schools; and

    • (c) The parents have given the Minister a clear written description and explanation (expressed in the form of aims, purposes, and objectives for the school) of the way or ways; and

    • (d) Students at a school with such a character would get an education of a kind that—

      • (i) Differs significantly from the education they would get at an ordinary state school; and

      • (ii) Is not available at any other state school that children of the parents concerned can conveniently attend; and

    • (e) It is desirable for students whose parents want them to do so to get such an education.

    (3) The Minister may in the Minister's absolute discretion refuse to establish a designated character school.

    (4) The notice establishing a designated character school shall specify the aims, purposes, and objectives that constitute its designated character; and every charter and proposed charter for the school shall be deemed to contain them.

    (5) The notice shall also specify the constitution of the school's Board.

    (6) The Minister may from time to time, after consultation with the Board of a designated character school, by notice in the Gazette amend—

    • (a) The aims, purposes, and objectives that constitute the school's designated character; or

    • (b) The constitution of its Board.

    (7) The Secretary must from time to time, by written notice to the designated character school, fix a maximum roll of the school, and—

    • (a) The Board must ensure that the number of students enrolled at the school is not more than the maximum roll; and

    • (b) The Board may refuse the enrolments of people whose parents do not accept the aims, purposes, and objectives that constitute the school's designated character.

    (8) Except as provided in this section and section 11PB , this Act and the Education Act 1964 shall apply to every designated character school as if it is not a designated character school.

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (7)(d) was repealed, as from 20 June 1991, by section 7(a) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Subsection (7) was substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 6(3)(a) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118).

    Subsection (8) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 6(3)(b) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by inserting the words and section 11P. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsection (8) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 26(5) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by substituting the expression section 11PB for the expression section 11P.

156A Minister may merge schools
  • (1) Subject to sections 156B and 157, the Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, merge 1 or more state schools (merging schools) that are not integrated schools with another state school (the continuing school) that is not an integrated school, if satisfied that—

    • (a) Each Board of a school concerned has made reasonable efforts to consult the parents of students (other than adult students) enrolled full-time at the school about the proposed merger; and

    • (b) The consultation that has in fact taken place has been adequate in all the circumstances; and

    • (c) The creation of a single school by the proposed merger is appropriate in the circumstances.

    (2) A notice under subsection (1) takes effect on a day (no earlier than the end of the term after the term during which the notice is published) specified in the notice, and has effect as follows:

    • (a) The merging schools are part of the continuing school:

    • (b) If the continuing school and each merging school are not already administered by a single Board,—

      • (i) The Board of each merging school is dissolved; and

      • (ii) All rights, assets, liabilities, and debts of each merging school are vested in the Board of the continuing school:

    • (c) The continuing school is a school of the class specified in the notice and provides education for the student class levels specified in the notice.

    (3) A notice under subsection (1) does not affect the name of the continuing school.

    (3A) Before a notice under subsection (1) takes effect, the Minister must give notice in the Gazette of whether, during the period between a date specified in the notice and the date on which new trustees take office following an election (in this section called the interim period), the Board of the continuing school is to be—

    • (a) the Board of the continuing school plus co-opted trustees representing each merging school, as provided for in subsection (3B); or

    • (b) a Board appointed by the Minister, in which case subsection (3C) applies.

    (3B) If the notice under subsection (3A) provides that the Board of the continuing school must include co-opted trustees representing each merging school,—

    • (a) the Board of the continuing school must, within 28 days after the notice under subsection (3A), co-opt at least one trustee in respect of each of the merging schools, so that each merging school is represented on the Board; and

    • (b) each of those co-opted trustees holds office until the end of the interim period (unless replaced earlier); and

    • (c) section 94C (which limits the co-option and appointment of trustees) does not apply to trustees co-opted for an interim period.

    (3C) If the notice under subsection (3A) provides that the Board of the continuing school is to be appointed by the Minister,—

    • (a) the notice must specify the constitution of the Board during the interim period, including how many trustees (if any) the Board may co-opt; and

    • (b) the Minister is not bound by section 94 in determining the constitution of the Board.

    (3D) When a Board is appointed by the Minister,—

    • (a) the trustees of the continuing school go out of office at the close of the day before the start of the interim period; and

    • (b) the trustees appointed by the Minister to the Board of the continuing school take office on the date of the start of the interim period.

    (3E) During an interim period, the Board of the continuing school may make decisions and exercise powers both for the purposes of the continuing school before the merger and for the purpose of providing and preparing for the continuing school after the merger has taken effect.

    (4) Unless it was (immediately before the merger took effect) a combined Board established under section 110, then, subject to subsection (6), the Board of the continuing school must hold elections for a new Board on a day that is not later than 3 months after the day the merger took effect.

    (4A) [Repealed]

    (5) If the Board of the continuing school is required by subsection (4) to hold elections for a new Board, all its elected, appointed, and co-opted trustees holding office immediately before the election day go out of office on the close of the day before the day on which the newly elected trustees are to take office.

    (6) If the merger takes effect after 31 October in the year before an election year and before 31 December in that election year, the Board of the continuing school does not have to hold an election until the next election year.

    Sections 156A and 156B were inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 22 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Section 156A was substituted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 40 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Subsections (3A) to (3E) were inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 40(1) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsection (4) was substituted, and subsection (4A) was inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 23 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

    Subsection (4A) was repealed, as from 17 May 2006, by section 40(2) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

156B Restrictions on mergers in certain cases
  • (1) A Kura Kaupapa Maori established after the commencement of the Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 may not merge or be merged with another Kura Kaupapa Maori or other school unless the schools involved in the merger—

    • (a) Operate in accordance with Te Aho Matua; and

    • (b) Use te reo Maori as the principal language of instruction.

    (2) Any other Kura Kaupapa Maori may merge with another school only if both schools use te reo Maori as the principal language of instruction and have the same aims, purposes, and objectives.

    (3) A designated character school may not merge or be merged with another designated character or other school unless the schools involved in the merger have the same aims, purposes, and objectives, being the aims, purposes, and objectives that constitute the way in which the character of each school is different from the character of ordinary state schools.

    Sections 156A and 156B were inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 22 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Section 156B was substituted, as from 17 July 1999, by section 4 Education (Te Aho Matua) Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 79).

156C Property held in trust
  • (1) This section applies to any property that, immediately before 2 or more schools merged under section 156A of this Act, was held in trust—

    • (a) By the Board of one (or more) of those schools; or

    • (b) For the benefit of—

      • (i) One (or more) of those schools; or

      • (ii) The students or former students of one (or more) of those schools,—

      by any other person or body.

    (2) All property to which this section applies continues to be subject to the trust concerned; but the person or body in whom it is vested may at any time apply to Public Trust to devise a scheme to modify the trust in the light of the merger of the schools concerned.

    (3) If satisfied that adequate arrangements have been made to meet the costs of doing so, Public Trust shall—

    • (a) In consultation with the Board concerned, devise; and

    • (b) Notify the Solicitor-General of,—

    a scheme to modify any trust in respect of which Public Trust has received an application under this section.

    (4) Where Public Trust notifies the Solicitor-General of a scheme under this section,—

    • (a) The Solicitor-General may, by written notice to the Public Trustee,—

      • (i) Approve the scheme (as originally notified by Public Trust or with amendments agreed by Public Trust after consultation with the Board concerned); or

      • (ii) Suggest amendments to it; or

      • (iii) Direct that it should not proceed; and

    • (b) If the Solicitor-General directs that it should not proceed, the matter may be dealt with under the Charitable Trusts Act 1957.

    (5) If, within 90 days of being notified of a scheme under this section, the Solicitor-General does not suggest amendments to it or direct that it should not proceed, the Solicitor-General shall be deemed to have approved it.

    (6) Where the Solicitor-General approves a scheme notified under this section, the trust concerned shall have effect accordingly.

    (7) The Solicitor-General shall not approve a scheme under this section unless satisfied that—

    • (a) It modifies the trust concerned so as best to give effect to the intentions of the testator, settlor, or other person or body by whom or which the trust was established; and

    • (b) Subject to paragraph (a) of this subsection, it effects the minimum change necessary to enable the trust to operate successfully in the light of the merger of the schools concerned.

    Section 156C was inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 12 Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Subsections (2), (3), (4) were amended, as from 1 March 2002, by section 170(1) Public Trust Act 2001 (2001 No 100) by substituting the words Public Trust for the words the Public Trustee wherever they occur. See clause 2 Public Trust Act Commencement Order 2002 (SR 2002/11).

157 Consultations
  • (1) [Repealed]

    (2) The Minister shall not—

    • (aa) Declare a school to be a boys' school, a girls' school, or a co-educational school under section 146A(1) of this Act; or

    • (ab) set limits by notice under section 146A(3) on the number of girls who may attend a boys' school, or boys who may attend a girls' school; or

    • (a) Designate a primary school as a normal or model school under section 148(1)(a) of this Act; or

    • (b) Designate a normal or model school or model class within a primary school under section 148(1)(b) of this Act; or

    • (c) Revoke under paragraph (c) of subsection (1) of section 148 of this Act a designation under that subsection; or

    • (d) Establish or disestablish an intermediate department under section 149 of this Act; or

    • (e) Determine under section 150(1) of this Act that a particular school is to be or cease to be a contributing school ; or

    • (f) Limit under section 151 of this Act the education given at a composite school; or

    • (g) Change under section 153(1) of this Act the class of a school—

    without consulting the Board of the school concerned.

    (3) The Minister shall not—

    • (a) Establish a school under section 146(1) of this Act; or

    • (aa) Declare a school to be a boys' school, a girls' school, or a co-educational school under section 146A(1) of this Act; or

    • (b) Establish or disestablish an intermediate department under section 149 of this Act; or

    • (c) Determine under section 150(1) of this Act that a primary school is to be or cease to be a contributing school; or

    • (d) Limit under section 151 of this Act the education given at a composite school; or

    • (e) Change under section 153(1) of this Act the class of a school; or

    • (f) Close a school under section 154 of this Act; or

    • (fa) redesignate, or remove a designation from, a school under section 154A; or

    • (g) Merge any school or schools with another under section 156A of this Act,—

    without first consulting the Boards of all state schools whose rolls might, in the opinion of the Minister, be affected if the Minister takes that action.

    (4) [Repealed]

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (1) was repealed, as from 20 June 1991, by section 11(2) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Subsection (2)(aa) was inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 9(4) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Subsection (2)(ab) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 42 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (2)(e) was amended, as from 20 June 1991, by section 10(2) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43) by omitting the words of an intermediate school or department, or a composite school.

    Subsection (3)(aa) was inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 9(5) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Subsection (3)(c) was substituted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 10(3) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

    Subsection (3)(f) was substituted, and subsection (3)(g) was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 23 Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (3)(fa) was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 41 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Subsection (4) was repealed, as from 20 June 1991, by section 11(2) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

157A Community education forums
  • The Minister may at any time appoint a person to—

    • (a) Convene within a specified area public meetings relating to any action the Minister proposes to consider taking under this Part of this Act; and

    • (b) Advise the Minister on the views expressed at the meetings;—

    and in that case the Minister may refuse to consider whether or not to take the action without—

    • (c) Giving the person reasonable time to convene the meetings and advise the Minister; and

    • (d) Considering any advice the person gives the Minister in that time.

    Section 157A was inserted, as from 20 June 1991, by section 11(1) Education Amendment Act 1991 (1991 No 43).

158 Provision by one Board of tuition for students enrolled at school administered by another
  • (1) By agreement between the Boards concerned,—

    • (a) Students enrolled at one state school may receive tuition at or from another; and

    • (b) Notwithstanding section 79 of this Act, the Board of the school at which the students are enrolled may pay the Board of the school giving that tuition for that tuition.

    (2) If satisfied that facilities at a state school were provided or constructed for the use of students enrolled at several state schools, the Minister may, by written notice to the school's Board, require the Board (in accordance with arrangements specified in the notice) to do either or both of the following:

    • (a) Allow the Board of another state school to use the facilities for the tuition of students enrolled at the other school:

    • (b) Provide in or by means of those facilities tuition for students enrolled at another state school.

    (3) A notice under subsection (2) of this section shall provide for the making of payments by the Board of the school at which the students required to be provided with tuition are enrolled to the Board of the school whose facilities are to be used; and payments shall, notwithstanding section 79 of this Act, be made in accordance with the provisions of the notice.

    (4) [Repealed]

    Part 12, comprising sections 145-158, was inserted, as from 1 January 1990, by section 14 Education Amendment Act 1989 (1989 No 156).

    Subsection (4) was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 32 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (4) was repealed, as from 19 December 1998, by section 41(1) Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

Part 13
General provisions relating to tertiary education

  • Part 13, comprising section 159, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 35 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

  • The heading to Part 13 was substituted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50). The previous heading read Interpretation.

159AAA Object of provisions relating to tertiary education
  • (1) The object of this Part, Parts 13A to 18, and Part 19 (which relate to tertiary education), and of the provisions of Parts 18A and 20 to 24 that relate to tertiary education, is to foster and develop a tertiary education system that—

    • (a) fosters, in ways that are consistent with the efficient use of national resources, high quality learning and research outcomes, equity of access, and innovation; and

    • (b) contributes to the development of cultural and intellectual life in New Zealand; and

    • (c) responds to the needs of learners, stakeholders, and the nation, in order to foster a skilled and knowledgeable population over time; and

    • (d) contributes to the sustainable economic and social development of the nation; and

    • (e) strengthens New Zealand's knowledge base and enhances the contribution of New Zealand's research capabilities to national economic development, innovation, international competitiveness, and the attainment of social and environmental goals; and

    • (f) provides for a diversity of teaching and research that fosters, throughout the system, the achievement of international standards of learning and, as relevant, scholarship.

    (2) In making decisions under this Part, Parts 13A to 18, and Part 19, and under the provisions of Parts 18A and 20 to 24 that relate to tertiary education, the Minister, the Commission, the Qualifications Authority, and Career Services must take into account the objects specified in subsection (1), so far as is practicable in the circumstances.

    Section 159AAA was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 6 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 159AAA(2): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 5 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159 Interpretation
  • (1) In this Part and Part 13A to 24 of this Act, and in Schedules 13 to 17, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Academic year means a period of 12 months commencing on the 1st day of January

    Accreditation means accreditation under section 259.

    Accreditation: this definition was substituted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 82(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Approval, in relation to a course of study or training, means approval of the course as a whole under section 258 of this Act, and Approved, in relation to such a course, has a corresponding meaning

    Approved nationally recognised course means a course of study or training that has been granted approval under section 258(10) of this Act, other than an approval that has been withdrawn

    Assisted student means a foreign student who is in New Zealand to study under an assistance programme administered by the New Zealand Government

    Association

    [Repealed]

    Association: this definition was repealed, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(5) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Association of students

    [Repealed]

    Association of Students: this definition was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 2 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90).

    Association of Students: this definition was repealed, as from 8 July 2000, by section 26(6) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

    Award includes a degree, diploma, certificate, or qualification

    Chief executive, in relation to an institution, means the person who, by whatever name the person is called, is the chief executive of the institution and includes a person for the time being performing the duties of the chief executive of the institution

    Chief Review Officer

    [Repealed]

    Chief Review Officer: this definition was repealed, as from 25 June 1993, by section 26(1) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    College of education means, subject to subsection (3) of this section, a body referred to in section 162(1)(b) of this Act or a body established as a college of education under section 162(2) of this Act

    Commission means the Tertiary Education Commission established under section 159C

    Commission: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Council, in relation to an institution, means the body that governs the institution in accordance with section 165 of this Act

    Course of study or training, in relation to an institution, means a course of study or training leading to an award

    Domestic student, at any time, means a person who is then—

    • (a) A New Zealand citizen; or

    • (b) the holder of a residence permit under the Immigration Act 1987 who satisfies the criteria (if any) prescribed by regulations made under subsection (4); or

    • (c) By virtue of paragraph (a), paragraph (b), or paragraph (f) of section 11(1) of that Act, exempt from the requirement to hold a permit granted under that Act; or

    • (d) Exempted under section 12 of that Act from the requirement to hold a permit granted under that Act; or

    • (e) A person of a class or description of persons required by the Minister, by notice in the Gazette, to be treated as if they are not foreign students:

    domestic student: paragraph (b) of this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(2) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Enrol includes admit and Enrolment and Enrolled have corresponding meanings

    Equivalent full-time student formula means the formula of that name that is based on the student workload that would normally be carried out by a full-time student in a single academic year

    Exempt student means a foreign student who is in New Zealand to study under an exchange programme approved by the New Zealand Government

    Existing institution means—

    • (a) A body specified in Part 1 or Part 2 of Schedule 13 to this Act; or

    • (b) A body that was established immediately before the day on which the Education Amendment Act 1990 received the Royal assent, or is established on or after that day and before the 1st day of January 1991, as a polytechnic, institute of technology, technical institute or community college under the Education Act 1964:

    Existing non-university institution means an existing institution other than a body specified in Part 1 of Schedule 13 to this Act

    Foreign student, at any time, means a person who is not then a domestic student

    Functions, except where the expression occurs in a provision setting out the functions of a body, includes duties

    funding approval means a decision made by the Commission under section 159YA to fund (in whole or in part) some or all of the tertiary education programmes and activities described in an organisation's proposed plan under section 159P(d)(i) and (ii)

    give public notice means to publish a notice in the Gazette that—

    • (a) gives notice of the fact that something has been made, approved, or done; and

    • (b) includes information about how or where the public can see and obtain a copy of the thing that has been made, approved, or done

    give public notice: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Government training establishment means any establishment that is—

    • (a) A Crown entity (within the meaning of section 10 of the Crown Entities Act 2004) for the time being approved by the Minister for the purposes of this definition; or

    • (b) A Department (within the meaning of the Public Finance Act 1989) for the time being approved by the Minister for the purposes of this definition; or

    • (d) The New Zealand Police:

    Government training establishment: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 29(3) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136)

    Government training establishment: this definition was substituted, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

    Government training establishment: this definition was substituted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 13(1) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Government training establishment: paragraph (a) of this definition was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by substituting the words (within the meaning of section 10 of the Crown Entities Act 2004) for the words (within the meaning of the Public Finance Act 1989).

    Grant, in relation to an award, includes confer and issue

    industry training organisation means a body corporate for the time being recognised under section 5 or section 8(1) of the Industry Training Act 1992

    industry training organisation: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Institution means—

    • (a) A college of education; or

    • (b) A polytechnic; or

    • (ba) specialist college; or

    • (c) A university; or

    • (d) A wananga:

    Institution: paragraph (ba) of this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(4) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Land includes any legal or equitable estate or interest in, or right, power or privilege over, or in connection with, land

    Minister means the Minister of the Crown who, under the authority of any warrant or with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part of this Act

    Minister: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(5) Education Amendment Act No (4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Ministry means the department of State that, with the authority of the Prime Minister, is for the time being responsible for the administration of this Part of this Act

    Ministry: this definition was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 2(5) Education Amendment Act No (4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Nationally recognised award means an award granted under section 263 of this Act in respect of any approved nationally recognised course of study or training

    New Zealand apprenticeship committee means an apprenticeship committee established under section 27 of the Apprenticeship Act 1983

    Personal property includes money

    plan means a plan in relation to which funding approval has been given

    Polytechnic means, subject to subsection (3) of this section,—

    • (a) A body that was established immediately before the day on which the Education Amendment Act 1990 received the Royal assent, or is established on or after that day and before the 1st day of January 1991, as a polytechnic, institute of technology, technical institute or community college under the Education Act 1964; or

    • (b) A body established as a polytechnic under section 162(2) of this Act:

    Private training establishment means an establishment, other than an institution, that provides post-school education or vocational training

    Proceeding means any legal or administrative proceeding, and includes an arbitration

    proposed plan means a proposed plan in relation to which an organisation is seeking funding approval

    Qualifications Authority means the New Zealand Qualifications Authority established by Part 20 of this Act

    Regional Employment and Access Council means a Council of that name established under section 7 of the Access Training Scheme Act 1988

    Registered establishment means a private training establishment that has been granted registration by the Qualifications Authority under Part 18 of this Act, other than a registration that has been cancelled

    Secretary means the chief executive of the Ministry

    specialist college means, subject to subsection (3), a body established as a specialist college under section 162(2)

    specialist college: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Staff, in relation to an institution, does not include the chief executive of the institution

    Student member, in relation to the Council of an institution, means a member of that Council referred to in section 171(2)(e) of this Act

    tertiary education provider means all or any of the following, but does not include an industry training organisation

    • (a) an institution:

    • (b) a registered establishment:

    • (c) a government training establishment:

    • (d) any other person or body that provides, or proposes to provide, tertiary education and that is funded through non-departmental output classes from Vote Education (for example, community education providers)

    tertiary education provider: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    tertiary education strategy means the latest strategy document issued under section 159AA.

    University means, subject to subsection (3) of this section, a body referred to in section 162(1)(a) of this Act or a body established as a university under section 162(2) of this Act

    University Grants Committee means the University Grants Committee established under Part 1 of the Universities Act 1961

    Vice-Chancellor, in relation to a university, means the chief executive of the university, by whatever name called

    Vice-Chancellors Committee means the New Zealand Vice-Chancellors Committee established by Part 19 of this Act

    Wananga means, subject to subsection (3) of this section, a body established as a wananga under section 162(2) of this Act.

    (2) In the absence of proof to the contrary,—

    • (a) A certificate signed by the chief executive of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade that on a specified day, or for a specified period, a specified person was or was not, or will or will not be, in New Zealand to study under an assistance programme administered by the New Zealand Government; or

    • (b) A certificate signed by the Secretary that on a specified day, or for a specified period, a specified person was or was not, or will or will not be, in New Zealand to study under an exchange programme approved by the New Zealand Government,—

    is, for the purposes of the definitions of assisted student and exempt student in subsection (1) of this section, conclusive evidence of the matter certified; and judicial notice shall be taken of the signature on any such certificate of the chief executive or (as the case may be) the Secretary.

    (3) The definitions of the terms college of education, polytechnic, specialist college,university and wananga do not apply for the purposes of subsections (1), (2), and (4) of section 162 of this Act.

    (4) The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, make regulations prescribing criteria that the holder of a residence permit under the Immigration Act 1987 must satisfy in order to fulfil the requirements of paragraph (b) of the definition of domestic student in subsection (1).

    (5) Regulations made under subsection (4),—

    • (a) if made on or before 30 June in any year, expire on the close of December of that year unless they are expressly confirmed by Act of Parliament passed during that year; and

    • (b) if made on or after 1 July in any year, expire on the close of 31 December in the following year unless they are expressly confirmed by Act of Parliament passed before the end of that following year.

    (6) The expiry of regulations made under subsection (4) does not affect the validity of any act done pursuant to, or in accordance with, the regulations before the date on which the regulations expire.

    Part 13, comprising section 159, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 35 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(1) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by substituting the words Part 13A to Part 24, and in Schedules 13 to 17 for the words Parts 14 to 24 of this Act, and in Schedules 13 to 18 to this Act.

    Section 159(1) charter: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159(1) funding approval: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159(1) plan: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159(1) profile: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159(1) proposed plan: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159(1) statement of tertiary education priorities: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    tertiary education strategy: this definition was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(3) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 159(1) tertiary education strategy: amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 6(3) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    In subsection (2)(a) the reference to the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade replaced an earlier reference to the Ministry of External Relations and Trade pursuant to section 9(2) Foreign Affairs Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 48).

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(6) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by inserting the words specialist college, after the word polytechnic,.

    Subsections (4) to (6) were inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 7(7) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159AA Tertiary education strategy
  • (1) The Minister must, from time to time, issue a tertiary education strategy that sets out—

    • (a) the Government's long-term strategic direction for tertiary education; and

    • (b) the Government's current and medium-term priorities for tertiary education.

    (2) The part of the tertiary education strategy that sets out the Government's long-term strategic direction for tertiary education must address the following:

    • (a) economic goals:

    • (b) social goals:

    • (c) environmental goals:

    • (d) the development aspirations of Maori and other population groups.

    (3) Before issuing a tertiary education strategy, the Minister must consult with—

    • (a) those stakeholders in the tertiary education sector that he or she considers ought to be consulted; and

    • (b) the Commission.

    (4) As soon as practicable after issuing a tertiary education strategy, the Minister must give public notice of it.

    Section 159AA: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 7 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Sections 159AA to 159AF were inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 8 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159AB Importance of tertiary education strategy
  • In exercising their functions under this Act or any other enactment, the Commission, the Qualifications Authority, and Career Services must have regard to the tertiary education strategy.

    Section 159AB: amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 8 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Sections 159AA to 159AF were inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 8 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159AC Revocation and replacement or amendment of tertiary education strategy
  • (1) The Minister may, at any time, revoke and replace, or amend, a tertiary education strategy.

    (2) Before revoking and replacing, or significantly amending, a tertiary education strategy, the Minister must consult with—

    • (a) those stakeholders in the tertiary education sector that he or she considers ought to be consulted; and

    • (b) the Commission.

    (3) As soon as practicable after revoking and replacing, or significantly amending, a tertiary education strategy, the Minister must give public notice of the revocation and replacement, or amendment.

    (4) An amendment forms part of the tertiary education strategy it amends.

    Section 159AC: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 9 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Sections 159AA to 159AF were inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 8 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159AD Roles within tertiary education sector
  • (1) [Repealed]

    (2) The Qualifications Authority (or, in the case of universities, the New Zealand Vice-Chancellors Committee) is the body primarily responsible for quality assurance matters in the tertiary education sector.

    (3) This section is for the avoidance of doubt.

    Sections 159AA to 159AF were inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 8 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 159AD(1): repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 10 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159AE Ministry may hold and disseminate information
  • Any information collected and held by the Commission, the Qualifications Authority, or Career Services may be held by the Ministry on behalf of the relevant agency and be disclosed by the Ministry to—

    • (a) the agency on whose behalf it is held; and

    • (b) any other person or agency that is entitled to receive it.

    Sections 159AA to 159AF were inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 8 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 159AE: amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 11 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159AF Secretary may delegate certain powers and functions to Commission
  • (1) The Secretary may delegate to the Commission any powers or functions of the Secretary under regulations made pursuant to section 303 or section 306 or section 307 (which relate to student allowances).

    (2) A delegation under this section—

    • (a) must be in writing; and

    • (b) may not include a power to further delegate any power or function; and

    • (c) may be revoked at any time by notice in writing.

    (3) The Commission may exercise any powers or functions delegated to it under this section in the same manner and with the same effect as if the powers or functions had been conferred on the Commission directly, rather than by delegation.

    (4) If the Commission purports to act under a delegation under this section, the Commission is presumed, in the absence of proof to the contrary, to be acting in accordance with the terms of the delegation.

    Sections 159AA to 159AF were inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 8 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Part 13A
Tertiary Education Commission

  • Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Preliminary provisions

159A Purpose of Part
  • The purpose of this Part is to establish—

    • (a) a Tertiary Education Commission (the Commission); and

    • (b) a framework for planning, funding, and monitoring in the tertiary education sector that primarily, but not exclusively, relates to funding organisations via plans.

    Section 159A: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 12 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159ABA Outline of framework for planning, funding, and monitoring in tertiary education sector
  • (1) This section—

    • (a) sets out a general outline of the framework for planning, funding, and monitoring in the tertiary education sector; and

    • (b) is by way of explanation only.

    (2) If any other section in this Act conflicts with this section, the other section prevails.

    (3) The following steps describe, in general terms, how the framework for planning, funding, and monitoring in the tertiary education sector works:

    • (a) the Minister determines the design of funding mechanisms and whether funding under those mechanisms is via plans:

    • (b) the Commission develops the details of how to implement funding mechanisms:

    • (c) the Commission issues guidance on what must be contained in proposed plans:

    • (d) the Commission identifies criteria for assessing proposed plans:

    • (e) an organisation prepares a proposed plan—

      • (i) in consultation with the stakeholders the organisation considers ought to be consulted and any other persons specified by the Commission; and

      • (ii) in a manner consistent with the Commission's guidance:

    • (f) the organisation submits its proposed plan to the Commission:

    • (g) the Commission applies assessment criteria to the proposed plan and decides whether or not to give funding approval:

    • (h) if the proposed plan is given funding approval, the Commission determines the amount of funding payable to the organisation by applying the appropriate funding mechanism:

    • (i) if an organisation's proposed plan receives funding approval, the Commission monitors the organisation's performance to determine if it is achieving, or has achieved, the outcomes it has specified in its plan.

    Section 159ABA: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 12 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159B Definition of organisation
  • (1) In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires, organisation means—

    • (a) a tertiary education provider:

    • (b) an industry training organisation:

    • (c) a person or body that provides tertiary education-related services and is identified in accordance with subsection (2) as an organisation for the purposes of this Part.

    (2) The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, identify organisations for the purpose of this Part, and may do so by describing a type of person or body that is an organisation, or by naming individual persons or bodies as organisations.

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Establishment of Commission

159C Establishment of Commission
  • (1) A Tertiary Education Commission is established.

    (2) The Commission is owned by the Crown.

    (3) The Commission is a Crown entity for the purposes of section 7 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (4) The Crown Entities Act 2004 applies to the Commission except to the extent that this Act expressly provides otherwise.

    (5) The members of the Commission are the board for the purposes of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 159C was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159D Composition of Commission
  • (1) The Commission comprises at least 6, but not more than 9, members appointed in accordance with section 28(1)(a) of the Crown Entities Act 2004 after consultation with the Minister of Maori Affairs.

    (2) At least 2 months before appointing a member, the Minister must advertise his or her intention to appoint a member and must seek responses from interested persons.

    (3) Subsection (2) does not apply if the Minister appoints as a member a person who, immediately before the appointment, was a member of the Transition Tertiary Education Commission.

    (4) When appointing members of the Commission, the Minister must have regard to the need for its members to collectively have a breadth of experience and expertise, and depth of knowledge, regarding areas of the tertiary education sector.

    (5) Subsection (4) does not limit section 29 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by substituting the words in accordance with section 28(1)(a) of the Crown Entities Act 2004 for the words by the Minister.

    Section 159D(2): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 13 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Subsections (4) and (5) were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159E Charging
  • The Commission may not charge a commercial rate for any goods and services that it provides unless the Minister has given his or her approval.

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 159E was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Functions of Commission

159F Functions of Commission
  • (1) The functions of the Commission are—

    • (a) to give effect to the tertiary education strategy by—

      • (i) prescribing and publishing guidance on the content of, and processes associated with seeking funding approval for, proposed plans; and

      • (ii) prescribing and publishing guidance on the criteria the Commission will use to assess proposed plans; and

      • (iii) assessing proposed plans and deciding whether they will receive funding approval by applying the relevant assessment criteria; and

      • (iv) determining the amount of funding payable to organisations by applying the appropriate funding mechanisms; and

      • (v) allocating funding to organisations that have plans; and

      • (vi) allocating funding to organisations that are not required to have plans in order to receive funding; and

      • (vii) prescribing what plan summaries must contain for the purposes of public inspection; and

      • (viii) building the capability of organisations; and

    • (b) to provide advice to the Minister on—

      • (i) the tertiary education strategy; and

      • (ii) the activities and performance of the tertiary education sector generally; and

      • (iii) any policy implications arising from any research, monitoring, or evaluation conducted under paragraph (c); and

    • (ba) to develop details of how to implement funding mechanisms; and

    • (bb) to implement funding mechanisms; and.

    • (c) to conduct applied policy and programme research, monitoring, and evaluation; and

    • (d) to monitor the performance of organisations that receive funding from the Commission including by measuring performance against specified outcomes; and

    • (da) to undertake any functions that the Minister directs the Commission to undertake under section 159J; and

    • (e) to undertake any functions delegated to the Commission, including (without limitation) functions relating to the funding of organisations other than under section 159YA or 159ZC; and

    • (g) [Repealed]

    (2) In addition, the Commission may provide information and other tertiary-related services to the Crown, provided that these functions are consistent with the Commission's statement of intent and are consistent with, and do not displace, any of its functions under subsection (1).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 159F(1)(a): substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159F(1)(b)(i): substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159F(1)(b)(ii): substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159F(1)(ba): inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(3) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159F(1)(bb): inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(3) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159F(1)(d): substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(4) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159F(1)(da): inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(4) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159F(1)(e): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 14(5) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Subsection (1)(g) was repealed, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159G Principles guiding how Commission operates
  • In performing its functions, the Commission must, in addition to complying with section 159AB,—

    • (b) work closely with the stakeholders of tertiary education providers and industry training organisations; and

    • (c) work closely with tertiary education providers and industry training organisations.

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Paragraph (a) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by substituting the words direction of the Minister given under section 103 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 for the words written direction of the Minister given under section 159J.

159H Minister may review performance of Commission
  • [Repealed]

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 159H was repealed, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159I Delegation of functions or powers of Minister
  • (1) The Minister may, either generally or specifically, delegate to the Commission all or any of the Minister's functions and powers under this Act (other than those referred to in section 159L) or any other Act, including functions or powers delegated to the Minister under this Act or any other Act.

    (2) A delegation under this section must be in writing.

    (3) No delegation under this section may include the power to delegate under this section.

    (4) The power of the Minister to delegate under this section—

    • (a) is subject to any prohibitions, restrictions, or conditions contained in any other Act in relation to the delegation of the Minister's functions or powers; but

    • (b) does not limit any power of delegation conferred on the Minister by any other Act.

    (5) Subject to any general or special directions given, or conditions imposed, by the Minister, the Commission may exercise any functions or powers delegated to the Commission under this section in the same manner and with the same effect as if they had been conferred on the Commission directly by this section and not by delegation.

    (6) If the Commission purports to act under any delegation under this section, the Commission is, in the absence of proof to the contrary, presumed to be acting in accordance with the terms of the delegation.

    (7) A delegation does not affect or prevent the exercise of any function or power by the Minister, or affect the responsibility of the Minister for the actions of any person acting under the delegation.

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 159I(1): substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 15 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159J Minister may direct Commission
  • (1) [Repealed]

    (2) [Repealed]

    (3) Every direction under section 103 of the Crown Entities Act 2004. must be consistent with the tertiary education strategy and the functions of the Commission.

    (3A) The Minister may, in accordance with section 112 of the Crown Entities Act 2004, direct the Commission to undertake additional functions that are consistent with the Commission's objectives.

    (4) The Minister may not direct the Commission to provide or deny funding under section 159YA or 159ZC to any specified organisation.

    (5) [Repealed]

    (6) If the Minister gives a direction to the Commission, the Commission must include in its annual report for every year to which the direction relates a report on how the Commission has responded to it.

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Subsections (1) and (2) were repealed, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by substituting the words under section 103 of the Crown Entities Act 2004. for the words under this section.

    Section 159J(3A): inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 16(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 159J(4): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 16(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by omitting the words , under this section,.

    Subsection (5) was repealed, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (6) was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159K Application of Commerce Act 1986
  • Despite section 6 of the Commerce Act 1986, nothing in that Act applies to the Commission except to the extent that the Commission engages in supplying goods and services for which it charges.

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159KA Chief executive
  • (1) The Commission must appoint a chief executive in accordance with section 117 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (2) The chief executive must not be a member of the Commission.

    (3) The Commission must act independently when appointing the chief executive.

    (4) The Commission must monitor and evaluate the performance of the chief executive.

    Sections 159KA to 159KG were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159KB Responsibilities of chief executive
  • The chief executive must—

    • (a) ensure the efficient and effective administration of the affairs of the Commission; and

    • (b) act in accordance with lawful policies and directions given to him or her by the Commission.

    Sections 159KA to 159KG were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159KBA Monitoring and reporting function of chief executive in relation to institutions
  • The chief executive of the Commission—

    • (a) must, on an ongoing basis, monitor institutions that receive funding under this Part in order to assess whether the operation or long-term viability of any of those institutions is at risk; and

    • (b) may report from time to time to the Minister on the outcome of that monitoring.

    Section 159KBA: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 17 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159KC Declaration of interests
  • (1) A person who is proposed to be appointed as chief executive must declare any interests (within the meaning of that term in section 10 of the Crown Entities Act 2004) to the Commission before accepting appointment to the position of chief executive.

    (2) If the chief executive has any direct or indirect interest in any transaction or other matter listed in section 62 of the Crown Entities Act 2004, he or she must disclose that interest to the Commission.

    Sections 159KA to 159KG were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159KD Superannuation
  • (1) Any person who, immediately before becoming an employee of the Commission, is a contributor to the Government Superannuation Fund under Part 2 or Part 2A of the Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 is deemed, for the purpose of that Act, to be employed in the Government service so long as he or she continues to be an employee of the Commission.

    (2) The Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956 applies to the person in all respects as if the person's service as an employee of the Commission were Government service.

    (3) Subsection (1) does not entitle a person to become a contributor to the Government Superannuation Fund if the person has ceased to be a contributor.

    (4) For the purpose of applying the Government Superannuation Fund Act 1956, the chief executive of the Commission is the controlling authority.

    Sections 159KA to 159KG were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

159KE Statement of intent
  • (1) The Commission must include the following information in its statement of intent:

    • (a) a general description of the things that the Commission proposes to do, achieve, or work towards during the period covered by the statement of intent, which—

      • (i) must be consistent with the tertiary education strategy and the Commission's functions; and

      • (ii) must include a summary of the nature and scope of the Commission's proposed operations; and

      • (iii) may cover both financial and non-financial matters; and

    • (b) a general description of the Commission's proposed strategies and activities for giving effect to, or achieving, the things referred to in paragraph (a), including a list of the intended principal activities of the Commission and how they relate to the things referred to in paragraph (a); and

    • (c) a description of how the statement of forecast service performance in the statement of intent links to the things referred to in paragraph (a); and

    • (d) a general description of the manner in which the Commission proposes to operate and, in particular,—

      • (i) which other persons or bodies engaged in similar or related work it proposes to liaise with, and how it proposes to liaise with those other persons or bodies; and

      • (ii) what capability it needs to do its work, and how it will develop that capability; and

      • (iii) how it proposes to manage its risks; and

    • (e) for each of the financial years to which the statement of intent relates, performance measures and targets by which the Commission's performance, and progress towards delivering the things referred to in paragraph (a) may be judged.

    (2) The Commission need not include in its statement of intent the information required in section 141(1)(b), (e), and (f) of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (3) The grouping of outputs in the statement of forecast service performance in the statement of intent must be done so that, in the case of outputs funded by appropriation, a group of outputs does not contain outputs funded from more than 1 appropriation in the Estimates.

    (4) The Minister may, in relation to the Commission, exercise his or her powers under section 147(1) of the Crown Entities Act 2004 as if that section included a reference to subsection (1)(a) and (e); and that section applies accordingly.

    Sections 159KA to 159KG were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Section 159KE(1)(a)(i): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 18 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159KF Annual report
  • (1) The Commission must include in its annual report a description of how the Commission is monitoring, and how it will report on, progress in giving effect to the tertiary education strategy.

    (2) This section does not limit section 151 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Sections 159KA to 159KG were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Section 159KF(1): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 19 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159KG Certain powers must not be delegated
  • (1) The Commission must not delegate any of the following powers:

    • (a) the power to appoint a chief executive; or

    • (b) any other power that the Minister specifies by notice in writing to the Commission.

    (2) This section applies despite section 73 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Sections 159KA to 159KG were inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Funding mechanisms

  • Heading: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159L Minister determines design of funding mechanisms
  • (1) The Minister must, from time to time, determine the design of the funding mechanisms that the Commission must use to fund organisations.

    (2) Without limiting subsection (1), in making a determination under that subsection, the Minister must—

    • (a) identify the general form and essential components of each funding mechanism; and

    • (b) indicate which of the funding mechanisms relates to—

      • (i) funding to be paid by the Commission under section 159YA (relating to funding organisations via plans); and

      • (ii) funding to be paid by the Commission under section 159ZC (relating to funding organisations under this Part other than via plans); and

      • (iii) other types of funding (if any).

    (3) Without limiting subsection (1), in making a determination under that subsection, the Minister may—

    • (a) specify the amount of money, or the proportion of an amount of money, available under any particular funding mechanism; and

    • (b) provide for funding to different groups of organisations or types of organisation; and

    • (c) provide for different versions of, or modifications to, a funding mechanism when applying it to different groups of organisations or types of organisation; and

    • (d) specify conditions that the Commission must attach to funding that is provided under any funding mechanism including, without limitation, conditions setting limits on the fees that an organisation may charge domestic students; and

    • (e) provide for funding that targets particular groups of students.

    Section 159L: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159M Restrictions on design of funding mechanisms
  • In determining a design for a funding mechanism under section 159L, the Minister may not—

    • (a) identify a specified organisation or organisations to which funding is to be provided or denied under any funding mechanism; or

    • (b) specify conditions under section 159L(3)(d) that set limits on the fees that organisations may charge domestic students until 2 months after the date on which the Minister has published a notice in the Gazette that—

      • (i) states that the Minister proposes to specify conditions of that kind; and

      • (ii) sets out the proposed conditions; and

      • (iii) invites submissions on the proposed conditions; and

      • (iv) specifies the date by which submissions must be received, which must be a date no later than 21 days after the date of the Gazette notice.

    Section 159M: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159N Funding mechanisms consistent with quality assurance principle
  • Every funding mechanism must be consistent with the principle that receiving public funds is dependent on an organisation meeting the quality assurance requirements in this Act.

    Section 159N: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159O Commission to implement funding mechanisms
  • The Commission must—

    • (a) develop the details of how to implement the Minister's determination of the design of funding mechanisms under section 159L; and

    • (b) implement the funding mechanisms.

    Section 159O: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Subsection (1)(a) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 42 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by omitting the words and publish a list of them in at least 1 daily newspaper circulating in each area served by the organisation.

Requirements for, and content of proposed plans

  • Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159P Requirements for proposed plans
  • A proposed plan must—

    • (a) describe how an organisation will give effect to the Government's current and medium-term priorities as described in the tertiary education strategy; and

    • (b) describe how an organisation will address the needs of its stakeholders (including, without limitation, students enrolled with the organisation); and

    • (c) describe an organisation's mission and role for the term of the plan; and

    • (d) set out a description of all—

      • (i) tertiary education programmes run by the organisation for which the organisation is seeking funding under section 159YA and specify the amount of funding sought in relation to those programmes; and

      • (ii) activities (including, without limitation, programmes and initiatives that will be undertaken by the organisation in order to build its capability) for which the organisation is seeking funding under section 159YA and specify the amount of funding sought in relation to those activities; and

    • (e) describe an organisation's proposed outcomes (including, without limitation, in relation to the tertiary education programmes and activities described in paragraph (d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought) and the performance indicators that the organisation will use to measure whether those outcomes have been achieved; and

    • (f) set out a description of all tertiary education programmes run by the organisation other than those in relation to which funding is sought.

    Section 159P: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159Q Exemption from certain requirements for proposed plans
  • (1) The Commission may, by notice in writing, exempt an organisation from having to comply with the requirements in section 159P(f).

    (2) The Commission may not exercise the power in subsection (1) in relation to an institution.

    (3) Before exempting an organisation under subsection (1), the Commission must consider—

    • (a) the amount of funding sought by the organisation; and

    • (b) the amount of funding already received by the organisation; and

    • (c) the type and size of the organisation; and

    • (d) the effective operation of the tertiary education system; and

    • (e) the Government's current and medium-term priorities as described in the tertiary education strategy; and

    • (f) any other matters the Commission considers relevant.

    Section 159Q: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159R Content of, and processes for submitting, proposed plans prescribed by Commission
  • (1) The Commission must prescribe and give public notice of—

    • (a) the content of organisations' proposed plans (being the particular matters that proposed plans must address or include in order to meet the requirements in section 159P); and

    • (b) the kinds of background or supplementary information that the Commission requires an organisation to provide in relation to a proposed plan; and

    • (c) the timetable and process for the submission of proposed plans to the Commission.

    (2) When prescribing matters under subsection (1), the Commission may include—

    • (a) standard content, as well as different content applying to different organisations, groups of organisations, or types of organisation; and

    • (b) different information, timetables, and processes for different organisations, groups of organisations, or types of organisation.

    (3) Notices given under subsection (1) may be—

    • (a) given at different times; and

    • (b) amended by the Commission.

    (4) The Commission must give public notice of a significant amendment made under subsection (3)(b).

    Section 159R: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159S Commission may exempt organisation from complying with certain matters
  • The Commission may, by notice in writing, exempt an organisation from complying with any of the matters it has prescribed under section 159R(1).

    Section 159S: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Submitting proposed plan

  • Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159T Who must submit proposed plan
  • (1) An organisation that is seeking funding from the Commission under a funding mechanism that provides for funding via plans must submit a proposed plan.

    (2) Subsection (1) does not apply to an organisation that is exempt under section 159U.

    Section 159T: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Subsection (1)(b) was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 43 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by adding the words , or any earlier date as agreed with the Minister.

159U Exemption from requirement to submit proposed plan
  • (1) The Commission may, by notice in writing, exempt an organisation, a group of organisations, or a type of organisation that is seeking funding under a funding mechanism that provides for funding via plans from the requirement, in section 159T(1), to submit a proposed plan.

    (2) The Commission may not exercise the power in subsection (1) in relation to an institution.

    (3) The Commission may exempt an organisation, a group of organisations, or a type of organisation under subsection (1) for a specified period that the Commission considers appropriate.

    Section 159U: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159V Frequency of submitting proposed plans
  • An organisation that is required to submit a proposed plan must submit a proposed plan to the Commission—

    • (a) at least once every 3 years; or

    • (b) if the Commission directs, at more frequent intervals specified by the Commission.

    Section 159V: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Profiles

[Repealed]

  • Heading: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159W Submitting combined proposed plan
  • The Commission may permit more than 1 organisation to prepare and submit a combined proposed plan if the Commission considers it appropriate.

    Section 159W: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Preparing and consulting on proposed plans

  • Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159X Preparing and consulting on proposed plans
  • (1) An organisation that is required to submit a proposed plan must prepare the proposed plan in accordance with this Part (including, unless it is exempt under section 159S, complying with the matters prescribed by the Commission under section 159R).

    (2) A proposed plan must be prepared in consultation with—

    • (a) the stakeholders that the organisation considers ought to be consulted; and

    • (b) any other person or group of persons that the Commission stipulates.

    (3) An organisation must develop the content of its proposed plan in collaboration with the Commission, including collaborating with the Commission about ways in which the organisation can implement the matters prescribed by the Commission under section 159R.

    (4) After completing the requirements in subsections (1) to (3), an organisation must submit its proposed plan to the Commission.

    Section 159X: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Assessment of proposed plans and giving of funding approval

  • Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159Y Criteria for assessing proposed plans
  • (1) The Commission must prescribe and give public notice of the criteria that the Commission will use to assess proposed plans to determine if they will receive funding approval.

    (2) The prescribed criteria must include, without limitation, criteria for assessing—

    • (a) how an organisation contributes to the Government's current and medium-term priorities described in the tertiary education strategy; and

    • (b) the tertiary education programmes and activities of an organisation in relation to which funding is sought under section 159YA; and

    • (c) the performance indicators used in measuring whether the specified outcomes relating to those tertiary education programmes and activities are being or have been achieved; and

    • (d) the extent and nature of an organisation's consultation over its proposed plan.

    (3) When prescribing matters under subsection (1), the Commission may include standard criteria, as well as different criteria applying to different organisations, groups of organisations, or types of organisation.

    (4) Notices given under subsection (1) may be—

    • (a) given at different times; and

    • (b) amended by the Commission.

    (5) The Commission must give public notice of a significant amendment made under subsection (4)(b).

    Section 159Y: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159YA Commission's assessment of proposed plans, giving of funding approval, and payment of funding
  • (1) The Commission must assess whether a proposed plan will receive funding approval by applying the assessment criteria prescribed under section 159Y.

    (2) After applying the assessment criteria, the Commission may decide to—

    • (a) fund (in whole or in part) all of the tertiary education programmes and activities described in the proposed plan under section 159P(d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought; or

    • (b) fund (in whole or in part) some of the tertiary education programmes and activities described in the proposed plan under section 159P(d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought; or

    • (c) not fund any of the tertiary education programmes or activities described in the proposed plan under section 159P(d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought.

    (3) Before deciding not to fund some or any, or part of some or any, of the tertiary education programmes or activities described in the proposed plan under section 159P(d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought, the Commission must—

    • (a) notify the organisation of its proposed decision; and

    • (b) give the organisation a reasonable opportunity to be heard.

    (4) The Commission must give its reasons to the affected organisation if it decides not to fund some or any, or part of some or any, of the tertiary education programmes or activities described in the proposed plan under section 159P(d)(i) and (ii) in relation to which funding is sought.

    (5) In deciding to give funding approval, the Commission must—

    • (a) specify the date from which that funding approval has effect; and

    • (b) determine the amount of funding payable to the organisation by applying the appropriate funding mechanism; and

    • (c) arrange for the payment to the organisation of the amount of funding determined under paragraph (b).

    Section 159YA: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YB Commission may decline to assess proposed plan
  • (1) The Commission may decline to assess a proposed plan under section 159YA if the Commission is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the proposed plan does not adequately satisfy the requirements of this Part (including, unless the organisation is exempt under section 159S, complying with the matters prescribed by the Commission under section 159R).

    (2) Before making a decision to decline to assess an organisation's proposed plan, the Commission must discuss with the organisation why the proposed plan does not adequately satisfy the requirements of this Part.

    (3) The Commission must give its reasons to the affected organisation if it declines to assess the organisation's proposed plan.

    Section 159YB: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YC Conditions on receiving funding under section 159YA
  • (1) It is a condition of an organisation receiving funding under section 159YA that the organisation will supply to the Commission or Ministry, from time to time as required by the Commission or Ministry, and in a form specified by the Commission or Ministry, any financial, statistical, or other information that the Commission or Ministry requires the organisation to supply.

    (2) The Commission may give funding approval subject to conditions, but only if the conditions are—

    • (a) conditions the Minister has determined the Commission must attach to funding under section 159L(3)(d); or

    • (b) conditions that the Commission considers necessary to ensure that the specified outcomes in a plan that relate to tertiary education programmes and activities in relation to which funding is being given are being achieved or will be achieved.

    (3) The Commission may at any time (including during a funding period) amend any condition imposed under subsection (2).

    (4) The amendment to the condition takes effect when the organisation has been given reasonable notice of it.

    Section 159YC: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YD Accountability for funding received under section 159YA
  • (1) An organisation (other than an institution) that receives funding under section 159YA must ensure that—

    • (a) it keeps records, in a form consistent with that required by the Commission, for the period to which the funding relates, that fully and fairly show—

      • (i) the transactions, assets, liabilities, and funds of the organisation that are or were affected by the funding; and

      • (ii) whether any conditions on which the funding approval was given have been complied with; and

    • (b) the records are available for inspection by the Commission at all reasonable times.

    (2) As soon as practicable after the end of any year in which an organisation (other than an institution) receives funding under section 159YA, the organisation must provide the Commission with—

    • (a) a financial report of the organisation for that year, including a statement of financial performance, a statement of financial position, a statement of movements in equity, a statement of cash flows, and a statement of service performance that compares the performance of the organisation with the outcomes specified in the organisation's plan as measured by the performance indicators specified in the organisation's plan; and

    • (b) any financial reports, or statistical or other information, required by the Commission; and

    • (c) any information necessary to demonstrate compliance with any condition attached to the funding.

    (3) A report required under subsection (2)(a) must be prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice and must be audited by an independent chartered accountant.

    (4) The Commission may exempt any organisation, group of organisations, or types of organisation from complying with 1 or more of the requirements set out in subsections (2) and (3).

    (5) In exercising the powers conferred on it by subsection (4), the Commission must have regard to—

    • (a) the amount of funding sought by the organisation; and

    • (b) the amount of funding received by the organisation; and

    • (c) the type and size of the organisation; and

    • (d) any other matters that the Commission considers relevant.

    (6) Section 203 sets out the accountability requirements for institutions.

    Section 159YD: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Expiry of funding approval

  • Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YE Expiry of funding approval
  • (1) Every plan that has funding approval must specify the date on which funding approval expires (the expiry date), which must be a date determined by the Commission that is no later than 3 years after the date on which the funding approval takes effect.

    (2) Funding approval expires on the expiry date, unless funding approval is earlier revoked under this Part.

    (3) Despite subsection (2), if, on the expiry date, an organisation is discussing a proposed plan with the Commission or the proposed plan is awaiting funding approval under this Part, the funding approval for the existing plan continues in effect until the earlier of the following dates:

    • (a) the date that is 6 months after the expiry date of the existing funding approval; or

    • (b) the date that funding approval for the proposed plan comes into effect.

    Section 159YE: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YF Effect of expiry of funding approval
  • The effect of the expiry of funding approval is that—

    • (a) the plan to which funding approval relates expires; and

    • (b) the Commission must cease payment, or cease any or all further payments, of funding under section 159YA in respect of that plan.

    Section 159YF: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Suspension or revocation of funding given under section 159YA

  • Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YG Commission may suspend or revoke funding given under section 159YA
  • (1) The Commission may suspend or revoke some or all funding given under section 159YA if it is satisfied on reasonable grounds that—

    • (a) an organisation has not complied, or is not complying, with a condition on which funding has been given under section 159YA; or

    • (b) when measured against performance indicators, the organisation has not achieved, or is not achieving, an outcome anticipated in its plan for a tertiary education programme or activity in relation to which funding has been given under section 159YA; or

    • (c) the organisation has not provided, or is not providing, adequate and timely information required by the Commission or Ministry under section 159YC.

    (2) Before deciding whether to suspend or revoke some or all funding given under section 159YA, the Commission must—

    • (a) notify the organisation of the specific matters of concern; and

    • (b) give the organisation a reasonable opportunity to be heard.

    (3) The Commission must give its reasons to an organisation if it decides to suspend or revoke some or all funding given under section 159YA.

    (4) The Commission must advise an organisation of the following matters if it decides to suspend some or all funding given under section 159YA:

    • (a) the date on which the suspension will end and, as a consequence, some or all funding will be revoked; and

    • (b) what action the organisation must take in order to have the suspension lifted and avoid some or all funding being revoked.

    (5) A suspension must be for a period that the Commission considers reasonable, having considered—

    • (a) the specific matters referred to in subsection (2)(a); and

    • (b) the action referred to in subsection (4)(b).

    Section 159YG: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YH Extending suspension of funding
  • (1) The date on which a suspension ends under section 159YG(4)(a) may be extended by the Commission.

    (2) The Commission must advise an organisation of the following matters if it decides to extend the date on which a suspension will end:

    • (a) the date on which the extended suspension will end and, as a consequence, some or all funding for all or part of the plan will be revoked; and

    • (b) what action the organisation must take in order to have the extended suspension lifted and avoid some or all funding for all or part of the plan being revoked.

    (3) An extension of a suspension must be for a period that the Commission considers reasonable, having considered—

    Section 159YH: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YI Effect of suspending or revoking funding given under section 159YA
  • (1) The effect of suspending funding given under section 159YA is that the Commission must cease payment, or cease any or all further payments, of funding given under section 159YA in respect of the plan or part of the plan in relation to which funding has been suspended.

    (2) The effect of revoking funding given under section 159YA is that—

    • (a) the plan or part of the plan to which the funding relates is revoked; and

    • (b) the Commission must cease payment, or cease any or all further payments, of funding under section 159YA in respect of the plan or part of the plan in relation to which funding has been revoked.

    Section 159YI: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YJ Review of decision by delegate to suspend or revoke funding given under section 159YA
  • (1) Subsection (2) applies to an organisation in relation to which a person has exercised any of the following powers under a delegation from the Commission under section 73 of the Crown Entities Act 2004:

    (2) An organisation to which this subsection applies may ask the Commission to review the decision of the delegate.

    Section 159YJ: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Amending or replacing plans

  • Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YK Organisation may seek approval for significant amendment, or replacement, of plan
  • (1) In this section and sections 159YL to 159YN, significant amendment means an amendment to a plan that relates to—

    • (a) a tertiary education programme or an activity in relation to which funding has been given under section 159YA; or

    • (b) any of the performance indicators that an organisation uses to measure whether proposed outcomes for tertiary education programmes or activities in relation to which funding has been given under section 159YA are being or have been achieved.

    (2) An organisation may, at any time, ask the Commission to approve a significant amendment to, or the replacement of, a plan.

    (3) An organisation that proposes to make a significant amendment to, or to replace, a plan must consult with—

    • (a) the stakeholders that the organisation considers ought to be consulted; and

    • (b) any other person or group that the Commission stipulates.

    (4) An organisation that proposes a significant amendment to, or replacement of, a plan must prepare the significant amendment or replacement in collaboration with the Commission, including collaborating with the Commission about ways in which the organisation can implement the matters prescribed by the Commission under subsection (5).

    (5) The Commission may prescribe the requirements for the following in relation to a significant amendment to, or a replacement of, a plan:

    • (a) the content of the significant amendment or replacement (which may be the same as the matters prescribed by the Commission under section 159R):

    • (b) criteria for assessing the significant amendment or replacement (which may be the same as those prescribed by the Commission under section 159Y).

    (6) In applying the requirements in subsection (5) in order to determine whether or not to approve a significant amendment to, or replacement of, a plan, the Commission must take into account—

    • (a) the extent of the significant amendment or replacement; and

    • (b) the impact of the significant amendment or replacement on the needs of the stakeholders and any other persons consulted by the organisation under subsection (3).

    (7) The Commission may, at any time, require an organisation to review a plan with a view to amending or replacing it.

    (8) Nothing in this section prohibits an organisation from making an amendment to a plan that is not a significant amendment.

    Section 159YK: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YL Effect of significant amendment or replacement of plan under section 159YK
  • (1) If the Commission approves a significant amendment to a plan, the significant amendment—

    • (a) forms part of the plan it amends; and

    • (b) takes effect on the date specified by the Commission.

    (2) If the Commission approves a replacement plan under section 159YK, the replacement plan—

    • (a) takes effect on the date specified by the Commission; and

    • (b) is treated as revoking the plan it replaces.

    Section 159YL: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YM Commission may make significant amendment to plan
  • (1) The Commission may, at any time, on its own initiative, propose a significant amendment to an organisation's plan if it is satisfied that the significant amendment is reasonably necessary to ensure accountability for public funding.

    (2) If the Commission proposes a significant amendment to an organisation's plan under subsection (1), it must prepare it in collaboration with the organisation (including giving the organisation a reasonable period to consult the stakeholders it considers ought to be consulted).

    (3) After collaborating with the organisation on the proposed significant amendment, the Commission must, if it decides to proceed with the significant amendment, determine the content of the significant amendment and give the organisation a reasonable opportunity to make submissions on it.

    (4) After considering any submissions made by the organisation, the Commission may—

    • (a) approve the proposed significant amendment (with further amendment if necessary); or

    • (b) abandon the proposed significant amendment.

    Section 159M: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YN Effect of significant amendment made to plan under section 159YM
  • A significant amendment made to a plan under section 159YM

    • (a) forms part of the plan it amends; and

    • (b) takes effect on the date specified by the Commission.

    Section 159N: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Plan summary

  • Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159YO Summary of plans
  • (1) The Commission must prescribe and give public notice of the matters that an organisation that has a plan must include in a plan summary.

    (2) An organisation that has a plan must ensure that—

    • (a) a plan summary is available for inspection by the public; and

    • (b) copies of that plan summary may be obtained either at no cost or no more than a reasonable cost; and

    • (c) the plan summary contains the matters prescribed under subsection (1).

    Section 159YO: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159Z Profiles must be publicly available
  • [Repealed]

    Section 159Z: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 20 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Funding by Commission

[Repealed]

  • Heading: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159ZA Minister must determine design of funding mechanisms
  • [Repealed]

    Section 159ZA: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159ZB Approval of profiles for funding purposes
  • [Repealed]

    Section 159ZB: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Funding under this Part other than via plans

  • Heading: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159ZC Funding other than via plans
  • (1) If a funding mechanism provides for funding for an organisation other than via plans, the Commission may, under this section, fund that organisation in accordance with that funding mechanism.

    (2) Nothing in subsection (1) limits the Commission's powers to fund organisations in other ways under a delegated authority or another enactment.

    Section 159ZC: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159ZD Conditions on funding received under section 159ZC
  • (1) It is a condition of receiving funding under section 159ZC that the recipient will supply to the Commission or Ministry, from time to time as required by the Commission or Ministry, and in a form specified by the Commission or Ministry, any financial, statistical, or other information that the Commission or Ministry requires the organisation to supply.

    (2) The Commission may impose conditions on funding received by an organisation under section 159ZC, but only if the Minister has provided that, under the funding mechanism under which that funding is provided,—

    • (a) any or specified conditions may be imposed; or

    • (b) specified conditions must be imposed.

    (3) The Commission may at any time (including during a funding period) amend any condition imposed under subsection (2).

    (4) An amendment to a condition takes effect when the organisation has been given reasonable notice of it.

    Section 159ZD: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159ZE Accountability for funding received under section 159ZC
  • (1) An organisation (other than an institution) that receives funding under section 159ZC must ensure that—

    • (a) it keeps records, in a form consistent with that required by the Commission, for the period to which the funding relates, that fully and fairly show—

      • (i) the transactions, assets, liabilities, and funds of the organisation that are or were affected by the funding; and

      • (ii) whether any conditions on which the grant was made have been complied with; and

    • (b) the records are available for inspection by the Commission at all reasonable times.

    (2) As soon as practicable after the end of any year in which an organisation (other than an institution) receives funding under section 159ZC, the organisation must provide the Commission with—

    • (a) a financial report of the organisation for that year, including a statement of financial performance, a statement of financial position, a statement of movements in equity, a statement of cash flows, and a statement of service performance that compares the performance of the organisation with the outcomes agreed with the Commission as measured by any performance indicators agreed with the Commission; and

    • (b) any financial reports, or statistical or other information, required by the Commission; and

    • (c) any information necessary to demonstrate compliance with any condition attached to the funding.

    (3) A report required under subsection (2)(a) must be prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice and must be audited by an independent chartered accountant.

    (4) The Commission may exempt any organisation, group of organisations, or type of organisation from complying with 1 or more of the requirements set out in subsections (2) and (3).

    (5) In exercising the powers conferred on it by subsection (4), the Commission must have regard to—

    • (a) the amount of funding sought by the organisation; and

    • (b) the amount of funding received by the organisation; and

    • (c) the type and size of the organisation; and

    • (d) any other matters that the Commission considers relevant.

    (6) Section 203 sets out the accountability requirements for institutions.

    Section 159ZE: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159ZF Commission may suspend or revoke funding given under section 159ZC
  • (1) The Commission may suspend or revoke payment, or any or all further payments, of any funding given to an organisation under section 159ZC if the Commission is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the organisation—

    • (a) has not complied, or is not complying, with a condition on which the funding was given; or

    • (b) is not providing, or has not provided, adequate and timely information required by the Commission or Ministry under section 159ZD.

    (2) Before deciding whether to suspend or revoke payment under subsection (1), the Commission must—

    • (a) notify the organisation of the specific matters of concern; and

    • (b) give the organisation a reasonable opportunity to be heard.

    (3) The Commission must give its reasons to an organisation if it decides to suspend or revoke the organisation's funding.

    (4) The Commission must specify the following matters if it decides to suspend funding under subsection (1):

    • (a) the date on which the suspension will end and, as a consequence, the funding will be revoked; and

    • (b) what action the organisation must take in order to have the suspension lifted and avoid funding being revoked.

    Section 159ZF: substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Part 13A (comprising sections 159A to 159ZF) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 9 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

159ZG Extending suspension of funding
  • (1) The date on which a suspension ends under section 159ZF(4)(a) may be extended by the Commission.

    (2) The Commission must advise an organisation of the following matters if it decides to extend the date on which a suspension will end:

    • (a) the date on which the extended suspension will end and, as a consequence, funding will be revoked; and

    • (b) what action the organisation must take in order to have the extended suspension lifted and avoid funding being revoked.

    (3) An extension of a suspension must be for a period that the Commission considers reasonable having considered—

    Section 159ZG: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

159ZH Review of decision made by delegate to suspend or revoke funding under section 159ZC
  • (1) Subsection (2) applies to an organisation in relation to which a person has exercised any of the following powers under a delegation from the Commission under section 73 of the Crown Entities Act 2004:

    • (a) suspending the organisation's funding under section 159ZF; or

    • (c) extending the suspension of the organisation's funding under section 159ZG.

    (2) An organisation to which this subsection applies may ask the Commission to review the decision of the delegate.

    Section 159ZH: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 21 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Part 14
Establishment and disestablishment of tertiary institutions

  • Part 14, comprising sections 160 to 164, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 36 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

160 Object
  • The object of the provisions of this Act relating to institutions is to give them as much independence and freedom to make academic, operational, and management decisions as is consistent with the nature of the services they provide, the efficient use of national resources, the national interest, and the demands of accountability.

    Part 14, comprising sections 160 to 164, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 36 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

161 Academic freedom
  • (1) It is declared to be the intention of Parliament in enacting the provisions of this Act relating to institutions that academic freedom and the autonomy of institutions are to be preserved and enhanced.

    (2) For the purposes of this section, academic freedom, in relation to an institution, means—

    • (a) The freedom of academic staff and students, within the law, to question and test received wisdom, to put forward new ideas and to state controversial or unpopular opinions:

    • (b) The freedom of academic staff and students to engage in research:

    • (c) The freedom of the institution and its staff to regulate the subject-matter of courses taught at the institution:

    • (d) The freedom of the institution and its staff to teach and assess students in the manner they consider best promotes learning:

    • (e) The freedom of the institution through its chief executive to appoint its own staff.

    (3) In exercising their academic freedom and autonomy, institutions shall act in a manner that is consistent with—

    • (a) The need for the maintenance by institutions of the highest ethical standards and the need to permit public scrutiny to ensure the maintenance of those standards; and

    • (b) The need for accountability by institutions and the proper use by institutions of resources allocated to them.

    (4) In the performance of their functions the Councils and chief executives of institutions, Ministers, and authorities and agencies of the Crown shall act in all respects so as to give effect to the intention of Parliament as expressed in this section.

    Part 14, comprising sections 160 to 164, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 36 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

162 Establishment of institutions
  • (1) Upon the commencement of this section, this Act has effect as if—

    • (a) Each body specified in Part 1 of Schedule 13 to this Act was established as a university under subsection (2) of this section; and

    • (b) Each body specified in Part 2 of that Schedule was established as a college of education under subsection (2) of this section; and

    • (c) Each body that, immediately before that commencement, was established as a polytechnic, institute of technology, technical institute or community college under the Education Act 1964, was established as a polytechnic under subsection (2) of this section,—

    and a reference in any other Act to an institution established under this Act shall be read as including a reference to a body referred to in paragraph (a), paragraph (b), or paragraph (c) of this subsection.

    (2) Subject to subsections (3) to (5) of this section, the Governor-General may, by Order in Council made on the written recommendation of the Minister, establish a body as a college of education, a polytechnic, a specialist college, a university, or a wananga, as the Governor-General considers appropriate.

    (3) Before deciding whether or not to recommend to the Governor-General the making of an Order in Council under subsection (2) of this section, the Minister shall—

    • (a) Give the Qualifications Authority a reasonable period in which to give advice to the Minister on the matter and consider any advice so given; and

    • (ab) satisfy himself or herself that the establishment of the institution is in the interests of the tertiary education system and the nation as a whole; and.

    • (b) Consult with such institutions, organisations representing institutions, and other relevant bodies, as the Minister considers appropriate.

    (4) In recommending to the Governor-General under subsection (2) of this section that a body should be established as a college of education, a polytechnic, a specialist college, a university, or a wananga, the Minister shall take into account—

    • (a) That universities have all the following characteristics and other tertiary institutions have one or more of those characteristics:

      • (i) They are primarily concerned with more advanced learning, the principal aim being to develop intellectual independence:

      • (ii) Their research and teaching are closely interdependent and most of their teaching is done by people who are active in advancing knowledge:

      • (iii) They meet international standards of research and teaching:

      • (iv) They are a repository of knowledge and expertise:

      • (v) They accept a role as critic and conscience of society; and

    • (b) That—

      • (i) A college of education is characterised by teaching and research required for the pre-school, compulsory and post-compulsory sectors of education, and for associated social and educational service roles:

      • (ii) A polytechnic is characterised by a wide diversity of continuing education, including vocational training, that contributes to the maintenance, advancement, and dissemination of knowledge and expertise and promotes community learning, and by research, particularly applied and technological research, that aids development:

      • (iia) a specialist college is characterised by teaching and (if relevant) research of a specialist nature that maintains, enhances, disseminates, and assists in the application of knowledge and expertise:

      • (iii) A university is characterised by a wide diversity of teaching and research, especially at a higher level, that maintains, advances, disseminates, and assists the application of, knowledge, develops intellectual independence, and promotes community learning:

      • (iv) A wananga is characterised by teaching and research that maintains, advances, and disseminates knowledge and develops intellectual independence, and assists the application of knowledge regarding ahuatanga Maori (Maori tradition) according to tikanga Maori (Maori custom).

    (5) The Minister may, on the recommendation of the Council of the institution concerned, change the name of an institution by notice published in the Gazette.

    Part 14, comprising sections 160 to 164, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 36 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 1 January 2003, by section 10(1) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by inserting the words a specialist college, after the words a polytechnic,.

    Subsection (3)(ab) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 10(2) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Subsection (4) was amended, as from 1 January 2003, by section 10(3) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by inserting the words a specialist college, after the words a polytechnic,.

    Subsection (4)(b)(iia) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 10(4) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

163 Constitution of institutions
  • (1) Each body referred to in paragraph (b) or paragraph (c) of section 162(1) of this Part of this Act shall consist of its governing body, the chief executive, the teaching staff, general staff, the graduates and students, and such other people as the governing body may from time to time determine.

    (2) Each Order in Council establishing an institution shall make provision for determining the people who are to constitute the institution.

    Part 14, comprising sections 160 to 164, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 36 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 25 June 1993, by section 14(2) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51) by substituting the words Part of this Act shall for the words Act shall.

164 Disestablishment of institutions
  • (1) Subject to this section, the Governor-General may, by Order in Council made on the written recommendation of the Minister, disestablish an institution.

    (2) The Governor-General shall not disestablish a university established under section 162 unless the House of Representatives has passed a resolution approving the disestablishment of the university.

    (3) The Minister shall not recommend the disestablishment of an institution unless the Minister—

    • (a) Is satisfied on reasonable grounds that there are good reasons to do so; and

    • (ab) is satisfied that the disestablishment is in the interests of the tertiary education system and the nation as a whole; and

    • (b) Specifies the reasons in the recommendation.

    (4) When an institution is, or 2 or more institutions are, disestablished, the Governor-General may, by Order in Council made on the written recommendation of the Minister, incorporate the disestablished institution or any one or more of the disestablished institutions in another institution, whether the other institution is—

    • (a) An existing institution or a new institution established for the purpose:

    • (b) An institution of the same class as the disestablished institution or institutions or an institution of a different class from it or them (for example, a disestablished polytechnic may be incorporated in a university).

    (5) Before deciding whether or not to recommend the making of an Order in Council under subsection (1) or subsection (4), or both subsections (1) and (4), the Minister shall—

    • (a) Give to the Council of the institution or the Councils of the institutions concerned, and to every other body that the Minister considers is likely to be directly affected, written notice—

      • (i) Setting out the action that the Minister is considering whether to take and the reasons for that action; and

      • (ii) Inviting each Council or other body to make a written submission to the Minister in relation to the matter; and

    • (b) Publish such notices as the Minister considers appropriate inviting members of the public to make written submissions in relation to the matter; and

    • (c) Consider any submissions made within a reasonable period in response to the notices referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this subsection.

    (6) If an Order in Council is made under subsection (1) or subsection (4), or both subsections (1) and (4), the Minister must present to the House of Representatives a copy of the Order in Council and a statement of the reasons for the making of the Order in Council.

    Part 14, comprising sections 160 to 164, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 36 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 43 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by substituting the words established under section 162 for the words specified in Part 1 of Schedule 13 to this Act. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (3)(ab) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 11 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Subsection (4) was substituted, as from 23 May 1998, by section 4(1) Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

    Subsection (5) was amended, as from 23 May 1998, by section 4(2) Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21) by substituting the words or subsection (4), or both subsections (1) and (4) for the words or subsection (3) of this section.

    Subsection (6) was amended, as from 23 May 1998, by section 4(3) Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21) by substituting the words , or both subsections (1) and (4), the Minister must present to for the words of this section, the Minister shall lay before.

Part 15
Administration of tertiary institutions

Councils

  • Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

165 Institutions to be governed by Councils
  • (1) After the commencement of this section,—

    • (a) The governing body of each institution shall be a Council constituted in accordance with this Part; and

    • (b) A reference in any law to the Council or other governing body of an institution shall be construed, except in relation to matters that occurred before that commencement, as a reference to the Council of that institution as so constituted.

    (2) Subject to section 193(2) of this Act, all acts or things done in the name of, or on behalf of, an institution with the authority of, or of a delegate of, the Council or the chief executive shall be deemed to have been done by the institution.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

166 Incorporation
  • (1) Each body that is established as a university under section 162(2) of this Act after the commencement of section 162 of this Act, and each college of education, polytechnic, specialist college, or wananga, is a body corporate with perpetual succession and a common seal; and is capable of—

    • (a) Holding real and personal property; and

    • (b) Suing and being sued; and

    • (c) Otherwise doing and suffering all that bodies corporate may do and suffer.

    (2) This section does not limit the generality of section 192(1) of this Act.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 January 2003, by section 12 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by inserting the word specialist college, after the word polytechnic,.

167 Affixing of Council's common seal
  • (1) The Council of an institution may, in writing under the institution's common seal, authorise any member or members of the Council, or any member or members of the staff of the institution, to execute documents, or documents of a specified class or description, or specified documents, on behalf of the institution.

    (2) Subject to subsection (6) of this section, an authority under subsection (1) of this section may be given—

    • (a) Unconditionally, or subject to any conditions the Council thinks fit:

    • (b) To a specified member or members of the Council or a specified member or members of the staff of the institution:

    • (c) To a member or members of the staff of the institution of a specified class or description:

    • (d) To the holder or holders for the time being of a specified office or offices of or in the institution:

    • (e) To the holder or holders for the time being of offices of a specified class or description of or in the institution.

    (3) The institution's common seal shall not be affixed to any document except—

    • (a) Pursuant to a resolution of the Council; or

    • (b) By virtue of, and in accordance with, an authority under subsection (1) of this section.

    (4) The affixing of the institution's common seal pursuant to a resolution of the Council shall be countersigned—

    • (a) In the case of the affixing of the common seal to an award, by one member; or

    • (b) In any other case, by at least 2 members.

    (5) The affixing of the institution's common seal by virtue of an authority under subsection (1) of this section shall be countersigned in accordance with the authority.

    (6) An authority under subsection (1) of this section shall provide for the affixing of the institution's common seal to be countersigned by at least 2 people.

    (7) The affixing of the institution's common seal on a document is conclusive proof of the authority of the people who affixed it to do so.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Constitution of Councils

168 Constitutions of Councils of existing institutions
  • (1) It is the duty of the governing body of an existing institution to recommend to the Minister, as soon as practicable after the commencement of this section, a constitution for the Council of the institution that is, in the opinion of that governing body, appropriate for the institution and complies with the requirements of section 171 of this Act.

    (2) Subject to subsection (3) of this section, if the governing body of an existing institution recommends to the Minister a constitution for the Council of the institution in accordance with subsection (1) of this section, the Minister shall, by notice published in the Gazette, determine the constitution of that Council in accordance with the recommendation.

    (3) If the governing body of an existing institution does not make a recommendation in accordance with subsection (1) of this section within 6 weeks after the commencement of this section or does not make a recommendation within that period that complies with the requirements of section 171 of this Act, the Minister shall, by notice published in the Gazette, determine the constitution of the Council of that institution.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

169 Constitutions of Councils of new institutions
  • (1) For the purpose of advising the Minister as to the constitution for the Council of a body that is, or is to be, established under section 162(2) of this Act, the Minister shall appoint a committee (in this section referred to as an establishment committee) consisting of 3 persons.

    (2) The establishment committee shall recommend to the Minister a constitution for the Council that is, in the opinion of that committee, appropriate for the institution and complies with the requirements of section 171 of this Act.

    (3) When the establishment committee has recommended a constitution for the Council in accordance with subsection (2) of this section, the Minister shall, by notice published in the Gazette, determine the constitution of the Council in accordance with the recommendation.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

170 Amendment of constitution
  • If, after the constitution of a Council has been determined, the Council recommends to the Minister that the constitution be amended in a manner that complies with the requirements of section 171 of this Act, the Minister shall, by notice published in the Gazette, amend the constitution in accordance with the recommendation.

    Part 15, comprising sections 165 to 222, was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

171 Requirements as to constitutions of Councils
  • (1) The Council of an institution shall consist of not fewer than 12 nor more than 20 members.

    (2) Subject to subsection (1) of this section, the Council of an institution shall include—

    • (a) Four persons appointed by the Minister:

    • (b) The chief executive of the institution:

    • (c) At least 1, but not more than 3, permanent members of the academic staff of the institution elected by the permanent members of that staff:

    • (d) At least 1, but not more than 3, permanent members of the general staff of the institution elected by the permanent members of that staff:

    • (e) at least 1, but not more than 3, persons who must be appointed,—

      • (i) in the case of an institution at which membership of a students association is compulsory, in accordance with the constitution or rules of the association; or

      • (ii) in any other case, following an election (conducted in accordance with statutes made by the Council) by the students at the institution:

    • (ea) [Repealed]

    • (f) Having regard to the courses provided by the institution—

      • (i) One person appointed in accordance with the Council's constitution after consultation by the person or body making the appointment with the central organisation of employers within the meaning of the Labour Relations Act 1987:

      • (ii) One person appointed in accordance with the Council's constitution after consultation by the person or body making the appointment with the central organisation of workers within the meaning of the Labour Relations Act 1987:

      • (iii) If the governing body or the establishment committee, as the case may be, considers it appropriate for professional bodies to be represented on the Council, 1 or more persons appointed in accordance with the Council's constitution to represent those bodies.

    (3) The constitution of a Council may, in addition to providing for the Council to include the persons mentioned in subsection (2) of this section but subject to subsection (1) of this section, contain any one or more of the following provisions:

    • (a) A provision allowing the Council to co-opt as members not more than a specified number of persons:

    • (b) A provision allowing the appointment, in accordance with the provision, as members of not more than a specified number of persons:

    • (c) A provision allowing the election, in accordance with the provision, as members of not more than a specified number of persons.

    (4) It is desirable that the Council of an institution should reflect so far as is reasonably practicable,—

    • (a) The ethnic and socio-economic diversity of the communities served by the institution; and

    • (b) The fact that approximately half the population of New Zealand is male and half the population is female.

    (5) The Minister, when appointing members of a Council, and a Council, when co-opting or appointing members, shall have regard to subsection (4) of this section and shall strive to ensure that the Council has a sufficient number of members with expertise in management to enable the Council properly to perform its functions.

    (6) A person is not eligible for appointment, election, or co-option as a member of a Council, if,—

    • (a) [Repealed]

    • (c) The person is a bankrupt who has not obtained his or her order of discharge or whose order of discharge has been suspended for a term not yet expired or is subject to conditions not yet fulfilled.

    (7) The constitution of a Council shall contain a provision limiting the number of occasions on which a person may be appointed, elected or co-opted as a member of the Council but, subject to any such provision, a person is not ineligible for appointment, election or co-option as a member of a Council merely because the person has previously been a member of that Council.

    (8) [Repealed]

    (8A) [Repealed]

    (9) No act or proceeding of, or of any committee of, a Council is invalidated because of—

    • (a) A defect in the appointment, election or co-option of a member of the Council or of the committee; or

    • (b) A disqualification of a member of the Council or of the committee; or

    • (c) A defect in the convening of a meeting; or

    • (d) A vacancy or vacancies in the membership of the Council or of the committee.

    (10) In this section permanent member, in relation to the academic or general staff of an institution, means a member of that staff—

    • (a) Who is employed, either on a full-time or part-time basis—

      • (i) For a period ending, unless sooner terminated, on his or her reaching a specified age; or

      • (ii) Until he or she retires or resigns; or

    • (b) Who has been employed, whether under a contract for a specified period or otherwise, and either on a full-time or part-time basis, for at least 3 months; or

    • (c) Who has been employed, whether under a contract for a specified period or otherwise, and either on a full-time or part-time basis, for less than 3 months and whose employment is, in the opinion of the chief executive of the institution, likely to continue for at least 3 months from the date of commencement of that employment.

    (11) The members of the staff of an institution who are to be regarded as the academic staff of the institution, and the members of the staff of an institution who are to be regarded as the general staff of the institution, for the purposes of an election of members of the Council of the institution by the staff of the institution or for the purposes of membership of the Council by persons so elected, shall, if there are no statutes of the institution dealing with the matter, be determined by the chief executive of the institution.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (2)(e) was substituted, and subsection (2)(ea) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 3(1) Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90).

    Subsection (2)(e) was substituted, and subsection (2)(ea) was repealed, as from 8 July 2000, by section 24(1) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

    Subsection (6)(a) was repealed, as from 25 October 2001, by section 44(1) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (6)(b) was substituted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 44(2) Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    The reference to the Mental Health (Compulsory Assessment and Treatment) Act 1992 in subsection (6)(b) was substituted, as from 1 November 1992, for a reference to the Mental Health Act 1969 pursuant to section 137 Mental Health (Compulsory Assessment and Treatment) Act 1992 (1992 No 46).

    Subsection (8) was substituted, and subsection (8A) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 3(2) Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90).

    Subsections (8) and (8A) were repealed, as from 8 July 2000, by section 24(2) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

172 Transitional provisions relating to an institution's first Council
  • (1) A reference in this section to an election includes a reference to the taking of any step connected with an election, including the calling for nominations of candidates for election, the ascertainment of the persons eligible to vote, the voting, the counting of votes and the declaration of the poll.

    (2) If it is practicable to do so, the Minister shall defer making the first appointments to the Council of an institution of persons referred to in section 171(2)(a) of this Act until the other members of the Council referred to in section 171(2) of this Act have been elected, appointed or co-opted.

    (3) An election of a member of a Council may begin to be held at any time on or after the day on which the Education Amendment Act 1990 received the Royal assent and, if not completed before the 1st day of January 1991, may be completed on or after that day.

    (4) An election of a member of the Council of an institution as mentioned in subsection (3) of this section shall be held,—

    • (a) In the case of an election of a student member where the students at the institution belong to an association of students recognised by the governing body of the institution, in such manner as the governing body of that association determines; or

    • (b) In the case of any other election, in such manner as is provided by statutes made by the governing body of the institution or, if there are no such statutes, in such manner as that governing body determines.

    (5) The governing body of an institution may make statutes for the purposes of subsection (4) of this section.

    (6) If, on the 1st day of January 1991,—

    • (a) The election of a member or members of the Council of an institution referred to in paragraph (c), paragraph (d) or paragraph (e) of section 171(2) of this Act has not been held or completed or, if provision is made by the Council's constitution for a member or members to be elected by the Court of Convocation for the institution, that election has not been held or completed; and

    • (b) The previous governing body of the institution included a person or persons whom the Minister considers to correspond to a member or members referred to in paragraph (a) of this subsection,—

    the Minister may, by written notice to the chief executive of the institution, direct that a specified person or persons, being a person or persons referred to in paragraph (b) of this subsection, is or are to be a member or members of the Council until the corresponding member or members referred to in paragraph (a) of this subsection is or are elected.

    (7) If the Minister notifies the governing body of an institution before the 1st day of January 1991 that a member of the proposed Council of the institution to be appointed by the Minister will not be appointed until after that day, that governing body may before that day appoint a person (other than a person who is not eligible for appointment because of section 171(6) of this Act) to be a member of the Council of the institution from and including that day until the first-mentioned member is appointed or the 1st day of November 1990, whichever is the earlier.

    (8) In the case of an existing institution, nothing in this Act affects the functions and powers of the existing governing body of the institution before the 1st day of January 1991 but, on the commencement of that day, that governing body ceases to exist and thereafter the Council of the institution constituted in accordance with this Part of this Act shall be the governing body of the institution as provided by section 165 of this Act.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

173 Term of office
  • (1) Subject to this section, members of the Council of an institution who are appointed, or (not being student members) are elected, hold office for 4 years.

    (2) Subject to this section, a student member holds office for one year.

    (3) Subject to this section, a member co-opted by the Council holds office for such period, not exceeding 4 years, as the Council determines in relation to the member concerned.

    (4) Each of the members first appointed (otherwise than under section 172 of this Act) to the Council, and each of the members (other than a student member) first elected to the Council, holds office for either 2 years or 4 years, as the Council determines in relation to the member concerned at, or within 3 months (or such further period as the Minister allows) after, its first meeting.

    (5) The term of office of a member of a Council who is appointed, elected or co-opted commences on whichever is the latest of the following:

    • (a) The date of the appointment, election or co-option:

    • (b) In the case of a member who was appointed or elected as mentioned in section 171(2) of this Act and whose predecessor in office did not cease to hold office before the expiration of his or her term of office, the expiration of that term:

    • (c) The date of commencement of this section.

    (6) Notwithstanding subsections (1), (2), and (4) of this section, if the term of office of a member of a Council who was appointed or elected as mentioned in section 171(2) of this Act expires before a successor is appointed or elected, the member continues in office until a successor is appointed or elected.

    (7) This section has effect subject to sections 172, 174, and 176 of this Act.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

174 Vacation of office
  • (1) A member of a Council (other than the chief executive) may resign as a member by written notice signed by the member and given to the chief executive.

    (2) A member of the Council of an institution who was elected as mentioned in paragraph (c) or paragraph (d) of section 171(2) of this Act ceases to hold office as a member if he or she—

    • (a) Being a member referred to in section 171(2)(c) of this Act, ceases to be a permanent member of the academic staff of the institution; or

    • (b) Being a member referred to in section 171(2)(d) of this Act, ceases to be a permanent member of the general staff of the institution.

    (3) The Council may, by resolution, dismiss a member of a Council (other than the chief executive) as a member if the member—

    • (a) Is declared bankrupt; or

    • (c) Fails to attend 3 consecutive meetings of the Council without having given to the chief executive prior notice of his or her inability to attend the meeting concerned; or

    • (d) Without reasonable excuse, fails to comply with section 175 of this Act.

    (4) The chief executive shall send to the member concerned a letter setting out the terms of the resolution dismissing the member.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    The reference to the Mental Health (Compulsory Assessment and Treatment) Act 1992 in subsection (3)(b) was substituted, as from 1 November 1992, for a reference to the Mental Health Act 1969 pursuant to section 137 Mental Health (Compulsory Assessment and Treatment) Act 1992 (1992 No 46).

175 Disclosure of interest
  • (1) A member of, or of a committee of, a Council who has an interest in a matter being considered or about to be considered by the Council or committee, as the case may be, shall, as soon as possible after the relevant facts have come to the member's knowledge, disclose the nature of the interest at a meeting of the Council or committee.

    (2) A disclosure under subsection (1) of this section shall be recorded in the minutes of the meeting of the Council or committee and the member shall not unless the Council decides otherwise—

    • (a) Be present during any deliberation of the Council or committee with respect to that matter; or

    • (b) Take part in any decision of the Council or committee with respect to that matter.

    (3) For the purposes of this section, a person has an interest in a matter if, and only if, the matter relates to the conditions of service of the person as the chief executive or a member of the staff of the institution concerned or the person has any other direct or indirect pecuniary interest in the matter.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

176 Casual vacancies
  • (1) If the office of a member of a Council becomes vacant before the end of the member's term of office, a person shall, subject to subsection (2) of this section, be appointed, elected or co-opted to the vacant office by the same procedure as that by which the member whose office became vacant became a member.

    (2) If the vacancy occurs within 3 months before the end of the member's term of office, the Council may decide that the vacancy need not be filled under this section.

    (3) A member appointed, elected or co-opted under this section holds office for the period commencing on the date of the appointment, election or co-option and ending at the expiration of the term of office of the member whose office became vacant.

    (4) Notwithstanding subsection (3) of this section, if the term of office of a member referred to in that subsection who was appointed or elected as mentioned in section 171(2) of this Act expires before a successor is appointed or elected, the member continues in office until a successor is appointed or elected.

    (5) This section has effect subject to section 174 of this Act.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

177 Chairperson and Deputy Chairperson
  • (1) At the first meeting of a Council the Council shall elect one of its members to be the Chairperson, and another of its members to be the Deputy Chairperson, of the Council.

    (2) Whenever a vacancy subsequently occurs in the office of Chairperson or Deputy Chairperson of the Council, the Council shall elect one of its members to fill the vacant office.

    (3) A member of the Council who is the chief executive of the institution, a member of the staff of the institution or a student member is not eligible for election as the Chairperson or Deputy Chairperson of the Council.

    (4) The Chairperson and Deputy Chairperson of a Council each hold office, subject to this section, for one year but are eligible for re-election.

    (5) Notwithstanding subsection (4) of this section, if the term of office of the Chairperson or Deputy Chairperson of a Council expires before a successor is elected, the Chairperson or Deputy Chairperson, as the case may be, continues in office until a successor is elected.

    (6) The Chairperson or Deputy Chairperson of a Council—

    • (a) May resign as Chairperson or Deputy Chairperson by written notice signed by him or her and given to the chief executive; and

    • (b) Ceases to hold office as Chairperson or Deputy Chairperson if—

      • (i) He or she ceases to be a member of the Council; or

      • (ii) He or she becomes the chief executive, a member of the staff or a student of the institution; or

      • (iii) The Council passes a resolution to the effect that it has no confidence in the Chairperson or Deputy Chairperson, as the case may be.

    (7) The Chairperson of the Council of a university may be referred to as the Chancellor or by such other title as the Council determines and the Chairperson of the Council of an institution other than a university may be referred to by such title (other than Chancellor or another title that includes the word Chancellor) as the Council determines.

    (8) The Deputy Chairperson of the Council of a university may be referred to as the Pro-Chancellor or by such other title as the Council determines and the Deputy Chairperson of the Council of an institution other than a university may be referred to by such title (other than Pro-Chancellor or another title that includes the word Chancellor) as the Council determines.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

178 Meetings of Councils
  • (1) The Chairperson of a Council may convene meetings to be held at such places and times as he or she determines.

    (2) It is the duty of the Chairperson of a Council to convene such meetings as he or she thinks necessary for the efficient performance of the functions of the Council.

    (3) If so requested by written notice by not fewer than 5 members of a Council, the Chairperson of the Council shall convene a meeting.

    (4) If there is no Chairperson of a Council or for any reason the Chairperson is not available, the Deputy Chairperson of the Council has the powers and duties of the Chairperson under subsections (1) to (3) of this section and references in those subsections to the Chairperson shall be construed as references to the Deputy Chairperson.

    (5) No business shall be transacted at a meeting unless a majority of the members then holding office are present.

    (6) The Chairperson shall preside at all meetings at which he or she is present.

    (7) If the Chairperson is not present at a meeting but the Deputy Chairperson is present, the Deputy Chairperson shall preside.

    (8) If neither the Chairperson nor the Deputy Chairperson is present at a meeting, the members present shall appoint one of their number to preside.

    (9) Every question before a meeting shall be decided by a majority of the votes cast on it by the members present.

    (10) At a meeting the member presiding has a deliberative vote on every question, and on any question where the deliberative votes for and against are equal also has a casting vote.

    (11) Except as provided by this section, a Council shall determine its own procedures.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

179 Fees and allowances
  • (1) A member of a Council other than the chief executive may be paid fees at such rates (not exceeding maximum rates fixed by the Minister in accordance with the fees framework) as the Council determines.

    (2) A member of a Council of an institution is entitled, in accordance with the fees framework, to be reimbursed, out of the funds of the entity, for actual and reasonable travelling and other expenses incurred in carrying out his or her office as a member.

    (3) For the purposes of this section, fees framework means the framework determined by the Government from time to time for the classification and remuneration of statutory and other bodies in which the Crown has an interest, including statutory entities and their subsidiaries and tertiary education institutions.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 179 was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Functions and duties of Councils

180 Functions of Councils
  • (1) The functions of the Council of an institution are—

    • (a) To appoint a chief executive in accordance with the State Sector Act 1988, and to monitor and evaluate his or her performance:

    • (b) to prepare and submit a proposed plan if the institution is seeking funding under a funding mechanism that provides for funding via plans:

    • (c) if the institution has a plan,—

      • (i) to ensure that the institution is managed in accordance with that plan; and

      • (ii) to determine policies to implement that plan:

    • (d) to determine, subject to the State Sector Act 1988, the policies of the institution in relation to the management of its affairs:

    • (e) to undertake planning relating to the institution's long-term strategic direction.

    (2) [Repealed]

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1)(a) was amended, as from 25 October 2001, by section 45 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88) by adding the words , and to monitor and evaluate his or her performance. See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Section 180(1)(b): substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 22(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 180(1)(c): substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 22(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 180(1)(d): substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 22(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 180(1)(e): substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 22(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Subsection (1)(b) to (e) was substituted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 13(1) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 180(2): repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 22(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Subsection (2) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 13(2) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 37(1) Public Finance Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 113) by substituting the words section 154 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 for the words section 41 of the Public Finance Act 1989.

181 Duties of Councils
  • It is the duty of the Council of an institution, in the performance of its functions and the exercise of its powers,—

    • (a) To strive to ensure that the institution attains the highest standards of excellence in education, training, and research:

    • (c) To encourage the greatest possible participation by the communities served by the institution so as to maximise the educational potential of all members of those communities with particular emphasis on those groups in those communities that are under-represented among the students of the institution:

    • (d) To ensure that the institution does not discriminate unfairly against any person:

    • (e) to ensure that the institution operates in a financially responsible manner that ensures the efficient use of resources and maintains the institution's long-term viability:

    • (f) To ensure that proper standards of integrity, conduct, and concern for—

      • (i) The public interest; and

      • (ii) The wellbeing of students attending the institution—

      are maintained.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Paragraph (e) was substituted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 46 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

182 Determination of policy
  • (1) In determining the policy of an institution with respect to any matter relating to the institution, the Council of the institution shall consult with any board, committee, or other body established within the institution that has responsibility for giving advice in relation to, or for giving effect to, the policy of the institution with respect to that matter.

    (2) The Council of an institution shall establish an academic board consisting of the institution's chief executive, and members of the staff and students of the institution, to—

    • (a) Advise the Council on matters relating to courses of study or training, awards, and other academic matters; and

    • (b) Exercise powers delegated to it by the Council.

    (3) The academic board shall be deemed for the purposes of section 222 of this Act to be a committee appointed by the Council under section 193(2)(i) of this Act.

    (4) Without limiting the generality of subsection (1) of this section, the Council of an institution shall not make any decision or statute in respect of any academic matter referred to in subsection (2) of this section unless it has requested the advice of the academic board and considered any advice given by the academic board.

    (5) Without derogating from the duties of the Council of an institution under subsections (1) and (4) of this section, a decision or statute made by the Council is not invalid merely because of a failure of the Council to comply with either of those subsections.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

183 Personal liability
  • No member of the Council of an institution is personally liable for any act done or omitted by the member or by the Council—

    • (a) In good faith; and

    • (b) In pursuance or intended pursuance of the functions of the institution or of the Council.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Charters

  • This heading was repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 15 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

184 Each institution to have charter
  • [Repealed]

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Sections 184 to 191 were repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 15 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

184A Interim arrangements for charters
  • [Repealed]

    Section 184A was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 14 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Sections 184 to 191 were repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 15 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

185 Consultations
  • [Repealed]

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Sections 184 to 191 were repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 15 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

186 Consideration of proposed charter or amendment
  • [Repealed]

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Sections 184 to 191 were repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 15 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

187 Power of Minister to initiate amendment of charter
  • [Repealed]

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Sections 184 to 191 were repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 15 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

188 Approval of charter or amendment
  • [Repealed]

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Sections 184 to 191 were repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 15 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

189 What happens if institution has no charter
  • [Repealed]

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Sections 184 to 191 were repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 15 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

190 Mandatory requirements for charter
  • [Repealed]

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Sections 184 to 191 were repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 15 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

191 Charter to be available for inspection
  • [Repealed]

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Sections 184 to 191 were repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 15 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Profiles

[Repealed]

  • Heading: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 23 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

191A Each institution to have a profile
  • [Repealed]

    Section 191A: repealed, on 1 January 2008, by section 23 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

Powers of institutions and Councils

192 Powers of institutions
  • (1) Subject to subsection (2) of this section, an institution has—

    • (a) The rights, powers, and privileges of a natural person; and

    • (b) The power to issue debentures; and

    • (c) The power to grant floating charges on the institution's undertaking or property, or any of it; and

    • (d) The power to do any other thing it is authorised to do by this Act, by any other enactment, or by any rule of law.

    (2) None of the rights, powers, or privileges of an institution shall be exercised except for the purpose of performing—

    • (a) Functions characteristic of institutions of the class to which the institution belongs; or

    • (aa) In the case of an institution that incorporates another institution or other institutions under section 164(4), functions characteristic of institutions of the class to which the incorporating institution belongs and functions characteristic of institutions of the class or classes to which the incorporated institution or institutions belong; or

    • (b) Functions of a kind that, in the opinion of the institution's Council,—

      • (i) May conveniently, and without disadvantage to the performance of those characteristic functions, be performed in association with those functions; and

      • (ii) Are appropriate for institutions of the class to which the institution belongs or, in the case of an institution that incorporates another institution or other institutions under section 164(4), are appropriate for institutions of the classes represented in the institution.

    (3) Paragraphs (b) to (d) of subsection (1) of this section do not affect the generality of paragraph (a) of that subsection.

    (4) Subject to subsection (5) of this section, an institution shall not exercise any of the following powers without the written consent of the Secretary:

    • (a) The power to sell or otherwise dispose of assets or interests in assets:

    • (b) The power to mortgage or otherwise charge assets or interests in assets:

    • (c) The power to grant leases of land or buildings or parts of buildings:

    • (d) The power to borrow, issue debentures, or otherwise raise money.

    (5) Subsection (4) of this section does not prohibit an institution, without the consent of the Secretary, from—

    • (a) Selling or otherwise disposing of, or mortgaging or otherwise charging, an asset or an interest in an asset, where the value of the asset or interest does not exceed an amount determined by the Minister or an amount ascertained in accordance with a formula determined by the Minister:

    • (b) Granting a lease for a term that does not exceed, and when added to any term for which the lease may be renewed does not exceed, 15 years:

    • (c) Borrowing, issuing debentures, or otherwise raising money, where the amount to be borrowed, the amount of the debentures, or the amount to be raised, does not exceed an amount determined by the Minister or ascertained in accordance with a formula determined by the Minister.

    (6) A determination by the Minister under this section may relate to all institutions, institutions of a specified class or description, or a specified institution or institutions, and shall be made after the Minister has consulted the institution or institutions concerned.

    (7) Where the Secretary consents under subsection (4) of this section to the exercise of a power by an institution, the Council shall comply with any conditions imposed by the Secretary and shall tell the Secretary when the transaction has been completed and how the proceeds, if any, of the transaction have been dealt with.

    (8) Subject to subsection (11) of this section, the powers to grant awards conferred on an institution by this Act or any other enactment—

    • (a) In the case of nationally recognised awards, are subject to any reasonable requirements made by the Qualifications Authority in the performance of its functions under this Act; and

    • (b) In any case, do not extend, without the consent of that Authority, to granting an award that is described as a degree or the description of which includes the words bachelor, master, or doctor.

    (9) Subsection (8)(b) of this section does not apply in relation to the granting of an award by a university.

    (10) Any consent by the Qualifications Authority under subsection (8)(b) of this section may be withdrawn, after consultation with the Council of the institution concerned, with effect from a date not earlier than the 1st day of January next following the giving of notice of the withdrawal to that institution.

    (11) Nothing in this Act prevents an institution that was in existence immediately before the commencement of this section—

    • (a) From granting during the 2 years following that commencement an award of a kind or description that the institution, or the governing body of that institution, was entitled to grant immediately before that commencement; or

    • (b) From granting after that period an award to a person in consequence of the person's having completed a course of study or training that the person commenced to undertake before the end of that period.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (2)(aa) was inserted, as from 23 May 1998, by section 4(1) Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

    Subsection (2)(b)(ii) was amended, as from 23 May 1998, by section 4(2) Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21) by inserting the words or, in the case of an institution that incorporates another institution or other institutions under section 164(4), are appropriate for institutions of the classes represented in the institution.

    Section 192(5)(b): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 24 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

193 Powers of Councils
  • (1) The Council of an institution has all powers reasonably necessary to enable it to perform its functions efficiently and effectively.

    (2) Except where they are exercised by delegation under this Act, the following powers of an institution shall be exercised only by the institution's Council:

    • (a) To provide courses of study or training, admit students (including provisionally and ad eundem statum) and grant awards:

    • (b) To grant fellowships, scholarships, bursaries, or prizes:

    • (c) To authorise the making of grants or loans out of the money of the institution to the chief executive, to members of the staff or students of the institution, or to any association of staff or students, on such terms and conditions as the Council thinks fit and guarantee loans made by other persons to the chief executive or members of the staff of the institution for housing purposes:

    • (d) To accept gifts, devises, and bequests made to the institution, whether on trust or otherwise:

    • (e) To agree to the disestablishment of the institution and its incorporation in another institution of the same class or a different class (for example, the Council of a polytechnic may agree to the disestablishment of the polytechnic and its incorporation in a university):

    • (ea) To agree to the incorporation in the institution of another institution or other institutions, whether of the same class as itself or a different class from itself (for example, the Council of a university may agree to the incorporation of a polytechnic in the university):

    • (f) To arrange for the manufacture of, and distribute (whether by way of sale or otherwise), any article or thing bearing a mark, symbol or writing that is associated with the institution:

    • (g) To arrange for the provision of (whether by sale or otherwise) goods and services to staff or students of the institution or other persons using, or otherwise attending at, facilities of the institution:

    • (h) To prescribe fees payable by students of the institution or any of them:

    • (i) To establish boards or other bodies within the institution to give advice to the Council:

    • (j) To do anything incidental to the exercise of any of the preceding powers.

    (3) The Council of an institution has power to appoint committees consisting of such persons, whether or not members of the Council, as the Council determines to exercise such powers as are delegated to them under section 222 of this Act and such powers as are conferred on them by statutes made by the Council, and to alter, discharge, and reconstitute committees so appointed.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (2)(e) was substituted, and subsection (2)(ea) was inserted, as from 23 May 1998, by section 4(1) Education Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 21).

194 Statutes
  • (1) The Council of an institution may make statutes, not inconsistent with this Act or the State Sector Act 1988, with respect to any of the following matters:

    • (a) The good government and discipline of the institution:

    • (b) The imposition, by or on behalf of the Council, of penalties upon staff or students of the institution for contravention of or failure to comply with a statute with respect to a matter referred to in paragraph (a) of this subsection:

    • (c) The election of members of the Council by the staff of the institution including—

      • (i) The persons who are to be regarded as members of the academic staff, and the persons who are to be regarded as members of the general staff, for the purposes of such an election; and

      • (ii) The determination of questions arising in relation to the conduct or the result of such an election:

    • (d) The persons who are to be regarded as being, or having been, students of the institution for the purposes of the election of a student member of the Council or for the purposes of membership of the Council as a student member and, in the case of an election of a student member to which section 171(8)(a) does not apply, any other matters relating to the election including the determination of questions arising in relation to the conduct or the result of the election:

    • (e) Subject to Part 16 of this Act, the enrolment of persons in courses of study or training of the institution or the admission of persons to examinations of the institution:

    • (f) Subject to Part 16 of this Act, the courses of study and training of the institution:

    • (g) Subject to section 192(8) of this Act, the awards that may be granted by the Council and the requirements for those awards:

    • (h) The granting by the Council of fellowships, scholarships, bursaries, and prizes:

    • (i) The provision of superannuation or retirement benefits for, or in respect of, the chief executive or members of the staff of the institution:

    • (j) Any other matter required or permitted by this Act to be provided for by statutes.

    (2) If the Council of an institution makes a statute under subsection (1)(b) of this section providing for the imposition of penalties upon staff or students of the institution, the statute shall provide for the Council, if so requested by a member of the staff or a student upon whom a penalty is imposed, to review, or arrange for the review of, the amount of the penalty, the imposition of the penalty, or both.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

195 Trust property
  • Notwithstanding anything contained in this Act or any other enactment relating to the institution, any real or personal property held by an institution upon trust shall be dealt with in accordance with the powers and duties of the institution as trustee.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Institutions at risk

  • The heading Institutions at risk was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 47 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

195A Criteria for risk assessment of institutions
  • (1) The Secretary must, after consulting with institution Councils, determine criteria for assessing the level of risk to the operation and long-term viability of institutions.

    (2) The Secretary must publish criteria determined under subsection (1) in the Gazette.

    (3) Criteria determined under this section must be reviewed at least once in every 2 years following the date of their publication in the Gazette.

    Sections 195A to 195G were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 47 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

195B Institutions to provide information if required
  • (1) The chief executive of the Commission may, if he or she has reasonable grounds to believe that an institution may be at risk, by written notice to the Council of an institution, require the Council to provide either or both of the following:

    • (a) specified information about the operation, management, or financial position of the institution at a given time:

    • (b) reports at specified intervals on specific aspects of the operation, management, or financial position of the institution.

    (2) If the chief executive of the Commission requires information under subsection (1), the information required must be information that relates to the risks to the institution that the chief executive of the Commission is concerned about.

    (3) A Council that receives a notice under subsection (1) must provide the chief executive of the Commission with the required information within or at the time or times specified in the notice.

    (4) The chief executive of the Commission may revoke or amend any notice given under subsection (1).

    (5) [Repealed]

    (5) In this section, Commission means the Tertiary Education Commission established under section 159C.

    Sections 195A to 195G were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 47 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Section 195B(1): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 25(1) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 195B(2): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 25(2) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 195B(3): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 25(3) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 195B(4): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 25(4) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    First subsection (5) was repealed, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Second section 195B(5): added, on 1 January 2008, by section 25(5) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

195C Minister may appoint Crown observer
  • (1) If the Minister considers on reasonable grounds that the operation or long-term viability of an institution is at risk, he or she may appoint a Crown observer to the Council of the institution.

    (2) A Crown observer may not be appointed to the Council of an institution unless the Minister has first—

    • (a) consulted with the Council; and

    • (b) advised the Council that he or she is considering appointing a Crown observer; and

    • (c) given the Council an opportunity to comment on the proposal.

    (3) Every appointment under this section must be in writing and must state the date on which it takes effect.

    (4) A Crown observer may—

    • (a) attend any meeting of the Council or committee of the Council of the institution to which he or she is appointed; and

    • (b) offer advice to the Council, or any committee or member of the Council; and

    • (c) report to the Minister on any matter raised or discussed at any meeting that he or she attends as a Crown observer.

    (5) A Crown observer must at all times maintain confidentiality with respect to Council affairs, except as authorised by paragraph (c) of subsection (4).

    (6) A Crown observer is not a member of the Council or any committee of the Council, and may not—

    • (a) vote on any matter; or

    • (b) exercise any of the powers, or perform any of the functions or duties, of a member of the Council.

    Sections 195A to 195G were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 47 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

195D Minister may dissolve Council and appoint commissioner
  • (1) The Minister may, by written notice, dissolve the Council of an institution and appoint a commissioner to act in place of the Council if the Minister believes on reasonable grounds that—

    • (a) there is a serious risk to the operation or long-term viability of the institution; and

    • (b) other methods of reducing the risk either have failed or appear likely to fail.

    (2) For the purpose of subsection (1), there is a serious risk to the operation or long-term viability of an institution if—

    • (a) the institution is, or is at risk of being, unable to pay its debts as they become due in the normal course of business; and

    • (b) according to the criteria published under section 195A(2), there is a serious level of risk to the operation or long-term viability of the institution.

    (3) A notice under subsection (1) must specify—

    • (a) the date when the dissolution and appointment take effect; and

    • (b) the name of the person appointed as commissioner.

    (4) The Minister may not exercise the power under subsection (1) in relation to an institution unless he or she has first—

    • (a) consulted with the Council of the institution and any other interested parties over the possible need to dissolve the Council and appoint a commissioner; and

    • (b) following that consultation, given the Council written notice of his or her preliminary decision that the Council should be dissolved and a commissioner appointed in its place; and

    • (c) allowed the Council at least 21 days in which to respond to the preliminary decision; and

    • (d) considered any submissions made by the Council about why the preliminary decision should not be confirmed.

    (5) As soon as practicable after giving a notice under subsection (1), the Minister must—

    • (a) publish a copy of it in the Gazette; and

    • (b) present a copy of it to the House of Representatives.

    (6) When a commissioner is appointed under this section, the Minister must review the appointment at least once in every 12 months following the appointment.

    (7) As soon as the Minister is satisfied (following an annual review or at any other time) that the risk that gave rise to the appointment of the commissioner has reduced to such an extent that is it appropriate that the institution be administered by a Council, a new Council must be appointed in accordance with the constitution of the Council most recently notified in the Gazette.

    (8) A commissioner's appointment ends on the close of the day before a new Council takes office.

    Sections 195A to 195G were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 47 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

195DA Protection of commissioners
  • A commissioner appointed under section 195D(1) is not personally liable for an act he or she has done or omitted to do, or for any loss arising from that act or omission, if he or she was acting—

    • (a) in good faith; and

    • (b) in the course of carrying out his or her powers, functions, or duties.

    Section 195DA: inserted, on 1 January 2008, by section 26 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

195E Powers and functions of commissioner
  • (1) A commissioner appointed under section 195D has all the powers, functions, and duties of the Council that he or she is appointed to replace, and must exercise those powers and perform those functions and duties in accordance with this Act (having particular regard to sections 160 and 161) and, in the case of an institution that has a plan, that plan.

    (2) A commissioner replaces all Council members who serve on any committee of the Council that he or she is appointed to replace.

    (3) Anything that, if done by or on behalf of a Council, is required to be signed by 2 or more members of the Council, may be done by the commissioner's signature alone.

    Sections 195A to 195G were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 47 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Section 195E(1): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 27 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

195F Minister to appoint advisory committee
  • (1) If the Minister appoints a commissioner under section 195D, the Minister must also appoint an advisory committee for the purpose of advising and supporting the commissioner in the exercise of the commissioner's functions, duties, and powers.

    (2) The Minister may appoint up to 5 persons to be members of an advisory committee and must ensure that the composition of the committee reasonably reflects the community of the institution as represented by its Council at the time of the Council's dissolution.

    (3) Members of an advisory committee may be paid fees at the same rates as were paid to members of the Council at the time of its dissolution.

    (4) The commissioner must have regard to any advice given by an advisory committee.

    (5) For the purposes of section 222(1) (which is about delegations by the Council to committees), an advisory committee is deemed to be a committee appointed under section 193(3).

    Sections 195A to 195G were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 47 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

195G Review of operation of sections 195A to 195F
  • No later than 5 years from the date on which sections 195A to 195F come into force, the Minister must—

    • (a) review, in consultation with interested parties, the operation of sections 195A to 195F; and

    • (b) prepare a report of the review that includes recommendations on whether any amendment to those sections is necessary or desirable; and

    • (c) present a copy of the report to the House of Representatives.

    Sections 195A to 195G were inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 47 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

Chief executive and staff

196 Duties of chief executive
  • (1) The academic and administrative affairs of an institution shall be managed by the chief executive of the institution.

    (2) A person who held office as chief executive of an institution immediately before the commencement of this section (whether by virtue of an appointment made as required by section 35 of the State Sector Amendment Act (No 2) 1989 or otherwise) shall, unless the term of office of the person would, apart from this Act, have ended on that commencement, be deemed to have been appointed to that office on that commencement by the Council of the institution in accordance with section 180(a) of this Act for the unexpired portion of his or her term of office and on the same terms and conditions as those on which the person was employed immediately before that commencement.

    (3) The chief executive of a university may be referred to as the Vice-Chancellor or by such other title as the Council of the university determines and the chief executive of an institution other than a university may be referred to by such title (other than Vice-Chancellor or another title that includes the word Chancellor) as the Council of the institution determines.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

197 Delegation by chief executive
  • (1) The chief executive of an institution may from time to time, either generally or particularly, by writing delegate to the academic board or to any member of the staff of the institution any of the functions or powers of the chief executive under this Act or any other Act including functions or powers delegated to the chief executive under an Act other than this Act.

    (2) Where the chief executive of an institution has, pursuant to subsection (1) of this section, delegated any functions or powers to the academic board or to a member of the staff of the institution, that board or member may, with the prior approval in writing of the chief executive, by writing signed by at least 2 members of that board or by the member, as the case may be, delegate such of those functions or powers as the chief executive approves to any other member of the staff of the institution.

    (3) Subject to any general or special directions given or conditions imposed by the chief executive, the person to whom any functions or powers are delegated under this section may perform those functions or exercise those powers in the same manner and with the same effect as if they had been conferred on that person directly by this Act and not by delegation.

    (4) The power of a chief executive to delegate under this section—

    • (a) Is subject to any prohibitions, restrictions, or conditions contained in any other Act in relation to the delegation of the chief executive's functions or powers; but

    • (b) Does not limit any power of delegation conferred on the chief executive by any other Act.

    (5) A person purporting to act pursuant to a delegation under this section shall, in the absence of proof to the contrary, be presumed to be acting in accordance with the terms of the delegation.

    (6) A delegation under subsection (1) of this section to the academic board shall be deemed to be a delegation to the persons from time to time constituting that board.

    (7) A delegation under this section to a member of the staff may be made to a specified person or to persons of a specified class, or to the holder or holders for the time being of a specified office or specified class of offices.

    (8) A delegation under this section does not affect or prevent the performance of any function or the exercise of any power by a chief executive, or affect the responsibility of a chief executive for the actions of any person acting under the delegation.

    (9) A delegation under this section is revocable in writing at will and, until it is revoked, continues in force according to its tenor, notwithstanding that the person by whom it was made may have ceased to hold office, and continues to have effect as if made by the successor in office of that person.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

198 Transitional provisions for employment of staff
  • (1) A person who was a member of the staff of an institution immediately before the commencement of this section shall, after that commencement, unless the employment of the person would, apart from this Act, have ended on that commencement, be, by force of this subsection, in the employment of the chief executive of the institution, on the same terms and conditions as those on which the person was employed immediately before that commencement, until the person's employment terminates or is terminated in accordance with those terms and conditions.

    (2) The terms and conditions of employment of a person to whom subsection (1) of this section applies shall remain in force until varied either individually or through a collective agreement.

    (3) This section has effect subject to the Labour Relations Act 1987 and the State Sector Act 1988.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 2 October 2000, by section 240 Employment Relations Act 2000 (2000 No 24) by substituting the words a collective agreement for the words an award or an agreement.

Bulk funding

  • This heading was repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 17(1) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

199 Grants to institutions
  • [Repealed]

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 199 was repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 17(1) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

Finance

200 Bank accounts
  • (1) The Council of an institution may establish, maintain and operate bank accounts in the name of the institution at any registered bank or any registered building society with which a Crown entity may establish, maintain, or operate a bank account under section 158 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (2) As soon as is practicable after receiving any money, the Council shall pay it into one or other of the institution's bank accounts.

    (3) The Council shall properly authorise every withdrawal and payment of money from any of the institution's bank accounts.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by inserting the words or any registered building society with which a Crown entity may establish, maintain, or operate a bank account under section 158 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 after the words registered bank.

201 Proper accounts to be kept
  • Section 168(1) and (2) of the Crown Entities Act 2004 applies to a Council of an institution.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 201 was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

201A How institutions may use income and capital
  • (1) An institution may, subject to the provisions of any enactment and the terms of any trust or endowment,—

    • (a) apply its income and capital in doing whatever the council thinks will—

      • (i) enable the institution to carry out the functions characteristic of an institution of the class to which the institution belongs; and

      • (ii) in the case of an institution that has a plan, enable the institution to achieve the outcomes set out in that plan; and

    • (b) create, maintain, or add to, out of income, a fund or funds for any 1 or more of the purposes for which the income may be applied.

    (2) Subsection (1)(b) does not limit the generality of subsection (1)(a).

    Section 201A was inserted, as from 1 January 2004, by section 18 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 201A(1)(a): substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 28 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

201B Gifts
  • (1) Any money or property that is gifted to an institution may be accepted or disclaimed by the Council of the institution in accordance with section 167 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (2) A limitation in this Act or the Crown Entities Act 2004 (such as a limitation on the form in which property may be held) does not apply during a period that is reasonable in the circumstances.

    Section 201B was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

202 Application of money
  • The money of an institution shall be applied only—

    • (a) In payment or discharge of the expenses, charges, obligations or liabilities incurred or undertaken by or on behalf of the institution; or

    • (b) [Repealed]

    • (c) In making grants to the Foundation for Research, Science, and Technology; or

    • (d) In payment of any remuneration or allowances payable to members of the Council or of committees of the Council or to the chief executive or members of the staff of the institution; or

    • (e) In making any other payments that are required or permitted by this Act or any other enactment to be made out of the money of the institution.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Paragraph (b) was repealed, as from 1 January 2003, by section 45(2)(a) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

203 Institutions are Crown entities
  • (1) Every institution is a Crown entity for the purposes of section 7 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (2) However, that Act applies to tertiary education institutions only to the extent that subsection (3) provides.

    (3) The provisions of that Act set out in Schedule 4 of that Act and Schedule 13A of this Act apply to tertiary education institutions and their Crown entity subsidiaries (within the meaning of that Act).

    (4) Section 65I(1) and (2) of the Public Finance Act 1989 applies, with all necessary modifications, to tertiary education institutions and, accordingly, every institution must invest in the same manner that Treasury invests money under that section.

    (5) No instruction issued by the Minister of Finance under section 80A of the Public Finance Act 1989 applies to an institution.

    (6) The financial year of an institution is an academic year.

    (7) The members of the Council of an institution are the board for the purposes of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1) was substituted, and subsection (2)(b) was repealed, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

    Section 203 was substituted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 14(1) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Subsection (2) was substituted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 19(1) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Subsection (3) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 19(1) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50). See section 19(2) of that Act as to subsection (2), as it read immediately before 1 January 2003, continuing to apply to every institution that does not have a profile.

    Section 203 was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

Miscellaneous provisions

204 Transfer of assets and liabilities on commencement
  • (1) In the case of an existing non-university institution,—

    • (a) All real and personal property that, immediately before the commencement of this section, was vested in the then governing body of the institution (including property held on trust) is, by force of this subsection, vested in the institution subject to all charges, encumbrances, estates, and interests, and the provisions of any enactment, affecting that property; and

    • (b) The institution becomes, by force of this subsection, liable to pay and discharge all the debts, liabilities and obligations of the previous governing body that existed immediately before that commencement.

    (2) Where any land vests in an institution under this section, the District Land Registrar for the land registration district in which the land is situated, on the deposit with him or her of such plans and documents as he or she may require, shall make such entries in the register, and generally do all such other things, as may be necessary to give full effect to the provisions of this section.

    (3) Any contract or other instrument subsisting, or any proceeding pending, immediately before the commencement of this section to which the then governing body of an existing non-university institution was a party has effect after that commencement as if—

    • (a) The institution is substituted for the previous governing body as a party to the contract, other instrument or proceeding; and

    • (b) Any reference in the contract or other instrument, or in a pleading, affidavit or other document in the proceeding, to the previous governing body in its capacity as a party to the contract, other instrument or proceeding is (except in relation to matters that occurred before that commencement) a reference to the institution.

    (4) Any statutes, regulations, or bylaws made by the governing body, or the Senate, Professorial Board or other board, committee or authority of an institution and in force immediately before the commencement of this section continue in force after that commencement, so far as they are capable of application and with any necessary modifications, as if they are statutes made by the Council of the institution.

    (5) Any rulings, decisions or other acts of authority of any relevant authority or person that, immediately before the commencement of this section, applied in relation to an institution but were capable of being repealed, replaced, or amended by an appropriate authority or officer of that institution continue to apply after that commencement, so far as they are capable of application and with any necessary modifications, but may be repealed, replaced, or amended after that commencement by the chief executive of the institution, subject to the State Sector Act 1988.

    (6) All statutes or regulations of the Senate of the University of New Zealand or any committee or Board of that Senate or University or of the Chancellor or Vice-Chancellor or any officer of that University, so far as they were subsisting immediately before the commencement of this section by virtue of section 53(1) of the Universities Act 1961 and were applicable in relation to a university that is an institution to which subsection (4) of this section applies, shall be deemed to be, in their application in relation to that university, statutes, or regulations to which that subsection applies.

    (7) All rulings, decisions, or other acts of authority of the Senate of the University of New Zealand or any committee or Board of that Senate or University or of the Chancellor or Vice-Chancellor or any officer of that University, so far as they were subsisting immediately before the commencement of this section by virtue of section 53(1) of the Universities Act 1961 and were applicable in relation to a university that is an institution to which subsection (5) of this section applies, shall be deemed to be, in their application in relation to that university, rulings, decisions, or other acts of authority to which that subsection applies.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

205 Taxes and duties in relation to property of existing institutions
  • (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule to the Tax Act Administration Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collection of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge—

    • (a) The previous governing body of each existing non-university institution, and that existing non-university institution, shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which the real and personal property of the previous governing body vests in that institution pursuant to section 204(1) of this Act; and

    • (b) In respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assessment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which the real and personal property of the previous governing body of that institution so vests in that institution, all transactions entered into by, and acts of, the previous governing body before the vesting effected by section 204(1) of this Act shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, that institution and to have been entered into or performed by that institution at the time when they were entered into or performed by the previous governing body.

    (2) For the purposes of determining whether—

    • (b) Any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IG 1 of the Income Tax Act 2004; or

    • (c) Any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer's imputation credit account under section ME 5(1)(i) of the Income Tax Act 2004, or in a taxpayer's dividend withholding payment account under section ME 5(1)(i) of that Act, or in a taxpayer's branch equivalent tax account under section MF 4(3)(d) of that Act,—

    shares held by the previous governing body of an existing non-university institution in any company (whether directly or through any one or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 204(1) of this Act shall be treated as having been acquired by that institution at the time when they were acquired by the previous governing body.

    (3) The vesting of all the real and personal property of the previous governing body of an existing non-university institution in that institution pursuant to section 204(1) of this Act shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968 or as a conveyance for the purposes of the Stamp and Cheque Duties Act 1971.

    (4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) of this section limits the generality of subsection (1) of this section.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 April 1995, by section YB 1 Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164) by substituting the words Schedule to the Tax Administration Act 1994 for the words Schedule 1 to the Inland Revenue Department Act 1974.

    Subsection (2)(a) to (c) was substituted, as from 1 April 1995, by section YB 1 Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 1 April 2005, by section YA 2 Income Tax Act 2004 (2004 No 35) by substituting the words Income Tax Act 2004 for the words Income Tax Act 1994 in all places in which they appear.

206 Transfer of Crown assets and liabilities to institutions
  • (1) Notwithstanding any Act, rule of law, or agreement, the Minister may, on behalf of the Crown, do any one or more of the following:

    • (a) Transfer to an institution assets and liabilities of the Crown (being assets and liabilities relating to the activities to be carried on by the institution):

    • (b) Vest in an institution any rights conferred by designations under operative district schemes applying to land transferred to the institution:

    • (c) Grant to an institution leases, licences, easements, permits, or rights of any kind in respect of any assets or liabilities of the Crown,—

    on any terms and conditions the Minister agrees with the institution's chief executive.

    (2) The Minister shall, within 12 sitting days after taking any action under subsection (1)(a) and (b), lay before the House of Representatives a copy of the document by which the action was taken.

    (3) Assets that are fixed to, or are under or over, any land may be transferred to an institution pursuant to this section whether or not any interest in the land is also transferred; but, where any such asset is so transferred, the asset and the land shall be regarded as separate assets each capable of separate ownership.

    (4) Any asset or liability of the Crown may be transferred to an institution pursuant to this section whether or not any Act or agreement relating to the asset or liability permits such a transfer or requires any consent to such a transfer.

    (5) Where a transfer of the kind described in subsection (4) of this section takes place,—

    • (a) The transfer does not entitle any person to terminate, alter, or in any way affect the rights or liabilities of the Crown or the institution under any Act or agreement:

    • (b) If the transfer is registrable, the person responsible for keeping the register shall register the transfer forthwith after written notice of the transfer is received by him or her from any person authorised for this purpose by the Minister:

    • (c) The laying before the House of Representatives of any document relating to the transfer shall be deemed to be notice of the transfer, and any third party shall after the date of the document deal with the institution in place of the Crown:

    • (d) The Crown remains liable to any third party as if the asset or liability had not been transferred:

    • (e) Any satisfaction or performance by the institution in respect of the asset or liability shall be deemed to be also satisfaction or performance by the Crown:

    • (f) Any satisfaction or performance in respect of the asset or liability by any third party to the benefit of the institution shall be deemed to be also to the benefit of the Crown.

    (6) No provision in any agreement limiting the Crown's right to sell any assets to third parties, or for determining the consideration for the sale of any assets to third parties, or obliging the Crown to account to any person for the whole or part of the proceeds of sale by the Crown of any assets to third parties, or obliging the Crown to pay a greater price than otherwise by reason of or as a consequence of the sale of any assets to third parties, shall have any application or effect in respect of any agreement or transfer entered into or effected pursuant to or under this section or pursuant to such an agreement or transfer.

    (7) Where—

    • (a) Land, interests in land, licences, permits, or rights created on terms and conditions wholly or partly set out in any Act are transferred to an institution pursuant to this section; and

    • (b) The Governor-General has by Order in Council declared that this subsection shall apply in respect of that land or those interests, licences, permits, or rights—

    then, whether or not the Act is repealed, such of the terms and conditions set out in the Act as are specified in the Order in Council (with all necessary modifications) shall continue to apply in respect of that land or those interests, licences, permits, or rights after the transfer unless the institution and the holders of that land or those interests, licences, permits, or rights otherwise agree.

    (8) [Repealed]

    (9) [Repealed]

    (10) Where any requirement has been made under section 43 or section 118 of the Town and Country Planning Act 1977 in respect of any work which has been transferred to an institution pursuant to this Act, the procedures specified in the Town and Country Planning Act 1977 may be completed as if a Minister of the Crown continued to be financially responsible for the work and as if the work were a public work.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 206(2): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 29 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Subsections (8) and (9) were repealed, as from 23 July 1993, by section 2 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1993 (1993 No 77).

207 Provisions relating to transfer of land
  • (1) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Act, Crown land within the meaning of the Land Act 1948 and any lands of the Crown other than lands registered under the Land Transfer Act 1952 that are to be transferred to an institution shall—

    • (a) Be identified by an adequate legal description, or on plans lodged in the office of the Chief Surveyor for the land district in which the land is situated (being plans certified as correct for the purposes of this section by that Chief Surveyor); and

    • (b) Be approved by the Governor-General in Council and vest in the institution pursuant to and on a date specified in an Order in Council made for the purposes of this section.

    (2) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Act, no land that is subject to—

    • (b) Reservation from sale or disposition under section 58 of the Land Act 1948

    shall be transferred to an institution pursuant to section 206(1) of this Act.

    (3) All land that is subject to the Land Act 1948 or the Forests Act 1949 and that is transferred to an institution pursuant to this Act shall cease to be subject to the Land Act 1948 or the Forests Act 1949, as the case may be, from the date of that transfer, unless otherwise expressly provided by this Act or any other Act.

    (4) Nothing in sections 40 to 42 of the Public Works Act 1981 shall apply to the transfer of land to an institution pursuant to this Act; but sections 40 and 41 of that Act shall after that transfer apply to that land as if the institution were the Crown and the land had not been transferred pursuant to section 206 of this Act.

    (5) Nothing in this Act or in any transfer of land to an institution pursuant to section 206 of this Act shall derogate from the provisions of—

    • (a) Section 3 of the Petroleum Act 1937:

    • (c) Section 3 of the Geothermal Energy Act 1953:

    • (d) Sections 6 and 8 of the Mining Act 1971:

    • (e) Sections 5 and 261 of the Coal Mines Act 1979.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

208 Title to land
  • (1) A District Land Registrar shall, on written application by any person authorised by the Minister and on payment of the prescribed fee,—

    • (a) Register an institution as the proprietor, in substitution for the Crown, of the estate or the interest of the Crown in any land that is incorporated in the register or otherwise registered in the land registry office of the land registration district concerned and that is transferred to the institution pursuant to section 206 of this Act; and

    • (b) Make such entries in the register and on any outstanding documents of title and generally do all such things as may be necessary to give effect to this section.

    (2) The powers conferred by subsection (1) of this section may be exercised in respect of an estate or interest that is incorporated in the register by virtue of a lease or licence that has expired or has been determined.

    (3) A District Land Registrar shall, on written application by any person authorised by the Minister and on payment of the prescribed fee, issue a certificate of title for land vested in an institution pursuant to section 207(1) of this Act in form No 1 in Schedule 1 to the Land Transfer Act 1952, amended as appropriate.

    (4) As soon as registration is accomplished in accordance with subsection (1) of this section or a certificate of title is issued in accordance with subsection (3) of this section, the institution shall, except where the interest acquired is either an easement in gross or an estate as lessee or mortgagee, be deemed to be seised of an estate in fee simple in possession in respect of that land.

    (5) Applications in accordance with subsections (1) and (3) of this section shall specify the name of the institution and the date of the approval under section 207(1)(b) of this Act of the land to be transferred, together with a description of the land sufficient to identify it and, in the case of applications under subsection (3) of this section, a certificate by the Chief Surveyor for the district concerned as to the correctness of the description.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

209 Land certification
  • (1) Before a District Land Registrar issues a certificate of title in respect of any land vested in an institution pursuant to section 207(1) of this Act, the District Land Registrar shall either receive under the hand of or request from the Director-General within the meaning of section 2 of the Survey Act 1986 or any Chief Surveyor a certificate in the form set out in Schedule 2 to the Land Act 1948 as to the legal description of the land, any trusts, reservations, or restrictions affecting the land, and any other matters that the District Land Registrar considers appropriate.

    (2) Where any land that has been vested in an institution pursuant to section 207(1) of this Act and for which no certificate of title has been issued in the name of that institution, is to be transferred to any other person, the District Land Registrar shall, before issuing a certificate of title, either receive under the hand of or request from the Director-General within the meaning of section 2 of the Survey Act 1986 or any Chief Surveyor a certificate in the form set out in Schedule 2 to the Land Act 1948 as to the legal description of the land, any trusts, reservations, or restrictions affecting the land, and any other matters that the District Land Registrar considers appropriate.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsections (1) and (2) were amended, as from 1 July 1996, by section 5 Survey Amendment Act 1996 (1996 No 55) by substituting the words Director-General within the meaning of section 2 of the Survey Act 1986 for the words Director-General of Survey and Land Information.

210 Maori land claims
  • The submission in respect of any land or interest in land of a claim under section 6 of the Treaty of Waitangi Act 1975 does not prevent the transfer of that land or of any interest in that land or of that interest in land—

    • (a) By the Crown to an institution; or

    • (b) By an institution to any other person.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

211 District Land Registrar to register necessary memorial
  • (1) Where any land or interest in land is transferred to an institution under section 206 of this Act or vested in an institution by an Order in Council made under section 215 of this Act, the District Land Registrar shall, without fee, note on the certificate of title the words Subject to section 212 of the Education Act 1989 (which provides for the resumption of land on the recommendation of the Waitangi Tribunal and which does not provide for third parties, such as the owner of the land, to be heard in relation to the making of any such recommendation).

    (2) Subsection (1) of this section does not apply in relation to any piece of land or interest in land that is excluded from section 212 of this Act by subsection (2) or subsection (3) of that section.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

212 Resumption of land on recommendations of Waitangi Tribunal
  • (1) Where the Waitangi Tribunal has, under section 8A(2)(a) of the Treaty of Waitangi Act 1975, recommended the return to Maori ownership of any land or interest in land transferred to an institution under section 206 of this Act or vested in an institution by an Order in Council made under section 215 of this Act, that land or interest in land shall, if the recommendation has been confirmed with or without modifications under section 8B of that Act, be resumed by the Crown in accordance with section 213 of this Act and returned to Maori ownership.

    (2) This section does not apply in relation to any piece of land that, at the date of its transfer to an institution under section 206 of this Act or the date of its vesting in an institution by an Order in Council made under section 215 of this Act, was subject to—

    • (a) A deferred payment licence issued under the Land Act 1948; or

    • (b) A lease under which the lessee had the right of acquiring the fee simple.

    (3) This section does not apply in relation to any piece of land or interest in land in respect of which a certificate issued under section 8E(1) of the Treaty of Waitangi Act 1975 has been registered.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

213 Resumption of land to be effected under Public Works Act 1981
  • (1) Where section 212 of this Act requires any land or interest in land to be resumed by the Crown, the Minister of Lands shall acquire that land or interest in land under Part 2 of the Public Works Act 1981 as if it were land or an interest in land required for both Government work and a public work and Parts 2, 4, 5, 6, and 7 of that Act and Schedules 1, 3, 4, and 5 to that Act shall, subject to any necessary modifications, apply accordingly.

    (2) The existence on the certificate of title to any land or interest in land acquired pursuant to subsection (1) of this section of a memorial under section 211 of this Act shall not be taken into account in any assessment of compensation made under the Public Works Act 1981 in relation to the acquisition of that land or interest in land.

    (3) The power conferred by this section does not include the power to acquire or take and to hold under section 28 of the Public Works Act 1981 any interest in land described in section 8A(6) of the Treaty of Waitangi Act 1975.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

214 Resumption of Wahi Tapu
  • (1) Where the Governor-General is satisfied that any land or interest in land held by an institution, being land or an interest in land transferred to that institution under section 206 of this Act or vested in that institution by an Order in Council made under section 215 of this Act, is Wahi Tapu, being land of special spiritual, cultural, or historical tribal significance, the Governor-General may, by Order in Council published in the Gazette, declare—

    • (a) That that land or interest shall be resumed by the Crown on a date specified in the Order in Council; and

    • (b) That, on the date of its resumption pursuant to the Order in Council, that land or interest in land shall be no longer liable to resumption under section 212 of this Act.

    (2) Where any land or interest in land is to be resumed pursuant to subsection (1)(a) of this section,—

    • (a) The institution shall transfer the land or interest in land to the Crown on the date specified in the Order in Council; and

    • (b) The Crown shall pay to the institution in respect of the land or interest in land the compensation that would have been payable to the institution if, on the date specified in the Order in Council made under subsection (1) of this section, the land or interest in land had, pursuant to section 213 of this Act, been acquired by the Minister of Lands under Part 2 of the Public Works Act 1981.

    (3) Every memorandum of transfer executed pursuant to an Order in Council made under subsection (1) of this section—

    • (a) Shall recite that it is so executed; and

    • (b) Shall give both the date of the Order in Council and the date of its publication in the Gazette.

    (4) Upon its resumption pursuant to subsection (1) of this section, the land or interest in land shall be dealt with in accordance with an agreement made between the Crown and the relevant tribe or, if they fail to agree, in accordance with any recommendation of the Waitangi Tribunal pursuant to an application made under section 6 of the Treaty of Waitangi Act 1975.

    (5) A resumption of land or of an interest in land pursuant to subsection (1)(a) is not a subdivision of land within the meaning of section 218 of the Resource Management Act 1991.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (5) was substituted, as from 1 July 2003, by section 262 Local Government Act 2002 (2002 No 84). See sections 273 to 314 of that Act as to the savings and transitional provisions.

215 Orders in Council relating to transfer of assets and liabilities
  • (1) For the purpose of facilitating the transfer of assets and liabilities to an institution pursuant to section 206 of this Act, the Governor-General may from time to time, by Order in Council, do any one or more of the following:

    • (a) Vest in or impose on an institution any asset or liability (other than land to which section 207(1) of this Act applies), or any class of any such asset or liability, that the institution has agreed to have transferred to it:

    • (b) Vest land in an institution for the purposes of section 207(1) of this Act:

    • (c) Declare that a reference to the Crown or a Minister, officer, employee, department, or instrument of the Crown in any or all regulations, orders, notices, or documents shall be deemed to be or to include a reference to an institution specified in the order:

    • (d) Declare that an institution shall assume or continue to have the rights and obligations of the Crown or a Minister, officer, employee, department, or instrument of the Crown in respect of applications for rights, objections, or proceedings before any court, authority, or other person, being rights and obligations that the institution has agreed to assume:

    • (e) Declare that sections 294 to 294I of the Local Government Act 1974 (which relate to reserve contributions, development levies, and contributions to certain regional works) shall not apply to specified developments, being developments that the Minister has agreed to transfer to an institution pursuant to section 206 of this Act:

    • (f) Declare, in respect of any assets or liabilities transferred to an institution pursuant to section 206 of this Act, that the institution shall be deemed to have specified rights or obligations in respect of those assets or liabilities, being rights or obligations that are required in respect of those assets or liabilities as a result of the change of ownership or responsibility from the Crown to the institution:

    • (g) Declare that any Order in Council made under this section shall be deemed to be notice to all persons, and that specific notice need not be given to any authority or other person:

    • (h) Direct any authority or other person to register or record any such vesting or declaration.

    (2) Every Order in Council made under this section may be made on such terms and conditions as the Governor-General thinks fit, and shall have effect according to its tenor.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

216 Interpretation relating to transfer of assets and liabilities
  • (1) In this section and in sections 206 to 215 of this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Agreement includes a deed, a contract, an agreement, an arrangement, and an understanding, whether oral or written, express or implied, and whether or not enforceable at law

    Assets means any real or personal property of any kind, whether or not subject to rights, and without limiting the generality of the above includes—

    • (a) Any estate or interest in any land, including all rights of occupation of land or buildings:

    • (b) All buildings, vehicles, plant, equipment, and machinery, and any rights therein:

    • (c) All livestock, products from livestock, and crops:

    • (e) All rights of any kind, including rights under Acts, deeds, agreements, or licences, planning rights, water rights, and clean air licences, and all applications for and objections against applications for such rights:

    • (f) All patents, trade marks, designs, copyright, and other intellectual property rights whether enforceable by Act or rule of law:

    • (g) Goodwill, and any business undertaking:

    • (h) All natural gas, petroleum, and other hydrocarbons:

    Institution includes a subsidiary of an institution

    Liabilities includes—

    • (a) Liabilities and obligations under any Act or agreement; and

    • (c) Contingent liabilities:

    Rights includes powers, privileges, interests, licences, approvals, consents, benefits, and equities of any kind, whether actual, contingent, or prospective

    Transfer includes—

    • (a) Assign and convey; and

    • (b) Vest by Order in Council; and

    • (c) Confer estates in fee simple of land held by the Crown, whether in allodium or otherwise; and

    • (d) Grant leases, rights, and interests in any real or personal property; and

    • (e) In the case of liabilities, the assumption of the liabilities by an institution.

    (2) In this section and in sections 206 to 215 of this Act, a reference to transfer, authorise, or grant includes entering into an agreement to transfer, authorise, or grant, as the case may be.

    (3) This section and sections 206 to 215 of this Act shall have effect, and assets and liabilities may be transferred pursuant to those sections, notwithstanding any restriction, prohibition, or other provision contained in any Act, rule of law, or agreement that would otherwise apply.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

217 Effect of disestablishment
  • (1) Where an institution is disestablished, the following provisions of this section have effect.

    (2) The institution and the Council of the institution cease to exist.

    (3) A person who would, but for the disestablishment of the institution, have been entitled to be granted an award of the institution is entitled to be granted a like award,—

    • (a) If the institution is incorporated in another institution, of the other institution; or

    • (b) Otherwise, of such institution as the Secretary directs.

    (4) A person who has partially completed a course at the disestablished institution leading to an award is entitled to enrol in a similar course at,—

    • (a) If the institution is incorporated in another institution, the other institution; or

    • (b) Otherwise, such other institution as the Secretary directs to enrol the person,—

    and to be granted such status, and such credit for work performed at the disestablished institution, as the Council of the other institution, after consulting the Qualifications Authority, considers appropriate.

    (5) If the disestablished institution is, immediately upon its disestablishment, incorporated in another institution,—

    • (a) All real and personal property that, immediately before the disestablishment, was vested in the disestablished institution (including property held on trust) is, by force of this subsection, vested in the other institution subject to all charges, encumbrances, estates, and interests, and the provisions of any enactment, affecting that property; and

    • (b) The other institution becomes, by force of this subsection, liable to pay and discharge all the debts, liabilities, and obligations of the disestablished institution that existed immediately before its disestablishment.

    (6) If the disestablished institution is not, immediately upon its disestablishment, incorporated in another institution,—

    • (a) All real and personal property that, immediately before the disestablishment was vested in the Council of the disestablished institution (including property held on trust) is, by force of this subsection, vested in the Minister subject to all charges, encumbrances, estates, or interests, and the provisions of any enactment, affecting that property; and

    • (b) The Minister becomes, by force of this subsection, liable to pay and discharge all the debts, liabilities, and obligations of the Council of the disestablished institution that existed immediately before its disestablishment.

    (7) Where any real or personal property that was held by a disestablished institution on trust vests in the Minister under subsection (6)(a) of this section, the Minister may appoint another institution to be the trustee of that property.

    (8) Where any land vests in an institution or in the Minister under this section, the District Land Registrar for the land registration district in which the land is situated, on the deposit with him or her of such plans and documents as he or she may require, shall make such entries in the register, and generally do all such other things, as may be necessary to give full effect to the provisions of this section.

    (9) Any contract or other instrument (other than a contract of, or instrument relating to, employment) subsisting, or any proceeding pending, immediately before the disestablishment of an institution to which the institution was a party has effect after the disestablishment as if—

    • (a) The institution in which the disestablished institution is incorporated or the Minister, as the case may be, is substituted for the disestablished institution as a party to the contract, other instrument or proceeding; and

    • (b) Any reference in the contract or other instrument, or in a pleading, affidavit or other document in the proceeding, to the disestablished institution in its capacity as a party to the contract, other instrument or proceeding is (except in relation to matters that occurred before the disestablishment) a reference to the institution in which the disestablished institution is incorporated or the Minister, as the case may be.

    (10) Notwithstanding subsection (2) of this section, the Council of the disestablished institution shall continue in existence for the purpose of complying, or facilitating compliance, with Part 4 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 and section 220 of this Act in relation to any academic year of the institution and,—

    • (a) If the institution is incorporated in another institution, the Council of the other institution; or

    • (b) Otherwise, the Secretary,—

    shall give to the Council of the disestablished institution any assistance that that Council requires for the purpose of complying with its obligations under those provisions and is responsible for paying any expenses incurred by that Council (including remuneration and expenses of members of that Council) in so complying.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (10) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 37(1) Public Finance Amendment Act 2004 (2004 No 113) by substituting the words Part 4 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 for the words Part 5 of the Public Finance Act 1989.

218 Taxes and duties where disestablished institution incorporated into other institution
  • (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule to the Tax Administration Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collection of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge—

    • (a) A disestablished institution referred to in section 217(5) of this Act and the other institution referred to in that section shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which the real and personal property of the disestablished institution vests in the other institution pursuant to that section; and

    • (b) In respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assessment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which the real and personal property of the disestablished institution so vests in the other institution, all transactions entered into by, and acts of, the disestablished institution before the vesting effected by section 217(5) of this Act shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, the other institution and to have been entered into or performed by the other institution at the time when they were entered into or performed by the disestablished institution.

    (2) For the purposes of determining whether—

    • (b) Any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IG 1 of the Income Tax Act 2004; or

    • (c) Any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer's imputation credit account under section ME 5(1)(i) of the Income Tax Act 2004, or in a taxpayer's dividend withholding payment account under section MG 5(1)(i) of that Act, or in a taxpayer's branch equivalent tax account under section MF 4(3)(d) of that Act,—

    shares held by a disestablished institution in any company (whether directly or through any one or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 217(5) of this Act shall be treated as having been acquired by the other institution referred to in that section at the time when they were acquired by the disestablished institution.

    (3) The vesting of all the real and personal property of a disestablished institution in another institution pursuant to section 217(5) of this Act shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968.

    (4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) of this section limits the generality of subsection (1) of this section.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 April 1995, by section YB 1 Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164) by substituting the words Schedule to the Tax Administration Act 1994 for the words Schedule 1 to the Inland Revenue Department Act 1974.

    Subsection (2)(a) to (c) was substituted, as from 1 April 1995, by section YB 1 Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 1 April 2005, by section YA 2 Income Tax Act 2004 (2004 No 35) by substituting the words Income Tax Act 2004 for the words Income Tax Act 1994 in all places in which they appear.

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 20 May 1999, by section 7 Stamp Duty Abolition Act 1999 (1999 No 61) by omitting the words or as a conveyance for the purposes of the Stamp and Cheque Duties Act 1971.

219 Taxes and duties in other cases
  • (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule to the Tax Administration Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collection of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge—

    • (a) A disestablished institution referred to in section 217(6) of this Act and the Minister shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which the real and personal property of the disestablished institution vests in the Minister pursuant to that section; and

    • (b) In respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assessment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which the real and personal property of the disestablished institution so vests in the Minister, all transactions entered into by, and acts of, the disestablished institution before the vesting effected by section 217(6) of this Act shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, the Minister and to have been entered into or performed by the Minister at the time when they were entered into or performed by the disestablished institution.

    (2) For the purposes of determining whether—

    • (b) Any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IG 1 of the Income Tax Act 2004; or

    • (c) Any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer's imputation credit account under section ME 5(1)(i) of the Income Tax Act 2004, or in a taxpayer's dividend withholding payment account under section MG 5(1)(i) of that Act, or in a taxpayer's branch equivalent tax account under section MF 4(3)(d) of that Act,—

    shares held by a disestablished institution in any company (whether directly or through any one or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 217(6) of this Act shall be treated as having been acquired by the Minister at the time when they were acquired by the disestablished institution.

    (3) The vesting of all the real and personal property of a disestablished institution in the Minister pursuant to section 217(6) of this Act shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968.

    (4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) of this section limits the generality of subsection (1) of this section.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 April 1995, by section YB 1 Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164) by substituting the words Schedule to the Tax Administration Act 1994 for the words Schedule 1 to the Inland Revenue Department Act 1974.

    Subsection (2)(a) to (c) was substituted, as from 1 April 1995, by section YB 1 Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 1 April 2005, by section YA 2 Income Tax Act 2004 (2004 No 35) by substituting the words Income Tax Act 2004 for the words Income Tax Act 1994 in all places in which they appear.

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 20 May 1999, by section 7 Stamp Duty Abolition Act 1999 (1999 No 61) by omitting the words or as a conveyance for the purposes of the Stamp and Cheque Duties Act 1971.

220 Annual report
  • (1) As soon as practicable after the end of each academic year of an institution ending after the commencement of this section the Council of the institution shall give to the Minister a report on the operations of the institution during that year.

    (2) A Council must include in every annual report of the Council the financial statements prepared by the Council, in accordance with section 154 of the Crown Entities Act 2004, in respect of the academic year to which the report relates, together with the audit report and the statement of responsibility under section 155 of that Act relating to those financial statements.

    (2AA) A Council must comply with sections 154 to 157 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 except that, despite section 155(d) of that Act, the statement of responsibility must be signed by—

    • (a) the chairperson of the Council and the chief executive of the institution; or

    • (b) if there is no chairperson, the chief executive of the institution and the chief financial officer.

    (2A) A Council shall include in every annual report—

    • (a) A summary of its equal employment opportunities programme for the year to which the report relates; and

    • (b) An account of the extent to which the Council was able, during the year to which the report relates, to meet the equal employment opportunities programme for that year; and

    • (c) An account of the extent to which the Council has eliminated unnecessary barriers to the progress of students; and

    • (d) An account of the extent to which the Council has avoided the creation of unnecessary barriers to the progress of students; and

    • (e) An account of the extent to which the Council has developed programmes to attract students from groups in the community—

      • (i) Under-represented in the institution's student body; or

      • (ii) Disadvantaged in terms of their ability to attend the institution; and.

    • (f) in the case of an institution that has a plan, a statement of service performance for that financial year reporting on the performance of the institution as compared with the proposed outcomes described in that plan.

    (2B) Section 156 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 applies to institutions and, for this purpose, is to be read as referring to a statement of service performance under subsection (2A)(f).

    (3) The Minister must present the report to the House of Representatives within 5 working days after receiving the report or, if Parliament is not in session, as soon as possible after the commencement of the next session of Parliament.

    (4) The first report by the Council of an institution that is a body to which section 162(1) of this Act applied shall extend to operations during the part of the academic year before the Council became the governing body of the institution.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (2) was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (2AA) was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (2A) was inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 26(2) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    Subsection (2A)(e)(ii) was amended, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115) by adding the word ; and.

    Section 220(2A)(f): substituted, on 1 January 2008, by section 30 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Subsection (2A)(f) was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (2B) was inserted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142) by substituting the expression section 44A for the expression section 44.

    Subsection (3) was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

221 Annual report to be available for inspection
  • The Council of an institution shall ensure that copies of its annual report are available at the office of the Council for inspection during ordinary office hours by any person without charge.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

222 Delegation by Council
  • (1) The Council of an institution may, from time to time, either generally or particularly, by writing signed by at least 2 members of the Council, delegate to the chief executive of the institution or to a committee appointed under section 193(3) of this Act any of its functions or powers under this Act (except the power to appoint a chief executive) or any other Act.

    (2) Where the Council has, pursuant to subsection (1) of this section, delegated any functions or powers to the chief executive or a committee, the chief executive or committee may, with the prior approval in writing of the Council, by writing signed by the chief executive or by at least 2 of the members of the committee, as the case may be, delegate such of those functions or powers as the Council approves to a member of the staff of the institution.

    (3) Subject to any general or special directions given or conditions imposed by the Council, the person to whom any functions or powers are delegated under this section may perform those functions or exercise those powers in the same manner and with the same effect as if they had been conferred on that person directly by this Act and not by delegation.

    (4) The power of the Council to delegate under this section—

    • (a) Is subject to any prohibitions, restrictions, or conditions contained in any other Act in relation to the delegation of the Council's functions or powers; but

    • (b) Does not limit any power of delegation conferred on the Council by any other Act.

    (5) A person purporting to act pursuant to a delegation under this section shall, in the absence of proof to the contrary, be presumed to be acting in accordance with the terms of the delegation.

    (6) A delegation under subsection (1) of this section to the chief executive shall,—

    • (a) Subject to paragraph (b) of this subsection, if the chief executive to whom it was made ceases to hold office, continue to have effect as if made to the chief executive for the time being; and

    • (b) If there is no chief executive for the time being, or if the chief executive is absent from duty, continue to have effect as if made to the person for the time being acting in place of the chief executive.

    (7) A delegation under subsection (1) of this section to a committee shall be deemed to be a delegation to the persons from time to time constituting the committee.

    (8) A delegation under this section to a member of the staff may be made to a specified person or to persons of a specified class, or to the holder or holders for the time being of a specified office or specified class of offices.

    (9) A delegation under this section does not affect or prevent the performance of any function or the exercise of any power by the Council or affect the responsibility of the Council for the actions of any person acting under the delegation.

    (10) A delegation under this section is revocable at will—

    • (a) In the case of a delegation under subsection (1), in writing signed by at least 2 members of the Council; or

    • (b) In the case of a delegation under subsection (2), in writing signed by the chief executive or by at least 2 of the members of the committee, as the case requires,—

    and until it is revoked continues in force according to its tenor.

    (11) This section applies to the academic board of an institution (established under section 182(2) of this Act) as if—

    • (a) It is a committee of the institution's Council; and

    • (b) All its powers are powers of the Council, conferred on the committee by the Council by delegation.

    Part 15, (comprising sections 165 to 222), was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 37 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Part 16
Courses and students

  • Part 16, comprising sections 223 to 229, was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 38 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

223 Courses
  • (1) Subject to subsection (2) of this section and Part 20 of this Act, the Council of each institution may determine the courses of study and training to be provided at the institution.

    (2) If the Minister believes on reasonable grounds that the provision or the continued provision of a particular course of study or training at a particular institution would have significant implications for the allocation of the national resources available for tertiary education or vocational training, and would be contrary to the efficient use of those resources, the Minister may, after consulting the Council of the institution and such other persons as the Minister considers appropriate, by written notice to the Council setting out the reasons for giving the direction, direct the Council that the institution is not to provide, or to continue to provide, that course.

    (3) The power of the Minister under subsection (2) of this section may be exercised only in relation to a course of study or training as a whole and that subsection does not entitle the Minister to give a direction limited to particular subjects or other constituent elements of a course of study or training.

    (4) The Council of an institution shall comply with a direction given to it under subsection (2) of this section.

    Part 16, comprising sections 223 to 229, was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 38 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

224 Enrolment of students
  • (1) In this section,—

    Eligible person, in relation to a course of study or training at an institution, means a person who is eligible to be enrolled as a student in that course by virtue of subsection (2) of this section

    Year means a period of 12 months commencing on 1 January.

    (2) Subject to this section, a person is eligible to be enrolled as a student at any institution in a course of study or training provided by the institution if, and only if,—

    • (a) One of the following subparagraphs applies:

      • (i) The person is a domestic student:

      • (ii) The person is an exempt student:

      • (iii) The Council of the institution consents; and

    • (b) The person holds the minimum entry qualifications for the course determined by the Council; and

    • (c) The person has attained—

      • (i) If the institution has fixed a minimum age for enrolment at the institution, the age so fixed; and

      • (ii) If the institution has fixed a minimum age for enrolment in the course, the age so fixed.

    (3) Paragraphs (b) and (c) of subsection (2) of this section do not apply to a person if—

    • (a) The person has attained the age of 20 years; or

    • (b) The Council of the institution is satisfied that the person is capable of undertaking the course of study or training concerned.

    (4) Where an eligible person applies for enrolment in a course of study or training at an institution, the person is, subject to this section, entitled to be enrolled in that course.

    (5) Where the Council of an institution is satisfied that it is necessary to do so because of insufficiency of staff, accommodation, or equipment, the Council may determine the maximum number of students who may be enrolled in a particular course of study or training at the institution in a particular year.

    (6) Where—

    • (a) The maximum number of persons who may be enrolled at an institution in a particular course in a particular year is determined by the Council of the institution under subsection (5) of this section; and

    • (b) The number of eligible persons who apply for enrolment in that course in that year exceeds the maximum number so determined—

    the Council may, in the selection of the students to be enrolled, give preference to eligible persons who are included in a class of persons that is under-represented among the students undertaking the course.

    (7) The Council of an institution shall not permit a foreign student to be enrolled at the institution in a course of study or training the duration of which will be or is likely to be not less than 3 months unless the course is an approved course and the institution is accredited to provide the course.

    (8) The duration of a course of study or training for the purposes of subsection (7) of this section is the period from and including the day on which the course starts to and including the day on which the course ends or is likely to end, as the case requires, irrespective of the number of days during that period on which study or training takes place or is proposed to take place.

    (9) Except as provided in subsection (11) or subsection (12) of this section, no foreign student other than an exempt student shall be enrolled at an institution if the student's enrolment at the institution would have the effect that a domestic student, or an exempt student, who is eligible to enrol at the institution and has applied for enrolment would not be able to be enrolled.

    (10) Except as provided in subsection (11) or subsection (12) of this section, no foreign student other than an exempt student shall be enrolled in any course of study or training at an institution if the student's enrolment in that course would have the effect that a domestic student, or an exempt student, who is eligible to enrol in the course and has applied for enrolment in the course would not be able to be enrolled in it.

    (11) Any assisted student may be enrolled at an institution, or in a course of study or training at an institution, by agreement between the Council and the chief executive of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade.

    (12) Notwithstanding that domestic students and exempt students may not be able to be enrolled at an institution or in a course of study or training at an institution, a foreign student who is not an exempt student may be enrolled at the institution, or in that course of study or training at the institution, if the enrolment is in a vacant place—

    • (a) That the Council of the institution established for foreign students; and

    • (b) Whose continued availability is dependent on the fees payable by foreign students enrolled in it.

    (13) Nothing in this section prevents the Council of an institution from refusing to permit, or from cancelling, the enrolment of a person as a student at the institution, or in a particular course of study or training at the institution, on the ground that—

    • (a) The person is not of good character; or

    • (b) The person has been guilty of misconduct or a breach of discipline; or

    • (c) The person is enrolled for full-time instruction in another institution or in a school; or

    • (d) The person has made insufficient progress in the person's study or training after a reasonable trial at the institution or at another institution.

    (14) The chief executive of an institution that provides approved courses of pre-service teacher-training shall ensure that the appropriate authorities of the institution liaise with the appropriate authorities of other institutions that provide such courses so as to establish common requirements to govern the selection of people for enrolment, and the enrolment of people, in those courses.

    Part 16, comprising sections 223 to 229, was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 38 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    In subsection (11) the reference to the Ministry of Foreign Affairs and Trade replaced an earlier reference to the Ministry of External Relations and Trade, as from 1 July 1993, pursuant to section 9(2) Foreign Affairs Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 48).

225 Records relating to students
  • (1) Each institution shall keep records that show—

    • (a) The progress of each student at the institution (including the principal results achieved by the student) in his or her course of study or training; and

    • (b) Particulars of any allowances, grants, or other payments received by each student at the institution in respect of his or her course of study or training out of public money appropriated by Parliament.

    (2) Without limiting the generality of subsection (1) of this section, the records to be kept by an institution under that subsection include such records as will enable the institution to comply with any requirement that may be made by the Secretary under section 226 of this Act.

    Part 16, comprising sections 223 to 229, was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 38 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

226 Secretary may require information
  • The Registrar or other appropriate officer of an institution shall, if so required by the Secretary, provide to the Secretary, in such form as the Secretary specifies, such statistical information in the possession of the institution as the Secretary specifies in relation to students generally or a particular class of students.

    Part 16, comprising sections 223 to 229, was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 38 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

226A Disclosure of enrolment information by institutions
  • (1) In this section, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Allowance means an allowance established by regulations made under section 303, or identified by Gazette notice under section 307AB

    Allowance: this definition was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 44 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by adding the words , or identified by Gazette notice under section 307AB.

    Benefit means an unemployment benefit or a sickness benefit under the Social Security Act 1964, or an independent youth benefit under section 60F of that Act

    Benefit: this definition was amended, as from 1 July 2001, by section 45 Social Security Amendment Act 2001 (2001 No 1) by substituting the words an unemployment benefit or a sickness benefit under for the words a community wage under Part 2 of.

    Chief executive means the chief executive of the department

    Department means the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Social Security Act 1964 and for the administration of Part 25

    Specified period means any period specified in a notice under subsection (3).

    Student loan and student loan scheme have the same meaning as they have in section 2 of the Student Loan Scheme Act 1992.

    Student loan and Student loan scheme: this definition was inserted, as from 1 November 1999, by section 2(1) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

    (2) The purpose of this section is to facilitate the disclosure of information by institutions to the department, in order to verify—

    • (a) The entitlement or eligibility of any person to or for any benefit or allowance or student loan; or

    • (b) The amount of any benefit or allowance or student loan to which any person is or was entitled or for which any person is or was eligible.

    (3) For the purpose of this section, the chief executive may from time to time, in accordance with arrangements under the Privacy Act 1993 previously agreed between the chief executive and any institution (or, where they are unable to agree, in accordance with arrangements under that Act settled by the Privacy Commissioner appointed under the Privacy Act 1993), by notice in writing or electronically require the institution to supply all or any of the information set out in subsection (6), in respect of people—

    • (a) Who are (or were in any specified period) enrolled as students at the institution; or

    • (b) Whose name and date of birth (being the name and date of birth of any person who is, or was during any specified period, receiving a benefit or allowance or student loan) is supplied to the institution by the chief executive, together with the notice.

    (4) A notice under subsection (3) may require the institution to supply the information specified in the notice either immediately or at specified times during the academic year, or both, and in the latter case may require the institution to supply at those times only details of any changes to the information the institution has previously supplied under this section.

    (5) A notice under subsection (3) may include—

    • (a) An identification number assigned by the chief executive to any person who is referred to in the notice; or

    • (b) An identification number assigned to any such person by the institution; or

    • (c) Both.

    (6) The details referred to in subsection (3) are—

    • (a) Their—

      • (i) Full names and addresses; and

      • (ii) Their dates of birth:

    • (b) Their identification numbers (being either or both of the identification numbers referred to in subsection (5)):

    • (c) Details of their recognised courses of study or parts of the courses in which they are so enrolled, and details of the fees for those courses:

    • (d) If, during the specified period, they are enrolled for any such course or ceased to be so enrolled or ceased to be enrolled as students, the details of each such event and the respective dates on which the event occurred:

    • (e) Details of their academic performance in any such course:

    • (f) Details of their citizenship or residency status in New Zealand:

    • (g) Details of any allowances granted to the person by the institution on behalf of the Secretary in any academic year before the 1999 academic year:

    • (h) Details reasonably required by the chief executive for the administration of the student loan scheme.

    (7) As soon as possible after the time or times specified in a requirement under subsection (3), an institution must supply the information required to the chief executive or any employee or agent of the department authorised by the chief executive to receive such information.

    (8) Information supplied by an institution under subsection (7) must be in a form previously agreed between the institution and the chief executive under the Privacy Act 1993 (or, where they are unable to agree, in a form settled by the Privacy Commissioner appointed under the Privacy Act 1993), and may include coded information.

    (9) Section 104 of the Privacy Act 1993 applies as if subsection (1) of that section also provided that, in relation to the information matching programme in section 226A of the Education Act 1989, the Commissioner, before seeking a report on any of the matters in section 104(2)(a), (d), or (e) from a tertiary institution, must first seek a report on the matter from the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Social Security Act 1964.

    Section 226A was inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 15(1) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    The references to the Privacy Act 1993 were substituted, as from 1 July 1993, for references to the Privacy Commissioner Act 1991 pursuant to section 129(2) Privacy Act 1993 (1993 No 28). See now as to Privacy Commissioner Part 3, sections 12 to 26 Privacy Act 1993

    Section 226A was substituted, as from 1 October 1998, by section 11 Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

    Subsection (2)(a) and (b) was amended, as from 1 November 1999, by section 2(2)(a) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107) by inserting the words or student loan.

    Subsections (3)(a) and (6)(d) were amended, as from 1 November 1999, by section 2(2)(b) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107) by omitting the expression full-time.

    Subsection (3)(b) was amended, as from 1 November 1999, by section 2(2)(c) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107) by inserting the words or student loan.

    Subsection (6)(c) was amended, as from 1 November 1999, by section 2(2)(d) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107) by inserting the words , and details of the fees for those courses.

    Subsection (6)(h) was inserted, as from 1 November 1999, by section 2(3) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

226B Offences concerning information requests
  • (1) Any institution that intentionally fails or refuses to comply with section 226A(7) commits an offence and is liable on summary conviction to the penalty specified in subsection (2).

    (2) The maximum penalty for an offence against subsection (1) is a fine not exceeding $5,000, and, where the offence is a continuing one, a fine not exceeding $500 for each day the offence continues.

    Section 226B was inserted, as from 1 October 1998, by section 11 Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

227 Fees for domestic students
  • (1) The Council of an institution may fix, or specify a means by which there may be calculated or ascertained, a tuition fee for any course of study or training at the institution.

    (1A) The Council of an institution that receives funding under section 159YA or 159ZC must not fix, in relation to domestic students, a fee (or a fee of a particular kind) that exceeds any maximum specified in a condition imposed under section 159YC or 159ZD(2) (whichever is applicable) as being the maximum fee (or fee of that kind) that can be charged to a domestic student.

    (2) No domestic student shall be or continue to be enrolled in a course of study or training at an institution unless there have been paid to the Council in respect of the student—

    • (a) The tuition fee (if any) fixed, or calculated or ascertained in accordance with a means specified, under subsection (1) of this section; and

    • (b) All other fees (if any) prescribed by the Council.

    (3) Nothing in subsection (2) of this section prevents a Council's accepting by instalments any fee required by that subsection to be paid.

    (4) The Council of an institution shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that before the procedures for enrolling a student at the institution for the first time in any year are complete the student is given written notice of the circumstances (if any) in which the student is or may be entitled to a refund of all or any part of fees under this section paid or to be paid to the Council.

    (5) The power of a Council to refund to a student all or any part of any fees paid to it under this section is not limited or affected by—

    • (a) Any failure to comply with subsection (4) of this section; or

    • (b) The fact that the circumstances fall outside those notified under that subsection; or

    • (c) The fact that the refund is larger than a notice under that subsection provides for.

    Part 16, comprising sections 223 to 229, was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 38 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 227 was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 24 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (1A) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 20 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 227(1A): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 31(a) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 227(1A): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 31(b) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

228 Fees for foreign students
  • (1) The Council of an institution shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that no person is enrolled at the institution until it has established whether the person is a domestic student or a foreign student.

    (2) No foreign student shall be or continue to be enrolled in any course of study or training at an institution unless there have been paid to the Council in respect of the student—

    • (a) An amount fixed by the Council that is not less than the Council's best estimate of—

      • (i) The cost to the institution (including the institution's marginal administrative and other general costs, and the appropriate portion of any initial or start-up costs of the course) of providing tuition in the course for 1 student, in the case of a course in which no domestic student is enrolled:

      • (ii) The marginal cost to the institution (including the institution's marginal administrative and other general costs, and any marginal initial or start-up costs of the course) of providing tuition in the course for 1 student in addition to the domestic students receiving tuition in the course, in every other case; and

    • (b) An amount fixed by the Council that is not less than an amount that in the Council's opinion is an appropriate reflection of the use by 1 student receiving tuition in the course of the capital facilities (if any) whose provision at the institution is necessary by virtue only of the institution's provision of tuition to foreign students in addition to domestic students; and

    • (c) All other fees (if any) prescribed by the Council.

    (2A) Notwithstanding subsection (2) of this section, a Council may accept from a foreign student in respect of any course of study or training at an institution an amount that is less than the sum of the amounts referred to in that subsection by an amount that is no greater than the sum of—

    • (a) Any amounts by which the Council has decided to subsidise the student in respect of the course; and

    • (b) The appropriate proportion of any amounts by which the Council has decided to subsidise the student in respect of courses of a kind or description that include the course; and

    • (c) The appropriate proportion of any amounts by which the Council has decided to subsidise students of a kind or description that include the student in respect of the course; and

    • (d) The appropriate proportion of any amounts by which the Council has decided to subsidise students of a kind or description that include the student in respect of courses of a kind or description that include the course,—

    out of the general revenue of the Council (not being funds provided under section 159YA or 159ZC) or out of any special supplementary grant under that section that may be used for the purpose.

    (2B) Nothing in subsection (2) of this section prevents a Council's accepting by instalments any fee required by that subsection to be paid.

    (3) Where a foreign student has after the 31st day of December 1989 received tuition in a course of study or training at an institution without paying the full amounts required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of subsection (2) of this section in respect of the course, the institution may, in any Court of competent jurisdiction, recover the underpayment from the student, as a debt to the institution.

    (4) In any year, the amount of any grant for an institution may be reduced from what it would otherwise have been by any amount by which (in the Secretary's opinion), by virtue of the fact that the full amount required by subsection (2)(a) of this section in respect of a course of study or training at the institution in which a foreign student was enrolled has not been paid to the institution, the student's education has been subsidised by public money appropriated by Parliament.

    (5) No grant shall be reduced under subsection (4) of this section unless the Secretary has given to the Council of the institution written notice of the circumstances taken into account when the proposed reduction was decided on.

    (6) Where the Council of an institution disputes that a grant should be reduced under subsection (4) of this section, or disputes the amount by which it should so be reduced, the following provisions apply:

    • (a) The Council may, within 28 days of getting notice from the Secretary under subsection (5) of this section, by written notice to the Secretary giving the name and address of a proposed arbitrator, require the dispute to be settled by arbitration:

    • (b) If, within 14 days of getting the Council's notice, the Secretary has agreed an arbitrator with the Council, the agreed arbitrator shall settle the dispute:

    • (c) If, within 14 days of getting the Council's notice, the Secretary has not agreed an arbitrator with the Council, an arbitrator appointed jointly by the Secretary and by the arbitrator originally proposed by the Council shall settle the dispute:

    • (d) The arbitrator's decision is final.

    (7) The Council of an institution shall—

    • (a) When a foreign student enrols, or resumes attendance, at the institution, give to the Secretary written notice (to the best of the Council's knowledge) of the student's name, nationality, and course of study or training:

    • (b) When a foreign student ceases to be enrolled at, or ceases to attend, the institution, notify the Secretary in writing:

    • (c) Comply with all accounting requirements relating to foreign students enrolled at institutions contained in any notice published by the Minister in the Gazette that is for the time being in force.

    (8) The Council of an institution shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that when a student enrols at the institution (whether for the first time or for a subsequent time) the student is given written notice of the circumstances (if any) in which the student is or may be entitled to a refund of all or any part of fees under this section paid or to be paid to the Council.

    (9) The power of a Council to refund to a student all or any part of any fees paid to it under this section is not limited or affected by—

    • (a) Any failure to comply with subsection (8) of this section; or

    • (b) The fact that the circumstances fall outside those notified under that subsection; or

    • (c) The fact that the refund is larger than a notice under that subsection provides for.

    Part 16, comprising sections 223 to 229, was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 38 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (2) was substituted, as from 1 January 1992by section 25(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (2A) was inserted, as from 1 January 1992 by section 25(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Section 228(2A): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 32 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Subsection (2A) was amended, as from 1 January 2004, by section 17(2) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by substituting the expression section 159ZC for the words section 199 of this Act.

    Subsection (2B) was inserted, as from 1 January 1992 by section 25(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (3) was amended, as from 1 January 1992, by section 25(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the words amounts required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of subsection (2) for the words amount required by subsection (2)(a).

    Subsections (8) and (9) were inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 25(3) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

228A Tertiary institutions to give prospective students information about fees
  • An institution (as defined in section 159(1)) must ensure that prospective students receive, before enrolment is completed, full written details of—

    • (a) All fees associated with their courses; and

    • (b) The class or lecture materials, books, special clothing, safety equipment, tools, and other items that are or may be required by the establishment to be bought or provided by students enrolled for each course of study or training.

    Section 228A was inserted, as from 19 December 1998, by section 42 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118). See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

229 Fees payable to associations of students
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16, comprising sections 223 to 229, was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 38 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 229 was repealed, as from 11 August 1998, by section 4 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90).

229A Institutions at which membership of students association is compulsory
  • (1) This section applies to every institution at which membership of a students association is compulsory.

    (2) The students association that, at the commencement of this section, is recognised by the Council of the institution as being the institution's students association for the purpose of representation on the Council, is the students association at that institution for the purposes of section 171(2)(e), this section, and sections 229B and 229C.

    (3) The Council must, if asked to by the institution's student association, collect the membership fees of the association, but only if the association provides the Council with—

    • (a) a copy of its current constitution; and

    • (b) an independently audited set of financial accounts of the association for the last financial year.

    (4) The Council must pay all membership fees collected on behalf of the students association to the association in a timely manner, but may charge the association for the actual and reasonable costs incurred by the Council in collecting the fees.

    (5) A students association may, on the grounds of hardship, exempt any student from the obligation to pay the membership fee of the association; and a student so exempted may nonetheless be a member of the association.

    (6) A students association may exempt any student from membership of the association on the grounds of conscientious objection; and, if exempted, the association must pay the student's membership fee to a charity of its choice.

    (7) Every students association must ensure that information about the rights in subsections (5) and (6) is available to students before enrolment, and must make rules for dealing in a fair, timely, and consistent way with applications for exemption under either subsection.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section (1)(3) of that Act as to subsection (1)(a) of the previous section 229A coming into force as from 1 May 1999. See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21). The heading to Part 16A read as follows: Membership of associations of tertiary students.

229B Initiating change relating to compulsory membership of students association
  • (1) The students of an institution at which membership of a students association is compulsory may request the Council to conduct a vote of all students at the institution on whether membership of the students association should continue to be compulsory.

    (2) The students of an institution at which membership of a students association is not compulsory may request the Council to conduct a vote of all students at the institution on whether membership of a specified students association at the institution should become compulsory.

    (3) A request under subsection (1) or subsection (2) is not effective unless it is accompanied by a petition requesting the vote, signed by at least 10% (as calculated according to figures provided by the Ministry) of all students currently enrolled at the institution.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229C Council to conduct vote on issue of compulsory membership of students association
  • (1) A Council that receives an effective request under section 229B must conduct (and pay for) a vote of all students at the institution as soon as practicable after receiving the request, but may not hold a vote more than once every 2 years.

    (2) The Council must make statutes setting out the procedures for conducting a vote under this section in consultation with,—

    • (a) in the case of an institution at which membership of a students association is compulsory, the institution's students association; or

    • (b) in the case of an institution at which membership of a students association is not compulsory, any associations that represent students and that the Council considers should be consulted.

    (3) The result of a vote of students held under this section determines whether, in and after the following year, membership of the association referred to in the vote is compulsory or not.

    (4) Despite subsection (1), a vote may be held in 2000 under this section.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229D Sections 229A to 229C apply to private training establishments
  • Sections 229A to 229C apply to private training establishments; and, for the purpose of those sections,—

    • (a) every reference to an institution includes a reference to a private training establishment; and

    • (b) every reference to a Council includes a reference to the governing body of the private training establishment.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229E Councils to conduct referenda
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229F Voting slip
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229G Disclosure, refund, and fixing of compulsory fees
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229H Close, and declaration of result, of referendum
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229I Campaign funding to be equalised
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229J Association to disclose value of resources used for campaign
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229K Group receiving equalisation money to account for its use
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229L Undue influence
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229M Complaints
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229N Provisions applying when membership of association of students is voluntary
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229O Association of students may prescribe fee for membership, and Council may collect it
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229P Provisions applying when membership of association of students is compulsory
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

229Q Association of students may prescribe fee for membership, and Council may collect it
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Part to apply to private training establishments

[Repealed]

229R Application to private training establishments
  • [Repealed]

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was inserted, as from 11 August 1998, by section 5 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90). See section 7 of that Act as to arrangements, in 1998 and 1999, for referendums under Part 16A of this Act.

    Part 16A (comprising sections 229A to 229R) was repealed, and new sections 229A to 229D were inserted, as from 8 July 2000, by section 25 Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21).

Part 17
Education Review Office

[Repealed]

  • Part 17 (comprising sections 230 and 231) was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 39 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

  • Part 17 (comprising sections 230 and 231) was repealed, as from 25 June 1993, by section 26(4)(b) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

230 Review of institutions
  • [Repealed]

    Part 17 (comprising sections 230 and 231) was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 39 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Part 17 (comprising sections 230 and 231) was repealed, as from 25 June 1993, by section 26(4)(b) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

231 Powers of Chief Review Officer
  • [Repealed]

    Part 17 (comprising sections 230 and 231) was inserted, as from 1 January 1991, by section 39 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Part 17 (comprising sections 230 and 231) was repealed, as from 25 June 1993, by section 26(4)(b) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

Part 18
Private training establishments

  • Part 18, comprising sections 232 to 238, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 40 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

232 Courses for foreign students to be quality assured unless exempt
  • (1) A person must not permit a foreign student to begin to undertake a course of study or training at a private training establishment unless—

    • (a) the course is an approved course and the establishment is accredited to provide it; or

    • (b) the course is of less than 3 months' duration and is an exempt course, as provided for in subsection (2).

    (2) The Qualifications Authority may, by notice in the Gazette, exempt courses of study or training for the purpose of subsection (1)(b).

    (3) A notice under subsection (2)

    • (a) may exempt only courses of study or training that are, or are likely to be, of less than 3 months' duration; and

    • (b) may identify courses, or classes of courses, that are exempt; and

    • (c) may identify courses by reference to a provider, or a class of provider, that offers them; and

    • (d) may be in respect of courses that have been completed, are in progress, or have not yet started; and

    (4) For the purposes of this section and section 236(1), a course of study or training is of less than 3 months' duration if the period starting on the day on which the course starts, and ending on the day on which it ends (or is likely to end) is less than 3 calendar months, irrespective of the number of days during that period on which study or training is, or is proposed to be, provided.

    Part 18, comprising sections 232 to 238, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 40 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 232 was substituted, as from 1 July 2003, by section 21 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

233 Provision of approved courses
  • A person shall not provide an approved course of study or training at a private training establishment unless the establishment is a registered establishment.

    Part 18, comprising sections 232 to 238, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 40 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

234 Applications for registration
  • (1) The governing body of a private training establishment may apply to the Qualifications Authority for registration of the establishment as a private training establishment for the purposes of this Act.

    (2) An application by the governing body of a private training establishment for registration of the establishment shall be in such form and contain such information as the Qualifications Authority requires and shall be accompanied by such fee (if any) as that Authority determines.

    Part 18, comprising sections 232 to 238, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 40 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

235 Certain applications not to be considered
  • The Qualifications Authority shall not consider an application for the registration of a private training establishment under section 234 of this Act unless—

    • (a) The establishment or the governing body of the establishment is a body corporate; and

    • (b) The application is accompanied by a written statement approved by the governing body that sets out the general goals and purposes of the establishment, being goals and purposes that relate primarily to education or training, or both.

    Part 18, comprising sections 232 to 238, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 40 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

236 Grant or refusal of application
  • (1) The Qualifications Authority must grant an application for registration of a private training establishment, and may only grant such an application, if it is satisfied that—

    • (a) The establishment is a suitable body to be registered having regard to the goals and purposes set out in the statement that accompanied the application in accordance with section 235(b) of this Act; and

    • (b) The establishment has, or will at the relevant time have, adequate staff, equipment, and premises to provide its courses of study or training; and

    • (ba) The establishment—

      • (i) In the case of an establishment that is already operational, has acceptable financial management practices and performance; and

      • (ii) In the case of an establishment that is not already operational, is likely to have acceptable financial management practices and performance; and

    • (c) The establishment complies, or is capable of complying and likely to comply, with section 236A of this Act; and

    • (d) The establishment—

      • (i) Provides, or will provide, every prospective student with a written statement of the total course costs and other financial commitments associated with each course of study or training before accepting that student's enrolment; and

      • (ii) Allows, or will allow, every student enrolled for a course of study or training (other than a course of less than 3 months' duration) to withdraw from it at any time within 7 days after the first day of the course for which the attendance of students at the establishment is required; and

      • (iii) Refunds, or will refund, to every student who so withdraws, without deduction, so much of any payment, or of the sum of any payments, made by the student to the establishment in respect of that course, and, if withdrawal from that course also constitutes withdrawal from the establishment as a whole, in respect of enrolment at the establishment, as exceeds $500 or 10 percent of the amount of that payment or of the sum of those payments, whichever is the less; and

      • (iv) allows, or will allow, every foreign student enrolled for a course of study or training that is of less than 3 months' duration to withdraw from it within a period (being less than 7 days) specified by the Authority, and refunds, or will refund, to any student who so withdraws a minimum amount or proportion, specified by the Authority, of any payments made by the student to the establishment in respect of the course; and

    • (e) The standard of instruction that is or will be provided in the courses of study or training will be not lower than the standard that would be expected to be provided if the courses were provided at a polytechnic or college of education.

    (2) Registration may be granted without limitation as to time or for a specified period.

    (3) The grant of registration to a private training establishment does not entitle the establishment or its governing body, or any of its students, to receive financial assistance out of public money appropriated by Parliament.

    (4) The Authority must give written notice to a private training establishment when it grants or refuses to grant registration and, if it refuses registration, it must give reasons for the refusal.

    Part 18, comprising sections 232 to 238, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 40 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1) (that part before paragraph (a)) was amended, as from 1 January 2003, by section 22(1) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by substituting the words The Qualifications Authority must grant an application for registration of a private training establishment, and may only grant such an application, if it is satisfied that— for the words Upon an application being made for the registration of a private training establishment, if the Qualifications Authority is satisfied that—.

    Subsection (1) (that part after paragraph (e)) was amended, as from 1 January 2003, by section 22(2)(b) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by omitting the words the Qualifications Authority shall grant the application but, if it is not so satisfied, it shall refuse the application. after para (e).

    Subsection (1)(b) was amended, as from 1 January 2003, by section 22(3) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by inserting the words , or will at the relevant time have, after the word has.

    Subsection (1)(ba) was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 26(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (1)(c) was substituted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 27(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (1)(d)(ii) was amended, as from 1 January 1992, by section 26(2) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136) by substituting the words first day of the course for which the attendance of students at the establishment is required for the words day of enrolment.

    Subsection (1)(d)(ii) was amended, as from 1 January 2003, by section 22(4) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by inserting the words (other than a course of less than 3 months' duration) after the words study or training.

    Subsection (1)(d)(iv) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 22(5) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Subsection (1)(e) was amended, as from 1 January 2003, by section 22(2)(a) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by substituting the word education. for the word education,—.

    Subsection (4) was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 22(6) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

236AA Conditions on registration
  • (1) It is a condition of registration that the establishment will at all times comply with the relevant policies and criteria established by the Qualifications Authority under section 253(1)(ca) that are currently in force, except to the extent that the Authority exempts the establishment, by a condition on its registration, from compliance.

    (2) When granting registration to an establishment, the Qualifications Authority may impose conditions on the registration that are specific to that establishment.

    (3) The Qualifications Authority may at any time, with the agreement of a registered establishment, impose new conditions on its registration, and may amend or revoke any existing conditions.

    (4) The Qualifications Authority may, without the agreement of a registered establishment, impose conditions on its registration, or amend or revoke any existing conditions, but only if the Authority has first—

    • (a) given written notice to the establishment of its intentions; and

    • (b) given the establishment a reasonable opportunity to respond to the notice; and

    • (c) considered any submissions made by the establishment in response to the notice.

    (5) When conditions are imposed, amended, or revoked, the Qualifications Authority must give notice in writing to the registered establishment of the new, amended, or revoked conditions.

    Section 236AA was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 23 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

236A Information, withdrawals, and refunds
  • (1) Every private training establishment shall—

    • (a) Ensure that all printed and other information made available to prospective students gives full details of—

      • (i) The total fees for each course of study or training, including fees for class or lecture materials, books, special clothing, safety equipment, tools, and any other items that are or may be provided to students enrolled for that course, and including any students association membership fees; and

      • (ii) The class or lecture materials, books, special clothing, safety equipment, tools, and other items that are or may be required by the establishment to be bought or provided by students enrolled for each course of study or training; and

    • (b) Provide every prospective student with a written statement of the total course costs and other financial commitments associated with each course of study or training before accepting that student's enrolment; and

    • (c) Allow every student enrolled for a course of study or training (being a course of 3 months or more) to withdraw from it at any time within 7 days after the first day of the course for which attendance of students at the establishment is required; and

    • (d) Refund to every student who so withdraws, without deduction, so much of any payment, or of the sum of any payments made by the student to the establishment in respect of that course, and, if withdrawal from that course also constitutes withdrawal from the establishment as a whole, in respect of enrolment at the establishment, as exceeds $500 or 10 percent of the amount of that payment or of the sum of those payments, whichever is the lesser.

    (2) Where, before the 7th day after the first day of a course of study or training (being a course of 3 months or more) for which attendance of students at the establishment is required, a student has made any payment or payments (whether described as fees or otherwise howsoever) to the establishment in respect of the student's enrolment or participation in the course,—

    • (a) The establishment shall ensure that there is paid to an independent person approved by the Qualifications Authority for the purpose out of that payment or those payments, to be held in trust to be available for refund to the student under subsection (1)(d) of this section, an amount equal to so much of that payment or the sum of those payments as exceeds the lower of the following amounts:

      • (i) 10 percent of that payment or the sum of those payments:

      • (ii) $500:

    • (b) If, and only if, satisfied that the student withdrew from the course within 7 days after the first day of the course for which attendance of students at the establishment was required, the person shall pay the amount held to the student:

    • (c) If, and only if, satisfied that the student did not withdraw from the course within 7 days after the first day of the course for which attendance of students at the establishment was required, the person shall (as the case requires) pay the amount held to the establishment, or hold it for the establishment's creditors.

    Section 236A was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 27(1) Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (1)(a)(i) was amended, as from 11 August 1998, by section 6 Education (Tertiary Students Association Voluntary Membership) Amendment Act 1998 (1998 No 90) by inserting the words , and including any fees as provided in Part 16A for students who become members of associations of students.

    Subsection (1)(a)(i) was amended, as from 8 July 2000, by section 26(7) Education Amendment Act 2000 (2000 No 21) by substituting the words students association membership fees for the words fees as provided in Part 16A for students who become members of associations of students.

236B Establishment to notify immigration officer if student withdraws from course
  • (1) A private training establishment shall ensure that, within 7 days of the withdrawal of any student from a course of study or training at the establishment, an immigration officer (within the meaning of paragraph (a) of the definition of that term in section 2(1) of the Immigration Act 1987) is given written notice of the name of the student and the course, and the day on which the student withdrew.

    (2) Subsection (1) of this section does not apply to a student if the establishment (or governing body) is satisfied on reasonable grounds that the student is a domestic student.

    Section 236B was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 28 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

236C Fees for domestic students must not exceed maximums set in conditions of funding
  • A registered private training establishment that receives funding under section 159YA or 159ZC must not fix, in relation to domestic students, a fee (or a fee of a particular kind) that exceeds any maximum specified in a condition imposed under section 159YC or 159ZD(2) (whichever is applicable) as being the maximum fee (or fee of that kind) that can be charged to a domestic student.

    Section 236C was inserted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 24 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 236C: amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 33(a) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

    Section 236C: amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 33(b) of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

237 Cancellation of registration
  • (1) The Authority may cancel the registration of a registered establishment if it is satisfied on reasonable grounds that—

    • (a) the establishment no longer meets 1 or more of the requirements set out in section 236(1); or

    • (b) the establishment is not complying, or has not complied, with 1 or more of the conditions applying to it.

    (2) Before cancelling a registration under subsection (1), the Authority must—

    • (a) notify the establishment that it is considering cancelling registration, and give reasons; and

    • (b) give the establishment a reasonable opportunity to respond to the notice; and

    • (c) consider any submissions made by the establishment in response to the notice.

    (2A) The Authority may also cancel the registration of a registered establishment if—

    • (a) the Authority receives a written request to do so from the governing body of the registered establishment; and

    • (b) that request is not withdrawn by the governing body of the registered establishment after being advised by the Authority of its intention to cancel the registration of the establishment.

    (3) If the Authority cancels a registration, it must give notice of its decision to both the establishment and the Commission, with reasons.

    (4) Nothing in this section limits the Authority's powers under section 255A(7) to cancel an establishment's registration.

    (5) Cancellation under this section takes effect on the date specified by the Authority in the notice given under subsection (3) (the date of cancellation).

    (6) If the registration of an establishment is cancelled under this section, then from the date of cancellation—

    • (a) all approvals to provide courses of study or training granted to the establishment under section 258 are withdrawn, and no notice to the governing body of the establishment is required to be given under subsection (8) or (9A) of that section; and

    • (b) all accreditations to provide approved courses of study or training granted to the establishment under section 259 are withdrawn, and no notice to the governing body of the establishment is required to be given under subsection (5) or (7) of that section.

    Part 18, comprising sections 232 to 238, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 40 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 237 was substituted, as from 1 January 2003, by section 25 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    Section 237(2): amended, on 20 September 2007, by section 5(1) of the Education Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 52).

    Section 237(2A): inserted, on 20 September 2007, by section 5(2) of the Education Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 52).

    Section 237(5): added, on 20 September 2007, by section 5(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 52).

    Section 237(6): added, on 20 September 2007, by section 5(3) of the Education Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 52).

238 Notice
  • [Repealed]

    Part 18, comprising sections 232 to 238, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 40 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Section 238 was repealed, as from 1 January 2003, by section 25(2) Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

238A Grants to private training establishments
  • [Repealed]

    Section 238A was inserted, as from 1 January 1992, by section 30 Education Amendment Act (No 4) 1991 (1991 No 136).

    Subsection (8)(a) was amended, as from 19 December 1998, by section 43 Education Amendment Act (No 2) 1998 (1998 No 118) by substituting the words accounting practice (as defined in section 2(1) of the Public Finance Act 1989) for the words financial practice. See section 62 of that Act as to the transitional provisions relating to enrolment schemes.

    Section 238A was repealed, as from 1 January 2004, by section 26 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

238B Disclosure of enrolment information by private training establishments
  • (1) In this section, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Allowance means an allowance established by regulations made under section 303, or identified by Gazette notice under section 307AB

    Allowance: this definition was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 45 Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by adding the words , or identified by Gazette notice under section 307AB.

    Benefit means an unemployment benefit or a sickness benefit under the Social Security Act 1964, or an independent youth benefit under section 60F of that Act

    Benefit: this definition was amended, as from 1 July 2001, by section 45 Social Security Amendment Act 2001 (2001 No 1) by substituting the words an unemployment benefit or a sickness benefit under for the words a community wage under Part 2 of.

    Chief executive means the chief executive of the department

    Department means the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Social Security Act 1964 and for the administration of Part 25

    Specified period means any period specified in a notice under subsection (3)

    Student loan and student loan scheme have the same meaning as they have in section 2 of the Student Loan Scheme Act 1992.

    Student loan and student loan scheme: these definitions were inserted, as from 1 November 1999, by section 3(1) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

    (2) The purpose of this section is to facilitate the disclosure of information by governing bodies of private training establishments to the department, in order to verify—

    • (a) The entitlement or eligibility of any person to or for any benefit or allowance or student loan; or

    • (b) The amount of any benefit or allowance or student loan to which any person is or was entitled or for which any person is or was eligible.

    (3) For the purpose of this section, the chief executive may from time to time, in accordance with arrangements under the Privacy Act 1993 previously agreed between the chief executive and any institution (or, where they are unable to agree, in accordance with arrangements under that Act settled by the Privacy Commissioner appointed under the Privacy Act 1993), by notice in writing or electronically require the institution to supply all or any of the information set out in subsection (4), in respect of people—

    • (a) Who are (or were in any specified period) enrolled as students at the private training establishment; or

    • (b) Whose name and date of birth (being the name and date of birth of any person who is, or was during any specified period, receiving a benefit or allowance or student loan) is supplied to the private training establishment by the chief executive, together with the notice.

    (4) A notice under subsection (3) may require the private training establishment to supply the information specified in the notice either immediately or at specified times during the academic year, or both, and in the latter case may require the private training establishment to supply at those times only details of any changes to the information the private training establishment has previously supplied under this section.

    (5) A notice under subsection (3) may include—

    • (a) An identification number assigned by the chief executive to any person who is referred to in the notice; or

    • (b) An identification number assigned to any such person by the private training establishment; or

    • (c) Both.

    (6) The details referred to in subsection (3) are—

    • (a) Their—

      • (i) Full names and addresses; and

      • (ii) Their dates of birth:

    • (b) Their identification numbers (being either or both of the identification numbers referred to in subsection (5)):

    • (c) Details of their recognised courses of study or parts of the courses in which they are so enrolled, and details of the fees for those courses:

    • (d) If, during the specified period, they enrolled for any such course or ceased to be so enrolled or ceased to be enrolled as a student, the details of each such event and the respective dates on which the event occurred:

    • (e) Details of their academic performance in any such course:

    • (f) Details of their citizenship or residency status in New Zealand:

    • (g) Details of any allowances granted to them by the private training establishment on behalf of the Secretary in any academic year before the 1999 academic year:

    • (h) Details reasonably required by the chief executive for the administration of the student loan scheme.

    (7) As soon as possible after the time or times specified in a requirement under subsection (3), a private training establishment must supply the information required to the chief executive or any employee or agent of the department authorised by the chief executive to receive such information.

    (8) Information supplied by a private training establishment under subsection (7) must be in a form previously agreed between the private training establishment and the chief executive under the Privacy Act 1993 (or, where they are unable to agree, in a form settled by the Privacy Commissioner appointed under the Privacy Act 1993), and may include coded information.

    (9) Section 104 of the Privacy Act 1993 applies as if subsection (1) of that section also provided that, in relation to the information matching programme in section 226A of the Education Act 1989, the Commissioner, before seeking a report on any of the matters in section 104(2)(a), (d), or (e) from a private training establishment, must first seek a report on the matter from the department for the time being responsible for the administration of the Social Security Act 1964.

    Section 238B was inserted, as from 25 June 1993, by section 16(1) Education Amendment Act 1993 (1993 No 51).

    The references to the Privacy Act 1993 were substituted, as from 1 July 1993, for references to the Privacy Commissioner Act 1991 pursuant to section 129(2) Privacy Act 1993 (1993 No 28). See now as to Privacy Commissioner Part 3, sections 12 to 26 Privacy Act 1993.

    Section 238B was substituted, as from 1 October 1998, by section 11 Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

    Subsection (2)(a) and (b) was amended, as from 1 November 1999, by section 3(2)(a) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107) by inserting the words or student loan.

    Subsections (3)(a) and (6)(d) was amended, as from 1 November 1999, by section 3(2)(b) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107) by omitting the expression full-time.

    Subsection (3)(b) was amended, as from 1 November 1999, by section 3(2)(c) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107) by inserting the words or student loan.

    Subsection (6)(c) was amended, as from 1 November 1999, by section 3(2)(d) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107) by inserting the words , and details of the fees for those courses.

    Subsection (6)(h) was inserted, as from 1 November 1999, by section 3(3) Education Amendment Act 1999 (1999 No 107).

238C Offences concerning information requests
  • (1) A private training establishment that intentionally fails or refuses to comply with section 238B(7) commits an offence and is liable on summary conviction to the penalty specified in subsection (2).

    (2) The maximum penalty for an offence against subsection (1) is a fine not exceeding $5,000, and, where the offence is a continuing one, a fine not exceeding $500 for each day the offence continues.

    Section 238C was inserted, as from 1 October 1998, by section 11 Employment Services and Income Support (Integrated Administration) Act 1998 (1998 No 96).

Part 18A
International students

  • Part 18A (comprising sections 238D to 238H) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 48 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

  • The heading to Part 18A was amended, as from 12 December 2002, by section 27 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by substituting the word International for the words Code of practice for providers who enrol international.

238D Interpretation
  • In this Part, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    administrator means the person or organisation responsible for administering the code

    code means the code of practice established under section 238F

    IEAA means the International Education Appeal Authority established by the code

    international student means a person who

    • (a) [Repealed]

    • (b) is enrolled by a provider; and

    • (c) in relation to the provider, is a foreign student as defined in section 2 or section 159 (whichever is applicable)

    international student: paragraph (a) of this definition was repealed, as from 12 December 2002, by section 28 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

    provider means—

    • (a) a registered school; or

    • (b) an institution as defined in section 159; or

    • (c) a private training establishment holding a current registration under Part 18; or

    • (d) an organisation that provides adult and community education and receives funding under section 159YA or 159ZC

    review panel means the review panel established by the code.

    Part 18A (comprising sections 238D to 238H) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 48 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    provider: paragraph (c) of this definition was amended, as from 17 May 2006, by section 46(a) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19) by adding the expression ; or.

    provider: paragraph (d) of this definition was inserted, as from 17 May 2006, by section 46(b) Education Amendment Act 2006 (2006 No 19).

    Section 238D provider paragraph (d): amended, on 1 January 2008, by section 34 of the Education (Tertiary Reforms) Amendment Act 2007 (2007 No 106).

238E Signatories to code may enrol persons as international students
  • (1) A provider may enrol a person as an international student or continue to have an international student enrolled, so long as the provider is a signatory to the code.

    (2) A provider must not enrol a person as an international student or continue to have an international student enrolled, or provide educational instruction for such a person, if—

    • (a) the provider is not a signatory to the code; or

    • (b) the provider is removed as a signatory to the code under section 238G; or

    • (c) for any other reason provided in the code, the provider ceases to be a signatory to the code.

    (3) A provider that is suspended under section 238G may continue to have international students enrolled and may provide educational instruction to only those students to the extent permitted by the review panel under that section.

    (4) Until 1 July 2003, nothing in subsection (1) or subsection (2) applies to providers who enrol international students only on courses of less than 3 months' duration (as that term is defined in section 232(4)).

    Part 18A (comprising sections 238D to 238H) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 48 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Subsection (4) was inserted, as from 12 December 2002, by section 29 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50).

238F Code
  • (1) The Minister may publish a code of practice that provides a framework for the pastoral care of international students.

    (2) Without limiting subsection (1), the code may include provisions for all or any of the following purposes:

    • (a) designating the administrator:

    • (b) setting out requirements relating to the manner in which providers may assess and recruit prospective international students, including the information to be given by providers about courses, procedures, and costs:

    • (c) providing for the welfare of international students, including the support services to be provided by a provider and any reporting obligations:

    • (d) requiring providers to review their own performance to ensure compliance with the code, and providing for the designation or appointment of an independent person or organisation to monitor the performance of providers to ensure compliance with the code:

    • (e) establishing the IEAA to investigate and determine complaints from international students about alleged breaches of the code, after all internal grievance procedures have been exhausted, and to refer appropriate cases to the review panel; setting out rules of procedure or empowering the IEAA to regulate its own procedure; and, subject to section 238G, specifying the remedies and sanctions it may impose:

    • (f) establishing the review panel to determine whether a signatory should be removed or suspended as a signatory to the code; setting out rules of procedure or empowering the review panel to regulate its own procedure; and, subject to section 238G, specifying the remedies and sanctions it may impose:

    • (h) providing for such other matters as are contemplated by or necessary for giving full effect to this Part and for its due administration.

    (3) The code of practice may make different provisions in relation to international students aged under 18 and in relation to international students aged 18 or over.

    (4) The code is binding on all parties who are signatories to the code.

    (5) The Minister must notify the making of the code in the Gazette and make copies available for inspection free of charge, or for purchase at a reasonable cost, in such form and at such places as the Minister determines.

    Part 18A (comprising sections 238D to 238H) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 48 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

238G Sanctions
  • (1) If it finds that a signatory to the code has committed a serious breach of the code of practice, the IEAA may recommend to the review panel that—

    • (a) the provider be removed as a signatory to the code; or

    • (b) the provider be suspended for a specified period as a signatory to the code.

    (2) If it finds that a signatory to the code has committed a breach of the code other than a serious breach, the IEAA may impose an appropriate sanction (other than a sanction referred to in subsection (1)(a) or (b)) provided in the code.

    (3) If it considers that the sanction it has imposed on a provider under subsection (2) has not been complied with to its satisfaction, the IEAA can recommend to the review panel that—

    • (a) the provider be removed as a signatory to the code; or

    • (b) the provider be suspended for a specified period as a signatory to the code.

    (4) The review panel may—

    • (a) impose the sanction referred to in subsection (1)(a) or (b) that is recommended by the IEAA; or

    • (b) substitute the other sanction referred to in subsection (1); or

    • (c) substitute an appropriate lesser sanction provided for in the code; or

    • (d) set aside the recommendation made by the IEAA.

    (5) At any time pending a final determination by the review panel, it may refer a matter back to the IEAA with directions to reconsider the whole or any specified part of the matter.

    Part 18A (comprising sections 238D to 238H) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 48 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

238H Export education levy
  • (1) The Governor-General may, by Order in Council, in accordance with a recommendation of the Minister, make regulations imposing an export education levy on providers who receive tuition fees from international students enrolled with them.

    (2) Without limiting subsection (1), regulations made under this section must—

    • (a) prescribe the amount, a method or methods for calculating the amount, or both, of export education levy payable by individual providers, and may prescribe different amounts, or different methods of calculating the amounts, payable by different classes of provider; and

    • (b) prescribe when the levy, or any part of the levy, is payable, and the period to which it, or any part of it, relates; and

    • (c) designate the agency that will administer the levy and, if that agency is the Ministry, the regulations may authorise the Ministry to delegate all or specified aspects of the levy's collection and use to another body; and

    • (d) require that a provider supplies, on request by the agency responsible for the administration of the levy, information on student numbers or any other matter that is necessary to determine or verify the amount of levy payable by the provider; and

    • (e) [Repealed]

    (3) The Minister must consult with providers before recommending that regulations be made under subsection (1) that prescribe or amend an export education levy.

    (4) No regulations may be made under this section that impose a levy in respect of tuition fees received in respect of any period before 1 January 2003.

    Part 18A (comprising sections 238D to 238H) was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 48 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Section 238H was substituted, as from 12 December 2002, by section 30 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50). See section 31 of that Act as to the transfer of fees to the export education levy account.

    Subsection (2)(e) was repealed, as from 31 August 2004, by section 3 Education (Export Education Levy) Amendment Act 200 (2004 No 75).

238I Purpose and administration of export education levy
  • (1) The purposes to which the funds of the levy may be put are as follows:

    • (a) the development, promotion, and quality assurance of the export education sector, which may include (without limitation)—

      • (i) professional and institutional development; and

      • (ii) marketing; and

      • (iii) implementation of scholarship schemes; and

      • (iv) research, and resource development; and

      • (v) support (financial or otherwise) of other bodies engaged in the development, promotion, or quality assurance of the export education sector:

    • (ab) the making of payments as set out in subsections (1A) and (1B):

    • (b) the administration and audit of the code:

    • (c) the general administration of the levy and associated purposes.

    (1A) Subsection (1B) applies if—

    • (a) an international student is or was enrolled with a private training establishment for a course of study or training; and

    • (b) at the time of the student's enrolment the private training establishment held a current registration under Part 18; and

    • (c) the private training establishment has not, cannot, or will not provide, in whole or in part, the course of study or training.

    (1B) If this subsection applies, the funds of the levy may be used for any of the following:

    • (a) to make payment to any person to ensure the reimbursement of the student, in whole or in part, for tuition fees or for any payment other than tuition fees made by or on behalf of that student to the private training establishment in respect of the student's course of study or training if, and to the extent that,—

      • (i) the private training establishment has not refunded the tuition fees or other payment; and

      • (ii) the agency responsible for the administration of the levy approves the reimbursement of the student as necessary and appropriate in the circumstances:

    • (b) with the approval of the Minister, to reimburse the Crown for any sum provided by the Crown and paid to any person to ensure the reimbursement of the student, in whole or in part, for tuition fees or for any payment other than tuition fees made by or on behalf of that student to the private training establishment in respect of the student's course of study or training if, and to the extent that,—

      • (i) the private training establishment had not refunded the tuition fees or other payment; and

      • (ii) the agency responsible for the administration of the levy approved the reimbursement of the student as necessary and appropriate in the circumstances:

    • (c) with the approval of the Minister, to reimburse, in whole or in part, the agency responsible for the administration of the levy, or any Crown entity, for—

      • (i) costs incurred by that agency or Crown entity in placing the student with an alternative provider; or

      • (ii) other costs incurred by that agency or Crown entity as a direct result of the private training establishment not providing the course of study or training.

    (2) The funds of the levy must be kept in a separate bank account that is used only for the purposes of the levy.

    (3) As soon as practicable after 1 July in each year, the agency responsible for the administration of the levy must present to the Minister an annual report on the administration of the levy, which must include audited financial statements prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice; and the Minister must present a copy of the report to the House of Representatives.

    (4) The amount of levy payable by a provider under regulations made under this section is a debt due to the Crown and may be recovered in any court of competent jurisdiction.

    (5) No later than 1 March 2006, the Minister must—

    • (a) undertake, in consultation with providers, a review of the operation, administration, and effectiveness of the export education levy; and

    • (b) prepare a report on the findings of the review; and

    • (c) present a copy of the report to the House of Representatives.

    Section 238I was inserted, as from 12 December 2002, by section 30 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50). See section 31 of that Act as to the transfer of fees to the export education levy account.

    Subsection (1)(ab) was inserted, as from 31 August 2004, by section 4(1) Education (Export Education Levy) Amendment Act 200 (2004 No 75). See section 6 of that Act as to the use of the export education levy.

    Subsections (1A) and (1B) were inserted, as from 31 August 2004, by section 4(2) Education (Export Education Levy) Amendment Act 200 (2004 No 75). See section 6 of that Act as to the use of the export education levy.

Part 19
Vice-Chancellors Committee

  • Part 19, comprising sections 239 to 245, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 41 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

239 Definitions
  • In this Part of this Act and Schedule 14 to this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Committee means the New Zealand Vice-Chancellors Committee

    Member means a member of the Committee.

    Part 19, comprising sections 239 to 245, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 41 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

240 Establishment of Committee
  • (1) A Committee to be known as the New Zealand Vice-Chancellors Committee is established.

    (2) The Committee is the same body as the Vice-Chancellors Committee that was established immediately before the commencement of this section under section 46 of the Universities Act 1961 but shall be constituted in accordance with this section.

    (3) The Committee consists of the Vice-Chancellors of such of the institutions as are universities.

    (4) If an office of Vice-Chancellor of a university is vacant, the person for the time being acting in that office shall be deemed to be the Vice-Chancellor of that university for the purposes of this Act.

    (5) The Committee is a body corporate with perpetual succession and a common seal; and is capable of—

    • (a) Holding real and personal property; and

    • (b) Suing and being sued; and

    • (c) Otherwise doing and suffering all that bodies corporate may lawfully do and suffer.

    (6) Sections 153 to 156 of the Crown Entities Act 2004 apply to the Committee as if it were a Crown entity within the meaning of that Act.

    (7) Schedule 14 to this Act applies to the Committee.

    Part 19, comprising sections 239 to 245, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 41 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (6) was substituted, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

    Subsection (6) was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

241 Functions of Committee
  • The functions of the Committee are—

    • (a) To set up inter-university course approval and moderation procedures:

    • (b) To exercise in relation to universities under section 260 of this Act the powers of the Qualifications Authority under sections 255A, 258, 258A, 259, and 259A:

    • (c) To grant scholarships to students enrolled or proposing to enrol at universities out of money under its control on such terms as the Committee considers appropriate:

    • (d) Where another body has power to grant such scholarships—

      • (i) To make recommendations to the person or authority having power to make appointments to that body as to the persons who should be appointed:

      • (ii) If authorised to do so, to make appointments to that body:

      • (iii) If requested by that body to do so, to advise that body on the grant of such scholarships:

    • (e) To make recommendations to the Qualifications Authority on criteria for entrance to universities for the purposes of the performance by that Authority of its functions under section 257 of this Act:

    • (f) If requested by the Councils of the universities to do so, to consider applications by foreign students for enrolment at any of those universities and make recommendations to the Councils in respect of those applications:

    • (g) To liaise with the Councils of institutions other than universities in respect of procedures for enrolling foreign students:

    • (h) To issue certificates relating to degrees and other academic qualifications and courses of, or examinations conducted by, the University of New Zealand as if that University had continued in existence and to charge such reasonable fees for the certificates as the Committee determines:

    • (i) To perform any other functions conferred on it by this Act or any other enactment.

    Part 19, comprising sections 239 to 245, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 41 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Paragraph (b) was amended, as from 1 January 2003, by section 32 Education (Tertiary Reform) Amendment Act 2002 (2002 No 50) by substituting the words sections 255A, 258, 258A, 259, and 259A for the words sections 258 and 259 of this Act.

242 Powers of Committee
  • The Committee has—

    • (a) The powers given to it by this Act or any other enactment; and

    • (b) All other powers reasonably necessary to enable it to perform its functions efficiently and effectively.

    Part 19, comprising sections 239 to 245, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 41 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

243 Devolution of certain property
  • (1) Upon the commencement of this section, all real and personal property that immediately before that commencement was vested in the University Grants Committee upon trust or as an endowment for any scholarship or any other purpose by virtue of section 52(1) of the Universities Act 1961 or otherwise is, by force of this subsection, vested in the Vice-Chancellors Committee for a like purpose.

    (2) All real and personal property that, under any will or trust instrument would have vested in the University of New Zealand for any purpose after the commencement of this section if the University of New Zealand had continued in existence shall, unless the will or trust instrument expressly provides for the eventuality of the University of New Zealand not being in existence, vest in the Committee for a like purpose.

    (3) All real and personal property that under any will or trust instrument would have vested in the University Grants Committee for any purpose after the commencement of this section if the University Grants Committee had continued in existence shall, unless the will or trust instrument expressly provides for the eventuality of the University Grants Committee not being in existence, vest in the Vice-Chancellors Committee for a like purpose.

    (4) Where any land vests in the Committee under this section, the District Land Registrar for the land registration district in which the land is situated, on the deposit with him or her of such plans and documents as he or she requires, shall make such entries in the register, and generally do all such other things, as may be necessary to give full effect to the provisions of this section.

    (5) The Committee may transfer any real or personal property that vests in the Committee under this section for a particular purpose to any university for a like purpose and, if any property is so transferred, no tax is payable in respect of the transaction.

    Part 19, comprising sections 239 to 245, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 41 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (5) was amended, as from 20 May 1999, by section 7 Stamp Duty Abolition Act 1999 (1999 No 61) by substituting the words tax is payable in respect of for the words stamp duty or other tax is payable in respect of the instrument of transfer or.

244 Taxes and duties in relation to Vice-Chancellors Committee
  • (1) For the purposes of the Acts specified in the Schedule to the Tax Administration Act 1994 and any other enactment that imposes, or provides for the collection of, a tax, duty, levy, or other charge—

    • (a) The University Grants Committee and the Vice-Chancellors Committee shall be deemed to be the same person with effect on and from the date on which real and personal property of the University Grants Committee so vests in the Vice-Chancellors Committee pursuant to section 243(1) of this Act; and

    • (b) In respect of the liability under any such enactment for, and the assessment, determination, or imposition of, taxes, duties, levies, or other charges accruing on and from the day on which real and personal property of the University Grants Committee so vests in the Vice-Chancellors Committee, all transactions entered into by, and acts of, the University Grants Committee in relation to that property before the vesting effected by section 243(1) of this Act shall be deemed to have been entered into by, or to be those of, the Vice-Chancellors Committee and to have been entered into or performed by the Vice-Chancellors Committee at the time when they were entered into or performed by the University Grants Committee.

    (2) For the purposes of determining whether—

    • (b) Any taxpayer is included in a group of companies or a wholly-owned group for the purposes of section IG 1 of the Income Tax Act 2004; or

    • (c) Any debit arises to be recorded in a taxpayer's imputation credit account under section ME 5(1)(i) of the Income Tax Act 2004, or in a taxpayer's dividend withholding payment account under section MG 5(1)(i) of that Act, or in a taxpayer's branch equivalent tax account under section MF 4(3)(d) of that Act,—

    shares held by the University Grants Committee in any company (whether directly or through any one or more interposed companies) immediately before the vesting effected by section 243(1) of this Act shall, if the shares vest under that section in the Vice-Chancellors Committee, be treated as having been acquired by the Vice-Chancellors Committee at the time when they were acquired by the University Grants Committee.

    (3) The vesting of real and personal property of the University Grants Committee in the Vice-Chancellors Committee pursuant to section 243(1) of this Act shall not be treated as a supply of any goods or services for the purposes of the Goods and Services Tax Act 1985, or as a disposition of property for the purposes of the Estate and Gift Duties Act 1968 or as a conveyance for the purposes of the Stamp and Cheque Duties Act 1971.

    (4) Nothing in subsection (2) or subsection (3) of this section limits the generality of subsection (1) of this section.

    Part 19, comprising sections 239 to 245, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 41 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (1) was amended, as from 1 April 1995, by section YB 1 Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164) by substituting the words Schedule to the Tax Administration Act 1994 for the words Schedule 1 to the Inland Revenue Department Act 1974.

    Subsection (2)(a) to (c) was substituted, as from 1 April 1995, by section YB 1 Income Tax Act 1994 (1994 No 164).

    Subsection (2) was amended, as from 1 April 2005, by section YA 2 Income Tax Act 2004 (2004 No 35) by substituting the words Income Tax Act 2004 for the words Income Tax Act 1994 in all places in which they appear.

245 General saving of statutes, etc, of University of New Zealand
  • All statutes, regulations, rulings, and decisions, and all other acts of authority, of the Senate of the University of New Zealand or any committee or Board of that Senate or University or of the Chancellor or Vice-Chancellor or any officer of that University, so far as they were subsisting immediately before the commencement of this section by virtue of section 53(1) of the Universities Act 1961 and are capable of application to the Vice-Chancellors Committee, apply to that Committee except so far as they are repealed, replaced, or amended by any enactment, or by regulations, rulings, decisions, or other acts of authority of that Committee under powers conferred by this Act or any other enactment.

    Part 19, comprising sections 239 to 245, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 41 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

Part 20
New Zealand Qualifications Authority

  • Part 20, comprising sections 246 to 268, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 42 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

246 Definitions
  • In this Part of this Act and Schedule 15 to this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,—

    Authority means the Qualifications Authority

    Employee

    [Repealed]

    Employee: this definition was repealed, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

    Member means a member of the Authority.

    Secondary school means a secondary school or composite school, as those terms are defined in section 2.

    Secondary school: this definition was inserted, as from 25 October 2001, by section 50 Education Standards Act 2001 (2001 No 88). See sections 65 to 68 of that Act for transitional provisions.

    Part 20, comprising sections 246 to 268, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 42 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

247 Object
  • The object of the provisions of this Act relating to the Authority is to establish a consistent approach to the recognition of qualifications in academic and vocational areas.

    Part 20, comprising sections 246 to 268, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 42 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

248 Establishment of Authority
  • (1) A New Zealand Qualifications Authority is established.

    (2) The Authority is a Crown entity for the purposes of section 7 of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    (3) The Crown Entities Act 2004 applies to the Authority except to the extent that this Act expressly provides otherwise.

    (4) The members of the Authority are the board for the purposes of the Crown Entities Act 2004.

    Part 20, comprising sections 246 to 268, was inserted, as from 23 July 1990, by section 42 Education Amendment Act 1990 (1990 No 60).

    Subsection (3) was substituted, as from 21 December 1992, by section 42 Public Finance Amendment Act 1992 (1992 No 142).

    Section 248 was substituted, as from 25 January 2005, by section 200 Crown Entities Act 2004 (2004 No 115).

249